This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http : //books . google . com/|
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
OPINIONS OP DISTINGUISHED PROFESSORS OP SANSKRIT
4£jr ^te^*' * *r **> ^ — *
v ** i ti
Opinion of Professor Max ler, Oxford, gth February, 1892.
* * * From what I have seen of it, it will be a very useful work. What
should I have given for such a work forty years ago when I puzzled my head
over Panini's SQtras and the Commentaries. * * • I hope you
succeed in finishing your work.
may
Opinion of Professor Gopalji S. Desai, Rajkot in Kathiawar, 20th February, 1892.
* * * The first part that has already been out before the Public
shows clearly that the author has spared no pains to make the translation
exact and pithy as possible. The work when completed will no doubt claim a
high place amongst the best works by European scholars on Sanskrit Grammar
The paper, printing and the general get-up of the book are excellent.
Opinion of Professor T. Jolly, Ph. D. t WUrzburg, {Germany), 23rd April, 1893.
* • • Nothing couldhave been more gratifying to me, no doubt! than to
get hold of a trustworthy translation of Panini's Ashtadhyayi, the standard work
of Sanskrit literature, and I shall gladly do my best to make this valuable
work known to lovers and students of the immortal literature of ancient India
in this country. *
Opinion of Profesi W. D. Whitney, New Haven, U. S. A., i 7 fh June, 1893.
* * * The wort seems to me to be very well planned and executed, doing
credit to the translator and publisher. It is also, in my opinion, very valuable
Undertaking, as it does to give the European student ot the native grammar
more help than he can find anywhere else. It ought to have a good sale in
Europe (and correspondingly in America).
Opinion of Professor V. Fausbbl, Copenhagen, r S /h June, 1893.
♦ • • It appears to me to be a splendid production of Indian industry
and scholarship, and I value it particularly on account of the extracts from the
Opinion of Professor Dr. R. Pischel, Halle (Saale), 27th May, 1893.
• * • I have gone through it and find it an extremely valuable and userul
book, all the more so, as there are very few Sanskrit scholars in Eurooe who
understand Panini. • • • *~- v#
Opinion of Pandit LalchandrajiYidyabhaskar, M.R.A.S. (London),
Guru to H. H. the Maharaja of Joflhpur*
wrn)-^ ftnH? f**l9 TOP? *A WIWUWiRl* TOPrf I
Pi4«i^Rn T^f^^T^t^nTT ^ra^fSlr fa*farcf *\hi<\ *rf%*i I
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
ifcrnrcrfc Ciilfeg*
Sthranj
THE BEQUEST OF
PROFESSOR OP SANSKRIT
1880-I926
Digitized by
Google
Opinions (continued.)
nwrcro? TOTOrferarafK^r ^f^t ^retaiwu Ami *wi finer i
TWrtn)
OPINIONS OF THE PEESS.
The Indian Union, (Allahabad), %6lh November ; 1891.
• * * The original Text and Commentaries, carefully edited with English
notes and explanations, bespeak of much diligence, care and ability ; and those
of the English-reading public who have a taste for Sanskrit cannot be too
thankful to Babu Sris Chandra for offering them so easy an access to the
intricate regions reigned over by that Master Grammarian. • • • We recom*
mend this book to all English-knowing lovers of the Sanskrit Language.
' The Tribune, (Lahore), glh December, 1891.
' + * • The translator has spared no pains in preparing a translation
which may place P^nini's celebrated work within the comprehension of people
not deeply read in Sanskrit The paper, printing and the general get-up of
the book before us are admirable, and considering the size of the book (it is
estimated to extend to 2000 pages) the price appears to be extremely moderate.
*
The Amriia Batar Patrika, [Cafcuita) % tith December, 1891.
• • • ' Judging from the first part before us, we must say that Babu
Sfis Chandra has succeeded well \ti the difficult work of translation, which
seems to us to be at once lucid, full and exact* k is no exaggeration to say
thktBabu Sris Chandra's translation, when completed, will claim a prominent
place among similar works by European Sanskrit Scholars.
. The Hope, {Calcutta), 20th December, 1891.
"* •' * The get-up of the publication is, of 'a superior order, and the
•contents display considerable painstaking on the part of tne translator.
■ , • 't - - ■
The Arya Patrika, (Lahore), *ind December, 189I.
•.■••• The Uletited Babu has rendered a great service to tlifc cause '
of Sanskrit literature by producing the sort of translation he i* engaged upo&
* * * His effort is most laudable and deserves every encouragement
Karnalak Patra, (Dharwar), *jth February, 1892.
* • • Mr. Vasu gives ample proof of his competency to undertake
the work which is not an easy task even to learned Sanskntists.
The Punjab Times, (Rawalpindi), 17/h February, 1892.
* * * Babu Sris Chandra is well-known for his scholarly attainments.
He has done the translation in a lucid and clear English. We can strongly
Digitized by
Google
QPINIONS (continued.)
recommend it to those .wbp^wjshr to... ;3tiidy Sanskrit; Grammar, .through the
medium of English. . '« '.':'--* . . .. .
• ' :v ;--;;-^'';;li r ; 'V /: \ " : / • ;/;
....... ; ; The Mandalay Herald, 31s/ December, 1891.
* * * Students and * readers of 'classic language of India are much
indebted .to the learned Pandit for his translation of this scientific work on the
grammar arfd philology. of the Sanskrit language. \
\'J\ T. •!/'..'. .<-.•.. The Arya Darpan, (Shahjahanpur), February, 1892.. : *
• • • Such a work has been a desideratum. It is well got(up f fcp<J,
"praiseworthy. We wish it every success.
.*..•'-*" The Allahabad Review, January, 1892.
...» » » The translator has done his work conscientiously and faithfully.
The translation of such a work into English, therefore, cannot but be a great,
booq to all students of the science of language and of Sanskrit literature in
Special. .The , translator deserves the help of the Government and the Chiefs
of , Indian, > .:;./ v ;i. ,:'..*' ;.i! . i' ; . v • .1
- The Maharatta (Poona), 4th July, 1893.
• * ,* If we may judge from the first part which lies before us, it will
prove a very valuable help to the student of P&nini. * * Safar as it goes
it.is creditably performed, and therefore deserves patronage from all students
of Sanskrit arid the Education Department.
The Arya Siddhanta (Allahabad), i$th November, 1891.
11 mftnfhi «ii*k«i ^i^civqnft «r wjf^ft 'tvjpraf 11
•rf 1 wr nnt^ to gnfftRi # fin fW f i
Digitized by
Google
BOOK III!
THE
ASHTADHYAYl OF PANINI.
• •
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH
BY
Sltf &A CHANDRA VASU, B. A„
Munsiff, Ghasipur.
:-o-: C>o-:
£ Ufthitbab:
Published by Satyajnan Chaterji,
at the Panini OJJice>
1894.
(All right* reserwvd.)
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
t
TO THE
§um'M* m f <rto* 0%, gt, <$. «.,
CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES,
THIS WORK
is,
WITH HIS LORDSHIP'S PERMISSION,
AND IN RESPECTFUL APPRECIATION OF HIS LORDSHIPS
SERVICES TO THE CAUSE OF ADMINISTRATION OF
JUSTICE AND OF HIGH EDUCATION
IN
THESE PROVINCES,
fUbuftttb
BY HIS LORDSHIP'S HUMBLE SERVANT
THE TRANSLATOR.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
PREFACE.
CJINCE the advent of the British rule and the peace and prosperity that have
O followed in its train, and especially since the foundation of the Arya
Samaj and the Theosophical Society, India has witnessed a glorious revival of her
ancient literature, in which is embodied some of the highest systems of philosophy
and religion of the world. Our schools and colleges are annually turning out
hundreds, nay thousands of scholars, who have entered upon the study of
Sanskrit literature, and have thus learnt to appreciate the beauties of that classic
language. Many Europeans too are taking pains to have some knowledge of
the immortal literature embodied in this ancient language. Very few of them,
however, have the opportunity of studying the language with that deep insight
and fulness of comprehension with which it was and is mastered by the Pandits
of the old school. To understand properly Sanskrit language, and especially
that portion of it in which are locked up the highest aspirations of the ancient
Aryan hearts, viz., the Vedas, the Brfthmanas, the Upanishads, &c, it is absolute-
ly necessary to have a complete knowledge of the Grammar elaborated by
P&nini.
Further, as a master-piece of close reasoning and artistic arrangement,
it ought to be an object of study to every one who wants to cultivate his intel-
lectual powers. In fact, what the Geometry of Euclid has done towards the
logical development of the western intellect, the AshUtdhyAyl of Ptoini has
done for that of the Sanskrit scholars. No one who has studied this book can
refrain from admiring it It has evoked admiration even from the Sanskrit
savants of the West. Professor Max Mailer thus gives his opinion about the
merits of this excellent Sanskrit Grammar : — "The Grammatical system ela-
borated by native Grammarians, is in itself most perfect, and those who have
tested P&nini's work will readily admit, that there is no Grammar in any
language, that could vie with the wonderful mechanism of his eight books of
Grammatical rules."
Unfortunately, however, for our college and school students, and also
for that vast majority of English-educated gentlemen, whose number is daily on
the increase, and who depend for their knowledge of what is contained in Sans-
krit books, on English translations of Sanskrit authors, no translation of this
important work exists in English. To supply this want, we have undertaken
to translate Panini's aphorisms, as explained in the well-known commentary,
called the K&sika. Though it is not a close translation of the whole of the KAsika,
it may be regarded as a free rendering of the most important portions of that
book. We have closely followed this commentary, explaining it where neces-
sary, and in short, making the work a help to the student, desirous of studying
the KftsikA in the original.
Digitized by
Google
( ii )
The work when completed would, it is estimated, cover nearly two
thousand pages. It would not therefore be possible to complete it and publish
it as a completed work within a short time. We have on that account thought
it expedient to publish the work in parts, that it might be of great advantage to
our readers and a matter of great convenience to the publisher. The Ashtd-
dhy&yi, as indicated by its name, is divided into ashta Adhydyas, i. *., eight Books.
Each of these Books again is divided into four pddas or chapters. It has thus
been found expedient to publish the work in 32 parts which are available to our
subscribers only, and, when four parts are out, to have them bound in one
volume available to the non-subscribing public as well as to our subscribers.
The rates of its subscription for the complete work published in eight
Books or 32 chapters are as follow : —
(Indian) Rs. 20-0-0 in advance, including postage.
(Foreign) £. 2-0-0 „ „ „
Price per set of 4 parts bound in one volume, 1. e. 9 one Book or Adhydya,
including postage— Rs. 3 (Indian) ; 6s. (Foreign).
Any encourager of Sanskrit learning subscribing for ten or more copies
of this work will be thankfully registered as our Patron and his name will be
made immortal with that of the book by giving it a prominent place in the
front of the book when it is completed.
Our hearty thanks are due to the Honourable E. White, c. s., Director
of Public Instruction, N.-W. P. and Oudh, for his kindly subscribing for 10
copies of our work, and to all those gentlemen who have hitherto subscribed
for any number of copies or in any way encouraged us in our undertaking.
}
PAnini Office,
THE PUBLISHER.
A llahabad.
Digitized by
Google
BOOK THIKD.
Chapter I.
— :o:—
HPW H \ M vtfk II WcTO H
1. An affix.
.This is an aphorism intended solely to regulate the sense of others.
From this place forward up to the end of the Fifth Book, whatsoever we shall
treat of, will get the name of 'Pratyaya' or an affix, except the 'prakriti* or base
(such as ipj, finj, fa^ in III. I. 5 are bases, the affix being ^ePj), the 'upapada'
or dependent word (such as wq, tr^rtf in III. 2. 24 are upapadas), the 'up&dhi'
or attribute, the special cause that occasions changes (such as <ft[ in III. 2. 25 is
an up&dhi); in the sfttra, HI. 2. 25, the word %rfH is a prakriti, f Rr and «rnr are
upapadas, *ij is an up&dhi, the affix being f^, the substitute and the augment.
Such as the affixes flsin;, *!**, H^ftT^ taught in III, I. 96, as 4*3*3^, qH^fta^
'to be done*.
TTW3 * ^ M W** « TOt % ( W9W5 ) M
^Ri: 11 qn* *r **Ri vrrtrtf HiRmR*MW *: imRreffr: 11
2. And subsequent.
This is also an ' adhik&ra' or regulating sAtra, and is understood in all
subsequent aphorisms ; or it might also be called a *paribh&sh&' or interpreting
aphorism. That which is called an affix comes after, or is placed after, the
'dh&tft' or root, or the 'pr&tipadika' or crude form ; as tff^cq^and SffrfN^.
The force of the word ^ 'and' in this sfttra is to indicate that the affixes
here treated of, are to be placed after a root &c; not so, however, the affixes not
taught in this Adhy&ya. These latter, such as UnAdi affixes, may sometimes,
be placed in the beginning or the middle of a word.
wflfr: 11 w^frav * *i*fii *: unnrefsr: II
3. That which is called an affix, has an acute
accent on its first syllable.
This sfltra may also be treated as a Paribh&sh4 or an Adhik&ra sfitra.
The ud&tta accent falls on the affix, and if it consists of more than one vowel,
then on the first of the vowels. Thus the affix flwr has ud&tta on the first h, as.
in qrfttp^- This general rule of accent applies only where there is no special
Digitized by
Google
348 The Desideratives. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 4-5.
rule laid down. Thijs, rule VI. I. 163, declares that affixes having an indica-
tory ^ will have ud&tta orv the final ; those having an indicatory * have accent
on the middle (VI. 1. 217) ; those that have an indicatory <c are anud&tta ; those
having an indicatory 5f, throw the acute accent on the syllable immediately
preceding the affix (VI. 1. 193); the affixes having an indicatory 3j and *r
throw the acute accent on the first syllable of the word to which they are
added (VI. 1. 197) ; the taddhita affix having an indicatory m takes acute
accent on the final (VI. 1. 165) ; and the affix having an indicatory n is svarita
(VI. I. 185).
^fa: 11 spr: fare tout M^rnrr *rafaf 11
4. The case-affixes (sup) and the affixes hav-
ing an indicatory <c (pit) are anud&tta.
This is an exception (apav&da) to the last aphorism. As **r^ 'two
stones' ; the case-affix aft is anudatta ; so also ^qj: ; so also qnfil ; The third
person singular affix ft^has an indicatory <r, and is anudAtta. But not *prci:.
( jj?w: ) 11
^ f%: 11 *£<c #f^, fim Pr*rf*, fo* fir*nt, infaSf *f$>*: ^ ***** >nrfau
mfS^ ii PHwniuufM>Kft<fti<^ srftmit j*** wninf u***f *rcrfaf 11
5, After the verbs «pr, Era and far*, comes the
affix *pj-
This affix is to be added to the above verbs, when they mean to 'dcs -
pise', 'to endure' and 'to heal' respectively, though they ordinarily mean 'to
hide', 'to whet' and 'to dwell'.. As *r*T<^p| 'he censures or despises'; fafimfr
'he endures patiently'; fafosafc *he heals'. But tfrvraft 'he protects'; tfrraflf
'he sharpens'; fi^raft 'he makes sign'.
When ^is added, there is reduplication of the root, by VI. I. 9. Thus,
1^ +*pj=3jij^ +*• (VII. 4. 62)=s^ijc^ to which is added the third person
singular termination wi=3Ttp*tf.
^MqqqiH^iq^ ft ^)3«<ll«ll4i<*4 II $ N ^rfw II *TW;
qfa: 11 fR 'jjrrar^. iw *&r%, fR^rwp?^, $ipf wtfif?, friffWt wnpv
^ xm3t **fii. wfrcrc* *imc** <te?Wr «nrfif 11
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 6-7] The Desideratives. 349
6. The affix *\ comes after the verbs inr <to
honor', w <to bind', fpr c to cut 1 aiid srnr c to whet', and
long i is the substitute of the 1 (VII. 4. 79) of the redu-
plicative (VI. 1. 4) syllable.
The ?EPr is to be added only then, when the sense of the desiderative
verb is as below : «fbrfcnfr 'he investigates', ^M?ct) 'he loathes', $?tert 'he
straightens', rfftrterct 'he sharpens*. The verbs given in this and the preceding
s&tra, are Desiderative in form, but not in meaning. The word 'optionally' in
the next sfitra, maybe read into this also, whereby the addition of ^ becomes
optional. Thus qprarftt, wnwfir, TPRlfic and foonrafq are also valid forms. .
*nrafc, ufani, ^fif-^nf *jt^, t hum hi, wi, ( ^w, urcmr: ) 11
Mffif 11
1fftNi*JII f*ttl^faRJlRi5iTt *^R**: II
7. The affix ^ is optionally attached, iu the
sense of wishing, after a root expressing the object wish-
ed, and having the same agent of the action as the wisher
thereof.
As, *j 'to do'; fa*f^==*^Rr«erfir 'he wishes to do'. This is the
Desiderative proper. It is optional to employ the desiderative affix, the same
sense may be expressed by a phrase. The root must also be simple and not
compounded with any upasarga, when the affix ?ept is to be added. Thus
Why do we say qntar: 'after (a root expressing) an object' ? The affix-
will not come after an Instrumental case. Thus iii33«ttftr ; here there is no
affix. But ip^Praffic will be fsnrfirefti.
Why do we say ^nrnr^^n^ 'when the subject of the verb to wish,
is also the subject of the verb denoted by the object wished' ? Observe ???*!€*
^nprPr*8[fa *riT**i:. Here Yajfiadatta is agent of the verb f«9ftt ; but he is
not agent of the action ^nrtf; hence there is no affixing.
Why do we say f^TOT^ 'when the sense is that of wishing'? Ob-
serve «ir«f sfPirfif 'he knows how to make' ; here the sense being that of know-
ing, there is no affix.
The word *r 'optionally 9 shows that a sentence may also be employed
to express the same idea. Thus *4i?roRr or fttftfft.
Digitized by
Google
350 The Denominatives. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § J.
The word *mt: being especially used in this sfttra, shows that this
spr is an Ardhadh&tuka affix, while the ^taught in the two preceding
sfttras, will not get this designation.
Vart : The affix sr^is added, when the sense is that of 'in imminent
danger'; as jrjp <rfit«*rRr *\fj&l =* fvrfirofil *&(\ 'the bank is in imminent
danger of falling down'. So also j^r **& Rr.
Vart : There is no affixing of ^[ after a verb which has already taken
st^ in the sense of wishing. As fcgftfcraftrefr. But the spr of III. I. 5, 6 not
denoting wishing, we have spjPfl^, *ft»rtfil^.
5*1 3|T3*IW: *HHf^ II c II xr^rf^T II *pT:, QTT&m:, W*,
irfita^ 11 s*f fir qfr*ttnifHfft q*fc^ 11
8. The affix *w% is optionally employed, iti
the sense of wishing, after a word ending in a case-affix
expressing the object wished as connected with the wish-
er's self.
This forms the Denominative verbs, i. e., verbs derived from nominal
bases. As, 5* 'son', <pftaf% 'he wishes for a son of his own* (jw+3R^=3'ft+
*?VM)<P.4-7h VII. 4. 33).
Why do we use the word fft? The affix should not come after a whole
sentence, but only after the particular word ending in the case-affix. Thus in
*f?T*tf yrfH*a[fic> the affix comes only after yp^ and not qfrei yf.
Why do we say dtmanah ? Observe nsn yrffrggfq 'he wishes a son for
the king'. Here there is no affixing as the wishing is for another and not for
one's own self.
The vr in qpr^is for the sake of classing kyacfi, kyaH and kyash in one
common group by simply using the word TO, as in sfttra 11: 9$ I. 4. 15 ; while
^ distinguishes Icyach from kyail &c, and is not for the sake of accent, the
affix will be ud&tta by III. 1. 3.
Vart :— In affixing iyac/t, prohibition must be stated of pronouns in
*T N and of Indeclinables. Thus in f?ft«a[f<f, d^ft^bfii , there is no affixing.
Vart : — In the Vedas, the affix is added even when the wish is with re-
gard to another. Asiir w.^kt wraft fa^. Here wi* (pi. wnrcn) is
Digitized by
Google
Bk. in. Ch. L 5 9-10.] Kamyach and Kyach.
351
formed by kyach, ar being added by III. 2. 170, and w is added by VII.. 4. 37.
See Rig Veda I. 120. 7 ; 27. 3 &c.
*$*:, T^TOT, *T ) II
9. And the affix **r**^ is also employed,
in the sense of wishing, after a word ending in a case-
affix, expressing the ohject wished as connected with
the wisher's self.
Thus, ?TOmrftr ' he wishes for a son of his own'.
The making of this a separate sfitra instead of adding it with the last
aphorism and making one sfltra of them both, is for the sake of the subsequent
sfltra, where the anuvntti of kyach only runs, and not that of k&myach. The
aF of k&myach is not indicatory, but is a part of the real affix. Here therer
fore, rule 1. 3. 8 which would have made the letter * indicatory, does not apply ;
because no particular purpose would be served by making indicatory. Or the
affix k&myach may be considered to have an indicatory «* before it i.e. the affix
being chak&mya.
wiMifiimft 11 \o 11 x^rf^r 11 ^tpflWTf , smn^,
( Timft:, *$*:, $*:, *T, *T\) II
ffN: II vmHHIM^QT: *p*SnnnWf qt wp^ 9t*?ft H*Rr II
^rPS^ 11 hRi*<uji*^Ri T?R"nj 11
10. The affix **w is optionally employed,
in the sense of treatment, after a word ending in a case-
affix denoting the object of comparison.
Thus, jqftqi^uRi Bflrw =* <{4frrftt HW*{ 'he treats the pupil as a son*
Vart : So also in a locative case. As irmiftaf* *y$£ 'he dwells in hut as
if it were & palace'. <rafaftaRt if ^* 'in a cot he lies down as if he were on a royal
bedstead ; he treats a cot as a royal bedstead'.
qiflfa^ti ^#>nRwR4}«c f^NB 11
Digitized by
Google
3$2 Kyan [Bk. III. Ch. I. 5 12.
ii. The affix **i^ is optionally employed in
the sense of behaving, after a word ending in a case-
affix, denoting the object of comparison of the agent ;
and there is elision (lopa) of the final *r of the nonn; if it
ends with a * .
Thus, jcsr^TOCfir ^rar:, **hrraS, 'the crow behaves like a hawk' ; arennratf
'she behaves like an Apsarft'; <nre*3 or tbtrt^ 'it becomes milk'; (jf^t
+ ^ ^irr + * =» rf*r*» VII. 4. 25).
In the words sftsie — *tt*TTO^, and b*c*tc^ — BT<c*ncrot the final « is in-
variably elided when forming the denominative verb : but not so in the case
of <ra*£ where the elision is optional, as TTRrtf or <nre*ret
The elision of sr N refers to the final ^ and not when it is followed by
any vowel. Thus f*r— **rra3; €TRT€r— *Tfrwc9; here the q is not elided as it
is not final. See. I. 1. 52.
Vatt\— After the words 3TOT?H, iftw, and $*, the affix ff^ is op-
tionally added in the sense of behaving like some one or some thing. As bt?t-
VF*ft or WT*Hra3, jfifoS or g^tarati, $(*$ or ft?nrit The alternative forms
are derived by the affixing of kyah.
Vart :— According to the opinion of some Grammarians, the affix ft^
comes optionally iu this sense after all crude nouns* As *nc?ft or *HC*rc$,
<Tf *fftf or nfanri? .
*5f*rprt ^ wfrr: 11
12, The affix *w*j. in the sense of becoming
what the thing previously was not, is employed after
the crude forms H^and the rest, which do not end with
the affix far (V. 4. 50) ; and there is elision (lopa) of the
final consonant of these words, if they end in a conso-
nant.
Thus, wpjt *pjt wfo=*J[rnrS *he becomes much (from a little)'; tfunrtt
lie becomes swift (from being tardy)'. All these roots will be Atmanepadi (I.3.1 2).
The phrase h«5: 'not ending in the adverbial affix f prefers to every
one of the words belonging to the class ftjjrf?. It may be objected, what was
the necessity of adding this condition, since the affix f%* itself denotes that
something has become what it was not before ; and therefore a word which has
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. ( *3.] v Kyasm. 353
taken the affix far, will not again take**r s in that very sense. The repetition
of ps* here shows that the words *]*r &c. never take the affix (%*, in the
sense of 'something becoming what it was not before'. Thus the present sfttra is
an exception to sfttra V. 4. 50 which ordains f%*.
*M,» *npin, wff^, **% 5 j«ro N , jjRt, wrc, »frt^» *4^, (f*«nr^» kh% *\*n s > f^» *j-
l^. The affix **v in the sense of becoming
what the thing previously was not, is employed after
the words ^tff*, &c. and after those that end with the
affix *r* (V. 4. 57), when these words do not take the affix
f%* (Y. 4. 50).
Thus M l ljqmft or BTfiprroftr 'he becomes red'; qrrcnrft or <BTO*fir 'he
makes a noise like patapata'; (tftff?i + *c=sftftflr + * =*Hlft«H«, VII. 4. 25).
The word «HH3i€uft is formed by adding the affix ddch to the word q*
which is first reduplicated, and then takes the denominative affix kyash. The
affix ddch is added to express inarticulate sounds.
There is no special class called lohitddi. The V&rtika, therefore, pro-
poses that the sfttra should read without the word ddi 9 as 5ftft9rf?nr: mi\;
'the affix kyash comes after lohita, and words ending in ddch\
This rule applies to words other than finprfV which are always in-
variably Atmanepadi owing to the f|q* N affix **?v while mo\ is optionally
both. (I. 3. 90). Thus *nhrf% or qrcfcrt. risrafit or ftira&i sronrofir or swunrir,
apinrf* or qranrt. The lohitddi is an BTT^faimJ, the following being some of the
words of this class ; sftfftt, *ft5f, ffal, 41*1, HK, «** and h^.
'the indicatory q* in ?&{ is not for the sake of prohibiting gutta and
vriddhi (1. 1. 5). ¥ or gun a or vriddhi takes place in a dhdtu followed by a s&r-
vadhdtuka or drdhadhdtuka affix. The affix *F\\ is not added to a dhdtu but
to a nominal stem : hence there is no scope for the operation olguna &c. The
q? is for the sake of grouping *q^, 9^9 N and wy\ in one class as qq ; as in sfttra
«r : 9$ (I. 4, 15), There is, however, no word ending in *r among those enumer-
ated above.
Digitized by
Google
354 KyAN. [BK. III f Cli. I. S 14-16.
The affix *pj (V.4. $7) comes when the verb following is one of the
three mh, h, or ^ ; as qarerarftfir, -H*Rr or -**TO N . The present sAtra teaches
by implication that when s§*^ follows *r% the above restriction, that the
verb should be qj, *^or wr, is not applicable. Here *r^ comes without the ad-
dition of *r, * or *?fe|.
The anuvritti of ***$' comes from the last sfltra ; and hence the affix
**^ is added in the sense of wym^rr? I e. something becoming that which
it was not before.
«8W WTO$ It \)i H ^rRr II TOTO, *H*i, ( *T» ) H
14. The affix w*rf, in the sense of exerting in
dishonesty, is employed after the word *r 'mischief,
when the latter has the fourth case-affix in construc-
tion.
Thus, qnrRT wriiff *FPrf%=srarrrt 'he is assiduous for trouble, i. e. he is
assiduous in the commission of dishonesty, or he plots'.
Vart :— The affix sw s comes in the sense of exerting in evil, after the
words srw, n^s, w^c, *£*&, and iflpr ; as, OTTTO3, *i*?Rrcf, 3i?rRrit» ^^£wfr,
and iTf^nm-
When the sense is not of 'evil', the affix is not added, as •?*: q& imrf%.
srfirarn 11 nro: <n3$<c* ^ 11
15. The affix **^ is employed after the
words, rlwnr 'ruminating' and *rrer 'austerity', when
they are used as the objects of the action of repeating
and performing respectively.
Thus, C|*mi wrffr= il T H « <H3£ ift: 'the cow ruminates/
Vart: This is restricted to the word signifying movements of the
jaws. Therefore there is no affixing here ; as, *ft?T d*Ftf *tf*fir.
Vatt The Prasmaipada affixes are used after the word *TW N ; as
ftTOtfihssrTOrfir, lie performs austerity*.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. 111. Ch. I. § 16-18.] Kvan. 355
jrfif^ 11 'frrr^fir w>hh ii
16. The affix **nris employed in the sense
of ejecting, after the words wr*? * vapour' and *** 'heat'
as the object of the action.
Thus, 3T«ire3 'it emits vapour'; 3Tnrit 'it sends out heat'. So also
*Wr# 'it ejects froth'.
17. The affix vm, in the sense of making,
comes after these words, as the object of the action,
viz :—u*i 'sound', <fc 'hostility', **K 'strife', *w c cloud', ****
'sin' and fa 'cloud'.
Thus, *Rf suftRf « *wtf 'he makes a noise'. So also fo*$, *Wf r-
*i$, wirarS, sra^nr^, farat i
Far/: — It should be stated that the affix comes after l^far, £fifa and ift-
frr ; as, *?tyu4<), jft'rraft, 'ftfrcntf i
Vart:—$o also should be included the words am, BTf r, tftar, qJteT, «fl?r
*fcrr and qrer ; as arcrcftj Mjntf, #l*mtf, *1?r#, «ftenr#, fft?i*$ and *?ct-
*ff 1
The word qrcoj in the sfttra is not the Grammatical Karana or the Ins-
trumental case, but has here its primary meaning of 'doing'.
§*Tf^»l: «qf3q«PITW II \6 || n^rfa II 3f%-9nf^RT: 9
ui-i^wni, ( ***:, w) II
18. The affix ***? in the sense of feeling, comes
3
Digitized by
Google
356 Kyach and Nin, [Bk. III. Cil I. § 19-20.
after the words **r 'pleasure' &c, when the pleasure
&c. belong to the agent as feels thereof.
Thus cpsraft ' he feels pleasure' ; 9:*sn?rt 'he feels pain*.
Why do we say 'when the feeling belongs to the agent* ? Observe *r*r
t^rRr TOPTCit ?*?*TC* 'the valet knows the happiness of his master Deva-
datta/ Here the agent viz. a valet, is not the percipient of the 'happiness/
which belongs to his master ; hence there is no affixing.
*1% J : ^i &*» i^v, fsr> *m» wfr^i *rfto> ^tojt* sjTf, *ft? 1
f^HRF:, VP^ ( **# ) II
*fir: 11 f»rmili^ fa*^|wi<Mt *r ^rj inrat wf?r ^rc^ufirfW *cn*r u
19. The affix wr, in the sense of making,
comes after these words as the object of the action viz : —
**% 'adoration', *fi:*^ 'honor' and fa* 'wonder*.
Thus qprctrftf t«rr^, 'he worships the gods' ; qforoft *ns^, lie honors
or serves the elders' ; Pnfta# 'he astonishes ( makes it wonderful)'. The ^ in
fa*^ indicates that it takes the affixes of the Atmanepada. (ftpr + if-
f*ft + * (VII. 4. 33) - Pnfhr).
^^ T^Hhrewrfty 11 ^ iitr^rRr 11 3^-TO¥-Vfcwm,
ftRF , ( «*% ) M
jfic: n ygg Hf^f ^far t*»Mt ffnw s imH *rrfa <M,mRiW »
^frfS^ 11 ;*m***tf <riNro m 11
^rrT^^ 11 *fTCTrwfN^ n
qrhfanj 11 "^tan*^ <iR>fi^ *f 11
20, The affix Pw N , in the sense of making,
comes after these words as the object of the action,
viz :— 3«s 'tail', hp* c pot' and *** ( rag\
Thus xR^B^* 4 hc lifts up the tail', (the sense must be that of lifting
or throwing about); qHUMna 'he collects pots in a heap'; cNfcrcRiitftq: 'the
beggar collects or wears rags'. Of the affix fifr^, the effective portion is f , the
other letters are servile. The r indicates Atmanepada (1. 3. 12) and tn serves the
purposes of the application of the rule VI. 4. 51 which applies generally to all
affixes containing f*r, such as ftn^ fa*t &c.
Vart : — After the word 3*9 the sense of the affix is that of lifting
or throwing about.
Digitized by
Google
BK. III. CH. I. $ 21.] NlCH AND YAN. 357
Vart -.—After *ir»* the sense of the affix is that of accumulation in a
heap.
Vart : — After *ftq* the sense of the affix is that of acquiring or wear-
ing.
( iret ) «
qfa: »i gin fan *w W 5W!J iw to w ^w frci *pi **$$»*: *re3 fib^ww lr
wflr 11
21. Tlie affix ft% in the sense of making,
comes after these words as the object of the action
viz : 351 'shaving', fas 'mixture', ssnpi 'soft', sm 'salt', ipi
'vow', *** 'dress', fw 'plough', srer 'strife', far 'done', and
irjHr 'matted hair'.
Thus yrocfir 'he shaves'; Pprafil lie mixes'; jw^smfil 'he softens or
alleviates'; rooraft 'he salts'; TOftprcft 'he fasts on milk'; «h«rcft 'he covers
with clothes i. e. dresses'; fvWfti 'he ploughs'; qreretffr 'he makes war*; fRnrftr
'he appreciates kindness'; firfflftraftf 'he combs the hair, or disentangles matted
hair or delivers from sin'.
The affix after the word ?ra has the sense of 'eating' or 'abstaining
therefrom'; as <rft CTraftr 'he drinks milk/ ^r*ff?q ?nrcft 'he abstains from the
food prepared by a low caste'; after the word qw the affix denotes the sense
of covering. After f ^r and srfq* the sense is that of taking ; as {fft iT^rl* =» %m-
^fy. The words in the sfttra are f*T and qftf and not f fo and *ff5C. This
anomalous form shows that in forming the Aorist of these by adding the affix
•q^ (III. 1. 48) the reduplication takes place, but not in the same way as if the
affix were sr«r s ; i.e. the Wf q?m does not take place here in the Aorist (VII. 4.
93). Thus the Aorists are &nrj*m and arai^R^; and not Bfifijstfl and «Hta«!^
which would have been the forms by the application of rules VII. 4, 79. & 94*
if there was **4\«ir?.
The word **yr means either hair, or matted hair, or sin.
^fii: 11 q*nr *ilr*i*i$Trft: Rrarcrofliftf vfo **rwi«^ ***** nwfa# toy*
Digitized by
Google
358 Yan [Bk. III. Cii. I. § 22-24.
*rf*fa?H 11 «J^«J^^w^jujl*R*rt «vfisr ^rp fa*in^*i whi*hJh, 11
22. The affix *nr, in. the sense of repetition
ot the act, comes after a root, having a single vowel and
beginning with a consonant.
The phrase kriyd-samabhihdfa means repetition of the act or its
intensity. As q^f 'to cook', qrrorf 'he cooks again and again'; srm*^ 'he shines
with great intensity'. The root must be a simple root, and not compounded
with any upasarga. We cannot therefore make Intensives of verbs like *r^
'to go', (because the root «f? is preceded by the upasarga *); or srnj 'to be
awake/ (because it contains two vowels) ; or f ^ ' to see' (because it begins
with a vowel).
Vart :— The intensive affix ** n comes after *jf% ^fw, ^Pr, Hf?, Mfif , Htf
and wft, though some of these contain more than two vowels and others begin
with a vowel.
As, ^^f«, Ht^S, ^t^unt BiHnwt, nrrjKl, «T^rnc^, and Stefan .
The affix is not added in these cases ^rf thrn* or HTT rlT^, as it is
against usage to make Intensive forms of these verbs on the sense of intensity,
though in the sense of repetition we have *ft«q£ and tftcrart.
In making the Intensives, the root is reduplicated and it takes the ter-
minations of the Atmanepada as the root is fen.
(to) «
23. The affix **L invariably comes, in the sense
of crookedness, after a simple verb expressing motion.
Thus upt 'to move', to**# lie moves crookedly'. So also <FV**nf.
After a verb of motion, the *r«; never expresses intensity or repetition ; so if
the latter sense is to be expressed, a phrase must be employed ; as *ir *mfn 'he
wanders much'. This is inferred from the word Prwr used in the sfttra i. e. w^
always has the sense of crookedness and no other sense after a verb of motion.
^rro^t ^ q ^H^i^^ T Hnpifbnw nq» 11 vrfn II
24. The affix *r s when it is intended to con*
vey the sense of contempt (iff) in respect of the souse
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI. Cii. I. § 25.] Nich. 359
»■ ' • 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 ■ 1 1 ■ ■ .> 1 1 1 1 1 »
of the root (*r*) comes always after the following roots,
viz:— 5j^ 'to cut off, *\ 'to sit', *iVto walk', *Vto mutter
silently any sacred formula', *n* N 'to gape or yawn', *? N
'to burn', m 'to bite' and *r <to swallow'.
Thus vfjrcyaffi 'he cuts off badly'; *ra<rf 'he sits badly' ; ^4n 'he
walks badly' ; 5T3r^r# 'he recites badly' ; so also sprort, writ , PW^t,
fa^Rl**i%. The affix ijy^ does not come in the sense of repetition &c. after
the above verbs, but only in the sense of censurable performance of the
action denoted by the verbs. Separate words must be used to express the
intensive or the frequentative meaning. As *pr 5J*Tftf 'he cuts off much'.
Why do we say 'when contempt in regard to the sense of the root
is meant' ? Observe m>g srefil 'he recites well*. There is no affixing as no con-
tempt is denoted. Why do we say 'in regard to the action denoted by the
root' ? When the contempt is not with regard to the sense of the root, but
with regard to the action as accomplished, the affix is not employed. Thus
H**t srrfif ^q*T : 'the Sfldra recites the sacred mantras'. The word ftm of
the last aphorism is understood here also.
fare n ^ 11 *T^rfa 11 *«m*-xm*-^-^T-im-'sfcfta-%WT-tfm-
irflfap^ 11 *ni 9wwiim;i*TOi*qr: 11 '
25. The affix fcr«L is employed after these
words, viz: — *«r 'truth' (which then takes the form of
win as exhibited in the sCitra), «rc[r 'a fetter', *<t 'form',
*rojT 'a lute', *gt 'cotton', scsflrar 'celebration', #*rr 'an army',
3rc 'the hair of the body', *r* 'the skin', ** 'mail', *d 'cele-
bration', *gJ 'powder' and the verb of the Chur&di class.
Thus wsrnrefil 'he speaks truly'; frrorarn 'he unfetters or liberates';
5TOft 'he looks'; wft'TOfil 'he sings with the lute'; M^Hsrafa 'he makes a brush';
^nc^TWlfi! 'he praises in verse'; *cfttfaj*rft 'he advances with the army'; M^sft-
TOfii 'he rubs over the hair'; ?*^rafit 'he feels of the skin'; e*fofi| 'he puts on the
mail armour'; ?otafei 'he celebrates or colors'; a?T*^rfil he pulverises. The
roots of the Chut Mi class belong to the tenth conjugation, for a list of which
see the Dh&tupatha. After the verbs of the Chur&di class, the affix fijj^ is em-
ployed without alteration of the sense ; as ^ftroffl 'he steals'. So also F*?*Rr%.
4
Digitized by
Google
360 Njch. [Bk. ill. Cii. I. § 26.
Vart:— The words a?<f, ^ and *rwi take the augment wj before the
affix f^ ; as, swrrrofir, Wffrofit, #*rprfa. The whole equation is thus shown
(Vir. 3. 85). The final syllable called f? is not elided in this case, i.e. of wf^
the syllable hi\ is not elided before fa*, as it would have been by VI.4. 155.
The reason is that if wj was to be elided, there would have been no necessity
of adding it. The affix Rsr^rhas the sense of 'unfettering' after the word mj> of
'seeing' after ^r, of 'singing in accompaniment' after sftmr, of 'brushing' after
?g*, of 'praising' after *jfirar, of 'leading' after *ftrr, of 'rubbing' after sffr, of
'taking' after ?r*, of 'putting on' after *$ and of 'taking' after *tf.
*rf*f^ 11 ^r^itrit^^iMH* wramrou»r 11
Tififapj 11 w^rRTfjirr€?wrpBrar tfir far* ffsr^ s?ftf?r Jmrnrfii: sjyft^^i
srfifspr 11 tfifl^frrv W5rm(r^f^lrir ^r^ron* 11
*rf$^ 11 wrifttf f^r 11
26. The affix fcr* is employed after a. root,
when the operation of a causer is to be expressed.
The hetu (I. 4. 55) means the mover of the independent Agent ; an
operation relating to the hetu % such as directing &c. is called hetumat ; as 7*i
*ffrr*rGr 'he causes to prepare a mat'; %nt •fT^^rRf 'he makes the rice to be
cooked'. In other words, the affix fnr^ forms the causative verbs.
Vart: — The affix comes also in the sense of 'he does that' after the
words fnr&c. Thus ** spftfir = **rarf?r 'he makes stitra' So also j^rtRt.
Vart 1 — After words ending in qp{ affixes and describing legends,
comes the affix figr^, when the sense is 'he does that'. The «^t n affix is eli-
ded, the word rcassumes its basic (JTr^Rw) form, and the base is as if the agent,
thus qrcrcrfw*ic?»3ta' *rrcRri%; *fOT*rep**?=»*fcr w^rofir; topppthto? =*
Vart : — Under the conditions mentioned in the last qrfftqr, the upa-
sarga w is elided, when duration of time is meant expressing limit, Thus
wtrfafiraro w? = nW forn g refic ; here the w of bttctBt is elided.
Vart : — Under the conditions mentioned in the second vartika the
.affix fcg^has the sense of 'making wonderful', meaning 'attaining that\ Thus
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 27-28.] Yak. 36.1
1 • ' 1 1 ■ 1 ■ ■ i ■ ■ .
tojRtot: sfamt mftwiwrf *ifi* iptf *=wtoS = *0g**rafa 'going from Ujjain he
finds the sun rise in Mahismati (wonderful speed)'.
Vart : — When an asterism is in composition and the sense is that of
knowing, there comes the affix fig^ after a word ending in «k^ affix, the
SjW affix is elided, the word reassumes its basic form and the base is as if the
agent. Thus ^wrJW iTHTfil = y^(!X *fcrafa. So also TOrWfnraftr.
^wnf^ft to 11 ^3 11 t^rf^r u j^-snf^ 2 *:, (to)ii
27. The affix *% is employed after the roots
*i*r* 'to itch', &c.
Thus.^r^fir orsfmgrd 'he itches or scratches'. This word takes ter-
minations indicatory. The words *k°? &c. are both roots and nouns, and are
placed therefore in a separate list by themselves and are not included in the
general list of verbs. The affix applies to these words as roots and not as
nouns.
5TO^5Tf|: I
SW, «gi[H, »nnT, *&&b f T*f*Ti ^1 *W> ^^9 W, PTO^» fWJH> f^T, ^RTO, "JTO*
yiTi wrnj, *T**f<j, k&t, «Sw, ^terf 1 fo* and tfts l
'I^MMRlRvifiilMfa^: STHT: II ^F II II M4fRl II JfiJ-^W-
*ftc: II 'JVT^, *C? ***&> f** 5 ^ TO *mi? *jA % TO % *5*taft
28. The affix wr comes after *TL 'to protect',
*t 'to heat', fir^ec 'to approach', tot <to contract or praise'
and <n 'to praise'.
Thus ifWirofa 'he protects'; *$jnrfir 'he heats'; so also, f%*unrRr, TOJroRr,
and<prnrfii«
The verb qnr N being read along with ^ 'to praise/ has here the sense of
praise only ; so that the affix does not come after the verb to^ when it means
'to make a contract' ; as *rae* TOjfl, ^f^T TOfT.
The verbs in s*ra do not take Atmanepada affixes, as there is no indi-
catory letter to show that.
**?Hhw u ^ ii ^rf^r 11 ^:, $*t* 11
Digitized by
Google
362 • . Aya &c. [Bk. III. Cii. I. § 2932
m — — ^— — ^. 11 1 1 ■ ..iii. ' 11
29* The affix tw. oomes after the sfttraroot
mfn 'to reproach'.
The indicatory y shows that the verb will take the affixes of the
Atmanepada ; as 3Pfta$ 'he pities or reproaches'; so also, 5?3tarf, 5{<fNr?3.
*ftfite 11 \* 11 M^ i fa 11 mkt 9 fws^ u
• 30. The affix Rtrc^ comes after the root *w 'to
desire'.
The ny indicates vriddhi (VII. 2. 115) and r shows Atmanepada ; as,
3FTiTO% 'he desires'; so also qiPFetf and qfnRl^.
^15%, *T, (ifiFTO:) II
^Rr: 11 w^rr5^f%^ wt>fr5^rf%^frnimRn^T: rwrtt *r **f?a 11
31. The affixes wr and those that follow it,
(i.e. wr, i *r and fey) are optionally added, when it is
desired to express one's self with an Ardhadhfituka affix.
Thus *ir 3rd. sing, of the Future is an Ardhadh&tuka affix. It is
optional to retain the dya of gop&ya before this affix. So we have iftfrft^T or
iftirr 'he will protect*. So also «tf5*ir or q^frftrw ; «Kflnrr or qrraftrar.
But for this stitra, the affixes amr &c. would have come always even
when &rdhadh&tuka affixes were to be applied. This makes it optional.
Therefore proper Ardhadh&tuka affixes should be applied when we retain a?nr
&c. and when we do not retain them. Thus the Ardhadh&tuka pffr^ (III. 3.
95 ) will be employed in forming ths fcTiimine noun from the simple root, but
the Ardhadh&tuka «r ( HI. 3. 102 ) will be employed in forming, the feminine
when «fnr &c are retained. Thus ijfar: or nfcrcr.
^ITSFflT ^^TcW: II ^ II . M^fRl II ^W^3nf^-3RIT:,
^TT?W: II
*ftr: 11 3rorerr: *r»j*r*r vx^km wfat 11
32. All the words ending with the affixes «*
and others are called Dh&tu.
This extends the sphere of Dh&tu or roots already defined in
sfitra I. 3. 1. These roots may be called derivative roots. They are separate
independent roots, and have all the functions of a root, as taking tense-affixes
&c. as shown in the above examples* Thus ftqftq? 'to wish to do', «&rft 'to
Digitized by
Google
. <c. Ill Ch. L § 33.35] Sya and Tasi. 363
tause to do'; <3fiiro 'to do repeatedly' are separate roots and not the same
as fj 'to do' and thus take jj^ &c.
} *mrtft ^$£t: H ft II ^TfW II ^?-m€ii, ^-$*ft:,
(m^:)ll
33. When 5j and w* follow, then w and nrRr
are respectively the affixes of a verbal root.
53 is thd common expression for sj^ and q* % formed by reject-
ing their special anubandhas, and means therefore the 2nd Future and the
Conditional tenses, wfc is the 1st Future also called the Periphrastic Future..
Thus ttfroft ararftTOl, ^^ The * of frr ^ is in d }cator y and shows that the
nasal of the root is not to be dropped before this ; as i\ 'to think', *r?m 'he
will think*.
^15^ $fe 11^ 11 *^rfa 11 ftw, ij^nj, *Nfc f (^T?ft:)ii
*Rr : 11 *imt: ftrj iwrtt *r*fir ^55? £ft TOl: II
34. fa*i is diversely the affix of a verbal root
when <r* follows.
The tense called £» or subjunctive is found in the Vedas only.
When the subjunctive tense is employed, the affix fa^ is diversely added.
Thus ifrfire^, wRVfc Hf^^r N . Sometimes this augment is not employed ;
thus <nirfii f|«m 3?fw 39T?*lft. Thus in Rig Veda I. 1.2, *fTfil is ah example
ofaewithfa^n
3TTW, 3tf*5, %ffc> ( W9TO:, ^rSt: ) II
«rctfW**wfirofr 11
*rflfai«i 11 *sre*^m f fti ^rtfi** 1 *. ^g^irotf ^ 11
35. *n^ is the affix of the verb srrci N <to cough \
and of those roots that are formed by affixes (i. e. the
derivative verbs), when fa^ follows, except in the Mantra.
This forms the Periphrastic Perfect The Perfect of *ra N will be
*jram N , after which the terminations of the Perfect are all elided ( IL 4. 81 ) and
instead, the perfect tense of the auxiliary verb ^ or •T^orfjis added. As
Hfrertai* c he coughed' ; ^tcmira 'he stole*. So also <H l frffl^i$ ,
5
Digitized by
Google
364 Am. [Bk. III. C11. I. § 36-38.
This rule however does not apply to the Vedas; as fftnft sftTT* Rig.
Veda I. 79. 2.
Vart:— This rule also applies where the root is polysyllabic con-
sisting of more than one vowel ; as "Ej^wjim^H, *R*l**(K II
The final n of mp^ is not indicatory.
VT^*^ 3^W^WH5qs: II ^ II M^TpJ II T^3TT^*, %
5^T9:> 3FP**:, ( %fs, 3TT*) II
^rf^^FT^ 11 4>iDf3*i JiRrWlr q^h^: 11
, 36. The affix wUs used when fo* N follows, after
a root beginning with a letter of i*f praty&h&ra and hav-
ing a heavy vowel, excepting the root m*&i 'to go\
Thus f f f to try', j?N$ 'he tried* ; so also ^g i *^H F 'he guessed',
3*T**PF 'he grieved'.
But t^-e^ forms HPT^ 'he failed or went'. This applies to mono-
syllabic roots which begin with any vowel prosodially long, except m or btt. The
verb arcf 'to cover' is, however, an exception; its perfect is 3^f ?tpt 'he covered*.
Why do we say 'beginning with ^ or any vowel except a? or m' ?
Observe «tf, Perfect a*rc$ (VII. 4. 71). Why do we say 'heavy vowel'?
Observe e*{, Perf. ^rrlRsr (VI. 4. 78 ) 9TO*:, 3^:. Why do we say 'vowel' ?
Observe sg$, Perf. g*¥ ; **, Perf. 5^.
H*fi| II )
37. After the verbs ** <to give', 'to go' and 'to
protect', we'togo', and srrcr 'to sit', there is the affix nnr,
when ftr? follows.
Thus ^n^tf 'he gave' ; TOrarofT 'he ran away' ; amrrro 'he sat'.
^sfa^Ml^^fli^I^ II ^C II TTfrfk II VI-fiR[-
*rpn*:, vr*unxw*> (•IW, XTCTO, f^ife) n
^Rr: 11 3* *r?, firc *n*> wj Prtrcn*, uS*ft f*rf* «roftJ***rc*rrcpj «j*rtt
*wfit 11
38. The affix wr is optionally employed after
these, viz :— ^ 'to burn', fir*; 'to know', and *nj 'to wake',
when l*n follows.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Gh. I § 39-41.] Am Optional. * 365
Thus sffrT**flKK or otW, f%*rs*«in? or Rtff, immtl^n: or snrmT?. As
there is an agreement in the present instance to regard the verb firj as ending
in a short **,guna is not substituted, as it would otherwise have been by rule
VII. 3. 86.
39. wr s is optionally affixed, when fire follows?
after these verbs *ft 'to fear', ft c to be ashamed', ^ 'to nou-
rish 1 , 5 to sacrifice' ; and when w^ is affixed, the effect
is as if there were *q elision and the roots belonged to
HvMi class.
The effect of^is to cause reduplication by rule VI. i.'io. As
R frws^K or fiwnr, frtf*r«r*irc or flnrra, firwr^srnc or **rr, sjffnwwrc or
*%: 11 MRWW 1*11 1^*!**!'^^ ftrfS* TOT, f»^?Rf Jre*l<H! u l fPTOPfr
40. After a verb which ends with *n^ the
verb *' to do' is annexed, when fo? follows.
After the above verbs formed by taking the augment w^ the
perfect tense of fj is added to form their Perfect. This has already been
illustrated in the above examples. The word m includes also the verbs
^and wr. All these three may be used as auxiliaries. The verb i?^ when
used as an auxiliary, is not replaced by w^ (III. 4- S 2 ) before the fsr^ affixes
which are irdhadh&tuka affixes. Thus q rmr^cM r, fnwn^r, qrroPTra.
41. The form ftr^w is optionally employed
as an irregular form.
This irregular form is obtained by adding the affix arpj to the
root Rrj 'to know/ when followed by 5^ or the Imperative tense ; the tense-
affixes of *?lRf are then elided by Ink ; moreover there is no substitution olguna
Digitized by
Google
366 Chli. [Bk. HI. Ch. I. § 42-43.
as required by VII. 3. 86 ; and when we have thus obtained the form fa*T^,
we annex to it the $far N of the verb *j ; thus wc have f«r*nr***w or Rrf^j 'let
them know'. The third person plural is not only intended to be spoken of by
the employment of the form fttfvfcl in the aphorism ; on the con-
trary, the word f fir shows that all the numbers and persons of the Imperative
may be so employed ; as ftraryft^ Rqf^wn &c.
fnmW!:, Migqifaui^ftqi+HM^ , *fir, *^f*> ( m^JIWI f qJ 11
42. The forms wrronp*prar. Jrararanro: fa**iH* : rwr-
*ra?: imtfa«H finnrw^are irregularly formed in the Chhandas.
The first two of these and the fourth are the Aorists (q^) of the
causatives of the roots ot n to sit', n^ 'to be born', and t^ 'to sport':
to which the affix ur^ is added. The third is the Aorist of the root far 'to
collect', to which «n^ has been added after the reduplication and the change of
^ into m of the root. The auxiliary wf: is added to all these four. The
fifth is derived from the root %/to blow, to purify', by adding the causative
affix ftj*, annexing the affix w^ before the terminations of the Potential (f*H0
and then using after the form so obtained, the auxiliary fiff*ft(. The last is the
Aorist of f^ 'to know', to which w^ is added and the auxiliary %?ir^ is em-
ployed. These are the archaic forms ; their modern forms are as follow : —
^ftr: 11 titflr: J^ff *r**nit wfii $fr toi: 11
43. When^r v follows, the affix f**r is added
to the verbal root.
The f of ft*! is for the sake of articulation, the ^ is for the sake
of accent (VI* 1. 162.) showing that an 'affix which has an indicatory *i has
ud&tta on its final. Then remains only fsr, which after all, is to be replaced by
other affixes, as we shall show below. In fact fet is the common name for all
Aorist affixes.
*$: f*W II «tt II trefoil *S'i ft* «
^fti: II ^: ffUltttft Vlfil II
Digitized by
Google
Atmanepada.
sing.
dual plural
fcr
wff Sfff
Sff:,*IT:
*nrt W
CT, H
^rmt wf
Bk. III. Cil I. $ 44-46.] Substitution of ChLi. '367
44. Of f^i, fa^ is the substitute.
The % of Rr^ is for the sake of pronunciation, the ^r is for accent,
and the real affix is ^; as M^ntf^ 'he did'. When %* is added, the termina-
tions of the Aorist assume the following forms.
Parasmaipada.
sing. dual plural
1st pers. *f w W
2nd pers. ?Eft: w, * w, n
3rd pers. «fhj *if, iff ?$:
The substitution of Rr^[ is optional in the Aorist of the roots nf\ 'to
touch', «HT'to rub', *re 'to plough', ^ 'to become satisfied', and f^ 'to
light'. Thus the Aorist of wjhas three forms ; M*J?T*ffy wmffy or fttt<ppr.
Similarly ?ij has wmftq, HTOfH or i *W N ; ^t wunff^ mntfrw or «Tfmnr N ;
r[. mw*fhi N , *T*wfar N , or *?<rT*T N ; f%» wewft \, nfmffi^ or q$v\ i
W fflMMl<[Rf*s Wm II H^U M^lfa II 1TCT:, Tf-^HinRT,
«rf*Rf:> W^i } (^:, 5&) II
45. After a verb that ends in a *ra consonant,
and has an f^ vowel for its penultimate letter, and does
not take j% (VII. 2. 10), *5jr is the substitute of Pw.
The forms of the terminations of the Aorist with q?jf are as follow:
Atmanepada.
sing. dual plural
Parasmaipada.
sing, dual plural
1st pers. tf *w «r^
2nd pers. «: *m* *q
3rd pers, *^ snf fPf^
As, i|H and f^ in the last sfltra have their Aorist with *er as mm«
and •Wjiw; so $f 'to milk'^forms M^T^'he milked', f%a£ 'to lick' trfsTOHl;
Why do we say 'when ending in tf , s, g and f ' ? Observe %?Wt^,
irofofci; here Rhj is employed. Why do we say 'having for its penultimate f,
V, fj or w( ? Observe trorfftl* Why do we say 'not having an intermediate
%' ? Observe H^f^ and *t ^ft«. See VII. 2. 4 and VIII. 2. 28.
fiSTO 3TTf*pft n *$ II M^lftl II fi^:,3nf*pft, (*l$:, w) II
ijfa: 11 ft^f^n fa^r»3i3*H m N <rcw «* ** wSjjfV *nrfii 11
46. «wr is the substitute of for after the verb
fiw*, when it is employed in the s&nse of embracing.
6
Digitized by
Google
368 Substitution of Chli. [Bk. hi.- Ch. I. § 47-49-
This is a restrictive aphorism. As $nfit<*Wf N «hs*Hl 'he embraced
the girl'. But *PTTfi[$Frq"35Pntfrff^ 'the glue joined the wood'.
*r pr: II »3 II M^ l fa ii *r, $*:, (^:, TO: ) H
47. «wr is not the substitute of fa* after the
verb j*( k to see'.
This is an exception to the sfltra III. i. 45- enjoining *m. The root fj^
will form its Aorists by HI. i. 57. and will take w, and fen; as »rofrc N or
•T*rtfftr v 'hesaw\
wM^^i» N ,(^:, S%) II
fTf^fapJ II itiHWIJKlll'l II
48. After a root which ends in for (III. 1. 20,
21, 44, &c.) and after the verb* fa Ho serve', *. 'to run',
and «. 'to drop', ■** is the substitute of P^r, when w x
follows signifying an agent.
The r prevents gtina and vriddhi and ^ is to distinguish it from *?^.
When ^is added, there is reduplication (VI. 1. 11). The usual terminations
of the Imperfect are employed after the root, when ^y^ is used ; as n^tfom^
'he caused to make'; trftjfiratl 'he served or went'; U$gqi{. 'he ran'; *t*p^rti
'it flowed'. This form is not used in Passive ; as, *TOTTf*rarttP(.
The root *pt 'to love' should also be included in this rule, q?ir, when
it takes the affix fcn? (HI- I- 3°) will of course be included in this sdtra, by
virtue of its ending in Rnr ; the Vdrtika makes the additional statement that
even when the root m\ does not take the affix fcj^, the present aphorism
must apply to it. Thus we have *?*RPm N 'he loved'; when it takes fcr^ the
Aorist will be irttar»rq; (VII. 4. 93, 79, 94.)
fBTOT*T 3* *?$T: II \R II m t fa « fiWTWT, $Z-V*T: $
( *$ : > ^» 1 vftft, $fv) II
<jf*r. u ^Tr*,?sft{^irfirf^r:, ^iwryirc** «^W>?rt *wfo$t *ref?r it
49. After the Toots $ 'to 3uck', and fit* 'to
grow', ^ is optionally the substitute of far, when qr
follows signifying an agent.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 50-52.] . Substitution of Chu. 369
As, hto* n 'he sucked*. When it takes the alternative fifr^, then
rule II. 4. 78. comes into operation, and we have *wnt s and qrarcffo 'he
sucked'. So also of fit*, we have nRjfifRro N 'he grew'. It also takes the W^
(HI. 1. 58) and then its form is m^or •nprtft^
50. After the verb *% 'to protect*, ^ is op-
tionally the substitute of f**i in the Ohhandas.
This rule applies where the root ij^ does not take the affix W*
(II. 1. 28). Asjin^sfr f*remnft *m N qfl^ M^ Mq ^ 'Mitra Varuna protected these
our houses'. The other forms are arortapr, «?iftfq«3rn or wft<ITftWk In the secular
literature, the latter three forms are used, but not the first.
**Rtor. <tror ^^fr rrT e[**fa fwft t *t*Ri 11
51. After the causatives of the verbs ** c to de-
crease', *pi ( to sound 9 y V* 'to send 7 , and n$ 'to go or to beg',
"**„ is not the substitute of fa* in the Ohhandas.
Thus we have s^nft: in the Vedas ; %ftRpTH in the classical literature ;
so also ito^, thrift: and aifcft^; their classical forms being itf****^, ^f^Rn,
and Mlf^. See Rig Veda I. 53, 3, I. 162. 15. and Panini VII 2 t 5.
52. After the verbs *** 'to throw*, «r*'to speak',
and **r 'to speak 1 , w* is the substitute of fa*, when qr %
follows signifying the agent.
T^ may be either the root, or the substitute of f^ (II. 4. 53)
and so also nm may be the root, or the substitute of ^ (II. 4. 54). The
root •!« belonging to the farff or the Fourth conjugation, falls under the
subdivision j^rft, and therefore it would have taken w; in the Parasmaipada
Digitized by
Google
3/Q SUBSTITUT.ON OF CHLI. [BK. m * Cn - *• 5 53*55
by rule III. I. 5$. The repetition is to indicate that it takes w N in the
Atamanepada also ; as <n$FWW (VII. 4. 17), BTfr*^ and *trtqw N . In the Passive,
we have «nrf fa^ron*.
wfar: 11 farc 5rrtf , fire ^tto, f ^*TaNr uptew <rc**, ^^rrrttft wRf II
53. After the verbs ft* { to paint 1 , fa* c to sprin-
kle* and f 'to call', w N is the substitute of f** when
qr N follows signifying the agent.
Thus »vf?rra N 'he painted or wrote* ; *?firor N 'he sprinkled' ; and HTpf N
•he called or challenged'.
54. After the verbs f^, fir* and f. w is op-
tionally the substitute of f**r, when the affixes ^of the
Atmanepada follow*
Thus *?firPl or nfat*t 'he painted' ; irftraff or trftrar 'he sprinkled' ;
Wffr or H£T«* 'he challenged'.
5Wlf%-^-fW:, Mi^M^M, ( *$:, 3HF ) II
jfa: nyirfa* vpifran «ftqr*nv irg*r: <rror *$: vn^q|«| qrft ircftflr
55. w N is the substitute of far. after the verbs
jq^'to nourish', and the rest, «jn N 'to shine', and the rest,
and the verbs haviilg an indicatory sj» when the affixes
of the Parasmaipada follow.
The verbs classed as yrffo are a sub-division of the 4th conjugational
verbs ; and Wirf? verbs belong to the 1st conjugation. As j^, Hyr^ 'he nou-
rished'; *pr N , W£*« N *h e shone' ; ir^j, M*prc N 'he went'. But not so in the Atma-
nepada ; as f^pftffc, tftftftre.
q(r l niW^**"W n ^ ii vqfa 11 ^f^-ifTfar-srf^w:,
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 56-58.] Substitution of Chli. , 371
56. After the verbs * 'to go\ jcto <to order',
and *c 'to go', w s is the substitute of fa* in the Parasmai-
pada as woll as in the Atmanepada.
Thus bto^ 'h2 went'; «?fior«ro N 'he ordered'; *rrc* s 'he went'. This sAtra
has been separately enunciated in order to make the rule applicable to Atma-
nepada ; as *rar?« (I. 3. 29); The ■* in the text is for the sake of drawing the
anuvritti of the phrase 'in the Parasmaipada* of the last sfttra, into the pre-
sent and its anuvriti will extend to future sfttras also.
57. w N is optionally the substitute of f**c after
that root which has an indicatory ^, when the Parasmai-
pada terminations are employed.
Thus from Pff^CPff ) 'to divide', we derive Mfa^or M$?sftw . But we
have HftnT in the Atmanepada. So from fs[f^ — MP*5^ or aregtafftr.
^ W3t|#M^^^M Xr^R ^y^Mfi34M gq || ^C || K^rfk II ^J-
jfti: II * «a*3 H^w^ ^^ ft* **** W : *"** *****
58. And, optionally "w, is the substitute of Pw
after the verbs *| 'to grow old', **** 'to stiffen' w^and «**
'to go', ^ and *q^ 'to steal, *q*^ 'to go' and ft* 'to grow',
when the terminations of the Parasmaipada are em-
ployed.
Thus «nrcw N or inn^ 'he grew old' ; «wai*nr or «r«pftfr.' he stiffen-
ed' ;Hypi,or»wHtn'hewent'; 3**b^« or »**#n(t« s , he went'; n^«^ orwft-
Hi s 'he stole'; niq^RC, or «*rsiNn{ 'he stole'; M*5*H!_ Or •mj-^w 'he went' .
tnC*\, M**tf^or8T%ficWi, 'he grew'. The roots t^ and r^both give
rise to the same three forms, viz. »t»s|^«J, *T^rs^w and M*5Tvm,. The use of
one root would, therefore, have served the purpose. The employment of both
indicates separatcness of their meanings. Others say that the us6 of both
roots indicates that in the case of *sj% the nasal is never elided. Thus
the Aorist of *s^ will be M*sjnw and •T'^ft^.
^% ( if:, 3T¥) II
Digitized by
Google
372 Substitution of Chli. [Bk. III. Ch. I. 5 59- 62 -
59. After the verbs * 'to do', ij 'to die', f 'to
tear', and *f 'to rise', w^ is the substitute of F 8 ** when
used in the Chhandas.
Thus M^Tt* 'he did'; mnr N 'he died'; H*^ 'he tore'; »ff*ftl 'he rose'.
See Rig Veda X. 85. 17, X. 44. 6. The classical Aorist of these verbs are
wfrpihr N , Hij*!, Hfrtf *r N and Bronr.
flror 3 vr$i 11 $0 11 vnpfa 11 f*ro^, 3, *np, ( § : ) it
w%. ti q* irn^ •rorrsrSr: qrw ^Pwnf xTr wfir **r«* ira: 11
60. fa^is the substitute of P^r after the verb
^1 'to go', when the affix * follows.
The affix fi here means the third person singular tense-affix of the
Atmanepada ; as mrft 'he went' ; but not s<5 in the dual and plural ; as Brmrar*^
'they two went'; *n**Ri N 'they went'; •ivf'H+foq; +*•=**+ <!HL + r=wrff
(the affix ir being elided by rule VI. 4. 104).
<^H^n^^MRdT(^U||fi|uTtvr^cnWT^ II ^ II M^lPl II
^fw M $fa stt ^\f <^fi: wfir cstrfa ?fi«r: <rcw ^R^<rtr«T it^rf • ! *?rcHrt Ptot-
WJr H*fa ii
CI. fa<sr N is optionally the substitute of Pw, when
«, the third person singular of the Atmanepada follows,
after the verbs <H 'to shine', *pi 'to be produced', w^ 'to
teach or know', %£ 'to be full', m*, 'to extend or protect"
and **Rr 'to smell'.
Thus artffir or Mfrfqrr 'he shone' ; intftr or ftnrPrc 'he was produced' ;
HftRr or Hf^C 'he knew'; ar^fc or H«jf*T 'he was full'; arafr or Hur^rr 'he ex-
tended'; trorfo or »?cirrfce 'he grew'.
«ro *ri*rf ft 11 ^ 11 *^rftr 11 snc:, W$-*tfR (*\ ?t
fir* ) II
62. ftr* is optionally the substitute of flw when
«> the third person singular of the Atmanepada follows,
after a root which ends with a vowel> and when the ob-
ject itself is spoken of as the agent.
A reflective verb is one in which the object is spoken of as the
agent. In reflective verbs therefore, fas^ is employed after roots ending in
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IIL Ch. I. § 63-65.] Prohibition of Chli. .373
vowels ; as Wffrf? *f*: trota 'the mat became made of itself. This is an
optional rule (unrfrrrar). Therefore we have also MfRf *W W*$T ; similarly
H*nfiror ireiff? *W- *TO$? 'the embankment broke of itself.
But in verbs other than those that end in vowels, 1. e. in those which
end with a consonant, the ftt^ is obligatory in the reflective voice, and not
optional ; as atfft vrfH,^f 'the wood split of itself. So also in verbs
other than reflexives ; as aranf? mit f *tf*t.
JUJT II {ft II *Tjfr II $f :, *, (*$:, fa*, <H«qq«MW ,
«*-*wft) It
^fti : 11 5f sr^cdi «towtct *dPkmji$?fr H*fif imwwwii^ 11
63. fa^ is optionally the substitute of f*** after
the verb v 'to milk', when it is used rcflexively, and
when * follows.
Thus Htrft or My* ift: *r*fa 'the cow milked of itself. In verbs
other than reflexive, the fai!£ * s compulsary, e. g. Mfrff nt'tflRF^Ff 'the cow
was milked by the cowherd*.
*Hra:tl ^HtT^Tf^ll %W., (*$:,f*TO, «$-*nfrf*)ll
64. Ptoj is not the substitute off***, after the
verb *h .'to obstruct', when used in the reflexive sense
in tho third person singular of the Atmanepada.
Thus t)?TTO3r *ft srafcr 'the cow was obstructed of itself. In verbs
other than reflexive, Praxis employed, e. g. *ro*rctfr tiVtf<n*nKT.
«MUyufr * 11 fft 11 xr^Tfa « * *, wyitf, *> K % : >
65. finn is not the substitute of faa after the
verb n^ 'to suffer', when used reflexively, and when the
sense is that of experiencing remorse.
This prohibition applies even to the passive and impersbnal voices
of the verb ^; as M?nr flTOllTO: 'the ascetic performed austerity' j ar?ror m$n
^4mr 'he repented from evil deeds'.
fin^T***^ II <| U ^^t II fa*, W-**$T:, ( f :,
ft*. * ) «
Digitized by
Google
374 Yak, Sap and Syan. [Bk. HI. Ch. I. § 66-69.
jfai: 11 vrr^r: **f* ^rvurrfifr «wfir *i9 *tffar mpi f iw 11
66. P*q is the substitute of fa* when * of the
third person singular Atmanepada follows, denoting the
action (ym) or the object *?*4.
A verb is said to denote an action when it is used impersonally ;
and it is said to denote an object when used in the Passive sense. As wrf*
«nrar 'it was lain by you I e. you lay'; wmfr «F*Y Wf^T '^the mat was made
by Devadatta*. The repetition of fai$r here is for the sake of distinctness.
^fii: 11 *n**ri*rfaPr frrf^r^* <ntfr tnftr&^TOrfr wfir 11
67. The affix ** comes after a root, when a
*r#*ro*f (III. 4. 113) follows, denoting the action or the
object.
In forming Impersonal and Passive verbs, this affix is employed in the
conjugational tenses. Thus in Impersonal verbs i?fto3 tout 'you sit', jpc*#
H*m 'y° u lie '- So in passive verbs ; as fif&fi *??: and q^# qp?.\ The q* of ^
is servile, and prevents guna and vriddhi. This affix is also used in reflective
voice (3R*fa^£ft); as pCT* q*?: W*tf* 'the mat becomes made of itself*
jf%: 11 *M^iftjqr OTt^ffjeS qrofttfrifo ^ Jmrtr H*f?lr 11
68. The affix jct^ comes after a root, when a
wfr n y i» follows, signifying the agent.
In active voice, ^f\ is employed in the conjugational tenses. This affix,
which is technically called a fipFTCT comes after roots of the ^ class and after
compound roots formed by ^&c. (III. 1. 32). The indicatory ir makes it a
Ml JMH*K affix by III. 4, 113, the \ indicates that the vowel has anuddtta ac-
cent (III. 1. 4). As ^+^+fH : ^+^+^=^+^+f*=^ft- (VII. 3. 84). So
also Tqfil.
^■njS, *^R ) n
69. The affix x*\ comes after a root of the Di-
vadi class, when a sftrvadhatuka affix denoting the agent
follows.
This debars q\. The servile «r of ppj is for the sake of accent (VI. 1.
197)1 showing that the uddtta accent falls on the radical verb and not on the
affix ;and the indicatory 5 makes the affix sArvad'iAtuka ; asft^+x^T N +
Digitized by
Google
Bk.. III. Ch. I. § ;o-73] Svan and Snu. 375
ft<t- f^+^+fa (VII. 2. 77) » {turfa ; so also tft*(«. The Div&di verbs
belong to the Fourth conjugation.
st \a \a >« >» * #
jf*i: 11 *w *5mcr H5 n»5 s?3 *Rr w ft 5f«r s*?*$r *r t*h mv&i n*fo 11
70. The affix *ro N * is optionally employed in
the active voice after the following verbs ; *rcj <to shine',
rni[ <to shine', mr 'to whirl', ** 'to walk', ff* N 'to be sad', to
'to fear', ^ 'to cnt', and 5T\ 'to desire'.
Thus WO* or inptf 'he shines'; *anrH or ^rn^* 'he shines'; wfii or
*r**f« 'he whirls'; ifrRi or iRpsrRr 'he walks'; wmfir or f?r**ft 'he is sad'. So
also TOTft or toRi ; ^nrflt or wjfir ; erofir or otRi.
'ratij^re^w 11 a^ 11 141ft 11 *ro, q i *Mq*i1« , ( tw,
w, toNt^, irif* ) 11
jRimi ^wftj^TOnfar jpnj Jrarir H*flf 11
71. The affix r*% is optionally employed after
the verb **r 'to strive', when it is employed, without a
preposition, and when a sarvadMtuka affix denoting
an agent, follows.
Thus trr?«rRf or srciRt 'he strives'. But no option is allowed in Mrorofn*
snrc*fr. The root ^ belongs to the Div&di class.
wtrm 11 3^ 11 tn^ 11 *-to:, % (vn, *t) 11
72. The affix x** is optionally employed after
the root to 'to strive', when it is preceded by the pre-
position «r*, and when a s&rvadh&tuka affix denoting an
agent, follows.
Thus otctR* or tfroft 'he strives'.
^EITf^: IJ: II 3^ II ^Tf^l II 3-^Tf^T:, *g:, (*^IgS,
73. The affix *5 comes after the roots of Sv&di
class when a s&rvadh&tuka affix denoting an agent
follows.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
376 Snu, Sa and Snam. [Bk. HI. Cn. I. 8 747 s
This debars jj^. As,*+**[+fit<j » * +5+61=^* 'he presses out'.
These are roots of the Fifth class
m ^ * II 38 II mifa II **:, *[, *> (*£: ) H
*fa: 11 *$*> J%**wtt H*fir nwT«iili*T«i **: sj ff^rsntflr *r*far 11
74. And jt is the substitute of m, and there is
the affix v% after it, when a s&rvadh&tuka affix denoting
an agent, follows.
Thus l *+JpJ+fi!V= 3 1J+5+fil =*Tuftf?i *he hears* ;*nsrci: 'they two hear'.
qnft4«qcwm^ ii 3^ iitn^rii snsr:, ^n^wwrnr, (v±:) 11
75. The affix ^ is optionally employed after
the root w 'to pervade', when a s&rvadh&tuka affix deno-
ting an agent, follows.
Thus wcftftl or wrfif 'he pervades or obtains'.
TWIFdif cPB: II 3$ II U^lfa II ^-*GT%-*nBT:, (>*l«t|cH¥ft,
Igi) H
76. The affix *3 is optionally employed after
the root'wfr 'to bore or hew' when a s&rvadh&tuka affix
denoting an agent, follows.
Thus *rorfir or wisJtfir *tft* 'he hews the wood'. But ewfa *rf«T: 'he
cuts with speech*.
5^Tf^*r: Hi II 33 II M^tft II 5^-«nf^«T:, *p II
77. The affix jr is employed after the roots of
the Tud&di class, in denoting the agent when a s&rvadh&-
tuka affix follows.
This debars^. The indicatory j(j makes this affix a s&rvadh&tuka
affix. As jf +tf+fil = W+«T+fn = *l*fit (I. 2. 4) ; he pains or torments'.
wrf^tTTOIISC II M^lfw II TO-«nf^*R, J»WI!
78. The affix 5pr^ comes after the roots of the
Rudh&di class, in denoting an agent when a s&rvadhft-
tuka affix follows.
Digitized by
Google
fix. III. CH. L S 79t8i] >U, A and Sna. r $fy
• — - - - ■ •
This debars jj<j The indicatory ^ of the affix ^^ shows that the
affix «r is to be placed after the last vowel of the root ; see Sfltra L I. 47. As
^L+^f^+fif =^+T+Rf » S+T+>l+fil =» Sitffa 'he obstructs*. So also f^fa
'he splits'. The indicatory ^j is for the sake of sfttra VI. 4. 23.
*Mir^s>«^m ^ : 11 *5 11 tr^rf% n ?R-a*Tf^-373nrar:, & 11
79. The affix * comes after the roots of the
Taiuidi class and after the verb 3? 'to make' when a s&rva-
dh&tuka aifix follows, signifying the agent.
This debars *nj. As *f^+3+El=**pflrr*l 'he expands'; f?+*+fit=*
^rctRf 'he makes'. Though the root ff is included in the list oftheTan&di
verbs, for which see Dh&tup&tha, yet its separate enunciation in the present
sfttra is for the sake of making a restrictive rule with regard to this verb;
that is to say, the root ^ is a TanAdi root only for the purposes of taking
the affix 9 ; all the other operations of Tan&di verbs are not to be performed
upon it. Thus the rule II. 4. 79. does not apply to sij. Thus HfTCT and iffttqr: ;
the %^ elision being compulsory and not optional.
(*:) n
*fa: 11 Ufa fafir fltf* sftoj'ntflr: rfk ffcraTO**: Tf 4qq*H W)rc*inn?t
80, The affix * conies after the roots fafar ( to
please', and ftf»* <to hurt', when a sarv&dh&tuka affix
denoting the agent follows ; and in these verbs h is the
substitute of the final *
The root fa** or fafar belongs to the Bhuftdi class. Thus fawr +
*+Rr - fa*+**+ *+fit=»ftPL+*+fil (VI. 4. 48> - frpftfa 'he pleases*.
It might be asked, why there is no guna of the \ of fvr^ by rule VII. 3. 86
which requires the base to be gunated before a s&rvadh&tuka or an &rdha-
dh&tuka affix. The answer is to be found in sfttra I. 1. 57 ; the substitute of ar
which is a blank, is like the former occupant (sth&nivat) } and thus prevents
guna,
IT^Tf^: *5TT II *\ \\ xT^lf^ II ^rSnf^T:, ^T II
81. The affix vn comes after the roots of the
Kry&di class when a s&rvadh&tuka alfix follows denoting
the agent.
~o v
Digitized by
Google
378 Snu, SNA AND Sayach. [Bk. III. Ch. I- 82-8^
This debars jj\ As nfr + x«r? + ft 1 * 88 * nfttorRf 'he buys'. So also sttorfif
c he pleases\
82 And there is the affix rrr after w, w,^[
or sapwf c to hinder', 'to be dull or insensible', 'to support',
and sar 'to go by leaps', as well as the affix vt, when a
s&rvadh&tuka affix follows, in denoting the agent.
As ct*ttRi or ^i»ftfif, *a*irfir or tfjtsftfir, **&*nfft or **wfrfir, wjHifa
or ^5ftRf, ^rrRr or €5ptf?T . The first four of theseroots are not found in the
Dh&tup&tha anjl are to be found in the sfttras, and hence called Safttra roots.
^f: *?T:*JTO$T II q II ^Tf^ II f*T:, *?!:, HT^-fT II
83. The affix m*\ is the substitute of rn after
a root ending with a consonant, when f* follows.
The affix f$ is the 2nd person singular of wlr? or the Imperative mood.
Thus q^rar 'do thou nourish', *r*nu do thou take', from roots y^ and iff which
end with consonants. But we have itfnflff 'do thou buy'; here there is no substi-
tution of JCTPf^, because the root ends with a vowel. The repetition of j*n in
the s&tra shows that jjnr^is a mere substitute and not an independent affix.
**?fk sn*nrfa ii *B n x^Tfif ii *^f% , nm\, srftr,
( i*r:> *?r:, *nn\ 9 !t ) II
^Pt: ii 5?rfr fa** w xrrainWhr *nrfic tfrnrft h
84. In the Ohhandas, qn*re is also the substi-
tute of m after roots 'ending in consonants, when ff
follows.
ThusTjHRT PtIT H%, (Rig Veda VIII. 17. 5.) The affix jjPT^ is
also employed ; as ^^PT <T*£$ 'kill the beasts'.
mztft w£«* n «( 11 W^ 11 wemr:, **«nj/( v^fe,
^TT^T: ) II
jSi: 11 tort* fireror: jsmft Wf*rct*t ep*% frri? 15* wmrit wRr 11
85. In the Ohhandas there is diversely an,
interchange of the various vikaranas *rr and the rest
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cn. I. § 86.) An. 379
which have been previously ordaiued under special cir-
cumstances.
The word «*mra means transgression *of the fixed rule, or inter-
change, taking of two vikaranas at a time, and so on. Thus $ffii =3 f*? + JJ%+
fir) instead of firrf% from the rootfaqr c to split', belonging to theRudh&di class;
e.g. V*H& w°^r%HfRf (Rig. VIII. 40. 11.) 'He(Indra) break the eggs (children)
of Shushma ; so also,msr »T^ <rf?r: (Rig. X. 86. 1 1) ; here there is *T*tf=< , I+*Pl+
3) instead of ffir*^ ; the root ij belonging to the Tud&di class. So also there
are two vikaranas at one and the same time, in the following. f*x\ **$ h
^*?f 'May Indra lead by this abode* ; here there is #*<| 3rd. per. sing, of the
Imperative 5ft? of the root ?r7 'to lead* ; there are two vikaranas Rpj and ^
instead of to* K^+^+'J * ^* ISJ 3*" ***** Y^ ( Ri S* VIL 48. 1). The word
*IW (sr+^+fe^+^+HT) is the 1st per. sing, of the Optative (fer^) of
the rooter, the classical form being *f* or trtafor 'may we cross'.
In the Vedic literature we have many apparent irregularities with re-
gard to the rules of declension of nouns, conjugation of verbs, application of
Parasmaipada or Atmanepada affixes ; rules of gender, person or tense, rules
of interchange of consonants, or of vowels, rules of accent, rules relating to
$n N and tffetf affixes and rules relating to the affixes included in the pratyA-
h&ra *^(IH. 1. 22 to III. 1. 86).
mflfo*^ 11 tikm^m : ii
86. The affix w* is employed in the Chhandas
when the affixes of the Benedictive (wtftftfoj) follow.
This debars $j^. The affixes of the Benedictive are &rdhadhA-
tuka by III. 4. 116; but in the Vcdas they are s&rvadh&tuka as well; see Rule
111. 4. 117. The scope of the present rule is confined to the Benedictive of the
verbs «n, *rr, n^, **, *\> ^ and ** ; as *<r*5*^ ; *wrgqr*N* ;.t5* wmir *Jff^, w
st^rnr* ; fat**** ** far wc**i ; **% ^fir«*tf*r *top**h ; w*f 5ftapn*t*r*.
The affix a**v * s employed in the Chhandas after the verb £T[ in the
Benedictive. Had there been euj, it would have caused gun* by rule VII. 4.
16, ; to prevent this, m^ is ordained ; as finite ffaf HF^N 'May I see the father
and the mother*.
9
Digitized by
Google
38q Reflexive Affix. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 87, 88.
87. Tho w denoting the agent, when the action
affecting the agent is similar to the action which affects
the object, is treated as if it were a *r denoting the ob-
ject.
This rule applies to reflexive verbs. "This direction implies the
substitution for the operations incident to a tense-affix or 5f, denoting an
agent, of all the operations, which fall to be performed when the tense-affix or
9T denotes the object. Hence there shall be the affixing of ?ra[ (III. 1. 6f) the
employment of Atmanepada terminations (I. 3. 13), the substitution of $WS^
for fas* (HI. 1. 66\ and the treatment of the word as directed in sfltra VI. 4.
62." (Dr. Ballantyne). Thus fan* wvi sntf * 'the wood splits of itseir ; itfff
^TOf WT*T 'the wood splits of itself.
When an action is participated by or affects the agent in the same
way as is done by the object, the agent is treated like an object.
When in an object, though it stands as an agent, the action is perceiv-
ed to take place as in an object, then that agent becomes like an object ; and all
grammatical rules applicable to the object apply to such an agent
The word q*l N 'like 1 in the s&tra signifies that the rules which apply tQ
an agent also come into operation ; thus faitf 3^n3«r.
The word qtfQjr 'with the object* in the sfltra indicates that the tulya*
kriya or similarity of action must be with the object, and not with the instru-
ment or the location. Thus ^i mRifi^fif 'the sword cuts well' ; here 'sword 1
is not agent but instrument. So also *r* tTOft TOft 'the pot cooks well';
here tqi*ft is a location.
This 'karma-vad-bh&va, the passive-like-construction takes place only in
cases of some verbs.
( **Md, qnM*) 11
88. The agent of the verb ^ 'to heat/ be-
comes similar to the object, only when the object is the
word *r^ itself.
Thus wztft HWlimi : 'the devotee performs austere devotion* ; but not
so in vroftr iitct **1i&fr l < : 'the goldsmith heats the gold'.
TO-fawr, ( *^*mSR, ipfarci ) 11
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. L § 89-91.] Prohibition of Yak and Chin. 381
Wff^f^ II H*(PwfV: iRl^J ffyNl^Hf^^l*H^41l«^4*IUJigM«HMIlH^ II
89. The affix ^ (III. 1. 67) and r^ (IH. 1. 62)
are not employed in the reflexive voice of the verbs J^
'to milk', ^ 'to fall in drops' and t^ c to bow'.
The affixes *ra^ and f^TOT are used in forming the reflexive verbs,
when the action affecting the agent is similar to the action which affects the
object. With regard to the root j^, the affix **r is only prohibited by the
present sfltra ; the fai^ being optionally employed by rule III. 1. 6$, as *n?,
*T}*t? or Mftft ift: crofrr 'the cow flows or flowed of itself irejfr or stptffcr
«ft: *Rfcr 'the cow flows or flowed of itself ; hhH or a^N* w. *w*rt* 'the stick
bends or bent of itself.
This prohibition of the employment of the affixes *q^ and faro is ex-
tended to the verbs that take the affix far (such as causatives &c), to the verbs
%f*H 'to loosen*, q?ir ( to compose' and f^ 'to speak', and to the Atmanepadt .
Intransitive verbs. As *M<q3 'it is caused to be made of itself ; wfta^ 'it
was caused to be made of itself ; MvftS 'it loosens of itself ; *TMtiTC 'it loosened
of itself ; inrftf ; •TOfiTT 'it composes or composed of itself ; ir# and itfta* 'it
speaks and spoke of itself ; «ff{3 and unrfr? TOTTO: wtf *.
wfagfc HHi^U^M ^ * II c» II xr^Tf% II jfa-Tgft:,
nniTf, ww, m\^m^, % ( wta&R ) h
jfa: 11 *pc fro**, rw ntf, w*taf*ft: *ri*rifi: *rw*wWrt «rt*r ***r %
ifrtt i*fir TO^ri * 11
90. The affix **«* comes after the roots %\ 'to
puir ; and rsr 'to colour', in the reflexive voice, according
to the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians, and these
verbs take the affixes of. the Parasmaipada.
This debars the affix ^ and the Atmanepada terminations. . As
^**ft «IT* : «*** 'the foot draws up of itself ; rs^Rr *?f tro3? 'the cloth
colours of itself.
The phrase 'in the opinion of the Eastern' shows that it is at* optional
rule ; so that we have also the forms *£«*$ and {5*ft.
VJthi II <^ II ^r^Tf% 11 iJltft: H
91. As far as the end of the Third Book
Digitized by
Google
382 Verbal Affixes. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 92,-94.
reckoning from the present aphorism, the affixes treated
of are to he understood as coming after some verbal root.
This is an Adhik&ra SOtra. All these verbal affixes are broadly divid-
ed into two parts pr and qjur^ affixes, which will be described later on. .
***> ( ,' ^nsV: ) 11
92. Herein this Third Book of Grammar re-
ferring to verbal roots, the word implied in a term exhi-
bited in the locative case, is called 'upapada' or depen-
dant word.
Thus in stitra III. 2. ^HiPl* the word 5R*$fcj is exhibited in the 7th
case ; therefore the word implied by the word *r*$fi!j, namely, the word
having the accusative case, will be called 3T?*. Thus «g»P^+«5+wqr=3[*H*7Tr:
'a potter* ; here the word 3T»T^ is an upapada.
gr^f?reni q u vrqyfa 11 w%, sr-fro, ( ^mft: ) 11
* 4 f%: II aifw^* Pratt? fingtftf «: sf^m: ffWETfrsft wfif II
93. In this portion of the S&tras in which
there is a reference to verbal roots, any affix except finr
(tense-affixes), is called frw.
Thus the affixes ?rrar^ &c. are f?q. All affixes up to the end of this
Book belong to this class. These are affixes by which substantives are form-
ed from verbal roots ; and they have, therefore, most aptly been termed
primary affixes. Words formed by these affixes will be Pr&tipadikas or
crude forms or nominal bases ( I. 2. 46). Thus $; + *fwi = <fr3s*r. Why do
we say 'except ftr^ affixes'? • Observe ^ttmo^ 'may he collect', *«rarni 'may he
praise' which form verbs and -not nouns.
(vrr^: ) 11
firf**w*4 qilfiiw 11
94. In this portion of the Sutras, in which
there is a reference to verbal roots, an affix which is
Calculated to debar a general one, not being of the same"
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I §94] Verbal Affixes. 383
form, optionally debars it; but not so in the case of femi-
nine affixes (III. 3. 94 &c.)
Thus the affixes ^^ and er^ (HI. I. 133) are general affixes
applicable to all roots in forming nouns of agency ; and the sAtra III. i. 133
which ordains these affixes, is an utsarga or a general rule ; while the sAtra
III. 1. 135 ordaining the affix m after verbs having a penultimate f^ vowel,
and the roots irr, sft and qr is an apavada or a special aphorism. In the
latter case, therefore, optionally we may have the affixes «??( and ^ also.
Thus fa\ is a root that has a penultimate f belonging to the pratyahara f^ N .
and therefore, in forming the noun of agency from it, the affix q? will have to
be applied by rule 135 of this chapter already mentioned ; thus ftftr{-|-q? «
fafiff^+M »ftftn: ; but this special rule however does not debar the operation
of the general rule, and we have optionally ftffH+°;^=fttf<PK: ; and faprT^
+* = finfar nom. sing, fttfdir.
Why do we say 'not being of the same form* ? Because if two affixes
have the same form, the present rule will not apply ; and in the case of such
affixes, the special affix will debar the general affix. Thus the affixes wn N
and *K are, when stripped of their indicatory letters, affixes having the same
form 1. i. *r ; and therefore the sAtra III. 2. I. ordaining anx^ as a general rule,
will be always debarred by sAtra III. 2. 3 ordaining qr, as the latter is a special
sAtra applicable only to those roots which end in long nr, or which are simple
roots not compounded with any preposition. Thus tfT+JT+3T = iTtj: 'giver of
cows'. So also *H<d fr 'blanket-giver'. In these cases we cannot have the affix
mi.
It folbws from this sAtra as a necessary corollary, that the addition
of indicatory letters does not make two or more affixes dissimilar in form
(•TO**) when their essential effective element is the same. Thus the affixes w,
1^» ^1 *5J & c - are similar.
Why do we say 'but not so in the case of feminine affixes' ? Be-
cause in the case of feminine affixes, a special affix will debar a general affix,
though they may be dissimilar in form. Thus sAtra HI. 3. 94 ordaining ftr*£
in forming feminine nouns from roots is a general or utsarga rule, while sAtra
HI. 3. 102 ordaining *r after roots that have already taken some affix is a special
or apav&da rule, and though *? and fit are dissimilar in form, they being
feminine affixes, the former will always debar the latter. Thus the compound
desiderative roots ftrfrf and fa$A will form feminine nouns in w and not by
R*H. Thus Fwfhft and Rnft** and not A**** Rt &c
f?t*T: OTSF53W II «* II ^Tf^l II 3k*IT:, HT*, ^T: II
10
Digitized by
Google
3$4 Kritya Affixes. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 95, 96.
■ .
95. From this aphorism, as far as the ap-
horism «35nr4V (III. 1. 133), all the affixes treated, will get
the name of Kritya.
This defines the class of affixes known as kritya % a subdivision oikrit
affixes. These are certain affixes like n^, ftrfta &c, which may be treated as
declinable verbal terminations. (III. 4. 70). The following 38 sfltras treat of
these affixes. These verbal adjectives correspond in meaning to the Latin par-
ticiples in udus conveyng the idea that the action expressed by the verbs
ought to be done or will be done. The word formed by them may be called
Passive Potential Participles or Future Passive Participles. The illustra-
tions will be given hereafter under each affix as taught. The word kritya
occurs in stitras II. 1. 33, II. 3. 71 &c.
*i6mi«uift«u: 11 <$ 11 tnjTft it ttara-ifw-snftat:,
*ftc: 11 *n<j\w>n*twii?fta^ fW *?nr*r wfar u
*ifii*Ff 11 TO^araqr ^rsffi: ftro 11
^rM^'l II SlIfirfHi tlHiWIWH, II
.96. The affixes *wrt., *«* and wfta^ come after
verbal roots.
The phrase 'after verbal roots' is understood in this aphorism by anu-
vritti from sfltra 91. The final letters f^ of «pq*^ and i; of trffa^ are for the sake
of indicating accent, being merely diacritical letters. The letter f^ indicating
svarita accent (VI. 1, 185) and the letter c indicating penultimate ud&tta ac-
cent (VI. 1. 217) ; these being exceptions to the general rule of accent given in
sfttra 3 ante of this chapter.
Thus** +«**q;= qnfoni, and c^+^s* =^wni 'must bedone r ; m+ H4t^
» MOlN^ 'must be done'. In these cases the sense being that of the action
itself, there is neuter gender singular number.
Vart: — The affix ftc«rq[ when coming after the verb q^ 'to dwell' in
marking the agent, is treated as if it had an indicatory or. The force of nj is
to cause vriddhi. Thus ro N +nwrq[ =**TWI: 'a dweller*. Here the word is in
the masculine gender, as the force of the affix is that of the agent, and not as
it generally has that of an act or object (III. 4. 70). • • ,
Varfr—TYis affix afrfep TT should be enumerafed.in addition to those al-
ready enumerated in this aphorism. Thus <rtfOTT irer: 'kidney beans fit to be
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. CH. I. $ 97, 98.] ■« Yat. ' 38$
cooked' ; fSpfsfffft qrorft 'the woods are apt to M split i. *:fta|jile\. This affix
is to be employed when it is intended to express an object alorte (i. e. in the
passive and reflexive sense) and cannot be employed like. those enumerated
above, to denote also the action. ^ -, . ^ •
*&\ v^w & 11 ^Tfan «rw: f *m, ( vrrst: ) )l
*rfiS*rn 11 nf%uftr^ft«rf*^ft^r5^ | wc^ ffr *r *w ^ 11
97. The affix ^ comes after a root that ends
iu a vowel.
The letter n of this affix is indicatory showing that the udAtta accent
(alls on the first vowel (VI. 1. 213) ; thus iu+*q=* if*, noun sing, «facn 'what
is to be sung' ; so also fan 'what ls to ^ e drunk 1 ; Hq\ 'what is to be conquer-
ed'. The Mr of nr and qr is changed into 15 by VI. 4. 65. Why do we say
'that ends in a vowel* ? By sfttra 124 of this chapter, a root ending in a con-
sonant takes *3*l affix instead of ^ ; reading these two aphorisms together,
the conclusion to be drawn is that the affix ^j comes after roots which prima-
rily end in a vowel, though in the course of development they may end in a
consonant by the application of other rules. Thus from ft 'to cut', we have the
desiderative root ffcr, which ends in a vowel *r. This a? is elided before Ardha-
dh&tuka affixes and thus the root becomes f^H , which ends in a consonant ;
nevertheless wc shall have the affix ^ and not •**. Thus ftw^'what is
wished to be cut* ; fire* 1 ? 'what is wished to be placed'. Similarly q before ftr-
dhadh&tuka affixes becomes *ft, the aft is changed into H^ before * (VI. i. 79)
and the form then is &\. The root m\ however takes ^ and not **rw N ;
as 5f«lt, *f**H, &c
Vart :—The verbs fi^ 'to fly', jy*j 'to leap', <*q 'to ask', ^ 'to attempt'
and n^ 'to be born', should be enumerated in addition ; that is to say, these
verbs, though ending in a consonant, take -q\ and not «*« ; as *m*[, T5Xq\>
*f**^> fW^i and sf^PJ.
Vart :— And of the verb 1% 'to kill' ** is the substitute when it option-
ally takes the affix ^. Thus we have *up^ or *rt** The latter form is
evolved by sfltras VIL 3. 32 and 54. The affix ^ comes only after the w
substitute ; after **j the affix **^ comes which changes the f into *, and * into
fT and causes vriddhi.
mY<£M*U«JI <S || M^lPl II lit:, 3Cf-*iTOT?T, (*IT*ft: *m,)ll
^Ri: 11 wi?*di4mfk*iCt , i>n* T^WRfir *r*Ri 11
98. The affix ^ comes after a root, which ends
in a labial letter preceded by a short m.
Digitized by
Google
3W Yat. Bk. III. Ch. I. § 99, ioo.
This debars *icfl ; thus tr^+ ^ ■» tN 'to be . sworn' ; 5Pt+* , l m *>*%
'to be acquired'.
Why do we say 'which ends in a labial' ? Because if a root ends in
any other consonant, though preceded by a short if, the root will take m^;
thus g^+»ifn= qrOTl ' what is to be cooked' ; 9re*t 'speech'.
Why do we say 'when preceded by a short ar' ? When preceded by
any other vowel, it will take «*n; thus ^+o^= ^c*i£ 'to be angry' ; so
also ifton^ 'to be concealed'.
The word nfi N is used in the sfttra in the original. The force of if here
is, by I. I. 70, that short *r having one m&tr& or prosodial length is to be
taken and not long nr. Therefore, after the root wj 'to obtain', we have •**
and not n^; thus mf^ 'to be reached' i. e. 'attainable'.
99. The affix w s comes after the roots xm €
•to be able 1 , and *? <to bear'.
Thus TJW*F[ 'possible' ; wn*[ 'endurable'.
*pi:, % wwtoJ, (*m) II
^f*r: ii it* *w ^c «pr, rifrwrwwNft totoH mfk ii
*rfiS*n ii ^cr* iPpcV n
100. The affix *w comes after the roots «i\ 'to
speak', ** <to be mad', ■** 'to go, to eat', and wt to restrain',
when these roots do not take any proposition.
Thus nun 'what is to be spoken, i. e prose' ; ira^'wine' ; *rf^ 'what is
to be followed ; *min 'what is to be restrained'.
Why do we say 'when not preceded by a preposition' ? When com-
pounded with an upasarga, these roots will take o^ ; thus imra^; WTO* &c.
The root ^ would have taken the affix irfj by sfitra 98 also, as it ends
in * and is preceded by M ; its separate enumeration in this sfitra is in order to
show, that the compound verb *H will not take the affix n^ Therefore with
regard to *P£, this is a niyama or restrictive rule and not a vidhiot original
rule.
Vart :— The root nc when preceded by the preposition nn^ takes the
*HI N affix when the sense is not that of a preceptor ; thus «tr*rf ttf: € an ap-
proachable or communicable country 1 . But when the sense is that of a teacher
the root takes 1\; thus wrf: 4 a preceptor 1 .
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 101-103] Irregular Formations ; 387
wwropni
101. The words urn, *•* aud **f are irregularly-
formed, having the sense of 'oondemnable', 'saleable'
and 'unobstructable' respectively.
Thus, «?TO frf 'censurable sin*. Another and regular form is ^.
This is formed by adding the affix m\ to the root ^ by IIL 1. 106. So also
q*W: «t*rer: 'saleable blanket' ; v«^r: ifh 'saleable cow'. The other and regular
form is <n°*ti formed by the addition of nnj. So also jrihr to? 'unobstructed
by hundred* ; ttfRQr **? 'unobstructed by thousand'. The other and regular
form is y*r from the root ^ 'to choose', **? means a girl choosing her own
husband and is non-obstructable by any body. The word *nf in the sAtra is
in the feminine gender, and it is in this gender only that the word is so form-
ed. In the masculine gender, the word is regularly formed ; thus *ni? qfftfif:.
*lrt *rct* ji \or n wf* 11 w^if, ipwri; (nx) 11
jfti: 11 wfriWt: srofr ****** Rnirw3 11
102. The word w is irregularly formed, when
the meaning of the word is an instrument of carrying.
The word to is derived from root *f 'to carry' and means 'a vehicle',
#. *., that by which a thing is carried ; as to* 30OT(. When it does not mean
a carriage, the root takes the affix *s(\; thus *ncr: 'an ox'.
«rt: *uifa«hw*ft: II \0\ II tn^Tf^C II *R *b, OTft-ttarat: II
^Ri: 11 m *vfit, iwTP^ifif ijrif, wft^**rf*f$«r*faihj|fw*t Prnwfr 11
qfKta^ II *tft OTC* tWI«1ltl*# Wt# OTftW^JlW*^ 4^**^ 11
103. The word •?* is irregularly formed when
xtieaning 'lord' and a ( Vai6ya\
The root ^ 'to go', would have taken •** by sAtra 124 of this chap-
ter ; but it takes *n^ when the sense of the word formed by it is that of a 'lord'
or a man of 'Vaisya' caste. As ****: tfrft, 'honored lord', wfr $**: "honored
Vaisya'.
Vartx Though by VI. 1. 213, the affix ^ makes the udAtta accent
fall on the first syllable of the word, yet in the case of the word h$, when it
means 'lord', the accent falls on the last syllable.
Why do we say 'when it means a lord or a Vaisya' ? Otherwise the
root Ukcs the affix nwj as w$t HTfWJ: 'the respectable BrAhmana'.
11
Digitized by VjOOQIC
38$ Irregular Formations. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 104-106
^nrotf wtcht mi* 11 \*8 11 xnpfa it **nntf , «mT,
IfllShl
^faf: 11 ^nwRf Pnnw^ *wwir *tenr# wfii 11
104. The word *ro*f is irregularly formed
when meaning what has reached the time favorable
to conception, or ripe for fruition.
The word ot*ri? is formed by adding ^rw affix to the root 3 'to move',
compounded with the preposition ot. The word qrre^rr means having reach-
ed the time. The word jhtt means the first conception. Thus swtf ift: 'the
cow fit for the bull' ; mmft ?TO 'the mare fit for the horse'.
Why do we say 'when meaning what has reached the time favorable
to conception* ? Otherwise the affix o*^ will be used ; as Trora? jnrff *n»rr
'Madhura is approachable in Sarat season'.
105. The word wriK imperishable' is irre-
gularly formed when qualifying the word **wi 'friend-
ship' expressed or understood.
The word *nr3^ is formed from the root sj by the addition of ^r, and
affixing the negative particle m [ as *T+sr+iTH = aniif'.
Thus Wl$' «ftJ^J *f*TO^ 'let our friendship be imperishable'. So also
Why do we say 'when qualifying the word ffiRI^ ? Observe wrfrnr
^nf5r: 'undecaying blanket'.
v%: ffa *r\ *r 11 \o$ 11 Tnjft u ^rt;, *fa, «n N . *,
(*m, sryroi ) 11
^ftl: II *$*!*: ««geH f« m$ M^TOiff *Wl. ****** H*fil ^KTOIT^ II
106. After the root f< 'to speak', governing
a case-inflected word as its upapada, and not having a
preposition annexed to it, there comes the affix **^ also.
The phrase 'not having a preposition' is to be read into this sfltra
by anuvritti from sfttra 100 ante. The force of the word 'also' is to indicate
that the affix *^ is also employed. The word *fRr means 'in construction
with an upapada that ends in case-affix'.
Thus wr+^+^n;=ii«r+w N +w«fitfrii^; wr+^+vf=»niRnii['told
by the Vedas or Brahman'. Similarly ***fttUl or wqqUH, 'truth-mouthed'.
Why do we say 'when it has a case-inflected word as upapada'? Other-
wise *\ + ^afii^a 'musical instrument',
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI. Ch. I. 5 107, ^8] ? Kvap. 3*$
Why do we say 'not having a preposition' ? Observe RfTO^ 'a rumour'
formed by the affix **m and not by n*{ or *irj.
H^ Hl3 II \09 II TH^ft II H*:, HtS, l( <*ynpi, jfir,
^Ri: ii wtaWlr. «**nmt **3TO*f Hit **^ uroflr *r*fii u
107. After the root */to be', iu construction
with a case-inflected word as its upapada and when used
without a preposition, the affix **rt is employed to de-
note coudition (bhava).
The words «fir and si«[TCPf of previous sAtras are understood in
this. The anuvritti of ^ does not cover this aphorism. As WfPJ^r im: = WB*i
iT*f : 'gone to or arrived at Brahmahood ; fa)fqf a $TOf W- 'gone to divinity'.
The word bhdva of this sutra governs the succeeding ones.
Why do wc say 'in construction with a case-inflected word' ? Other-
wise it will take n% ; as i|+;*w = vft-f *« = *{*Q* (VI. I. 79).
Why do we say 'not taking a preposition' ? Observe spmn^.
wf*r. 11 frfNWt: *[*** 3<n* 4*to*t ht% **^ unnft wfii *«rcvretT?{r: 11
108. After the.root n 'to kill 1 , when in cons-
truction with a case-inflected word as its upapada, and
when used without a preposition, comes the affix **% in
denoting condition, and the letter * is the substitute of its
final.
The phrases *jftr «TfTO*f and wt are understood in this sfttra.
Asiwr+f^+iiir^^frw+W+^^iW^wr, (VI. 1. 71) *****! 'Brahman-
murder'. So also anro**r 'killing a horse'.
When not in construction with a noun, the form is tot: 'a blow' (f{+
R&^+*nO- This verb does not take the affix **mjn denoting condition,
there being no example of such formation.
Why do we say • when not taking a preposition' ? Observe Jflrttft *fJfc
'there is a combat'.
jfti: 11 ^fif *c jfp^ ^ % ipr: vrntom: m\ wnftHfftl 11
rftf*^ 11 xrftrjlf yfyil tfti ***m^ u
Digitized by
Google
39° Kvap. [Bk. III. Ch. I. S 109,110
109. After the verbs 1 'to go', *r 'to praise*, saner
'to govern 1 , * 'to choose', f 'to respect* and ^ 'to pleased
comes the affix wt
The anuvritti of gft, fFTOpf and ht# does not extend to this aphorism.
The present sfltra ordains generally the affix w^after the above verbs. Thus
* +***=»* +<l +* (VI. 1. 71) « (op 'to be gone'. The letter * being added by
Rule VI. 1. 71 which declares **f is the augment of a short vowel when a «- h
affix, with an indicatory ^ follows'. So also Si+**^ = *$**: 'to be praised* ;
Xrrcr+*^ = ffcw+* (en being changed into f by VI. 4. 34) « fijjc*: 'to be ins-'
tructed i. e. a pupil 1 . So also ^ +**^ — *** : «to be chosen' ; wf +**%=* wjwr:
'to be honoured' ; *r^+*RTJ = *p*: 'to be served'.
Though the anuvritti of qq^was coming from the previous sfltra 100,
its repetition in this aphorism is to indicate that other rules such as 125 of this
chapter shpijld not take effect in the above verbs. Thus Rule 125 requires
«*^ 'after the verb s$, but the present rule prohibits that. Thus we have
•TOP* S*W 'must be praised'.
By n in the sfttra the root ^r is intended to be taken, and not the root
jl£. The equivalent derivative of the latter is qr£: as *ntf STfiiqnr:.
VarU— The roots jj^'to praise' w s 'to milk' and ijj 'to cover' optional-
ly take the affix *a^ As T$s*\ or ff«*^ (VI. 4. 37) ; in^ or fcirw, ^rfP^ or
Vart:— The verb n'n 'to anoint', preceded by the preposition w^
takes the affix «rt^ when used as an appellative. As W+tfX+^l ** WW{
meaning clarified butter. The nasal is elided by VI. 4. 24.
Obj. — How do you explain the form 3TO1 which is evidently formed
from the root f by adding ^? According to the present sfltra, the affix
8Rl^ ought to have been added. Ans. The f in aftw( is a different root from
that taken here. The root in this sfttra is fQ^ of the Ad&di class.
llPl^ML II TOOT ^*J w 4flL^tinr: II
qrf^spj 11 wr^jfa* 11
110. After verbs having a penultimate short
*C, the affix nn\ is employed, with the exception of the
verbs ifcV to ^e able', and ^n 'to hurt'.
Thus ^+**^=JW£; so also tjuin. But ^and^ will form w**\,
and *ni*£
Why have we used the letter *r in ^n^? It is to indicate that short k
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § tn-113.] Kyap. 39*
is meant and not long ^ (I. 1. 70). Therefore the root ** * will take m^ and
form qftt«h(.
Part : — The root qn takes the affix •** when compounded with the
word qrftj. Thus wftra**? rm: 'a rope'.
Vart : — The root ^ when preceded by both j$\ and w takes *qi{
as QfTOnrf,
t ***** W ^ H ^T^T II $, *, ^W-, ( **\) II
111. The affix **\ is employed after the root
*nr <to dig*, aud long i is substituted for the final of the
root.
Thus f^+^W^=^r+l+^=^hnj 'to be dug*. The long f is used in the
sAtra for the sake of euphony. The same purpose would have been served by
using short f , thus '% 1 *FT:'. But the long f indicates that the rule VI. 4- 43
does not apply here. By that rule the m of ctt would have been lengthened
into w before the affix mw{.
ntttxi 11 ^jffiwrer 11
112. The affix **\ is employed after the verb
H*iJto bear' when not used as a name.
Thus *| -f- WV 9 ^jwr PL *|wir: 'those who ought to be supported* i. e. 'ser-
vants'. Why do we say 'when not used as an appellative' ? Observe ¥+°*ni «=■
jfril: 'a Kshatriya',
Vart : — The use of kyap is optional when this verb takes the preposi-
tion *n, Thus *'vwr: or *mif ^
^$f$Mm II ^ II ^T^ II ^:, fanro, ( *f\) II
113. The affix **% optionally comes after the
root f* 'to cleanse*.
This is an example of Prdpta-vibhdshd. By rule 1 10 anU 9 the root
j* having a penultimate *c would have necessarily taken kyap ; this sfltra de-
clares an option. As qRtfW or iffanr*: 'to be cleansed'. The second form is
thus evolved :—
*ft^+^(III. i. I24)»lft**t+H (VIL 3. 52)«i|fafP*(VII. 2. 114)
12
Digitized by VLrOC
39* Kya*. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 114-116.
Rmm^ n
114. The words rnrerjr *nS t«flr*r *«* *<ar $ar t** and
www are irregularly formed by the addition of the affix
Thus rrsnr ehiw or xtm ff *ep*, nV+ tf +9^«oir<nr: 'the Rajastiya
tir coronation sacrifice.
Similarly 5 or q-f qq^oc *$: 'the sun', literally that which moves (*rfw)
in the sky ; or that which impels (g^fir) creation* to action. OT+7V+9OTs
OTtiP( 'false speech' ; this is an exception to rule 106, by which *nj would also
have been applied This rule prevents it. Thus tHtfjrft, s^r+**H « ***. < a n
agreeable lover'. So also *T^+WW^= VI* ' a base metal (other than gold and
silver)' ; the other form is ifttw^l fff +<r^T = frrrnrr: ' that which ripens of itself
in cultivated ground', sr ivrtaipwr: 'a snake (what does not move by legs)'.
115. The words Pm and *3* are irregularly
formed by the affix **%* when meaning a 'river'.
Thus f5|f N +^r^ =» Pro: 'a river that breaks its banks by the rush of its
water', the name of the Bhidya'river.
^H+«W^=^5^r 'a river whose waters overflow^the banks', name of
the Uddhya river ; the p is changed into ^.
When not meaning or qualifying the river, the regular forms are used ;
thus ^rr and sfispif.
g*rf%S*ft m* ii xtf ii x^rfa 11 gw-fasift, *** u
116. The words 3** and Rrsqr are irregularly
formed by the affix w, when used as names of asterisms.
Thus ^-Mu^-» jnr: 'the Pushya asterism'. It is so called because ob-
jects are nourished under the influences of this asterism. fa^+*Fnj=: %gg : 'the
asterism Siddhya' another name of Pushya, so-called because things are accom-
plished under the' influence of this star.
When not the names of asterisms, the forms are tfantf 'nourishing',
fhrr^ 'accomplishing'-
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 117-119.] Kyap. 393
^fti: m f%^i firfta fir** f«« *w fimwf# wctat jST***^ ft**
«**? «fr*5 "
117. The words faro, firffcr and fanr are irregular-
ly formed when they mean, the 'mijiija grass', the 'sedi-
ment' and the 'plough' respectively.
Thus f%+^+^TJ » fi^jr: etymologically 'that which has to be Purified
to make rope'; Rr+'ft+** f {= 3 fiFft* 'a sediment or sin'; fr+TOt-ftrar 'a plough
that which is to be conqueted by strength'.
The regular derivatives are faqT«*^, fqphpi and tfw^.
Hwftn«n ^w^f% ii \\* 11 inpfwn jrfrr-srfaiirt,
v$i f «k(*i, 0*n»^ 11
118. The verb *? ( to seize', preceded by the
prepositions ufa and *rft, takes the affix *** in the Vedic li r
terature.
Thus *nwr *r «iRr*jfP^ ; *rawffir*ifF* 11
In the classical Sanskrit the proper forms are stfnifVPl anc * •ffoOTPfc
M^H&ft*Uf *UM^i|M *P II ^< II M^lfa If tR[-3TOtft*
wnwr-^i^ *> W«f *ro) 11
jf* : it <rtJ$$fi:aj *r«mrt ^9 *iw qfthfr *n^ ***** **Rr m
119. The root ** takes the affix w*^ , when it
means a 'word 1 , a 'dependent', 'outside', or a 'partisan 1 .
Thus ihtjtt; 'the Pragrihya words that do not admit of sandhi, already
defined in sfttra I. 1. 11. So also Hfipcf.
The word wte means dependent upon others, not free to provide
for himself. Thus *T*P*r: ^p*r: 'the captive parrots'.
The word wm means 'situated outside*. Thus fmr*JOT **r 'an army
lying outside the village*. The word *rWT being in the feminine gender indicates
that the derivative word formed from *f must also be feminine in gender to
have this sense.
The word q^r is derived from w 'a side, a party 9 , and means a par-
tisan, follower or friend. ' Thus *r$9*t[vrr: 'siding with or being the partisans
of V&sudeva', So also M^njfir: 'belonging to the party of Arjun',
Digitized by
Google
394 Kyap. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 1 20-1 22.
f^WWr Wtt: II X& II M^lfa llfWTOT, V-^*fc, (W^)ll
<jfa: 11 fift * 4 *v fairer *w^*nrcralr wRi 11
120. After the verbs i^ 'to do', and ^Jto rain'
the affix *m\ is optionally employed.
The root f; would have taken the affix «*w N by 124, and the verb ^
would necessarily have taken 9*^by HO ; the present sfttra therefore declares
an optional rule. Thus : SJ+*^ = 3*H(H 'to be done' ;or *j+*^=a qrnt<T. So
also ^wpjr or ^J»r 'stimulating'.
^nt ^ xft 11 ^ 11 T^Tfn 11 5^ni, *, <ric m
, . 121. The word y*^ is irregularly formed
meaning a vehicle.
The word <nr means that by which a thing is carried. Thus wnft ift
'the carrier bull or the yoked bull', ^nft f**ft -the harnessed elephant ready
to carry'. *[^+ **% = l* 1 ^ The *T is changed into it. When not meaning a
carrier or a carriage, it has the form ^tnf.
%Fx: \\ WTO*?: **r$M#, *lf%Hwrr$ tosH*: ^rT^Jf^Pafi <!*W«TOt **fir
122. Optionally the word •tht^it is irregular-
ly formed.
The word mr means 'along' or 'together*, wr in composition with
the root ^ 'to dwell*, takes tlje affix npr k in the sense of location of time. Op-
tionally the Vriddhi is not substituted in such a case. The time or the day
on which the sun and the moon dwell together in the same constellation is
called wr*re*r or Himr^rr.
The final * in wr*CTH is indicatory and is for the sake of showing
where should the proper accent fall.
The two forms wtrrorr or WRrrarr are the same word, and a fortiori a
rule made with regard to one will be made applicable to the other. And to this
effect there is a paribh&shft which deplares gw fa i ftfrimwmw ^ ; 'that which
has undergone a change in regard to one of its parts, is by no means in conse-
quence of this change, something else than what it was before the change had
* taken place'. Therefore sfltra IV. 3. 30, though it, in terms, says wrf Rlflf
jf i$ made applicable to the form iranrc*! also,
Digitized by
Google
BK. III. CH. I. § 123, 124] NYAT. 395
1¥tRt II
wrfafap^ 11 f&y* fftr **um^ 11
123. In the Vedas the following words are
found which are formd irregularly : — f*re*$, $*f 5, qirfte, z*H\n,
afc^**, ipi, *raf, up}, i&% uF^r, $i«i*«u, w^gcr, *?Rtfter, kjhw, htot, *tnr**r and
The formation of the above words are extremely irregular and they are
all met with in the Vedic literature only. Thus the word Pfg^j is derived from
the root ^ 'to cut', with the preposition fa^, and the affix wqn, instead of w^
which is the regular affix, by no ; pr:+*nt+°*t! ;= ^r:+^+^ (the root ^ n
transformed into £*v.by transposition) = f*?9«i. As fitesi fa?#ft N «m^iR:.
The above is apparently a guess-work etymology of grammarians.
So also fogr is formed by adding to the root ptf 'to call' or * 'to in-
voke, the affix **\ and the upapada in ; the vowel of the root is then leng-
thened and the augment a (VI. 1.71), is not allowed, tv+$ or f +9*Y «faf *: So
atsoq+sft(to lead)+**^=iwfftc: JOT+sft+WT^^wfta:, StT+f^ (toleave)-H
«^» ¥f*S[«*PJ ; ? (to die)+*w = Hi: ; sar (to cover)+*w » *i*? ; it is always
feminine. 1^ (to bend)+*^= i*& ; <S|5J (to dig) +*fj =» ^5^: ; ^+<*NV= ^p^. .
ta (God)+^n (to sacrifice) +^ =» Itosct ; always used as feminine. «rr+7^
(to ask)+**^-s?r**3*:, Rfil+tft* )to sew)+wj =, qfirftar: ; sr*raX+*^ (to
speak) +«^ = WHWi: J *Jto be)+air^ = HTO: ; ** (to praise>+tni*r = tots*: ;
ST-ffl* (to collect) +v*rn+**= 3 *<Hirc*I¥ij ; This last word is formed then
only when the word ^f follows : and when the sense is that of 'gold'. When
it does not mean 'gold', the form is ;rHtaT3*r 1
W*«>4rUI ^8 II T^rfrr II ^-f^:, **m II
124. The affix •** comes after a verb that
ends in *c (long or short), or in a consonant.
The phrase TOsft: is in the genitive case dual number, the force of geni-
tive here being that of ablative. As fr +<n^ « nrr^'to be made' ;^+o^ =,
'3 Digitized by VaO
396 Nyat. [Bk. III. Cm. I. 125, 126.
<■ ■ 1 iii..
fW nom. sing. ff4^ 'to be taken' ; *+o*nf =« xfl$ ; 'to be held* ; *^+*^nr =
**V + ■** ( vir - 3- 5 2 ) = *n** (VII. 2. 1 16) 'to be spoken' ; <r* + **w = TORT*.
3ftrorag% 11 ^ » X M* 11 sft:, 3mrcg% (m) 11
125. The affix «*m comes after a root that
ends in the letter s long or short when the sense is that
of necessity.
This debars the affix ^ Thus *j+wircr N = *ft+* = *rmf (VII. 2. 115
and VI. 1. 79) 'must be cut' ; so also j+o^f^ <nsqp( 'must be purified'.
When 'necessity' is not indicated we have the form sppwc* 'to be cut'
The sfltra as given in the original is rather ambiguous ; it may be construed to
mean, 1st when the word arraCTO or a word having the sense of this term is in
construction as upapada, the affix **^ is employed : or 2ndly when, the
sense of the affix is that of 'necessity', the «*nr N is employed. There are ob-
jections to both these interpretations taken separately. For in the first case,
though we could form the words trocwrtq &c, we could not form the word
ftOT by itself. In the second case, though we could form the single word vtr**',
we could not form the compound. The best solution is to take the second in-
terpretation and form the compound by the universal rule of Tatputusha con-
tained in II. 1. 72, which would also regulate the accent.
-Tfa-^fa-*fa-*PT:, *, ( WW ) H
^fa: 11 w N <£* 5 *ftf : 3 *Rr tPr 5?Ar «rfa ^ ******* niw mitft *wRi 11
126. The affix °*ro s comes after the verbs we
<to distil', g 'to join', n/to sow', ^ 'to speak distinctly' <ot n
'to prate', *\ 'to be ashamed', and vr 'to drink'.
The verb Hfff is a compound verb formed by the preposition bto^ and
the root g. This stitra debars **r N that would otherwise have come by sfttra 97
arid 98.
Thus wr +ni*i N — Brrerrwpj, (VII. 2. 1 1 5 and VI. 1. 79) ; so also *t**\,
^rr^i u^H,> 5fc^r, *x*q\ and w^ro^
The force of the word ^ 'and' in the sfttra is to indicate that the roots
not included in the above enumeration should also be taken. Thus f^+°** «=
W*1 II
enTO^ttftc^ h ^9 n ^tRt 11 vrranirt, «rR^ 11
^fiwi wn** fill Fritntf mPr* JPnHt 1 *ntfTO^ < nr! wy ^Rrrt^ RmnW 11
Digitized by V^OOQlC
Bk. IIL Ch. I. § 12/, 128] Irregular formations. 397
127. The word wnwr is irregularly formed
when meauing 'impermanent'.
This word is thus formed :— W^+tf +^r=wr+^+* = W*TO, (the jr
being changed into a?l* by the analogy of VI. 1. 79).
As MFffeift *%*mfir: . This is a species of Dakshinftgni fire. As this
fire is brought from the G&rhapatya fire and is not permanently kept alive,
therefore it is called &n&yya. This however, is not co-extensive with Dak-
shin&gni. It is that fire which is brought from the G&rhapatya, and has the
same source with the Dakshinagni and Ahavaniy&gni. A Dakshin&gni fire
may be taken from different sources, as from the family of a well-to-do Vaishya,
or from a frying place, or from Gftrhapatya fire. When it is taken from the
last i. e. from G&rhapatya fire, it is &n&yya Dakshinagni. Ahavaniya is also
taken from G&rhapatya.
It is not every thing, that is not lasting, which is called inAyya ; for
a fragile pot will not be called so. It applies only to the consecrated fire.
When it has not this sense, the form is »rtf* meaning 'what ought to be
brought*.
wiTi5ft<nFHi$T 11 ^ 11 tr^Tft 11 nwmt:, «ra^r 11
^Wt: 11 tops* tfif Prcnsro WTOrrfaW 11
128. The word totto: is irregularly formed
when meaning 'disapproved'.
The word •rtufir is a negative word meaning 'non-agreement*. It means
also 'disrespect*.
Thus TCTR^fa:: 'the thief is to be disliked'.
Why do we say when meaning 'disapproved'. Because otherwise the
regular form is q+?ft 'to lead' + *t*=ih$N: 'tractable*.
The word in the sfttra is trcftrRf which we have translated as 'dis-
approved*. But the word *tafa also means trftvlPr or 'desire' ; and twrfff
would therefore, mean 'free from desire or worldly attachment'. Therefore the
word wfaRr means also 'free from attachment', as in the following sentence : —
wHnrj^m fair ira v^xi^ munarr* twNifttf m**& grefaf'let the
father teach the Secret Doctrine to his eldest son, or to such pupil who is free
from worldly attachment, and to no one else*.
M l iqqi*|iqflHM*q*ll"U *rPTffaffimTOTfa^f^ II
^11 m^ t Pi 11 ^Txii-^wT^^-f^inw-MT«rr:, iro-ffo-f'rBrre-^TfSr-
*hfhj 11
**ropui
Digitized by VjOOQIC
398 Irregular formations. [Bk. hi. en. I. $ 129-131
129. The words *ro, *r*r**r, faKnar and vttot are
irregularly formed meaning 'a measure', 'an oblation to
fire', 'a dwelling 1 , and 'a sacrificial prayer', respsctively.
These words are supposed to be formed thus:— iff (to measure) +°*nj=»
<rnap£, the it being changed into <r and another * being added by VII. 3. 33.
The regular form is fan 'to be measured* (iff +«*w=*5+* VI. 4. 65 = **). w^+^ti
(to lead) + °*r^ =* *P«rrcinT 'the oblation*. It being a crude form applies to a par-
ticular kind of oblation. The regular form is mUn^ I ftr + fa (to collect) +<ur*
= f^+4+^=fir+^nf+^=firaRT«i|: c a dwelling'/ The regular form is fain 1 *r
(to put)+nm N = wan (fern.). Thesftmadheni is the name of certain Rik hymns
used as supplemental verses in a Litany. The other form is $q \
w^t ww^rominh h ^0 11 T^Tf^r n mih, www*-
^Nut^T 11
<j fa: n ***<?ro $w* %&& *r*r> ftrcrww wnr*fin?S 11 .
130. The words ^nrn^: andieNra: arc irregular-
ly formed meaning a sacrifice.
These words are thus formed: ^"¥+qr (to drink)+*n N = *[«* +<?T+*+
^ (VII. 3'. 33) = ^"otto: ' the sacrifice in which Soma is drunk with a bowl*. The
accent falls on the first syllable by VI. 1. 213. *cn+fa (to collect) + »^H =*
*T3Par: 'the sacrifice in which Soma is collected*.
If not applied to sacrifices, the forms will be ^«¥*TRH and ?af*ta:.
*fa: 11 ^rRr^f^r s^r*!** ^njp f*3tf ^rwjr GrcrwFtf *FTOf*nH n
131. The words qft*par:, irsm. and *««r: are irre-
gularly formed when they are names of fire.
These words are thus formed: — <cfi:+fit +<nmj==<rfi:+4+T oa *R:+^tW+
^ = <rfr*TP*j: 'sacrificial fire arranged in a circle' (the $ being changed into w^
by the analogy of VI. I. 79. This peculiar sandhi before the semivowel % has
been illustrated in the previous examples also). So also 3<rae*: 'a kind of
sacred fire'. *t+*t + °*ni = «*+l^+* — ^iryr: 'a kind of fire'. SPTjof ftF*H
«nrofir let him kindle the SamOhya fire desirous of a victim*.
Why do we say 'when they are names of fire* ? Observe otherwise,
«f f&*\ 'to be heaped', ^rt^ 'to be increased', qYTO* 'to be carried'.
Digitized by V^OCK > l£
BK. III. CH. I. § I32-I34-] LYU NI AND ACM. $pg
ftrenffcif^ * 11 ^ 11 x^rfa 11 fapi-arffcifir^, ^ u
132. The words fttw and aifcrfii** are also irre-
gularly formed.
The word f*w: comes from the root fl* 'to collect', and means fire I $.
that which is collected. As P*wfTjfnr: 'the funeral pile fire\ The word Hffcrfror
means, arranging the fire. The affix * has been added to denote condition,
together with the augment w^ (^). These words have uddtta accent on the last
vowel. The regular form is ^fcpj 'to be gathered'.
TO9P#T II TO « ^# II ^-*%T, (mSttz) II
133. The affixes ^(wOand «^(v)are placed
after all verbal roots, expressing the agent.
The word 'root' is understood in the above aphorism. Thus ^ 'to do'
+«W**c + 3 (VII. 2. U5)-«rc+ wf(VII.i. i)= a arT^frnom.sing. *rrro:
'doer.' br +s^=^;+ar(VII. 3. 84) = ^ nom. sing. Wfi?. So also frro: and **f.
The «^ of ^ is not indicatory, but distinguishes this affix from ^ ;
the simple g includes both ?r* and £% as in V. 3. 59, and VI. 4. 154.
^f^rf^M^in^ft wftpro II TO M *Rjfo N if^-
nf^-VWf^l:, W,fiirfa, 3TO II
TOf^tJ*; 11
134. After the verbs classed as »n* 'to be happy-,
wr 'to take' and *v% 'to cook' there are the affixes «[ (w)
toft fat) and *n (m) respectively.
The word ddi meaning etcetra, is to be joined with every one of the
above three words. These three affixes come respectively -after ttye verbs of
the above three classes. Thus after the verbs of *w class, comes the affix *g;
after the verbs of iff class, comes the affix Rj[?r ; after the verbs of v\ class,
comes the affix wr^.
•The *r?^ft verbs will not be found in one place in the DhAtupAtha.
The list of the words formed by these affixes have, however, been collected in
the Ganap&tha. Thus 1^+ **=«T^+g (I 3. 8) » *** + w (VI. I. 1) = «Pf*
nom. sing. w*. 'son* (lit what gladdens). So also from the following causa*
Digitized* by C^OOglC
4ob The affix ka. Bk. III. Ch. I. § 135.
tive roots, nouns are formed, meaning names :— qrrftr— qrenr: or ^I3[R: ; irff — m*; ;
^r— fjro: (or *yrcj:) ; mfa— *w. ; *ftf-*>f t : ; tflrf^r— tfta*r: and ttF*— ct^r.
The following derivatives are names : — ^rf^r— *r$*r: ; fifa— ?tr: ; *f*c —
WT :
So also the following words: — st^W, WU:, *$«!J:, *itl^Fr:, *ratfoj:,
tffTCj:, STTffT:, *f*:, TC?T, T^flJpT:, fir^'TOT:, &VH- (the cj in *tto is irregular),
farefirTncrv> «g5CfW and scnjfw.
The qjrff verbs are also nowhere enumerated in a group. The fol-
lowing are, however, those verbs:— i^—irff^nom. frnft ; STWf— ^wrf** nom.
TOrcftj^sr— s?rSri; *g;r*r— ^tRft; eirr— *uTftr*f ; *f*— nf*^; *ret— srF* *r.
So also the verbs-w, M, **, tj and scnr preceded by fa ; as, fatfsr^, fwrfa^, f**r-
ftpr. fa*rfifl[, RnprfiPt The verbs «rrf%, s^inr, tfs^TOi 3PT, ** and to take fo^
when preceded by the negative particle ; as, snrrfa% WffiR^ , wfalOTft'T,
•Wlfipfc wrrft^and arerfini;. So also after verbs ending in a vowel when agents
are non-conscious beings : as, BrarTit'r, *wfir^. So also, »?RrTf fipj, MfSrxrrfipJ,
firrftH;, firefa^ (meaning a place) f%J[rrfa^ and fa*rfa% MftwRr^ MTOfa 1 *.
OTtffa% qrfittfir^ and qfrmRr* 1
The following are q^rf^ words :— qr% *% *<r, ?r*, 'SRT, tTT, *R n%s> W* ,
*\*k$ 5wr?, st?, *frrr, m*z, sir, **, wr, wrc, *$*» $**> *ftre #t, *t, *to, xw t
The ff in ?*** &c, shows that the feminine of these is formed by long f
(IV. 1. 15). The <wft class is an s?pjrfam3J: 1
*Tft*fir: sr$*nw**: ***** n T^r^r: i
In fact the affix b?^[ comes after all verbs, and is not exclusively con-
fined to the verbs above enumerated. The affix *?*, therefore, debars W!T
and may be taken to be the universal affix, and by its help the forms like
^m&c. may be explained.
m:\\
nfrr. 11 ri<nt*ft urcrih tfmra: flktth? snmnit *nr-*i »i
135. After a verb ending in a consonant but
preceded by t, * or m (long or short), ami after the verbs
ict 'to know', tf 'to please 1 , and ^ 'to scatter', comes the affix
Thus firftm+*i = (%%T nom. sing, ftrftrr:. So also faftrcr. 'inscription';
j\r: 'who knows' ; *JJCP lean' ; srf+*=ir: 'who knows' (VI. 4* &0; 'ft+* SS3
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 136, 137] The affix sa. 401
fi?n: 'what pleases* ;^+*=*fiff+*?( VII. 1. 100 )=f^;+iT ( I. 1.51)=^:
'who scatters' *. e. 'a hog'. .
The words ta 'God', *for 'service' and $«r 'ram', should be read in the
<T^rf? class of the last sfttra, being formed by the affix ar^ and not by eff.
arms^ra*? ^ 11 TT^rf^r 11 arm:, *, Wf, ( w; ) 11
^f%: 11 Mi«Grcn*rnft wpn *<renfr *<?«r* ^niwptr H*fif 11
136. Also after a verb ending in long w when
there is a preposition along with it, the affix ** is placed.
This is an apavAda of III. 1. 40, and debars the affix xg. Thus rerr+
*ff =* roy +ai a iraq: (VI. 4. 64). w^+srsgcsf +m=^5T: 'very weary'(Bn substi-
tuted for $ by VI. 1. 45.) sr*5?+8ir - *r*5«r +*?=*£***: 'very languid'.
The final w is dropped before the affix ^ by rule VI. 4. 64, There
is elision of long an when an ardhadhatuka affix follows beginning with a
vowel and having an indicatory ^ or r.
^n^Tsm $*$*!: *P H ^3 II ^ft II xn-^-^-$*-£fP,
*:, ( *tre5? ) 11
*fa: 11 q?f*«ft *\w srotf s<rtf *ro*nft **fa h
*rft? ^ n fer^ eirrot srfitftft <raw 11
137. The affix v (h) is employed after the roots
trr'to drink', *r 'to smelP, Wto blow', S^suck', and w
'to see' when there is a preposition along with these
roots.
Thus sn,+<n+*r «^+Rr^+H (VII. 3. 78)=»tf*T* nom. sing. sRw ; so
also firfar; ^fer^: and Rrftn^: 1 ^+uTf+tf==s*+^+»?» (VII. 3. 78);
*5*: ; fa>W ; *^+$+*J=3;3*: ; Rrcw ; so also SW+p^+JJ =**!**:, (VII. 3.
78). so also Rmc^r: ;
Some commentators do not read the word 'upasarga' into this stitra.
According to them the forms like «?$*: &c, can be formed also.
The affix $r, of which st is indicatory, the real affix being it, causes the
root to undergo all those changes, which it undergoes in special tenses ; (or it
is a sftrvadhatuka affix there ; see sfttra III. 4. 113 and VII. 3, 78.
Vart: — Prohibition must be stated of the root *q, when the word to
be formed is a name. As fa+w+^r +*=s*r^: 'tiger' (an animal that goes
about smelling). Here there is n* and not the affix q.
■ Digitized by
Google
402 The affix na, Bk. III. Ch. I. § 138-140.
^Tf^r-^Tffnwr:, * (*rO u
138. The affix v is employed after the follow-
iug verbs when used without a preposition : fcr*r, Rf* and
the causatives *rifr, <nfr, tf%, *?f%r, ^f%, srrEr and *rf|.
Thus RrT*qr: 'smearing' ; ft^f: 'acquiring' ; >*rr*c: 'holding' ; qrr*: 'ferry-
ing ; ***: 'knowing' ; srf*nn 'shaking' ; 3?r*: 'perceiving' ; srrtw, and m?*' •
Why do we say 'when used without a preposition' ? Observe qfiam ;
here the affix is ir.
Vart .-—The verb fe^with the preposition ft takes the affix jj. As
prfepqrr 'the name of certain deities', 'a cow*.
Vart : — The affix jj is employed after f%s? when compounded with the
words ift &c. and when the word to be formed is a proper noun. As iftfa^f :
'Krishna' (protector of cows) ; wfaf : 'a lotus' (having petals like spokes).
f*HT*T, ( *T: ) M
139. The affix v is optionally employed, after
the root *r <to give', and w <to hold', when used without a
preposition.
This debars uj. Thus w 'giving' ; or jnr: 'inheritance' ; **: 'holding' or
*rnr: 'having*.
When a preposition is used, the affix q is not employed ; as jtj;, iot:.
*: II
140. After the verbs beginning with *** 'to
shine 1 and ending with sre ( to go', when used without a
preposition, the affix qr is optionally employed,
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ctt. I. § 141, 142.] The affix na. : 403
The word f Ri in stfafar indicates beginning. These are about 66
verbs, all belonging to the Bhvddi class. See No. 804 to 860 in the Dh4tup4-
tha, Bombay Edition in the Appendix to Sidh&nta Kaumudi.
This debars the affix ar^J as 9*151: or $**?:; *TCf: or «3*r:.
The affix <u (a?) having an indicatory ur N causes the vriddhi of the pen-
ultimate m. When the affix m is not used, then %v\ is used, and we have the
other form. But compound verbs take *r^ ; as sfs*5f: 'luminous'*
VarU — The verb fnr 'to stretch' must be included in this list, and it takes
the affix w ; as a?T3FT. The conditions 'option' and 'without preposition' do not
apply in this case. The verb ipr necessarily takes this affix, though compoun-
ded with an upasarga.
141. The affix *ff is employed after the follow-
ing verbs also :— ^ 'to go', verbs ending in long Mr, *n 'to
pierce', w^ to pain', ^ 'to flow', wfan *to pass on', w*r 'to
complete 1 , w c to take away', Tm 'to lick', fitsrc c to em-
brace', and 1** 'to breathe'.
The root ^, before affixes, becomes jprr, (VI. 1. 45) and is thus included
in the phrase 'verbs ending in long an. What is then the use of its separate
enumeration ? The separate enumeration is for the sake of excluding the ap-
plication of every other rule which might have prohibited nr. Thus HI, 1. 136
enjoins q* when a compound verb ends in w. But that rule does not apply to
the verb **r.
Thus *T7**re: 'frost', tf?nranr: 'catarrh', fnr: 'inheritance', mq: 'having',
«TW 'pain', waff: 'wound', tf ar*: 'flow', awrr*: 'transgression', iron*: 'conclu-
sion', *T*m: 'taken away', £* : 'licking', spfo: 'embracing*, **re: 'breath'. See
viL 3.33.
142. The affix m is employed after the verbs
i c bo burn', and*lr ( to lead', when used without a prepo-
sition. ^
15
Diojitizec
Google
404 The affix shvun. [Bk. III. Ch. I. § 143-145-
Thus j+cy=^ + h (VH. 2. H5)«fnr: (VI. 1. 78) 'burning'. So also
•ft+or='ft+u=*rr*: 'leading'..
Why do we say 'when used without a preposition' ? Observe m*:
'burning* ; TOT*.* 'friendship 1 .
fSwm irf: \\\)% « tr^r 11 fk^vrx, **, ( w: ) 11
wififapr 11 *pro$fir m&fn 11
143. The affix cr is optionally employed after
the verb q* 'to seize 1 .
This debars the affix *r*. Thus q^+W -* «**.,+•? (VII. 2. 116) = in?:
'seizing', 'a crocodile' ; or Of +*?* = iff: c a planet'.
The option allowed by this aphorism is a vyavasthita-vibhAshd or de-
finite option, that is to say, the affix m is always used when the word to be
formed means a water-animal, such as a crocodile, shark &c, and in that sense
the word is in? . But not so, when heavenly luminaries are meant ; there the
yord is qf.
Vart :— This rule should be extended to the root ^ 'to be' also.
Thus :— my: 'condition' and w 'existence',
*$ * : || yw || xf^jfa n Jr^, *:, ( TTf: ) H
j^r: 11 irt^t: srqnnft H*Rr tf? *r$fir 11
144. The affix ** is employed after the verb
«if when the agent so expressed denotes a house.
Thus *?+** (VI. 1, 16) ^ *Jf^'a house'. The * is changed into ^ by
the rule of samprasdrana. The plural form *r ft: means 'wife', as she is especial-
ly the person that constitutes the house; while the plural of *ji meaning 'houstf
ivill be *Jfffi!J.
firfwfa *** 11 ^wi 11 tr^rfa u firf^qf^, tjwn
^f%: 11 writ- «fpwfir ntfn ftrfarf* *tifc 11
145. The affix «yr N (inr) comes after a verb;
when the agent so expressed denotes an artist.
Vart :— This affix should be confined to the verbs ^ 'to dance', ^ 'to
dig' and rw 'to dy e '»
Thus T^+^J^ =» *r$ +WF (VII. 1. 1) = «nfa: 'dancer'. The letter * is
indicatory (1)3. 6) and by Rule IV, 1. 41, it denotes that words formed by pre*
pxes having indicatory ^ form their feminine gender by the affix tfw. Tklis
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. I. § 146-148.] The affix nyut. 405
the feminine of h$* is snfaft ; so also q&*r. 'miner', fem. *FTOft 5 Hlf: 'washer-
man', fem. tiref) 1 .
In the case of the root ?*r the nasal is elided. According to the opi-
nion of the author of Mahdbhdshya, only two verbs are governed by this sfitra
namely i|« and *5T*. According to him, the verb rw takes the affix tjpr.
Thus rw+*A — **l+3 ( VI - 4- 37) =» ^r+»W (VII. 1. 1) = r^w:, feminine
14G. The affix twj, fa*s) comes after the verb
% to 'sing', when the agent so expressed, denotes an
artist.
As, 9}+tpR^« nnnir. (VI. 1. 45) ' a singer', fem.irrfir*r.
*3* * «^3 11 tn$Tfo 11 ^r, *r ( *:, firf*<rf% ) 11
147. The affix ©3? is also employed after the
verb $ 'to sing', when the agent so expressed denotes au;
artist.
By the word n 'also', the word «ir of the last sfltra is drawn into this.
Thus tf +°*? s = «TT +WT (VII. 1. i)=unR; fem. nnnft; the * is added by VIL
3.33.
The separation of these rules ( yoga-vibh&ga ) relating to ^ is for the
purpose of the sfltras that follow. Had TOtTO^ and *g^ ^ been made one aph-
orism, the onuvritti of both these affixes would have run into the subsequent
stitras. But it is intended that the anuvritti of »*? should only run, and
hence this yoga-vibhdga or division of one sfltra into two.
ft* sftf^KTCPft : ll^cil *n$Tfo H *:, % rftff-WSWR^J,
( V& ) II
*%: 11 5ifc«fS4Wv *nft**s % uro^r toRt iw ^w 1 *rtfV 11
148. After the verb ft, also the affix *3* is
employed when the agent so expressed denotes 'rice' and
*time\
The verb *r denotes two verbs *w # to abandon 1 and fr^ c to go 1 both
belonging to the Third Conjugation, forming *ffrfil and fiitf# as 3rd per. sing.
Thus fr+*^3f N =?npr: *a kind of rice* (that which jah&ti 'leaves off all water)
*i**: 'a year* (that which jihtU 'goes through' all conditions.)
Digitized by
Google
4o6 The affix vun. [Bk, III. Ch. I. § 149, 150.
The accents are however different in the two. In one case the udfttta is
on the middle ; in the other, on the last.
149. After the verbs * 'to go', * ( to move', a. c to
flow' and «Jto cut', the affix yr is employed, when repe-
tition is meant.
As, 5+5^=*+WR (VII. I. i>= m*R: ; so also, **?*., a**:, and era*:.'
The word samabhihdra in the sfltra indicates that the action done by
the agent must be well performed. The affix vun being thus ordained for the
action, when it is well performed, it follows, that it will not be employed where
the action is repeatedly ill performed. The affix will be employed even when
there is no repetition but the action is well performed even at the first attempt.
snfifrfa ^r 11 yp 11 vRjfk 11 snfirfa, *r, ( jw ) 11
\ fa: 11 wftrft ip^PTPTrct ^mmwr^y^wapft *nrfa ti
150. The affix $t is employed after all verbs,
when benediction is intended.
As, *fl^+yi= sfaW. 'may he live* ; ?!??**: 'may he be happy*.
The word Muft: means a sort of prayer ; and it relates to action. The
force of this affix is that of 'an agent with the addition that the action is sim-
ply the object of a prayer of some one who wishes that that may be the ac-
tion of that agent'.
<*-
Digitized by
Google
BOOK THIRD.
Chapter II.
— :o:-
*rf8*Pl ii tf^m^^ftfcait or: tf<i*ifirfHmt* ^ « M»mn ii
*rftf ** ^ ii tfwrfawrf 3fir *n*«*n 11
1. The affix wjj comes after a verbal root
when the object, (of whatever sort it may be), is in
composition with it, (as an upapada).
The object or karma is of three sorts, namely nivartya, vik&tya and
pr&pya.
The object which has a material cause, but such cause is however
unexpressed in the sentence, is called nivartya object jas^x^c^rtf c he makes
a pot' ; here g^ 'mud* the material cause of v^s\ is unexpressed, therefore,
sir** is nivartya object. Where the material cause itself is changed, by a
modification, into something else, such an object is called vikdrya object ; as
s*l<*35cr*: 'the branch-cutter 1 . While the object which cannot be approached
by any action, and is not affected by it, but is always constant, is called the
pr&pya object ; as 4(furor: 'the reading of Veda' ; the Veda is always the same.
They will be illustrated by the following examples : — Of the first kind,
we have «|***rr: 'a potter* and iottoi?: 'a city-builder' ; of the second, we
have qsTOH!*: 'a branch-cutter' and UXW*\ 'a reed-cutter'. Of the third, #<iMin(:
•the learning of Veda' and ^qfo?: 'the reading of CharcbA\ But compound
nouns cannot be formed of such sentences as qnf *TO[fif 'he goes to the village',
mRttf <nc*fif 'he sees the sun', 'ffitftf iJcsStfif 'he hears the Himavat\ The reason
is that it is against the usage of the language to form nouns out of these.
Vart:— The affix ur comes after the verbs tffaj, *rr^, **** and w^f
and the noun in composition with it, retains its original accent As tfertfter:
'addicted to flesh', fem. *fcrtftar ; irfcRKPr: 'loving flesh', fem. *rNwrirr ; Tfcrw:
'carnivorous', fem. *tawr ; and 3ffF*ngr*nc: 'good-conducted', fem. ^Firnur^rn I
16
Digitized by
Google
408 * x The affix ka. [Bk. III. Cn. II. § 2-4.
Vatt\— The affix m comes after the roots f*r 'to look* and *pr N 'to for-
bear* under similar circumstances. As tporatftifr:, fern. 9«ifffftOT Expecting
happiness' ; wrtpr: fern. *ttfptf 'much forbearing'.
fTOTTOT II * H V^rfk II *T, *T,*T:, *, (swr) II
2. The affix w^ comes after the root i"*r 'to
call', **j ( to weave', mw^ ( to measure', when the object is
in composition with it.
This debars the affix sr (III. 2. 3); as ***f+j*+*TO = trf+£r+ar=»
^f+inr+ST (VII. 3. 33)=; wffrar: (the * is added by rule VII. 3. 33, 'when a
krit affix with an indicatory m or h follows, the augment *r is added after the
verbs that end in long air). So also *F*j*nr, qrorrar: 1
a u dU H Mqfl *: 11 ^ 11 trqfa 11 an*!, sign^ *♦,
3. The affix *s comes alter a verbal root that
ends in long w when there is no upasarga preceding it
and when the object is in composition with it.
This debars aui^; asift +qr+*f = nt+*+*T = «fto 'Giver of cows', (the
long w is elided by VI. 4. 64,)= So also, 9**351?: 'who gives a blanket* ; qrfasfa^
'what protects the rear' ; ar^fsnPJ 'what protects the finger' (a thimble)'.
Why do we say 'when there is no upasarga'? Witness ift*r?r«r: 'who
ceremoniously gives a cow', q?TO?ra 'who ceremoniously gives a mare'. Here
the compound verb ^jr takes the affix nog.
5ft **: II H II ^lOl II 5ft, **:, ( «: ) U
jftr 11 **&* svtf fas*: snmi^t «wft 11
4. The affix * comes after the root wr when in
composition with a word ending in a case-affix, as an
npapada.
In the three previous sfitras, the word in composition was always in
the accusative case. This sfltra declares that with regard to the verb *n?, the
upapada may have any case not necessarily the accusative. As CTrer:—*rt
fiwrfir 'who dwells in accessible position' ; and pflPTW ' having an inaccessible
position', ....-.' . - • " .
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § s] The affix ka. • 409.
— ■ , ' ■ . ■ i ■ ii ■ ■»
This sfttra should be divided into two sfttras (yoga-bibh&ga). Thus: —
(i) sjf* II The affix sir comes after every root ending in long w, when in compo-
sition with a case-inflected word ; as *mrf Rwfif= ft+ir + W^fOT: (VI. 4.
64) 'who drinks with two organs' i$ % the proboscis and the mouth, an elephant'.
So also «rorn * a plant' (what drinks through the foot), sf^t: • a tortoise' (that
always protects its mouth by drawing it in, at the approach of danger).
(2) Hfqr^T. 11 The affix 3? comes after the root *qr when in composition with a
word ending in a case-affix. Why do we make this two-fold division, when we
see the second rule is included in the first as the verb *qr also ends in along atr?
The reason is that the first rule applies where the agent is indicated, while
the second rule applies where condition is to be denoted. As atrc^n^HTFPr^
=w*nur: 'a swarm of rats' ; so also ^Rrritar: * a swarm of locusts'.
Both the words qtffcj and afir are understood in the sfttras that follow:
viz : the word *f#fcj in sfttras that relate to transitive verbs, and the wordscfa
everywhere else*
irf^-SfUJ^t:, ( *$f%, «: ) II
5. The affix ^ comes after the verbs qfti*r c to
wash out' and *m%\ 'to drive away 1 , when in composition
with the words y* 'navel' and qfai 'grief, as objects, res-
pectively.
As 5^ <rf^pc hr% 'he lay lazy'. So also $fciR«£?: yit sit*: 'a son, des-
troyer of sorrow is born'.
Vart.— This affix is to be applied only then, when the meaning of the
word to be formed is 'lazy' and 'giver of happiness'.
Vart. — The epithet jwj qftij^r: is applied to a lazy person ; while n*%
ffbtnff: means who clears his navel. So tffaOT^*: means giver of happiness, while
3 flt * M M *i H : means 'removal of sorrow*.
Vart.— The words *gtf*$si: 'a chariot' and the rest should, be In-*
eluded in the subdivision of words formed by the affix *?. The words belong-
ing to this head can only be recognised by their form, there being no list of
them to be found anywhere. Thus lynEpni; 'a chariot', *m**i 'a bow,' qm*J$
[sesamurris', *RV{ (siflr %S) 'a lotus 9 ..
Digitized by
Google
410 The affix tak. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 6-8.
— ■ 1
xfcjnr: II $ N JV^fk II d, ^T-W:, ( **f%, C) U
6. The affix * comes after the root *r 'to give'
and m 'to know', when taking the preposition s and in
composition with a word in the accusative case.
We applied by sfltra 3 the affix qr after verbs that ended in long arc and
had no upasarga. Now begins the case of verbs with upasarga. This debars the
affix *fl^ ; as *#j|f : (VI. 4. 64) 'giver of all ; liberal', <Tftpj*r (VI. 4. 64) 'acquaint-
ed with roads'. The long btt of *r and ht is elided by VI, 4. 64.
Why do we say 'when taking n' ? With any other upasarga these
verbs will take the general affix *r\; as ifcftra*
^fa^T: II 3 II M^rfa ^ftr, ^r:, ( ^fiir, m ) II
^fa: II SPJjrfci, *RIT |t4WWI4lti|: SfR^iTO? 9nit«nft *rcfflr 11
7. The affix v comes after the root w 'to tell%
when preceded by the preposition *% and when the object
is in composition with it.
The verb mix ends in long arr and by III. 2. 3 when compounded with
an upasarga, it would have taken the affix *$![. This debars wn ; as ifcraqr
(VI. 4. 64) 'a cowherd' (*rr ***£)♦
^fa: 11 unitf: Wv >rr%: ari^vrf Jyrcrof *9v*HRft Wfff II
*rftf ^ 11 $cntfri$r. Prefifrfii ****** n
*rf*fan 11 W55? ^fs fftr ^iiwn^n
8. The affix **r comes after the verbs $ c to sing*
and it 'to driilk' when used without a preposition, and
when the object is in composition with it.
The phrase anupasarga is to be read again into this sfitra by anuvritti
from sfttra 3, though this anuvritti h&d temporarily lain dormant in sfltra 6 and
7. as being unnecessary. This debars «f ; of this affix ^ and qr are indicatory
the ^showing among others that the feminine is formed by the affix tft^ (IV,
1. 14)
As t *|*J *rrofir = *nff+*ir+CTt=tfiCT: (VI. 4. 64) 'who sings Sakra
hymns', mtm: 'singer of S&ma'. fern, jjiRift and crppft I
Vart.-r- The affix ^ comes after the verb qr when it means to drink
and only when it is in composition with the words *jtt and jf\% as its object.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cii. II. § 9-3 The AFF1X AC1L 4 "
This is an important modification of the general sfttra. Thus gn*: fem. Quit
'wine-bibber' ; tfhrr: fern, tftyfr 'spirit-drinker'.
Why do we say 'when in composition with surA and sidhu' ? Observe
tf tr*T mcraft 'the milk-drinking Br&hmani'; formed by the affix * and the femi-
nine, therelore, not formed by the affix f but by *?r.
Why do we say 'when qr means to drink' ? When qrr means 'to protect 1
this affix is not used ; as ^TRT 'who protects wine'.
When these words are compounded with an upasarga they do not take
rs^but Hm ; as jjira'trnt:, ottctut: \
Vart. — There is diversity in the Chhandas as to the employment of
these affixes ; as trr UClTCft %Kli\ or fjmr H*fir $*rt **r; <ffilwfoff TOfal 'the gods do
not carry that BrAhmani to the regions of her husband who drinks wine'.
f <<Kgii H H j\ ii < ii ^rrf^ ii **&, swsp^, WW,
^Tf4«n,utni55iwd iir^tfiii^t^HrfHtaros^Urys qftntararaji
9. The affix m^ comes after the verb ^ when
it does not mean 'to raise np' , when the object is in com-
position with it.
•This debars Mm;. The word 3sra<f means 'to raise a load'. Thus
HTi ftfil=M>jfc: 'who takes a share, or sharer* ; so f^l?*: 'an heir\(f+*r* =
j^+U=**:)(VII. 3. 84).
Why do we say 'when it does not mean to raise tip* ? For then the
affix wquvill be employed ; as HTCJTC: 'a burden-bearer, a porter'.
Vart. — This affix comes after the verb o^ when in composition with
the words *rf% -spear*, grr gp* 'plough*, %!%£$ 'goad', ^rft- 'staff, ?farr 'an iron
club', «r* 'jar*, *ti\ 'a small jar', *pj^ 'a bow' ; as jjfc&fff : 'a lancer', W^HTf :
•a plough-man', *C^iT*: 'an elephant driver', *feirt : 'a staff-bearer*, nftTOf :
•a club-bearer', wif:, irftiff: 'a jar-bearer*, q*qf: 'a bow-bearer*.
y<\rL— This affix comes after the verb iff when the word wr is in
composition with it and the sense is that of 'holding' ; as fgrat : 'a thread-
holder*. When it has not this meaning we have f^Wf : 'a thread-taker*.
*itf* * II %0 II i^rf* II W*lfa, *, (**£:, **f*,«TW) N
17
Digitized by
Google
4i3 The affix ach. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § u 9 12.
10. The affix *?* comes after the verb cr when
the object is in composition with it and when the mean-
ing of the word to be formed is descriptive of age.
In this sOtra the verb gv^ has the sense of udyamana which was speci-
fically excluded in the last. The word w^ means the condition of human body
as dependent upon time. This rule applies to those words which indicate the
attainment of appropriate age for the accomplishment of objects described by
the upapada> or the reaching of that age in which the thing described by the
upapada naturally takes place ; as HferfT: ^r 'the dog that has reached the age
when it can chew bones' (lit. when it can raise it up) ; SfT^fT: JT ftRH j pfTC »* 'the
Kshatriya boy old enough to wear (lit. 'to raise up or bear) the shield' ; so that
the verb here has the sense of 'raising up*.
11. The affix h% comes after the verb t*r N (when
the object is in composition with it), the root taking the
preposition **r^, and the sense of the word to be formed is
inclination or acenstomed occupation.
The word fi i ^O^ij means a natural inclination or habitual occupation ;
as 5*nf*: (y^+WfTi%=^«r+Wfr) 'he who has a natural tendency towards
fetching flowers or whose habitual occupation is to collect flowers' ; so also
ITOTft: I
Why do we say ' when denoting inclination* ? Otherwise the affix will
be Wj; asnnnnfrfif-HTrrfrr: 'who brings load'.
3r$: n ^ 11 *n$Tfo 11 ar^*, ( «$% 3T* N ) 11
12. The affix peonies after the verb *ti 'to
•respect*, when the object is in composition with it.
This debars wt£. The words so formed are especially of feminine gen-
der. As <£?rt? 'deserving of respect' ; so also ipwfr, TTvfTff l
wftli
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch* II. 5 13, 14] The affix ach. 413
•■—-"-"—--* — , —
13. The affix «^r comes after the verb c^ c to
sport' and *^ 'to whisper' when the case-inflected words
w** 'a clump of grass' and *tf 'ear* are in composition with
them respectively.
The verb V[ is intransitive and the verb *r^ can take an object under
very limited circumstances, only namely when the object denotes Sabda ; there-
fore in the case of both these verbs, the object cannot be in composition as an
accusative case ; therefore, the upapada here must be a general case-inflected
word. Hence we have read the anuvritti of the word ^ from sQtra 4 into this,
the anuvf itti of the word v&k being inapplicable here.
Vart.— The words to be formed must have the sense of 'elephant' and a,
'tale-bearer*. Thus TO**r<ri)=:**|s3?ir: 'an elephant (lit who sports in cluster of
grass)' 9idJ irafff^qroNra; 'a slanderer (lit* who whispers in the ear)\
The affix h^ is not employed when the words to be formed do not
mean an 'elephant' and a 'traducer'. - Thus w*^ T&X 'who plays in clusters of
grass', snif Jffatt T^ra?. 'the mosquito that hums near the ear'.
1WW, ( 3T* ) II
14. The affix t?^ is employed after the Verbal
roots when TP{ ( weir, is in composition, and t he word to
he formed denotes a name.
As snt+flf+H^ 83 Jfanc: lit. 'who does good*. So also «iff : $*f: I All
these are proper nouns.
Why have wc repeated the word dhdiu in this aphorism, when it was
understood by anuvritti from sfltra III. 1. 91 ? To this the reply is, that the re-
petition of the word dhdtu shows that there is prohibition of the affix ? 9 that
comes after the verb f» in certain senses (III. 2. 20), when the word lj\ is in
composition. The affix «r^ will be employed after the verb $ and not the
affix ?, when jjh is an upapada, even when the sense to be indicated is that o£
cause, habit &c. (III. 2. 20). The result is that the feminine.of jfaTC will be
ttaTCT, and not afanft, which, had the affix been s, would have been the proper
feminine (See IV. 1. 14). *rancr means 'a female-ascetic/ 'a vulture' and 'one hav-
ing the habit of doing good'.
«j$wrci 3fe 11 ^1 u xr^rf* Marfan, ifo, (gfr>*\ )J!
Digitized by
Google
4H The affix ta. [Bk. HI. Ch. II. § 15, 16.
«rrfi?^ 11 Pp& *«§F*fa 11
15. The affix »nr comes after the verb tft ( to lie
down' when in composition with a case-inflected word
indicating location, i. e., in the locative case.
The word ^ (III. 2. 4) a noun ending in a case-affix is understood in
this aphorism. As * ffet = *rjj*: 'who lies in the sky'.
% Far/.— The affix *r^ comes after the verb jft when in composition
with the words <mc$ 'ribs', &c, though not necessarily denoting location ; as
«int#rv*rt xW=»<rnc#*m: 'who reclines on his sides', HltTTO: /who lies on his
stomach', TOFT: 'who lies on his back'.
Vart. — And when the verb jft is preceded by the word f^mf ; as
Vart. — So also when the words grfnt &c. are in composition with it de-
noting agent and jn the nominative case. As swt: xr* =**TFnfRj: I W 1 ^
fW=W*afaro:i
Vart. — In the Chhandas the affix *^ comes after the verb jft when in
composition with the word PrR: in the locative. As fn^ trtf—firfirn 'who lies
on the mountain'.
The letter w of v\ is 'indicatory denoting that there is elision of the
final vowel with what follows it (I. 1 64).
*R© 11 ^ n tn^ftr M ^ : > * : > ( «rfa*rc*> gfa ) «
16. The affix * conges after the verb ^ 'to go*
When a case-inflected word in composition with it, de-
notes location.
The word adhikarana of the last sfttra is understood in this. As ror
^tfr-s^CTTC 'who goes among the Kurus. qirTC 'who goes among the
Madras'.
Of the affix ? the real affix is *T, the letter ? being indicatory, showing
that the feminine of these words is formed by the affix w)\. (See. IV. 1. 14)1 &
^prjjtfi W*<f I. .... .
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 17-20.] The affix ta. 415
fiOB T ^ i qiH* * II \3 U vtfk II f^-^BTT-^T^T^,
\fki-. m ftm *fr *ir*m v&*^fi% ^rWtercwft *r*fit 11
17. The affix * is employed after the verb 55
4 to go', when the words in composition with it are ft*rr
'alms', *rr 'army' and Hr*ro 'having taken 7 .
The anuvritti of the words 'in the-locative case* does not extend to
this aphorism, and hence the necessity of making a distinct and separate stitra.
Thus Piwrc: 'a beggar' (who goes for alms) ; *hnnr* 'one who goes
with an army' ; HifraTC 'one who goes after having taken'.
( w ) »
18. The affix ? comes after the verb a 'to move'
when the words in composition with it, are ^, •wtr: and
mf, all meaning 'in front of or before'.
As 3*: «cft a^rac: 'who goes in front, a harbinger*. So also mm:
TC and mmc 'going in front, a leader'.
*$ *tfft II \<S II q^T II TUT, *flft, ( *$:, W) u
19. The affix * comes after the verb « ( to go 1 ,
when <$ is in composition with it, denoting the agent.
Thus <$: ?ercfir =» %fhn:: 'going in front'.
Why do we say 'denoting the agent' ? Otherwise the affix mi^ will be
employed. As <$*tt tftff* - <$«*: 'going to the east'.
%fti: 11 «4«f«nt 2KdehTWte*w*mr Hffir S& <ir*ac>3 w^sft** ««i*r**RFf i*
20. The affix * comes after the verb ^ 'to
make 1 when the object is in composition with it denot-
ing canse, habit ajid going with the grain (concession).
The word $3 of this sfttra means the final or conclusive cause, and is
not the grammatical S3 meaning agent. «r*$t?* means habit, and literally, the
18
Digitized by
Google
416 The affix ta. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 21.
act of being accustomed to that. MPJ^fa* comes from *^T*fTT meaning 'with the
hair', that is to say, regular, in natural order, successive, and hence favourable,
and agreeable complaisance, acquiescence &c. Of $w, we have jftaranft srwir
'the daughter that causes sorrow ; «rt^^ft Rrw 'honorable science* ; ^Mfrl 1 *tf
•the family making wealth'. Of arafr**, we have W33RT: 'who performs obse-
quies' ; whfiX: 'who amasses wealth'. Of Wjsft**, we have starc: 'who prompt-
ly does what he is directed' ; T^raT: 'who regularly does what he is told'.
Why do we say 'when having these, senses' ? Otherwise the affix will
be Binj. As ^afCTT. 'potter', H*K<*K : 'city-maker'.
WfW^n 11 fitf ^^55^ <p4ii^r<viHH 11
21. The affix ? comes after the verbfi 'to make
when the following words are in composition with it : —
***r 'by day', tor 'light 5 , Pnorr 'night', *w 'splendour', *r: 'light',
*n? 'work 1 , ms* 'end', *tm*m 'endless', *nf* 'beginning', ^
' many', tt*# 'benediction', fe^ 'what', fofir 'writing', faf*
'writing', *fo 'oblation*, h% 'devotion', mm 'agent', fa* 'paint-
in g', *fr 'field', words denoting numerals, ^ir^rr 'thigh', to
'hand', wr : 'day', ^ 'what', «w 'that*, *3^ 'bow' and w*
'wound'.
Both the words 'karma* and l sup % are understood in this aphorism ; that
is to say, sometimes these upapadas stand as accusative case and sometimes
they have other cases, as the construction may require. This affix ? comes
when the sense is not that or cause &c, as it was in the last sfitra.
Thus fcrrair: 'the sun.' The word ft*rr is an indeclinable and means
'in the day time*. There the upapada, therefore, is in the locative case. The
sun is so called, because it makes creatures active in the day time.
So fwrar: 'the sun' (light-maker) ; Orjjrac: 'the moon* (the night-ma-
ker); mfwt: 'the sun' ; *FWRT: 'the sun* (the letter sr is not changed into visar-
ga % as it has been so read in the sfltra) ; ottoc. 'agent' ; arerarc 'death* (end-
maker); ^RRvC: 'magnifying to any extent' ; MTf^inr: 'the creator* ; mijSK:
/the busy' ; «rreftarc 'the speaker of benediction' { fafarc/a servant* ;faft*r; 'a
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 22, 23] The affix ta. 417
scribe' ; fofir^: 'a scribe* ; tri&rart: 'offering sacrifice* ; »ffcf>3ii: 'a devotee* ;
tR***?: 'an agent' ; ftpnirc: 'a painter' ; tf crarr: 'a cultivator' ; trqrarc: 'doing
only one thing', fscff?: 'doing two things' ; f*ran:: 'doing three things' ; *T 5 Hr<M :
'a runner, an express' ; qigeKl" 'a hero', 'a manual labourer' ; *T^*fiT: 'the
sun'; wax: 'doing that'; m^r: 'doing that'; ^pst^: 'bow-maker'; it*<=^:
'causing or inflicting wounds'.
Varl.— The affix sr^ comes after the verb fr when fai^, *h, nf and
*f are in composition with it. The speciality of ? affix is that the feminine of
words derived from it is formed by long i ; while the feminine of words derived
by*?^is formed by longw. Thus fiF3HT, ***rt, **mt and *£3irr; these
words might be said to belong to theanrrf* class (See IV. 1. 31).
22. The affix ? comes after the verb f? 'to
make', when the word *ri is in composition with it, and
the sense of the word to be formed is that of wages.
The word ^Rf means service for hire, wages. The word qtf does not
mean the grammatical object but the word-form *tf ; as Sifof^: 'a hired la-i
bourer' (not a slave); otherwise the affix is an^ ; as 3tf«ffrc: 'an artisan'.
23. The affix ? does not come after the verb
1> 'to make', when the following words are in. composi-
tion with it:— V*i 'sound', vat* 'verse', ^^ 'quarrel' , imn
'praise', fc"enmity', ^"1 'flattery', *? 'thread', 'to 'hymns'
and v* 'word\
This prohibition relates even when the sense is that of cause, habit &c.
The affix e being prohibited, the general affix iro^ takes its place. As .trottm;:
'sounding, sonorous' ; ^stftratt?: c a verse-maker' ; tfftVWK': 'one who foments
quarrels' ; murarn:: 'a writer of GAth&s or prakritee verses' ; *t3rrc: f an enemy' ;
■tfrj^iR:: c a flatterer' ; *£ranc 'an author of sti teas' ; R^r^K: 'a composer of Man-
tras' ; <T?*Krc: 'an author of Padap&tha'.
Digitized by
Google
418 The affix in. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 24-26.
**P*1RS*W** tt ^8 11 *n[rf*c II w*-us$r: f J*, ( «-
^nfwfiiT; 11 fflffTOriftftfii q^^ 11
24. The affix V% comes after the verb V when
the objects in composition with it, are the words **** 'a
sheaf, and *rs^ 'ordure*.
Thus CT**+$+i«r N =set«wR: nom. sing, ssrararfc ; so also ^n^ft::.
VarL — This rule is applicable when the sense ©f the words to be form-
ed, is that of 'rice' and 'a calf respectively. Therefore W^*R : means 'rice',
and TRFplif?:, 'a calf.
When the words have not the senses of 'rice* and 'a calf, the affix b?^
is employed. As ctpror?: 'sheaf-maker 1 , HfrmhK : 'ordure-maker*.
trifrr, ( **fir, r\) «
jfar: 11 ifir tot v^rtt: Softer?**: fT#^: *& *rifc f^swfr wfii 1 1
25 f When the agent indicated is an animal,
the affix n comes after the verb \ 'to take', the object in
composition with it being the words tftt 'a leather-bag'
and tot % master'.
Thus jfaffi:: 'a dog* (a carrier of skin) ; TOTffi:: 'a beast* (that carries its
master).
When the words formed do not denote an animal, the affix wa is em-
ployed ; as ^fifffw:: 'a water-carrier* (a carrier of a leather-bag for holding
water), tntvrr: 'a carrier of his master'.
* H
^Pti : 11 irSqff : wwwrfr- v*& V*ft fcrnri* h
26. And the words «^tf« and wvroft are irre*
gularly formed.
The word qjwrff: is formed by adding the affix f* to the verb qf and
maJffog the upapada end in the vowel 3. Thus liOTpT ^anfa^qflftrff: 'the
fruit-bearing 1. $. a tree'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI. Ch. II. § 27, 28.] The affix khas. 419
The word Hiw**fi:: is formed by adding the augment yj (*) to the upa-
pada mur, and the affix %*$ to the verb >pj. Thus 9TR*rt f**f$ « afffPHft: 'sel-
fish 1 (one who feeds his own self).
The word 'and* indicates that there are other such irregularly-formed
words. As «5%«ffi:: 'gluttonous, selfish* (caring to feed his own belly). s^«?fi::
'gluttonous, selfish'.
27. In the Yedic literature, the affix ft comes
after the verbs **r 'to honpr' b\ 'to worship' *^ 'to pro-
tect' and «m 'to agitate', when the object is in composition.
Thus 'mri? t*r *m*f«T^ (Vaj. San. I. 17., V. 12., VI. 3) ; vuft tftf*
(Rig. Ved. VI. 53. 10) $ ^ *wft <rRfr*TJ (Rig. Ved. X. 14. 11) f**f irtglWTTC,
mroer vM4)«rf^ (Rig. Ved. VII. 104. 21).
^%: qp^n ^c; n injrft II ^:, *«(, ( irifqr) II
itRf^ 11 tsnpiTOd wi^Miriot*w^ ^WNffarymircR^ 11
28. The affix «n comes after the verb ^ 'to
tremble' when ending in fox (III. 26.) and when the object
is in composition with it.
This affix comes after the causative of ^. Of the affix *mj the letters
^ and T{ are indicatory, the real affix is *|. The ^ indicates that the augment
SH is added to the upapada ending in a vowel (VI. 3. 67). The q indicates that
thisisaSarvadh&tuka affix (III 4. 113), and therefore the vikaranas like ^
&c. (III. 1. 68. ) will be employed here. Thus arj^wrfii =*Bqj:tor*: (**JF+tf5| +
^+^jj=?*jpt + ^+*f+*T) 'who awes the limbs' j 9i«rt?ngr: 'who awes man-
kind'.
Vart:— The affix ur^ comes after the verbs wi; 'to go\ 9?: 'to suck', *%
f to strike', fr 'to leave' when in composition with the words *ro 'wind', ^j*ff
<a bitch', Rifj 'sesamum' and rof 'flatulence'. As imw. f iff: 'swift antelopes'
(going with the wind) ; SfPf***: 'a bitch-sucker' ; Rra W- 'an oilman' ; *rcf 3Tf r
Hiqf: 'a kind of bean' (that causes or cures flatulence). The long f of jpf r is
shortened by VI. 3« 66>
19
Digitized by
Google
420 The affix khas. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 29, 30.
WTT-§£t:, (*^f%, ^) II
29, The affix wj comes after the verbs i*r
■to blow' and $ 4 to suck' when frfw 'nose' and wr 'breast
are in composition with them as object.
The rule of yathdsankhyd as given in L 3. 10 does not however, apply
here, For bt is compounded with w^; as («Pr+§+*m=5 wr+ $1+*?"*"
51+ WT 53 wr+*+>f*l+»?+BT) = *RFFvnc: 'an infant* (sucking the breast).
But mirror is compounded with both Uffand5; as «rrf^FT+Mfr+ciXr
= *cr*w +*+**+* (VI. 366 and 67 ; VII. 3. 78) -=qrf%wfw: 'blowing and
breathing through the nose . So alsomfluriTO: 'drinking through the nose'.
That the rule of yathdsankhyd does not apply here, is indicated by the
irregular construction of the Dvandva compound *rr faq f flw n ft :- By rule II. 2. 84.
the word vm containing fewer syllables ought to have stood first ; one irregu-
larity lets in another.
The feminine of *?.*r W is *?.*fa*ft. as the verb £ has an indicatory \\
TfT^Nvetft^r 11 \o h ^rl^r 11 ^mrt-ya^:, % (m&ftrt,
WJT-^&T:, **J ) II • .
30. And when the words wft 'a tube* and
Ufe c fisV are objects in composition with the verbs «rc and
»> the affix wrr is employed.
Here also the irregularly-formed Dvandva compound irnfr^firshowes the
non-applicability of the rule of yathdsankhyd \ for «fir being a fir ought to
have stood first (II 2. 32).
Thus *nfa[wpT: 'blowing through the tube* ; jfe^n: 'blowing through the
fist' ; mffyro: 'sucking through the tube', an infant ; igfeare: 'an infant*.
The word 'and' in the aphorism indicates that there are other words
also so formed. Thus^ftew, ^fi^r:, t!nftw:, mftTTOVTOl'TOi TOPTO,'a
mountain'.
This sfltra is not Pftnini's, but is reajly a Vftrtika, raised to the rank of
a sfitra by the author of the K&sik&. The V&rtikak&ra divides the last stitra
in this W&y: (1) *** *?: 11 (2) mil wii uro It (3) Tlftwrcrt «***?* II (4) wft 5fe
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 31-34] The affix khas. 421
^jf^ JTO %fiw$i: II ^ 11 xn^rfit m vf^, *l$, ^fil-*$T:,
31. The affix ^ comes after the verbs, ** ^to
break into pieces 7 and *? x 'to carry 7 , when preceded by the
upasarga **k and the 'word ^r 'bank' is in composition
with them as the object.
Thus 3gft3;J!f«=3 9giT5^T: 'breaking down banks' (such as a chariot,
river, elephant, &c.) ; 3Hrprsf: 'tearing up or carrying away the bank'.
*fT$ filf: II ^ II TFfjfk II *1-3t£, fill: II ( *\) II
32. The affix «^ comes after the verb fa* 'to
lick* when the object in composition with it, is the word
*f 'the shoulder of an ox' or ** 'a cloud 1 .
As ?f%ft «ft: 'the shoulder-licking cow' ; H*.*T*t *rcj: 'the cloud-licking
wind'.
*fi*r$ tw 11 ^ 11 tr^rfan trftm^, trw:, (**far, ^) h
^r%r: 11 <rft*frcf ireirfs, uRtwii'i ^^n? i^: ia^wnfV wfii 11
33. The affix «ro comes after the verb <m 'to
cook' when the object in composition with it denotes a
measure.
Thus hot q^fa-TOrmr 'a pot having the capacity to cook a prastha
of food' ; so also tftm*re:, wft*W 'a kettle'.
fifcnw * 11 ^ n T^rfir 11 fii?i-^ f *, ( iro, *^) 11
f f^i: 11 fro «ra vrtTOf: *tfisflrc<n<tft: <rt: *m*f3Pft *r*fn II
34. The affix *cn is employed after the verb
<r*, when Pro ( a measured partition* or to 'a nair is the
word in composition with it as an object.
The aphorism has its scope when the words formed do not denote
measures, which was the case in the last sQtra. Thus ftwp«r«rr ilTOaft 'the
BrAhmani who cooks a little i. e a. niggardly Brfthmani' ; TOT* r *r*p£ 'the
nail-scorching barley gruel'.
finnrcri^n;: 11 ^ 11 xr^rfrr u finj-sroft, n^t, (tff$fir,
«* ) 11
Digitized by
Google
422 The affix khas. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 35-37-
35. The affix sro comes after the verb «*, 4 to
strike', when fir* 'the moon* or w*r <a wound , is the
word in composition with it as object.
As fcj?*p: nf : 'the Rahu that eclipses the moon ; «rc?gv; 'corrosive,
wounding the vital parts'. For the addition of the augment y* after the word
»TC«, see VI. 3. 67.
|rfii-?nft: f (w^f%,^n^) II
- 36. The affix *ro comes after the verb rn 'to
see' and ^ 'to heat' when n*$ and ^rarr? are the words in
composition with them respectively as objects.
Thus M*u!+f*l+*m« awjfa**: ; as i^itarar *nr*rn 'the king's wives
not even seeing the sun* (being shut up in the harem, and so having no oppor-
tunity of seeing the sun, that is, they are so well protected that even the sun
cannot see them, much less any irreverent gaze).
So also M W | g r<tq; 'heating the fore-head' (such as the sun).
The word Hfgf is an incomplete or impossible compound, as the
negative %? applies to the verb j^r and not to the word «jf '. This is in oppo-
sition to the rule of samartha pada vidhi (II. 1.2).
<dU*M VK**mi I filWRT^ II ^3 11 *npf*r H w*ran-
Y^^-tnrf^n^^T:, v 11
37. The words w*<r**r, ft*** and <rrfiij*pr are irre-
gularly formed.
Thus wq <nc*fir » *tt*t^: 'fierce-looking' ; pror TOfa =f**W 'delighting
in drinking an epithet of Agni, a flash of lightning'. So qrft jr^wr : qwTFf:
•chilly roads'.
fxi*ra$i w^t ^ntji ^c 11 tnjTf^r 11 fijW"«*r, ^:, ^r*r 11
*?ftf ik\ 11 w|H*<ui nt: sjgjtcjcttt^ h
mW^n fircroft fir* mi
wifif *nr N u *n*^ fan *raw 11
qiftatji * * firjratfr finrtitft Titfnc: \\
Digitized by
Google
Bk III. Ch. II. § 38, 39.] The affiJc Khach. 423
38. The affix *s* comes after the verb ** N 4 to
speak' when fir* or to is the word in composition with it
as an object.
Thus Prt *tffl=fa*r$ 'who speaks kindly 1 ; TOW 'who professes sub-
mission'.
Of the affix isr\, the letters *( and ^ are indicatory ; 15 indicates the in-
sertion of the augment yr (VI. 3. 37), and ^r shows that there is shortening of
the vowel in certain cases (VI. 4. 94).
In the case of fir* and to with q*, the affix ijr^ would have given the
same result as the affix <s^. Making a separate affix in this sfttra is for the
sake of the aphorisms that follow, where this affix will produce different effects
than ^ft.
Vart.— 'The affix ur^ comes after the verb ith 'to go* when a word end-
ing in a case-affix is in composition with it. As Preripft f^ft 'the slow-
moving i e. an elephant* ; fttrwr ?fenft 'the slow-moving 1. e. a she-elephant'.*
Vart.-~ This affix comes under similar circumstances when the word in
composition with *PI N is firfT*^; and the letter is then replaced by the word faf.
As frotTCH *P55ftl = fitf«TH: 'a bird (that which goes through the sky)\
Vart.—ln the Vdrtikas above given, the affix w\ may optionally
be considered as if it had an indicatory ?. The force of 7 is to cause elision of
the final vowel with what follows it. As fa^ir: or ft^'ipt: 'a bird*. So also *spTf :
or gsfir: 'a serpent' (what goes crookedly).
Vart % — fa$r*rcr N is replaced by fa* when the affix * (III 2. 48) comes
after the verb ii^; as fir$«r: 'a bird'. Thus we have three forms: firfir, faf^pj
faflpTl
f5*Mm*lHfllH: II ^<! II M^lft II f^Rf-tp^:, JSJh$
39. The affix ^ comes after the verb *t\, 'to-
heat', when f8^ or tc is the word in composition with it
as an object.
The verb *\ belongs both to Bhti and Chut classes. Both are meant
in the stitra. In the case of BhvAdi\ the verb frrfq* is the causative ending
in fig of a^ ; while in Churddi, all verbs take for.
Thus fa*F«i *iroRi=fCT*ro: (VI. 4. 94) 'one who destroys his enemies',
so also <rc?era: 'one who subdues his enemies, a hero'..
20
Digitized by
Google
424 ' The affix khach. [Bk. III. Ch. IL § 40-42.
This affix however, will not apply when the above upapadas are in the
feminine gender* In this case the general affix HHT N will be employed ; as
Rcvflf mrtfRr «■ firoftanr: 1
*Tfa n$t jn* II 80 II TF^fa II *Tfa, iHf:, aft, (w*) II
40. The affix *sre conies after the verb *r* ( to
curb' when the word ^ 'speech' is in composition with
it as object, and the sense indicated is that of a vow.
The word ur*r means a vow taken according to the rules of Dharma-
: s&stra. Thus *r*fa* WW 'he has taken the vow of rigid silence'.
Why do we say c vow* ? Otherwise the form is ttoot: 'restraining
speech* (VI. 3. 6g).
Hi qg ftnlfollu II »VI TT ^ r " ^ J -^^T*,^Tft-^T: f
(**)* ^^
wrfilll
41. The affix ^ comes after the verbs fffi: 'to
split 1 and **. 4 to bear 7 when respectively in composition
with the words 3O a city* and s* 'air, as objects.
As <jt {nrafr — JTSJC 'name of Indra (who splits asunder cities)' (VI. 3.
. 69 and VI. 4. 94) ; «faft *nir 'the king who is all-forbearing'.
Vart. — So also when the word h*T is in composition with the verb irfi: ;
! t as HT*Jt; 'a fistula in the anus'.
42. The affix ^ comes after the verb ** 'to
rub* when the words ** 'air, *fiw *bank\ w 'cloud' and
ntfta 'a dry cow-dung', are in composition with it as
object.
As *arf *W TOT- 'a villain, a rogue' ; qtgtaror *# 'a river 1 ; trfqtfr fifo
fa mountain 1 ; wtuNror mm 'a strong wind 1 .
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI. Ch. II. § 43-45.] The affix khach. 43$
^Rr: 11 ** icfii *ra t**a* *ri*|yi$* qn: *r^n*TOtTO5rii
ntftv&i 11 OTi*f%^ >rarf*TO*i *u*if%Rr **tanirRr 11
43, The affix *ra comes after the verb v 'to
make' when the words fcc 'cloud', *rfa 'misfortune' and to
'fear' are in composition as objects.
As 5^*»r: 'producing clouds' ; 3CfiNHT: 'giving pain' ; ipt*?: 'frightful'.
Fart. — The tadanta vidhi applies in the case of upapadas like *nr. &c.
This is an exception to the vdrtika under 1. 1. 72. by which, in the case
of affixes, tadanta-vidhi was prohibited. Thus we have wrtftrc: 'who causes
security'.
*Nfifa^j* N *r 11 «tt 11 xr^rf^ 11 *N-fifci-w?t, srw, *r,
44, And the affix *n^as well as *r* comes after
the verb v 'to make' when the words *to 'happiness*, flw
•pleasant* and to 'joy' are in composition as objects.
The word 'and' denotes that the affix ^ is also to be included.
Thus frrare : or tf<tarc: 'propitious' ; fairen:: o^R**sirc: 'showing kind*
ness' ; TO^K: or inf^r: 'causing delight'.
The repetition of the affix ^ when its anuvritti could have been
read into this sfttra by using the word *r 'optionally', indicates that these words
never take the affix z of sfltra 20 though cause, habit, &c, may be denoted ; so
that the feminine of those words is formed by w and not by t ; as w*nc*Hn
qpWfO: 'small beginnings lead to or cause prosperity'.
wftT:, (*sw, gfa) u
^Pfl: II Wfitrmj*? *J**3 HTrt WfaWt* *TO& Hl$ ^frff *BH| iRTOt TORt il
45. The affix *^ comes after the verb ^
•to be' when in composition with the case-inflected
word wftra 'satisfied by eating* and the sense is that of
instrument or condition.
The word '<gft' of sfttra 4 is understood here.
Digitized by
Google
<f26 . The affix khach. [Bk. III. Cii. II. § 46, 47.
Thus ^nftpflW: meaning 'food', literally that by which one is satiated.
•frfljHt H**fr •I^T. Here the word denotes instrument. And wftiWHT: also
means 'satiety', which denotes condition.
*fcr. 11 * 35 * fa *nfi: *rf? sfir vt ****** >*rm*: *frRrt ft** *r* n***
46. The affix ^ comes after the following
verbs when the words to be formed denote a name : — viz.
«[ l to bear r , % c to cross over', ^ 'to choose*, ftf 'to conquer',
*nfi: 'to hold 7 , sft 'to bear', sfir <to heat 1 and f* 'to subdue'.
Both the words q&SftJ and eft of sfttra 1 and 4 are understood
here and should be applied as the occasion requires. Thus f%^*ra 'earth' (that
which supports all) ; *u?t* 'the Rathantara Sftma* ; fftfcRT 'a girl' lit. (who is
about to choose a husband) ; jrwsw 'an elephant* lit. (who conquers the
enemy) ; 3*fw *a mountain' or 'the pole of a carriage to which the yoke is
fixed* ; trwer* : 'Satrunsaha' (withstanding an enemy) ; jpjfvr. 'Satruntapa' (des-
troying an enemy) ;«tfr*T: 'Arindama' (victorious).
Why do we say 'when denoting a name* ? Observe q&*pn?: 'he who
supports his family'.
im* 11 «9 11 t^rfa 11 *mt, % (5ft, ra*n, wk) u
47. And the affix *m comes after the verb
m, 'to go' when in composition with a word ending in
a case-affix, and when the word to be formed denotes a
name.
As *raipr 'Sutangama'. Though the verb it* could well have been in-
cluded in the last aphorism, the separation serves the purpose of carrying the
anuvritti of ipj into the subsequent sfttras.
^tfll^tfl|V€|^<MK4|^H^ ¥: II 8P II H^lfa II 9WT-
wfifii
qritapi 11 st€t eittw 11
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 48.] The affix da. 427
*rfifoipjii PrctWhi
*rRfa* 11 wrorfr*#«*fa ir«tf 11
48- The affix * comes after the verb *pj 'to
go' when in composition with the following words as its
objects :-t-wi 'end', wrei 'excessive', ww* 'road', *£ 'far 1 , <rnc
'across', *i 'all* and wrm 'endless 1 .
The anuvritti of the word ri^rorqr does not extend to this. As ajstfir:
'having gone to the end, thoroughly conversant 1 ; W4?tr<r 'going too fast' ;
WW: 'a way-farer' ; ypii 'going to a distant place* ; q^ir 'completely familiar';
*r$T 'going everywhere, the Supreme Being* ; t^rew 'going to infinity, moving
for ever'.
Of the affix * the letter ^r is indicatory, the real affix being*?. The
7 indicates that the f> portion of the word to which this is added, must be
elided (VI. 4- H3) I as Wfl+*Pr+*=» W*f+^+%? (the fc portion m^ of ^ is eli-
ded). Now though the rule VI. 4. 143 says 'when that which has an indica-
tory % follows, there is elision of the f? of a *r'; yet in the present case, such
elision takes place, although the word n\ here is not one of those called H
(I. 4. 18); because the presence of v as an indicatory letter must not be un-
meaning.
Vart.— The * is also employed when the words in composition are
*rfw 'everywhere* and TO 'creeping' ; as trfifT: 'Supreme Spirit* fqipp 'snake.*
Vart— So also when the word in composition is^jq; 'breast', and
there is elision of its final. As 3^+ir^+S=*iFCJr- 'moving on breast, a snake'.
Vart.— So also with the words ^ 'weir and jr„ 'bad', when, the result-
ing words denote location. As *jif: 'that if* which one goes easily, easy of
access', yr: 'difficult of access, a fort'.
Vart. — So also with the preposition fin^, the word to be formed
yeaning country ; as Rt*t: 'a country'.
Vart. — Others say, that this * is added when other words besides the
above stand as upapadas. Thus snrorer: (5fi , -frWTPC+*PJ k +*) 'who goes to
the women's compartment' ; mw. 'going to the village' ; T[s?n*nr: 'who pollutes
the bed of his guru*.
snfafa *f: 11 *! 11 *^tRi 11 anfirftr, 1* :, (*: ) 11
mttv&l 11 ^n& *r 11
flrfif ^ 11 «ttf ftr *fH * 11
21
Digitized by
Google
428 The affix da. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 49-51.
49. The affix * comes after the verbn 4 to
kill', when the object is in composition with it, and
when benediction is intended.
The affix s is understood in this sutra. Thus fiifif TOPl«iftiftf : 'may
he kill the whale' ; jj*$: 'may he kill the enemy'.
Why do we say 'when benediction is intended' ? Otherwise we have
tHpTlir. 'who kills his enemy'.
Vart. — The affix *toj comes after the verb Wf^ when the word fi*
'wood' is in composition with it, and the final letter of the word so formed is
changed into ?, when the word so formed denotes a name. As jf$ HTffat=
frafal?: (JTJ+Hnpr+wq) 'the wood-pecker'.
Vart.—So also optionally when the word ^ 'beautiful' is in compo-
sition under the circumstances detailed in the last vArtikax as TOfcn?: or
Vart. — So also, when the verb %\ is preceded by the preposition €nj,
and is in composition with a word in the objective case, the affix *nq; is em-
ployed ; and the final is replaced by ar ; as ^H tfsfaf^TOfcNr?: or qp&fartr;
'the alphabet' ; qrtffif tfffal=<T**tW: or <T^*rm: 'connecting the words that arc
separated, an annotator'.
st3 ina*^: 11 yo 11 xppfa 11 an*, jta-tnritt, ( irif*,
■If:, ¥: ) II
60. The affix * ccmes after the verb Vi 'to kill'
when it is compounded with the preposition •*%, and
when the object in composition with it, is the word **J
'pain' or w^ 'darkness*.
As, afCTTO: jt: 'the pain-allayer i e. the son'; (riftf: srjh 'the dark-
ness-destroyer i e. the sun'.
This aphorism has i ts scope when the sense is not that of benediction.
51. The affix foftr comes after the verb f\ 'to
kill' when the word in composition with it is«g*n: 'a
child', or tftf 'head'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI, Ch. II. § 52, 53.] The affix tak. - 429
Thus ^rrc+^+foft = ^n*+*ro+i^ (VII. 3. 54 and VII. 3. 32) »
^r^rrlf^ nom. sing, qgirrcttft 'child-killer 1 . So also 3[frfqTfa*i; nom. sing. tftf-
*nfr 'head-killer*.
The word tft4 is an irregular form of the word ftr^ I
**> (f*0 II
52. The affix^ comes after the verb e^; 'to
kill' wh .311 it is in compos itioti with the word w*r 'wife'
or trfif husband' as object, and when the word so formed
denotes the agent possessed of that attribute (or when
the word so formed denotes a mark).
The word smcr of this sfltra gives rise to the doubt whether it meafte
WWd sfftfft orsmnwrfil vtffc In the former case the meaning will be 'when
the agent is itself the mark* ; as srrar^: *a mole' (a mark on the body indica-
tive of the death of one's wife). In the latter case the meaning will be 'when
the agent is possessed of the attribute denoted by the word' ; as ^nw«^r: 'the
murderer of his wife* ; qfa^ 'the murderer of her husband*.
01 the affix zv^ the letters ^and 55 are indicatory. The s shows that
the feminine is formed by f , and a^ causing elision of the penultimate •? of ^.
Thus ^r+f^+^wm+iH+B* (VI. 4- 98)-iRni?r: (VII. 3- 54).
3nwmn$ % * 11 ^ 11 tr^Tfa " ^-'ro*i-*i£% J % (**,
**: ) 11
53. And the affix &s comes after the verb **
c to kiir when the object is in composition with it, and
when the word to be formed denotes an agent other than
a human being.
As srren^Rfrcrarrcrar. 'the mole* (literally that which indicates the death
of one's wife) ; qfif^sft <wRsj^rr 'the line of the palm of the hand' (that which
indicates the death of one's husband). These two forms were deducible also
from the last aphorism. J[^«qt0 ^ 'honey' (literally that which has the
property of destroying the phlegm), fant^ sjtf 'clarified butter' (lit. that
which destroys the bile).
Why do we say 'when the agent is not a human being* ? Observe
urcrew *rj*: 'a Sfldra' (literally one who kills the mice). Here the affix & w!£
Digitized by
Google
430 The affix khyun. [Bk. III. Cn. II. § 54, 55-
Why is the affix v^ not employed in the following ? ^k^nitfssft 'an
elephant* (i. e. who kills a thief.) Here the word is formed by the affix bto on
the analogy of sfltra III. 3. 113 which allows a diversity in case of kritya
affixes, which diversity is extended in this case to a krit affix.
(m)^t:, ( f*T:, *« ) II
54. The affix **v comes after the verb w% 'to
kilP when the word in composition with it as its object
is weft Elephant' or «rtc 'gate' and when the sense indi-
cated is that of power.
This sfltra applies where the agent is a human being. As ffenf f^g
3CWfT: BS ?feRJT: iTyi: 'a man who is strong enough to kill an elephant* ; so
also vnJ^f: 'a burglar* ( who is capable of breaking open the doors).
Why do we say 'where power is indicated' ? Observe f%<to ffapr ffar =*
tfapmr: c who kills the elephant by poison*. Here the affix is W££
mfavi<Ks*n fijf^rf'r 11 ^ 11 M^ift 11 trrf^- , 5rnr^ l
firf^rf^ii
^fa: 11 qifisnc <irn t**ft u*& RrwM fcrfferfir sntJI: 11
qiM*H 11 CPW WiJJHUH^ 11
55. The words wfim and mr* are irregularly
formed when denoting an artificer.
These forms J*re thus evolved. The affix «& is employed after the
verb ^ in composition with qrrr<U 'hand* *nd are 'a blow 1 as object ; then the
H portion pf *% i. e. *(% is elided, ancj * is changed into q irregitfarly. Thq$
i^%+^+^a<rrfJ!T+f N +«f -ttRett: '$ drummed (workman or handicraftsman);
HHTC: 'a smith*.
Why c whpn denoting an artificer' ? Observe qrrfiOTW 'boxing* ; hottr*
'hammering'.
y a rt:— The word *nre: shoqld be enumerated in this connection ; un-
% ir: *a regicide*.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IL § 56.] The affix khyun. 431
5G. The affix s^pr, when the sense of the word
to be formed is that of an instrumental agent, comes after
the verb v 'to make', when the following words are in
composition with it as objects:— »nw 'rich',*™* 'fortunate*,
*C ^ig\ qftwi 'grey'* TO 'naked', **** 'blind' and fire 'pleasant',
provided that these words have the sense of the words
formed by the affix f**, though not actually ending in the
affix ft*.
The affix fa* ( V. 4. 50. ) is added to a noun when it is in composi-
tion with the verbs »^'to become', *j 'to make* and *ra N 'to be' ; its force b % eing
that a thing attains to a condition in whic'i it previously was not. The
f%V being an optional affix, its sense is two-fold ; namely, words ending in f%?
and words not ending in ft*. Both may have the force of f%f. [In the present
sfttra, however, the words that actually end in to have been excluded, while
words which do not take the affix frr, but have the force of ft* are included
in the present sfitra.
Thus aifw" +*j +*?^= w*r" +^+**^= Mraf *ror 'that by the instru-
mentality of which the poor becomes rich, viz., wealth, prosperity, means
of enriching' ; *i*pniin!J»l 'making happy* ; ctr^f **ro»£ 'by which one becom^f
big' ; (rfsm^tojl 'rendering grey 1 ; H'^l d 'making naked' ; traraftCPl 'mak-
ing blind* ; faifaiiTO^ 'showing kindness'.
Why do we say 'when the force is that of the affix ft*' ? Otherwise
ira?' fhS^ «5$faf *• * Hum^far 'they anoint with oil . Here though something
is joined with what it previously was not joined, namely with oil, yet as the
radical word is not prominent here, the sense is not that of f%* and hence this
counter-example.
Why do we say 'when not ending in the affix f%f* ? Observe HWft
*g$fal H^«T 'they make rich by this'. Here the affix n^ is not employed.
It might be objected : 'well if *&*[ is not used, then the affix wj^ must
be used (III. 3. 1 17) as there is no difference between qq*[ and f«[? s ; both
having the efficient portion 3 ; what is then the use of prohibiting f%q ? We
reply, 'because there is this prohibition, when the affix n^( is not employed the
affix e*? will also be not employed. Thus by implication the affix f$* is also
prohibited. The prohibition of f*?in this sfltra is for the sake of the ap-
horisms that follow'.
22
Digitized by
Google
' 432 The affix kvin. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 57, 58.
P&tanjali observes this prohibition as superfluous, because there is no
distinction between f** and *ot. For the word formed by any one of these
affixes have the same form and the same accent. Nor there is any distinction
in the feminines of their derivatives. For the word formed by *nj, CT*{, f *v» W£
and isinj take f in the feminine as well as the words tiyr and tor. Nor there
is any distinction in their samdsas. For in both the cases it will be nitya sa-
mdsa. . Nor is the prohibition made for the sake of the augment $n For it
being an indeclinable, »|H cannot come after it. The prohibition therefore is of
no use to this sfttra but it is inserted here for the sake of the following sfttras.
Urift H*: f^W\1J*reft II ^ II H7{Tfa II Hflftft, g*:,
f^2\i|*§T> ( WTOTTf^J ) II
*5*T^ {niftf toot hot. 11
, 57. The affixes ftr«q^ and ^^, when the word
to be formed denotes an agent, come after the verb *^ 'to
become 1 , when it is in composition with words *ror &c. f
provided that these have the sense of the words formed
by the affix f** though not ending in f**.
Thus *tt?4**f%*q: 'becoming rich (who was not rich before)* ; an**-
*Hnr*f: 'becoming rich' ; *rH*r*^«CT: or -wf 3f: 'becoming happy* ; Wiorf%*q or
-HT$«K: 'becoming big' ; <rfatfHfiraq.' or HPpF: 'becoming grey* ; ^infa*^ : or
-HTTO: 'becoming naked' ; M^Hf%**lT: or -qrf W- 'becoming blind' ; fiMHfq «i3T: or
-Hflpi: 'becoming an object of affection, amiable'.
Why do we say 'when denoting the agent' ? Not so when it denotes
the instrument. The affixes will apply when the sense of the upapada is that
of fa*, otherwise not ; as an&ft HfifllT 'he will be rich'.
These affixes will not apply when the upapada ends in far ; iTfuft Hfiprri
sq*frR^% f|w 11 ^ 11 u^rft u v&r., «5^%, <^w n
^Pn: 11 *jwhfirr*** H**rmt fewnwnft *wfir 11
58. The affix fi^r comes after the verb^'to
touch', when it is in composition with a case-inflected
word other than *v* 'water'.
By sAtra 4 of this chapter, the anuvritti of the word *rf? is to be read
into this sfltra. It might be objected 'why do we not read the anuvritti of the
word *tf instead of ^Rr, because the verb cx^isa transitive verb, and after
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IL § 59.] The affix kviN; . 433
such verbs, the anuvritti of qrf ought to come by sfltra 4' ? To this we say
there is no harm in reading the anuvritti of *rfir in this case ; because the word
qrfft of the last sfltra is also, in a way understood here, and indicates the
collection of all sorts of agents whether objects, instruments &c, and this can
only be when the first member of the compound is a word in general *
Thus tpr croft =3*3*711, nom. sing. cgtTCT^ *he who touches clarified
butter 1 . *m+fiR*+tf =* *&[ +f^+o (VI. 1. 68)=ej^+o (VI. 1. 67, and VIII.
2. 62). So also *F*tg croft 38 T?**?^ 'who touches with hymns' ; *r#r croRr=
*t5TCI*V ' w ' 1 ° touches wifc h water'. But gf *tt * f ^JjRl=***ft<Tj|: ; here we have the
general affix arc^.
The ^of ffc^ is to distinguish this affix from affixes like fif^r &c. For,
had it been merely ft, then in sfltra VIII. 2. 62. we should have used ft? sTOFTOf
q?:, and it would have been ambiguous, for % might be explained as meaning
both fa and fafy as qra means **^, spn^ &c. To remove this ambiguity,
^ is added to make a distinctive affix. The ^ cannot be for the sake of accent
(VI. 1. 1 17), the verb being monosyllabic would of itself have taken that accent.
59. The words wR^ 'a domestic priest', v**\
'impudent', a* ' a garland', ft* 'a direction 7 and ^sw/a
quatrain* are irregularly formed by adding the affix fa\ ;
and so also after the verbs h*? 'to worship 1 , *ftr c to join 1 "
and *** <to approach', the affix fa* is employed.
The first five words are irregular forms. Thus s^+^+ff^-Sjftf^t
'he who performs sacrifice in the season fa$t) or to the season (3*3$- Thia
word, however isas:/* word in which it is fruitless to search for its etymological
meaning, v^+fe^^^^. Here there is reduplication and the final has acute
accent, (nff^wj. Here there is augment H^. fH+f*^=ff3v ^° aI ^° ^
+ ft^g x +ffcsr = 33<inv A11 thcse are in fact crude nouns > their current meaning
having little traces of their root meaning.
The affix ftj^ comes after the three roots ^, ***% and %v*. Be«t
ing read along with the five above-mentioned irregularly-formed words, there
is some irregularity in the application of %«J to these verbs. Thus the affix
fira comes after «frg only when a word ending with any case-affix precedes it in
composition. As n+w^+f*5*J=m*^ nom. sing, sn^ (VI. 4. 24 ; VII. 1.79,
VIII. 2. 23 and 62) 'east' ; so also frort^west' ; *^ 'north'.
Digitized by
Google
434 The affix kan. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 60.
The affix ffc^ comes after ^fir^ and iipc^ when these are uncombincd.
Thus ipj+ff^s^jj. In nominative singular, Vl+^-^k+^l ( VI1 - l - 70=*
g^;+o (VI. 1. 68) =- ipr (VIII. 2. 62) 'who joins" When the root w^ 19 in com-
position with an upapada, it takes the affix ft^ (see sutra 61). As *n*w^
'yoked with horses'.
So also ?gt^+fi^== ffjrw, nom. sing. 15^, 'a curlew'. The non-elision of
the if (VI. 4. 24) of i£5^ is an irregularity, as this word has been taught in
connection with other irregular words.
Jlp, STITOW^, W9f t *r, ( %w^) 11
60. And the affix *r^ comes after the verb ftr s
c to see 7 whQn it is in combination with w N &c. and does
not signify perception.
The force of 'and' is that the f|pr also comes under similar circumstan-
ces, f^f &c. are pronouns, for a list of which see I. 1. 27. Thus t*r?ft nom.
sing. WV£% 'such-like 1 when it is formed by fa* ; and Wfjj: 'such-like' when
the affix is wt[. So also f!^+?f[+ftj^=i!iCT[ (VI. 3. 91) nom - sin &- **V*l
(VI. 1. 68, VIII. 2. 36 and 62, VIIL 4. 56) ; and niftf: when qj*r is the affix.
So 'nm or instf: 'what-like\
What is the force of the letter ^ of *T*J ? It is for the sake of accent ;
the uddtta is on the first syllable of those words which arc formed by an affix
having an indicatory t[qt \ (VI. 1. 117). But the indicatory sj would have
given the same accent, there being no difference between srr^ and *FJ in this
respect. The indicatory sj then serves only the purpose of distinguishing the
affix *?*J from q(H in sfltra IV. I. 15 in which ^r^ is taken and not *pj. Had
we not formed thfy separate affix, then for qT^r^of that sfttra, we should have
read «F^ ^TJ so that the feminine of words formed by w% would have also
taken long f, so that the feminine of nrf V (TO+qR^ V. 4-29) would have
been *r?*ft instead of *mra?r.
Why do we say 'when not signifying perception' ? See li q^jfir « nftf :
'who sees that'. The words *K\*[, nfl^ &c are crude nouns, in which the ety-
mological sense of the root not being visible, the act of seeing can never be de-
noted by these words.
Vatt— This rule applies also when the words ^ifpr and •?** are in
composition with 3^. 'As *t% or *f$: 'like^m^+flj+ftpr «€T+?*r VI. 3. 89) *
so also •writf: or «T^VT9^ 'of another kind'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. Ill Ch II. § 61] The affix kvip. 435
Vart. — The affix *w comes also after the root fX^. As tiff*:, irpr:,
•i^n^r: and tftfw: \ n^+^+^r« «r+civi- | v* (VI. 3. 9l.)»WCT w +^ (VIII.
2. 36) - W|«*+« (VIII. 2. 41) =mf^+«r(VIII. 3. 59) **m&r. \
^snren, sift, %*?, ( 5ft ) 11
61. The affix f*\ comes after the following
verbs when in composition with a word ending in a case-
affix, though it may be an upasarga, viz :— sni 'to sit', *,
'to bring forth', ft^ 'to hate', ^ 'to bear malice*, *& 'to milk',
3^ 'to join 7 , c to concentrate the mind', fa* N 'to know', 'to be-
come ','to consider', fn* 'to divide', feci 'to cut', fit 'to con-
quer', *ft 'to lead' and o*l 'to shine'.
The phrase 'the word ending with a case-affix' is understood in this
sfitra. The anuvritti of q?*| is not to be taken in this sfltra for the same rea-
sons as in sAtra 58 ante. The upasargas are also words ending in a case-affix
i. e. they arc also sub ant a words Their special mention in this section, indi-
cates by implication (jildpaka) that wherever in the previous sfitras, the word
subanta (a case-inflected word) is used, it does not include an upasarga
(III 1. 106).
The root » being read in conjunction with ft^ shows that •roft class
verb is meant here, and not gflfifr class. The verb ^ includes, both ;jf^ 'to
join' and 15^ 'to concentrate one's mind'. The verb fa? K includes the three
verbs having the sense of 'to know', 'to become' and 'to consider', but does not
include the verb fk\ 'to gain', because that root has an indicatory sj (fa**j)
while all these verbs have indicatory m.
Thus,*^— sgflw^ 'dwelling in purity'; •reifora* 'dwelling in the
skies', 'epithets of Brahma' (Kath. 5. 2); 3TO*l 'serving', ^-h^h: 'oviparous';
*RWt 'bringing forth hundred'; irej: 'parent', ffcv— ftrcrfa* N 'treacherous'; nft?
•hostile'. ^— fir*^ 'treacherous'; n»^ 'hostile' (VIII. 2. 37). j^— ifrj^ 'cow-
milker* ; n^n 'milker' (VIII. 2. 32. and 37). ^~^M^1T K 'carriage 1 ; iro^ 'im-
pulse'. Rr^— tfRr^ 'knower of Veda'; itfk\ 'knower' ; vmfa^ 'knower of Brahma'.
fJf^— IWftn 'wood-cutter* ; nft^ 'cutter'. fl[f N — rsJjftsc^ 'rope-cutter' ; n^gjf
'a cutter', fif — SPjfar^ 'enemy-conqueror' ; *r%r^ 'conqueror*. «ft — *Npft: 'leader
of an army' ; nuft: 'a leader'; wruft: 'head-borough' ; •unifr 'first'. (Why is there
cerebral HJ in these words ? Because the word mmsft has a cerebral or in
Digitized by VjOOQIC
43^ The affix nyut. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 62-65.
sQtra V. 2. 78 and that indicates that these words will have in, as also by stitra
VIII. 4-3)- tn^-fircr* 'splendour'; *nrr? 'emperor* (the letter iris added by
sfttra VIII. 3.25).
This sfitra is a continuation and expansion of sfltras 75 and 76 sup.
mS*t fira: 11 ^ 11 ^fa n vm:> fw, ( wr&i> srfa, 5^)»'
62. Tho affix fir* comes after the verb *n* ( to
share* when in composition with a word ending in a
case-affix whether it he an npasarga or not.
The words 'upasarga' and 'supi* are understood in this s&tra. As t?4£
H^f — M^fHT^ nom. sing. «r#>ir^ 'sharing a half. So also when in composi-
tion with a preposition ; as spir^ 'division'.
«W[f*f ^f: II ^ II M^lfH II *•<(*!, ^f:, faTOT, jfa*
fiflf: ) H
63. In the Chhandas, the affix P* come.3 after
the verb *\ 'to hear' when it is in composition with a
word ending in a case-affix.
The words Npasarga* and *sup? are understood here. As Wt+ftf + f*T
=*JTTOT^nom. sing, fj*r*i? 'name of Indra'. The dental *c is changed into cere-
bral * by VIII. 3. 56, and the ^ into ? by VIII. 2. 31, The final •? of ^r fs-
lengthened by VI. 3. 137. See Rig Veda. I. 175. 2, III. 48 5.
« pt: 11 wrftfwtf* fa** «*** «w# r°ww*r **ft 11
64. The affix r°* comes after the verb ft 'to
Garry Yin the Chhandas, when a word ending with a case-
affix is in composition with it.
As OTfif, 1st sing OT*f^ 'carrying a ptashtlia measure' ; so, f^rer? I
The division of this sAtra from the last is for the sake of the subsequent
sfttras, into which the anuvritti of *?^only is carried and not of «*^ See Ya;mv
Veda. XIV. io, XVIli. 26.
N ^m. u **«* yft* $tf «* r*S* *rrf sapfftr fire* ***Wt****w*T *ifn u
65. In the Chhandas tho affix *l* comes after
Digitized by
Google
Bk III. Ch. II. § 66, 67.] The affix vit. 437
the verb if .when it is in composition with the words *w
c oblation of food to deceased ancestors', yfK 'faeces' and
^r«* 'water'.
As **«W^ : fam&rn (Yajur. Ved. II. 29) 'fire that carries the oblation
to the pittis* ; ^r^hm**: 'carrier of water' ; <Tttuc*ff*: ( Yaj. Ved. XI. 44 )•
The feminine of these words is formed by adding long $ 1
j^jtohtfiw 11 %% 11 Mqiffr 11 fd, «raitf:-*Tqw,
* 4 fti : 11 f>comr ^ni tii^Ri fart if >*Mt***ijHnct wfH, wwnwl *Wt-
66. The affix*** comes in the Chhandas, after
the verb w* 'to carry' when it is in composition with the
word w 'an oblation to gods', provided that the word so
formed does not occur in the middle of a p&da (fourth
part of a stanza).
As tff*TO fewf*?: 'fire, the carrier of oblation to the gods'. (Rig. Ved.
I.44.2).
When this word occurs in the middle of a p4da, or at the beginning,
the form is fs*rer^, which is derived by adding the affix far (sfltra 64). As
fWOTSiiftW:: fiat »r: 'the never-decaying agniot fire that carries oblation to
the gods, is our father'. (Rig. Veda. III. 2. 2.)
^ftr: 11 iwi^Tf *i v* : ^c«i svtf w&Vm finr* fir^mrtt wftr 11
67. The affix ft* (the whole of which is elided)
comes in the Chhandas after the verbs ^ *to be born\
*H 4 fco bestow*, ^ 'to dig', w\ c to pace 1 and *w, 'to go',
when a word ending in a case-affix is in composition, and
the final nasals are changed into long w.
The words SRfa, S<wnf and 3ft are understood in this sAtra. The
verb t*\ includes two verbs meaning 'to be born' and 'to happen' ; so also
fPJ means both 'to give' and 'to worship'.
Of the affix ft^the letter s is indicatory, and is qualifying, as in
VI. 4. 41, by which rule the final nasal of m^ *^&c. is replaced by long w
when the affix fa^ follows, and the whole affix is elided by VI. 1. 67.
Digitized by
Google
438 The affix kap. [Bk. III. Ch. 11. § 68, 70.
As M^+*|V+fte N =WW(Rig. Ved. VII. 34. 16) 'born in water* (VI.
4. 41); iTtur: 'born in the heaven i.e. God* (Rig. Veda IV. 40. 5). So also from
**— iTlror: 'acquiring or bestowing cows' (VIII. 3. 108); ifm tit 1*T Mftr 'O Indra
bestower of cows ! thou art lover of mankind' (Rig. Veda IX. 2. 10). From ^rj
— fawn 'digger of lotus stalk' ; qgrar: 'digger of well'. From n^— *ftm>T 'who
gets milk' (Rig. IV. 39. 1 and 40. 5). From ipj— H*irr HWCHTr^'the leader*.
3?ttow* 11 $c 11 ^nfffw 11 «nj: f snrfc, (3ft, fir* ) 11
68. The affix ft? comes after the verb w N 'to
eat, 1 when in composition with a case-inflected word
other than *ro *food\
The anuvritti of the word 'Chhandasi' does not extend to this sfltra.
Thus wreftl ■» Wtt\ 'eating raw food' ; scttotw 'granivorous'.
But with wr as an upapada, we have wr*: 'eating food', which is
formed by the general affix w!£ (HI 2. 1.)
w^ * 11 $« 11 nqifa 11 war,*, ( «nj: f fire) 11
69. The affix fir^ comes after the verb mt n 'to
eat/ when the word %** is in composition with it.
As iRHsrifr « iR^rni. 'carnivorous'.
Why has it been made a separate sfltra, when this form could have
been obtained by the last sfltra also? To this the vftrtika replies: 'This
has been made a separate sfltra in order to indicate that the rule of rare:? (III.
I. 94) docs not apply here. Therefore the affix Brut will not apply in the alter-
native. If the affix wel does not apply, how then we get the form n^rrf :
which is evidently formed by the affix WD^? The affix s*mr s comes after the
root when the word formed means the eater of meat which has been cut, dress-
ed and cooked'; thus fffeqrv: means a man who eats meat cooked and prepared,
i. $. a meat-eater as opposed to a vegetarian, while qron^ means an animal
which eats raw flesh ; the word *TOT9 : in fact may be regarded as an irregular
form falling under tpftjtrft class of sfltra VI. 3. 109.
£f: WR5 II 30 II 3f:, «*-*:, *, (gfa ) II
^fti: 11 *toWf : ^vtf ^swr^r H*Rr qrenrarerr Sy: 11
70. The affix ^ comes after the verb w ( to
milk' when in composition with a word ending in a case-
affix and the letter *r replaces its final.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cii. II. §. 71, 72] The affix nvin. 439
As qrR^W *[: 'a milch cow, giving abundance of milk 1 ; so also wJj*rr f
. *f£ ^5^9lfta^*|^<t«nft ffSPT II 3^ II M^lfH II TO,
wfo: 11 ^ftff <r*v*W^ idwrj f*W*ir faf ^ wwpft h*Ri *i? # f%** 11
*rfil^ 11 ^**frflirt ratcvfir v*W[ 11
71. la the Mantra literature, the affix f**i
comes after the words *$^,**£ro* and jCtero 1
The above words contain both the verb and the upapada ; the Tact of
their being so given indicates that there is some irregularity in the application
of the affix.
Thus the affix P** comes after the verb **,. preceded by the upapada
*5<! as denoting an agent, while the force of the whole word so formed denotes
an object. As ^nr ipt *?fal » ***rarrf nom. sing. i|<m: 'a name of Indra' (whom
white horses carry).
The affix f«*\ is applied to the verb if *r/to praise' when preceded
by the word **QT as object or instrument ; and then the nasal is irregularly
dropped. As ?3^ffft **vjN? *Hf?r=»^5S[rr^ nom. sing. TOftnpr: (Rig. Ved. II.
39. i.) 'a reciter of hymns, the name of the sacrificer' .
The fbq* s is applied after the verb $nrj 'to give', preceded by <jft, and $
is changed into ¥, the force of the whole word denoting an object. As 5^ tntffei
^t = <i^sn^ nom. sing. *ftn: (Rig. Ved. III. 28. 2) 'an offering*.
Vart\ — The augment *\ is added to the words *$!T*nr.&c. 9 when the
pada affixes follow. Thus before pada terminations nhw* N becomes jtflf*r N I
Therefore its Instrumental dual is jtwtonj, pi. *# irfrf*: I
.The augment 3^ is not applied before 3? ^TPTCtrFT and h termina-
tions. As tfwrfh rfOTrr- 1
qffir v&\ 11 3^ 11 w^tfk 11 sri, n*r:, (fanr, **£) h
jfii: 11 n* wv& waNftfrP*^*** n*fa * * fire* 11
72. Iu the Mautra literature, the affix f***r
comes after the verb *\ *to sacrifice' when in composi-
tion with the word *t\.
As arranj, nom * s * n S* •WW (R ,# g Ved. I. 173. 12) 'name of a Vedic
priest' ; as *# njjt TCHmrrTOT affisr 'Thou art the priest of Vafuna in the sacrifice'.
The division of this aphorism from the last in which it could have been
included, is for the sake of the subsequent sfttras in which the anuvritti of to
24
Digitized by
Google
44<> The affix vich. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 73, 74.
only runs. This word is thus declined :—
sing. dual plural.
1st. 9^m: 9 wwnfh iror*:
2nd. •T^TfST, MTOnft, WTOf:
• 3rd. «OTHT, H^fi^f, •Mtft:
73. The affix fir^ comes after the verb *n
when st precedes, in the Chhandas.
As WTQ*J**:vZ *ffai 'they carry it up with the smr^ formulas', vnm
i s the name of eleven formulas at a sacrifice.
The word 'Chhandas' has been repeated here though the anuvritti of
the word 'mantra' was present in it, in order to include the Br&hmana literature
also.
The fj is indicatory and is useful in including the affix fir^ in the
larger group called (% (which includes ft;^, ftfy faj, fas ), as in the sfttra Hi*irc*
(VI. 1. 6 7 ).
Why has this sQtra been made, since the affix fk\ would have been
valid even by aphorism 75 ? The sfltra has been separately made to show
that it is a restrictive rule here. The form ST*r^ is found in the Chhandas only,
and not in the ordinary literature.
STRft Tf^lTirfalflftlMSI II 38 II M^lfa II 3?T?T:, ^PlH-
>fti: 11 wirrrr^»ft wnw ^syn* ep*% fvrt hPpj **ftr^ *f«ri t*$ff
smsrr H*fai ■wiwrfOTfa 11
74. The affixes *rfM[(^), tf*nr(**0, ^Pf^(^r) and Rnj
come in the Chhandas, after verbs which end in longw,
when a case -inflected word or an npasarga is in composi-
tion.
The force of 'and* is to include fa^. Thus^*r+irf*Fi;=*j*PPT> 1st. sing.
g*mr (Rig. VI. 20. 7) 'one who gives liberally'/ MT*+W+HpT^=*TT**n*^ 1st.
sing. m^TRT 'the name of Asvatth&man' ; «tn+*ifir^=g>ft+*^ (VI. 4. 66)=
&4t*% 1st. sing. fr*ft*T 'having good understanding' ; tf<TT+frf^=g<ffa*T v 1st.
sing, ^'w 'a good drinker'. v^+^r+^rfH^^l!^"^^ Is *- sing. vgrvm (Rig. H.
27. 17) 'liberal' ; ^nw, 1st. sing. enrarar (Yaj. VI. 19) 'ghee-drrnker\
The affix Rr^ is also included in this aphorism. As qftarer +<rr+fi^t=*
^WOTli (Rig. X. 91. 14) 'nectar-drinker'; fpfar: (Rig. IV. 3. 6. and Pftnini VII.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 75-77.] The affix kvip. 441
3. 46) 'beautifully going' ; m^Jta^T: 'an offering of R&ma.' (see sfitra III. 3. 106
and Yajur. Ved. XXX. 9).
m^nhfi ptff* 11 «j 11 xRpfy 11 snq*!:, sift, jvftl,
(ifar, fff'R, *f^re, fir*) II
^ftr: 11 wWtfi' vrj^t^HUMii^lwn hRfj *4fa\ ifa^ frii8 row n**# f
Pr^r 11
75. These affixes viz. *(H*r v ***H- *Pi\i and ft^. are
seen after other verbs also besides those ending in long w.
The word 5*fftr is not understood here. As 04 *j 'to injure 9 +i|fat
= ^r*w, 1st. 'sing, gjcrcf 'who destroys well 1. e. destroys sin or ignorance',
m^+f 'to go , +wf^=»HRl^+^+^ (VI. i.7i) = HTflftt^, 1st. sing, qroftw
•who goes early*. f%+sp^+*fcr<t = f*+*Tr+*'J (VI. 4-4i) as faw*«fc 1st. sing.
f%*ir?r 'who brings forth', anfirntr 'who goes before'. ft^+ft^^t^^VIL 3. 86)
1st. sing. ^ 'who injures' ; as in ^rRr <TO *Hh (Yajur. Ved. VI. 18).
The word 'also' in this aphorism has the force of removing all condi-
tions under which these affixes were employed in the previous aphorisms, that :,
is to say, these affixes come even when there is no upapada. As <ffar, tjfar.
The words 'are seen' in this sfitra show that all verbs do not admit of
these affixes indiscriminately. It is only when we see a particular form that
we can infer the existence of these affixes.
fifr\* 11 a$ 11 ^rf% 11 %*, * 11
jftr. 11 «4wi£*r. *ta$*ft r*rc<rct**v sp*fa *ncrot * Rh t ;h**41 *rftt u
76. And the affix r?m is also seen after all
verbs, whether having an npapada or not in the Vedic as
well as in the modern Sanskrit.
As toot: *** ■» WIWWL(VI. 4- 24) 'falling from the pot'; qi&T3jfalling
from the leaves'; ^ffCi«^Jn»'rifn»IT ; 1st. sing. *ffrw?„ 'falling from a car'.
The fr is long by VI. 3. 137- See Rig. Ved. I. 3. 8.
mi % * lias « *n[Tft n mx, % % (gfir, *ro?, fifl\)H
^ftr. 11 bh ySn^n t mt : w^n* mvmft **fi! fax* 11
77. The affixes ** and ftweome after the verb
wr when it is in composition with a word ending in a
case-affix or an upasarga.
Why has this aphorism been made, when by rule III. I; 4, wr woutf
have taken q> and by rule III. 1. 75, it would have taken Rr^ also ? This
repetition is for the purpose of prohibiting the prohibition, that is to say, the
Digitized by
Google
442 THE AFFIX NINI. [BK. III. -ClI. II. § 78, 79.
sAtra HI. 2. 14 prohibited the sfltra III. 2. 4, and the present sfltra removes that
prohibition. Thus <riftr: and itan: I But for this sfltra, this form could not
have been evolved ; for, with the upapada fpi % the verb *qr would have taken
the affix H\by III. 2. 14.
fafa:, cTTOft^ II
78. When habit is to be expressed, the affix
fofir comes after a verb, provided the word with a case-
affix in composition with it, does not mean a genus.
Thus toJ +3^+fijfir »^qr4tftf^, 1st sing. «mj*? | fft 'who eats his meal
hot*. So also tftofofr &c.
Why do we say 'when it does not mean a genus* ? Witness mfKUPTr-
iFWftnir 'the Inviter of Br&hmanas'. We cannot form mfmJHlH*n41
Why do we say 'when habit is to be expressed'? Witness ^nt H^^r
Wf ifiW. 'he sometimes eats hot*.
Though the anuvritti of the word 'supi' was understood in this ap-
horism, its repetition here declares that upasargas are not included. This is
contested by the author of the Siddh&nta Kaumudi. According to him this affix
comes even with upasargas. As Hyirfirf^ «T3*ftf^0 mftfiw s &c/,
Vart % — The verb m^ in composition with the prepositions *n„ or srfii
should be enumerated as taking this affix. As 3fRffft^, fern, ^qnuftuft , 1st.
plural sfrarfiTO:. So also HWHmflufl , pi. mirarRw I
Vart. — So also when the sense is 'having skill in such and such action'.
As *rnj*rrft 'excellent worker' ; «rr*YRft 'giving liberally'.
Vart~ So also after the verb *j preceded by mr. As ira?rff«r N in
ntrarfMt *?fcf 'the knowers of Brahma say'.
np ft jm i fr n se • ^rf^r u infrft, **nn*, (Ml:) h
79. The affix fioftr comes after a verb when it is in
composition with a word denoting an object of compari-
son, expressing the agent, the sense of the affix being
'doing something like that', that is to say, when th^
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 80, 81.] The affix mm. 443
upapada agent is the standard of comparison of the agent
denoted by the word to which the sense of the affix re-
fers.
Thus to fr ytffft= TO*ftffo[ 'who makes a noise like a camel'; urfor-
nf^ 'who makes a noise like a crow'.
This sAtra applies where 'habit' is not indicated : or where 'genus' is
denoted in opposition to the last aphorism.
Why do we say 'when expressing the agent'? Witness as iftrtrft*
WHfif *rar*r N 'he eats mAsha like apftpa\ Here bi^j is object and not agent, and
hence no composition takes place.
Why do we say 'denoting a standard of comparison'? Otherwise there
will be no composition. As otc: ifrjjfiT 'the camel makes noise'. For the
accents of these words, see VI. 2. 80.
51^ U CO II H^Tfa || *% faTffr:, 3ft, fifrfa:) II
80. The affix toft comes after a verb, in com-
position with a word ending in a case-affix.
The word jpi means a 'vow' as regulated and ordained by the Scrip-
tures. This condition 'when vow is expressed 9 applies to the completed
word, that is to say, when the complete word made up of the root, the upapada,
and the affix, denotes a vow, As wfefWfjrfc^'the vow of sleeping on bare
ground (and nowhere else) or a person who has taken this vow'. ar*ir<j*ffff| ^
'who has vowed not to eat during the performance of a Sr&ddha ceremony.
Why do we say 'when vow is to be expressed' ? Otherwise there is
no composition. As wfef^ ffrft frqrcr: 'Devadatta sleeps on bare ground'.
This sfttra is also an exception to III. 2 78 applicable when habit is
not meant, or when genus is to be expressed.
jfti: 11 wfftp** i|j*iii<r wtitahpi fcjfinwwt wRr 11
81. The affix ftjfa comes after a verb diversely
when continued repetition of an 'action is to be expressed.
The word Wft3** means continued repetition, that is to say, zealous
practice or assiduous performance of anything, but does not mean habit. As
*SI%i<Uftun «n»'OTf: 'the people of GAndhftra are kashftya-drinkers'. sjrror-f-
<ir+farfir ~**r«rr*+qr+^+farf*r (VII. 3. 33). So also ^ftrnfiro stfhntr: 'the
people of Usin&ra are milk-drinkers'. *fhfa:-qrficaft *l*$tt*rr: 'the people of
B&hlika are sauvira-drinkers'.
By using the word 'diversely' in the sfttra, this affix is not applied in
other places, as in the following :— 5**fTOfV: 'a grain eater'.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
444 The affix khas. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 82, 83.
*HT : II CR 11 TRJTfa II *P?.\ (^fir, fifcft:) II
82. The affix foft comes after the verb i% 'to
think' when there is a word with a case-affix in compo-
sition with it.
The word 'supi' is understood in this sfltra* As t&fcwFft 'who
thinks himself handsome'; tftfTOpft 'who thinks himself beautiful'.
The verb H*{ belonging to the 4th conjugation is taken here and not
that belonging to the 8th conjugation ; because the anuvritti of # the word
'diversely' is understood here. In the present aphorism, whether we take the
Div&di or Tanftdi t^ the resulting form would be the same, namely •frf'T^.
Bub not so in the next aphorism, where before the affix ^nj there would be
difference of form owing to the vikarana. i. e., in the 4th conjugation j^
would be added, but not so if the verb belonged to the 8th class.
83. And the affix wr^ comes after the verb tn
'to think' when the word in composition with it is a
word with a case-affix, and when it is employed to sig-
nify thought, whereof the object is self (the sense of the
affix being 'thinking himself as such').
The word WWT means thinking of one's own self. By the word
'and' it is meant that the affix fiufa may be employed in the same sense.
This rule applies where the agent, indicated by the sense of the affix, thinks him-
self possessed of the qualities of 'handsomeness' &c, denoted by the upapada.
As t^NN*?*: or rfffcrapff 'who thinks himself handsome' ; . qfonin « m : or
qff!?*ranft 'who thinks himself learned'.
Why do we say 'when employed to signify thought whereof the
object is self ? Witness tf«fta*r<ft $*T*I** *H**i: 'Yajfladatta is thought
handsome by Devadatta.
Of the affix isn^ the letter ^ causes 5^ augment by VI. 3. 66 ; and ^
makes it a s&rvadh&tuka affix, which brings in the proper vikaranas. The
affixes so far treated of are applicable in all tenses. The others that follow
denote some particular time.
*$ N eg 11 M*ifo ii ^ M
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. 5 84-87.] The affix kvip. 445
84. All the affixes to be treated of hereafter
should be understood to come in the sense of past time.
The phrase 'with the sense of past time' is an adhikdra or governing
aphorism and exerts its influence up to aphorism 123 of this chapter ; that
is to say, these affixes give a signification of the past tense to the verb whose
anuvritti is also understood throughout the subsequent sfttras; see III. 1. 91.
Thus it will be taught in the next aphorism: 'after the verb «n^, when
the word in composition is in the instrumental case, the affix ftorRr is employ-
ed'. Here to complete the sense we must read into the stitra, the words 'with
the sense of past time'. As a?f«r£lrww^=» Mffcretwfa^ 'who has sacrificed
with an Agnishtoma or a five-day series of offerings'.
Why do we say 'with the sense of past time' ? Otherwise these affix-
es will not be employed. As BTfare\$5T ^nifil 'he sacrifices with Agnishtoma'.
q«$ to 11 <i m tr^TRr 11 «*$, *nr:, (fafo, ^%)»
^Rf: 11 *nri*Wr: srorm* fafSpmnft *wfit h# 11
85. The affix foft comeg after the verb ^ 'to
sacrifice' with the sense of past time, when the word in
composition is iu the instrumental case.
The anuvritti of ftj^r and not of ^ is to be read into this sfttra. As
•fftretH^rDff^who has sacrificed with Agnishtoma.' Here Agnishtoma is the
instrument for the attainment of the desired fruit
**fir *** M ^ « t !^Tfa M **fo> **:, (f*fa:) II
86. The affix Raft comes after the verb *^ 'to
kill 1 , with the sense of past time, when the word in
composition is in the accusative case.
As ftgurcrft^ 'who has killed his paternal uncle' ; TPjemfa^ 'who
has killed his maternal uncle'; f^+fofir=:tr^+fcxfa (VII. 3. 54)=tr«r + ftjfir
(VII. 3. 32)=*^ (VII. 2. 1 16>
This affix is employed only when censure is implied. Therefore it is
not employed in ifltf ^ fmm s 'he has killed the thief.
The anuvritti of. the word qtffa of this aphorism extends up to stttra
III. 2. 96.
*%.- 11 ?rorJ^ «RsHjn?$* iFfcgfcft: dwjijwlr HlTn ** 11
87, The affix fon comes after the verb *% ( to
Digitized by
Google
446 The affix kvip. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 88, 89.
kill' with the sense of past time, when the following
words in the accusative case are in composition: wr'a
Br&hmana' f *jjj <a foetus' and */* '"V>itra\
As WG*%> 1st. sing. fWfT f who has killed a Br&hmana'; *J3TVT 'who
has killed a foetus'; wmt 'who has killed Vritra, a name of Indra'.
Since by sfltra 76 ante, the affix far* was ordained to come after all
verbs, and therefore would have come after the verb ^ also, where is the ne-
cessity of the present aphorism ? This aphorism makes a niyama. #. e. the verb
f*j takes the affix fz$v[ only when it is in composition with the words tm
&c. Four-fold restriction is here intended.
(1) When ^ has, as upapada, the words to &c, and not any other
word ; as 55** fWJ 'he has killed the man\
(2) When the words *& &c. are upapadas of any other verb than f^,
then this affix is not employed ; so that* the verb must be $% ; thus iramfrrcri
•he has read the Veda*.
(3) The Rprj is the only affix to denote past time in the case of fj
preceded by mr &c, and no other affix can be employed in this sense.
(4) This is employed only in the past tense and not in any other
tense ; as twr ffcf or ffTOfr 'he kills or will kill the Br&hmana'. This sfitra
anticipates the diversity taught in the next sfltra, and is an example of
**»f use of the affix.
88. In the Chhandas, the affix Gw^ diversely
comes after the verb *«r N ( to kill 7 with the sense of past
time, even when the word in composition with it is
other than those mentioned in the last aphorism.
This aphorism ordains fw<J in cases which are not governed by the
restrictive rule contained in the last aphorism. As >n^fr TOR TOR Hfirify 'may
the matricide enter the seventh hell'; so also f^f r 'patricide'.
Diversely we find also Tigtrnf: and firOTRf.'l
3^.intt, (ft*)*
jfa: 11 mfe* arfajntfs snftfcsWfc Rw^nnlT H*Rl II
89. The affix E*rr comes after the verb * 'to
make 9 with the sense of past time, when the following
words in the accusative case are in composition :— %
fwettV ** 'action', irr 'sin\ 1* 'hymn* and %** •virtue*.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI, Ch. II. § 90-92.] The affix kvi*. 447
The phrase 'in the accusative case* is understood in this aphorism, and
applies to all the above-mentioned words, except ^, which being an attributive
word, of course, cannot take any case-terminations. As *ff?n (VI. 1. 7i) # whp
has done well'; qrff?^ 'who has done all works'; qrn^L <w h° has committed
sins'; ri^^'who has made a mantra'; 3**rj>* 'who has done virtuous actions'. '
This sfltra also ordains a restrictive rule or niyan\a. Three-fold
restriction is intended here : namely, restrictions with regard to time, upapada,
and affix ; but not with regard to verbs. See III. 2. 87. There being no res-
triction with regard to the root, this affix is employed when words other than
these are upapadas. As, Jjrer^T 'who has made Scriptures ; qra$ff 'who has
made a commentary'. The f^ is added to the root by VI. I. 71 ♦
%T^ 3*r: « <» n ^rf^ h%t^, 3*:, (*rifa, flnj II
^fir: 11 *rft *H u <ymi CTftthgfft: fiw^w^fl H*ft 11
90. The affix Rf^ comes after the verb § 'to
press out juice', with the sense of past time, when the
word *ta f in the accusative case, is iu composition.
As, 9)11*1*1 <w ^° has pressed the soma juice, or soma-distiller*; 1st. dual
«ta«*t ; 1st. plural 9****: I
This sGtra is also for the sake of making a niyama or restrictive rule.
The four-fold restriction is here intended, t.*. as regards the verb, the tense,
the upapada and the affix.
apift ^: II ^ II UT^rf* « *****> ^3 (^fa,%*) II
Jfil: II Hlft *tf«iyro? <pTrtafar: RR^lfirtr *wfil II
91. The affix fkr^ comes after the verh f* 'to
collect' with the sense of past time, when the word Hfcr, in
the accusative case, is in composition.
As, Hfirfaq; 'one who has kept the sacred fire' ; 1st. dual tfflrftnk ;
1st. plural »?ftrftpi: I '
Here also, as in the last aphorism, four-fold restriction is intended. '
**Uu«+mwim^ 11 <sr 11 vtfh 11 uriftr, srfr^-grnau-
'jro* (*rW*> ^> fijnr) ii
*jRr: 11 *rt*grr* f^ftS: ****** *i*4t fw£mc*ft m fii H wmtumn 11
92. In expressing an object the affix Ritt
comes after the verh fa 'to collect* with the sense of past
time, when in composition with a word in the accusative
case, provided the word so formed is the name of fire.
The words % and wrfftr are understood in this sfltra. The Name is
26
Digitized by VjOOQIC
44& The affix kvanip. [Bk. III. Ch. IL § 93-95.
expressed by taking the complete word consisting of the verbal root, the upa-
pada and the affix. As ^hrftft^ 'a fire which has been arranged in the shape
of a hawk* ; yrJ^H 'fire arranged like a heron'.
The word i?RHrr indicates that these words are rucjhi words, their
sense depending upon usage rather than etymology. The arrangement of
bricks for sacrificial purpose with regard to fire, gets these various names ; that
is, when the bricks are arranged like a falcon, it is called jifaP^, and so on.
w^iftf* fofkm 11 ^ 11 M^ r fa 11 qpftfiir, t^, ftfitir: 11
93. The affix xfa comes after the compound
verb Rrv 'to sell', in the sense of past time, when in com-
position with a word in the accusative case.
The repetition of the word *tf firr in the sQtra, though its anuvritti
might have been drawn from the last aphorism, indicates that when the object
carries with it a sense of censure on the agent, then only this affix is employed
and not with every and any object. As *taf?*if*Fr N 'the seller of soma plant* ;'
TOfimrRFr K 'the seller of liquors'; employing disapproval of the action of those
persons who carry on these mean professions. But not so in qi«mfqtM* : 'the
seller of paddy'.
jilt HifttM N 11 <sa 11 *nfrfa 11 £&, tyftii, (^pftftr) 11
94. The affix «wr^ comes after the verb f*{ ( to
see' in the sense of past time, when in composition with
a word in the accusative case.
As ft?fpnr x t 1st. sing. TOf^r 'who has seen the Meru'. «Hfrftq»iVH
'who has seen the hereafter.'
Though the affix ^rfif^was valid by sfltra III. 2. 75 its repetition here
shows that no other affix comes in this sense after this verb.
95. The affix mfhu. comes after the verbs ** 'to
fight' and *» ( to make* with a past signification when the
word mpc/king* is in composition, in the accusative case.
How can the verb w, which is an intransitive verb, govern an object ?
It is a transitive verb, inasmuch as it is taken to be a causative verb, with the
fig^ affix late # nt. As TORp**,, 1st. sing. mrgurr (VIII. 2. 7) « w ho has caused
the king to fight' ; U9f^f^r v 1st sing. *nffro(VI. 1.71.) f who has made a king'.
Digitized by
Google
BK. III. Ctt. IL § 96-IOO.] THE AFFIX DA. 449
*% * 11 <$ 11 infill 11 *%, % (jfa, v*:, *f*w) u
96. The affix **fr«r comes after the verbs ** and
V, with a past signification, when the word *? 'with', is in
comi)osition.
The word mf, being a particle, and not denoting a substance, is incap-
able of taking any case. As *r$*[«^r v 'who has made to fight with*; *Tf«FW N
'who has done any thing along with another 9 .
*jmri *ft$: 11 <ss 11 tr^Tf% 11 *jrot, *ft:, *: h
97. The affix * comes after the verb *pt n 'to be
produced 7 , with a past signification, when the word, in
composition with it, is in the locative case.
As3TO?5rrn:=a^mni: 1 *T^+3=»^+aT(VI. 4. 143) »n 'born of the
first conception'; «i?*iii: 'born in the stable*.
Mq+*uH*u*ft ii <s 11 xr^rf^r inr^n**, sniT^ft (*ft:,*:)ii
98. The affix * comes after the verb *it n) with a
past signification, when the word in composition with it,
is in the ablative case, which does not denote a genus.
As ^fqpi: 'born through understanding' ; *fcq»Kq :'born of habit'; JfSPf:
'born through pain'.
Why do we say 'when not denoting a genus' ? Observe ffaret *im:
'born of elephant'; *rqreim: 'born of horse'.
****? n wrt^ii <« 11 tr^rfa 11 *wr, % ^wtttpt,
(*%:, wO 11
^r?r: 11 sro*f ^nt *tf*: Jwnit *r*rfir tfin^rt firctf u
99. The affix * comes after the verb *n. with
a past signification, when an upasarga is in composition
and when the sense is simply appellative.
The term here being simply appellative, and not descriptive, cannot be
explained by giving the signification of its component elements. As mrr:
'people', or 'a son'; as in the sentence Mtf *n mnH TOf: I
v&r w¥k u \oo 11 Tnsrflr 11 snfr, **f%, (*|3*:, *:) ||
100. The affix * comes after the verb *% with
Digitized by
Google
45° The nishtha affixes. (Bk. III. Ch. II. § 101, 102.
a past signification, when the root takes the preposition
*3 and is compounded with a word in the accusative case.
As ;<Pprr 'a girl born after the male child i % e. a girl having an
elder brother 1 ; c***^*: 'a boy born after the female child 1. e. a boy having
an elder sister'.
(*fc: 9 *:) II
*f%: ii H^ nr t ywt^ whsr^ *&& ***** pcw# II
101. The affix * is seen to come after the verb
*flr K with a past signification, though it be in composition
with other nouns, having cases other than those mention-
ed in the previous sfttras.
Thus the locative case has been dealt with in s A tra III. 2. 97 ; but the
affix comes when the upapada has any other case than the seventh. As * urart
=3 wr : 'unborn'; ffcfrm: « for 'twice-born'.
Thus, it is said in sfttra III. 2. 98 that the upapada may be in the ablative
case, when genus is not denoted. We see, however, the affix employed when
genus is denoted. As KWrcmt **: ; ^rfircpc ^FU
It is declared in sQtra III. 2. 98 that when appellative is meant, the affix
* comes after the compound verb ip^. We find, however, the affix employed
when the sense is not simply appellative ; as Hftiir: or qfHir: 'born or produced
all round 1. e. hair'.
It is declared in sfltra III. 2. 100. /When an object is in composition
with the verb M*ir* this affix is employed'. But it may also be employed
when no object is in composition. As M^ir. 'born after i t. younger brother*.
The force of the word *rfqr 'thpugh' is to free this rule from all restric-
tions and conditions. So this affix comes after other verbs and other cases
in composition with such verbs. As ^ftn: *n?ir » *ft*IT 'a moat' (literally that
which has been dug all round); new 'a pond'.
Itot n \o^ 11 xr^rf^r 11 (tot, (*w0 m
102. The affixes called fk**t come after a verb*
al root, employed with the sense of past time.
The affixes *r and ***f[ are Pro (I. 1. 26). As ^+*r-wpiw 'made';
^+^Hj «^fww, 1st. sing. ^jfwrPTjdone'; so also ^iff^and ^^wnr^ 'eaten'.
part.— The Nishtha affixes come when ddi-kartna is meant. For a
fuller description of what constitutes ddi-karnta see sfttra III. 4. 71, and the
illustrations under it r Thus napi: mi &(**•> •I^WIT.V* 9*W> I
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. ^ 103-106.] The affix jcanach. 451
yfr i lqftin i \o\ 11 n^f* 11 3-n3tT$, **fSroii
103. The affix ^jrf^n comes after the verbs g 'to
press out or extract juice' and **{ 'to sacrifice', with a past
signification.
As f£+^*flPl««ni+** (VI. 1 7i)***jm m 1st. sing. gur 'who has
pressed out or extracted juice* ; *3CT K , 1st sing, *rorr 'who has sacrificed'. The
a is added by VI. 1. 71. See Rig. Ved. I. 3. 1.
tftiffo** 11 \o* 11 xrtf* h «ifcHfc, 3*5*, (*fc) 11
104. The affix wr comes after the verb *j 'to
grow old' with the sense of past time.
As ir + naPT =» **;+*** (VII. 3. 84) - n*^, 1st, sing. *rc% 1st. dl. *K9& t
1st. pi. arr^t: 'grown old' (VII 1. 70).
By the rule of otpkt (III 1 94)» the NishthA affixes also come after this
verb. As *fftd: and iftofrpjl *[+*ff=»flf^+fl (VII. 1. 100 and 1. 1. 51) «fti^Hr
(VIII. 2. 42)=ifh5 (VIII. 2. 77 and VIII. 4. 1) 'grown old'.
*?*fo f*rc 11 \o^ 11 xi^Tfw 11 **ffo, ftrcr, (jrfc) n
. ^fa: 11 ei^ftr Pre* wilrRfe N «Twnft *r*fii 11
105. In the Ohhandas, the affix for comes
after a verb with a past signification.
As iff *£**raft irft 'I saw the sun from both sides' ; •?§ nmtflpft
HKPtFT 'I stretched the heaven and the earth'. Here the words ffrf and wmPT
have the force of nishthft. See Yaj. Ved. VIII. 9.
Why this separate stitra, when by aphorism III. 4. 6i, in the Chhandas
the lufi, lah and /// come in all tenses ? That rule is made with regards to two
or more verbs when in syntactical relation (Wfftff?*) with each other (III. 4. 1).
The present rule is general, and without any such limitations.
Lit is the affix of the Present Perfect and will be fully treated of in the
conjugation of verbs.
fa*: WPTTOT II \0$ II ^Tfa II fa*:, *T*r* , *T* (v^ft)ll
^fa: II Bp*f% f5TC: afrPntfttft H*f*l IT II
106. In the Ohhandas the affix fa* is optional-
ly replaced by the affix *pt^i
As •*&* fiwnr: 'he consecrated the fire'; *JN q^wmj: lie pressed the soma
juice'. This being an optional affix, is sometimes not employed ; as in the
examples in the last aphorism.
27
Digitized by VjOOQIC
452 The affix kvasu [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 107-109.
Why has the word /// been repeated in this sQtra, when its anuvritti
could have been drawn from the last sfltra ? The substitute «Fr^ replaces not
only the special fei^ of sfltra III. 2. 105, but the general fsr^ which comes after
the roots in forming the perfect tense ; so that the affix «pr^ forms verbal ad-
jectives as well as the perfect tense.
This affix comes after those verbs only which take Atmanepada termi-
nations. See I. 4. 100. imwr (Rig. Ved. I. 3. 6).
15s 11 \os 11 ti^rfw 11 w**t, % (*F*ffa, fa* :) n
107. In the Ohhaudas the affix wib is option-
ally the substitute of fa* N .
As 9if?ra^ 1st. sing. n%^P( 'eaten' (Yaj. VIII. 19) ; qfirf^ 1st. sing,
qfa*P{ 'drunk*.
Sometimes it does not come, as in the example under sfttra III. 2. 105 ;
The division of this sfltra from the last, in which it could well have
been included, is for the sake of the subsequent sfttras, into which the anu-
vritti of 9ff£ only runs,
(f^rar:, wwst) 11
^fa: it mi to m ******•' qrrwforft *reRrf ftvt wr **rtf*ft H*fiNi
108. In the modern Sanskrit, the affix *f*r
optionally replaces fifi? N after the verbs *\> ** and * with a
past signification.
This being a substitute only, the original affix finr % also comes after
these verbs. As, 34flfqq i ^ &m: qrforfin^ 'Kautsa served PAnini'. In the alter-
native, the proper affixes of the past tense will be employed. As 3TOTV«'he
served' ; 3qrfft« and 3TOtrr*.
So also •FjRf*PC N q?W: qffojPn^. In the alternative we have ivtwcfrr,
. iv^ro* and iFcrrcr.
So also *mj*J*Pr N sftw qtfqrf^. In the alternative we have wihfty
vnrnsflf^and ¥qf[MW.
The affix **€j is employed with the force of 91^ and fti^also.
^ Ptei«H i »flM*t q M« 11 wt ii Mg i fii 11 *9f**TT-
w m w ^•ijwif •> W 11
109. The forms rtf**rt wnw* **w\ are irregu-
larly formed.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. UL.Cit. Hi § no.] The. affix lun. 453
These forms are thus evolved :— To the verb f 'to go* with the pre-
position VT, the affix w| is added: as W+f +?rr^. The root is reduplica-
ted: as VT+f+f +WJ. The reduplicate is here longf by VII. 4. 69. This
long f does not coalesce with the short f by the rules of sandhi ; for then the
rule by which this f was introduced would have no scope. Now we add the
augment f* K contrary and in opposition to the rule VII. 2. 6y. and this is the
irregularity. As w+f +f +f? N +WH- Then the root f is replaced by * by
sfttra VI. 4 81. As OT+f +^+f? s +w^=*OTRnr^ 1st. sing, rffcrpr. The aug-
ment %* s is however dropped in those cases (*r) where to n is changed into ^ ;
because the insertion of ^ was itself an exceptional case of limited scope :— for
while the general rules VII. 2. 75 &c. ordained it, the special rule of VII. 2. 67
prohibited it ; and it was by prohibition of this prohibition that f? was em-
ployed before nq. Therefore in accusative plural we have s^yr: ; instrumental
sing ?3*qr &c
This irregular participle is not limited to the upasarga 3? ; we find
such irregular forms with other upasargas and without them also; thus wftfr?r%
and f fiWT as well.
By the anuvritti of the word qT read in this aphorism, we have suf &c.
in the alternative. As in Aorist wmTfr, Imperfect sfc^, Perfect s^nr I
The word afTr^FJ * s t * lus f° rme d ' — To the verb W£ 'to enjoy* we add
the negative particle w ; apply the affix q*3 and donot insert the augment |? N ;
so, we have *FT+*ttl+3?3 ea 'Fma^, 1st. sing. ntt^. In the alternative we
have Aorist rrncfhf , Imperfect srmnjand Perfect *rncr.
The word *t*jjipt: is thus derived : — The affix sffpr^( 5s added in expres-
sing the agent to the verb ^r preceded by h^. In the alternative we have
Aorist H9ff^ Imperfect H**lrfta N i Perfect *?%!tt*r.
*W II \\0 II M^lPl II *[¥, (jJO II
*iPisi^ 11 1^*53^ *rf*ratf smrcGra^rofr *w. **•• 1 1
110. The affix 5^ comes after a verb in the
sense of past time. •
The *rr forms what is known as aorist. It is in fact the n ame of the
aorist, as the whole of this affix is replaced by other personal terminations.
See III. 1. 43 and subsequent sAtras.
'The aorist has reference to a past time indefinitely or generally, with-
out reference to any particular time. An action done before today is express-
ed by the perfect or imperfect ; whatever remains for the aorist is, therefore, to
express a past action, done very recently, say, in the course of the current day
or having reference to a present act. Aorist, therefore, merely implies the
completion of an action at a past time generally ', and also an action done at a
Digitized by
Google
454 The affix lun. [Bk. HI. Ch. II. § in.
very recent time, as during the course of this day. The imperfect and perfect
are used in narrating events of past occurrence, generally in remote past time ;
the aorist is used in dialogues and conversations which refer to recent past
actions, but it is not used to denote past specified time or to narrate events'. —
Apte's Composition. As •r^nrf^ 'he did' ; Hjpff^ 'he took*.
Vart. — The affixes? comes after the verb q^'to dwell', when 'end
of the present night* is indicated. Supposing a person rising from his bed at
the proper time of rising (not In the middle of the night, but in the early morn-
ing) and finding another near him were to ask that one, 4 where did you dwell
*. e. pass the night' ? That person so asked should answer in the sjc^ and not
in ot?. As nynqrart 'I dwelt there'; and not ntpmraPfc
Vart.— -The above rule applies only in connection with waking after
regular sleep. He who has not slept the whole night, but only for half an hour
or so, should reply wpriTO^
smsjs^ *r» u \\\ ii *ncrfa 11 ^ra^, mv> (*rct) n
irftf^ 11 <rct*if ^r <Htarq9i9 sr^^wNfcrq ot^ *■***: u
111. The affix mw K comes after a verbal root
employed in the sense of past before the commencement
of the current day.
The word •FrauH' is a Bahuvrihi compound, meaning that which has
not occurred during the course of the current day (adyatana). The whole of
this affix is replaced by conjugational terminations, and the affix w«f by itself
denotes the Imperfect tense. As iroftfi/he did'; m*C*1 'he took'.
Why have we explained anadyatana as a Bahuvrihi compound ? Be-
cause when there is a doubt as to the time, whether it was to-day or yester-
day, there the Imperfect should not be used. As w *ft wr ifwv^ff *we ate
to-day or yesterday'. In such a case the affix is q^.
Vart :— The affix 5^ is also employed in signifying what is not wit-
nessed by the narrator, when it relates to a well-known public event which can
form the object of perception by the narrator. Thus in speaking of a recent
public occurrence we may say :— «rou^ ***: «nfeP(.'the Yavanas have besieged
S&keta'; *?*tu* *m\ mwrfifcKT* 'the Yavanas have besieged M&dhyamika'.
Why do we say 'not witnessed by the speaker*? Observe sfHT^wfirw
•the sun arose'. Why do we say 'a popular public event* ? Observe ^rh: nrr.
$W. 'Devadatta has made the maf . Why do we say 'which is the object of
perception by the speaker' ? Observe wm *tt fa$C *igt*: 'V&sudeva killed
Kansa*.
wf^mra^ t^ii ^ ii ^n^rf^f h «rf^«T-Ti%, ^
faft, «ro«ro*) ii
v «s
Digitized by
Google
Bk III. Cih II. § ii2, 114.] The affix lrit. 455
112. When a word implying 'recollection* is in
conn cc bio 11 with it, a verb takes the affix *j* (2nd future)
in the sense of the past before the commencement of the
present day.
The word itftlfr means 'recollection'. This rule sets aside the affix
*ry. As *?ft?rPTrf% ?*?rt tropft^ WW*: 'rememberest thou, Devadatta, we
were dwelling (lit. we will dwell) in Kashmir'.
The word q*R meaning 'signification* in the sAtra, denotes that the
construction is the same when the synonyms of arfH<it are used ; as wftf 'dost
thou remember' ; y.^ 'dost thou know* ; <&rcro 'dost thou reflect'; and the like.
1 v$% 11 ^ 11 tr^Tft 11 n, ^f^, (^rf^ra^, *[*) 11
113. The affix «fr (the 2nd future) is not appli-
ed in the sense of the past, when the upapada donoting
recollection has iu connection with it the particle v^.
This prohibits *j£ which the verb *sr obtained from the last sfttra. As
MfifUPUfa' $***t *HJ *n[*ft?«*WT 'thou rememberest Devadatta how we did
dwell in Kashmir*. Here the mere fact of dwelling is recollected, there being no
other idea implied ; therefore the subsequent aphorism has no scope here. That
aphorism has its scope, when with recollection, is added another dependent idea
or action, without which the sentence is not complete.
fam*T *rot% i» \\* 11 *^rft 11 fanm, *i*Hi, tyc,
«PffmsR%) 11
114. The affix sj* is optionally applied in the
sense of the past, when a word implying 'recollection* is
in connection with it, and whether snch word has the par-
ticle ** or is employed simply; provided that the two
verbs, occurring iu the same complex sentence, are so
connected together, that each is necessary to the other,
to complete the sense of the speaker.
. The word frrarrc^TT means the relation between the sign and the thing
signified, wished for or wanted by the speaker, or in other words, when the first
verb is related to another verb used in the same sentence, as a sign is to that
which is indicated by the sign. As •rfHJTTCTRl 9^%fi *T*#a* N Tpt«*nT:, tiw 9*r*
23
Digitized by
Google
456 The affix lan. [Bk. III. 'Cn. II. § 115
qrwr or NPnrprrRf f^f^r aintfftr^ t^^pt, «w s*ir* fwr, 'do you remember
Devadatta we went to Kashmir and there did drink Saktu'.
This option is allowed whether the particle ^ is or is not used. As
affHUTTTfil t**^f TT mtf tn* nfir^lR: (or qQ 4iVil<K ip^SCPT,) ^ *w$* Hl*«n«i£
(or *rcr <f*fhFTf ^Sfafif) 'Do you recollect, Devadatta how we went to Kashmir
and how we ate rice there*.
In the above examples, the verb 'to go* is the sign, and the 'eating' or
'drinking', in the second sentence, is the thing really signified ; the first verb is
necessary as an introduction to the thought of the speaker which dwells more
upon the second verb. Here the second sentence or proposition is used as com-
pletion or complement of the first proposition.
*rertr %? 11 \y 11 v^jfk 11 xrc^fsrc, (jft, sTTspsft) 11
115. The affix fa? comes after a verb in the
sense of the past before the commencement of the cur-
rent day and unperceived by the narrator.
The word qffoT 'unperceived* qualifies the words *%j 'past* and MTO*FT
'non-current day' understood in this aphorism.
'Well, are not the senses of verbs all unperceived, since they are mere
words, and words cannot be perceived? Exactly so; but in popular phraseology,
the perception is imagined to attach to the agent with regard to certain verbs;
this rule relates to cases where such perception does not take place. As,
^2ffPC 'he did* ; s^TC 'he took'.
'It is evident that the fm^ (perfect) should not be used in the first per-
son, #. c. when the agent of the action is the speaker or writer himself ; for it is
impossible that the action should not have been witnessed by him. But if by
reason of some distracted, unconscious or absent state of mind, it is possible
for the agent to speak of the action as one, of which he was not a conscious
witness, the perfect may be used even in the first person. As igtitflf firar E l <H^m
'indeed I prated while asleep*.
Vart : — The perfect should be employed (in denoting past time simply,
whether of the current day or otherwise, and whether the action has been wit-
nessed personally or not) if the sense is total denial of the action. As qrfcf^
fwffrRr ? TN? ^ffsrjp^ *m* 'did you live in the Kalinga country ? I did not
even go to the Kalinga country'; fftnOTTO fffaffrfe ? TT* fftflUTTO *fa*JJ.
snrowS, tret$, fa*) 11
Digitized by
Google
Br. III. Ch II. § 116-118.] The affix lat. 457
116, And the affix wr N comes after a verb when,
the particles * and *r*^ are in connection with it, and
when tho verb denotes past action 11 u perceived by the
speaker, and before the commencement of the current day.
The force of ^r 'and* is that the affix fe? N (perfect) may also be employ-
ed in similar construction. As f fir frarcf^ (imperfect), or f fit $ ^rcrrc (perfect)
'Alas 1 he did it*. $p***rtt^ or jpq^reKTC 'again and again he did it*.
TC& ^*TO*«RT$ II ^3 II T^Tfa II XR^, % 3TTO*TOT$,
(£$, vHHi|W^, *tf^, ^TSF, f*TC) II
117. The affixes era? (imperfect) and f^ (perfect)
come after a verb (in expressing a past time not belong-
ing to the current day and unperceived by the speaker)
when the past time referred to is recent, and the sentence
is interrogative.
This stitra also qualifies the words >m, aiTOSPT anc * l ^r understood in
this sfttra. The word im means 'what should be asked'; and BTi qqah lgc 'time
close at hand' : As, some one may ask another, nir*lg? % tav<l: or *rmr $***r:
'did Devadatta go or has Devadatta gone (just now)'? s^ taq*r: or % mn
f ^tT: 'Did Devadatta sacrifice or has Devadatta sacrificed?
Why do we say 'in asking question*? Otherwise there would be Per-
fect tense only. As, wttH f **W 'Devadatta has gone*.
Why do we say 'when the past time referred to is imminently recent'?
Observe **?* S*S[rf*r, sWT «r3 fare? *r^W 'I ask you, did Krishna indeed kill
Kansa in days of yore'.
*r? ^ 11 \\* 11 t^Tfa m *rc> ^, (^, wr?r^, *«t%)n
118. The affix 5T? N (present) comes after a verb,
when the particle w is in connection with it, (and de-
notes a past time not belonging to the current day and
unperceived by tho speaker).
All the words within brackets are understood in this aphorism Thte
debars f§FC? N or the perfect tense. Thus *nrfif w ^fafifc: 'Yudhishfhira sacrificed';
so also ?t^t * i <jrrofaff 1 sunrr w qntftatf 11
*^, snr)u
Digitized by
Google
45& The affix lat. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 119-122.
119. The affix sr* (present) comes after a verb
when the particle w is in connection with it, and denotes
a past action not belonging to the current day, and when
the action is perceived by the agent.
As ^f w fair ipftfir 'thus said the father* ; f Ri SHPrrwnr*: *itprfti 'thus
said the preceptor'.
120. The affix *r* is employed after a verb in
denoting past action, when the word *% is in connection
with it, and an answer is given to a question.
The anuvritti of the words 'anadyatana* and 'paroksha' does not ex-
tend to this sGtra. This declares a rule with regard to past time in general.
This debars 5|* s (the Aorist tense). As Wffntf : to 9m* ?— H% qrrtft $1: 'Deva-
datta, did you make the mat ? O, yes, I did make it*. atftTC!* %f^ frmr,— 1J
wUfa *ft: 'Devadatta, did you speak there anything? O, yes, I did speak 1 .
Why do we say 'in reply to an interrogation* ? Observe h^<^1m7^
TTOTTOi: 'certainly, Manavaka did it'.
*l**tf$m*T II ^ II x^[Tfw II *-*ft:, fWT^T, (*W*, *IB-
^f*r: 11 hv$ 5^ «*m? t gnfiNqfl firaror tiHwnfr H*fH >$ 11
121. The affix *r* comes optionally after a
verh, in denoting past time, in reply to an interrogation,
when the words *r 'not' and 5 'what of that' are in connec-
tion with it.
As, wot?: *R? w**r— n Wpttfr *: or sfWT*^;— m 3 **tft or vtf **m$\
'Devadatta, did you make the mat ? — No 1 did not ;— what of that, I did*.
3ft 5V ^T^ II ^R H ^[Tfw II ^fT, 5^, % ST**, (JR|,
<HH£|?I*I, "fifaT^T, f!rc) II
122. Optionally the affixes ^ and 5f* come
after a verb, in denoting past time not belonging to the
current day, when the word s*r is used in the sentence,
provided that the word w is not used.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 123, 124] The affix SANAC& 459
The anuvritti of the word anadyatana which had come to a stop with
III. 2. 120 manifests itself again in this sfltra by a process of jumping over the
two intermediate aphorisms. This sort of anuvptti is technically called man-
duka-pluii 'the leap of a frog 1 i. e. skipping of several stitras and supplying
a word from a previous stitra.
This is an optional rule, so that when lat and lun are not used, the
proper tenses, as the case may be, must be employed. As rotiftf 3CI Sfl*T-
•the pupils lived here formerly'. So also, Aorist, wrc$: jn Bflwr. J Imperfect,
•rorfir* 5*r ^mr: ; Perfect, «^ftf jn scwr: 1
Why do we say 'when the word w is not used' ? Observe *nfir ct jn
^fafe*: 'Yudhishjhira did perform a sacrifice • formerly '. Here rule 118 ante
exerts its influence.
123. The affix m*. comes after a verb when de-
noting a present action.
The word rffTT means that which is begun and which has not yet
come to an end. The action denoted by a verb in the present tense is yet con-
tinuing and has not stopped. As T«rf% 'he is cooking'; qvfti 'he is reading 9 .
So also whatever is constant, regular, uniform, is represented by the Present In-
definite. As flrcrfcr ffctf: 'the mountains stand'; mfai «ro: 'the rivers flow'.
*rcr: «^aiM^inH^^m4iHifvw<% 11 ^p. 11 xn^ff^r n to:*
124. The affixes jcrt and jctpt^ are substitutes
of *^> when agreeing with what does not end with the
first case-affix.
As TOTPT t*^n* <H* 'behold Devadatta who is cooking 9 ; <pwr fRP( 'or
•^#1 ^\ 'done by one who is cooking'. <p^+*jr* n « f^+*T{+ *TPT^ (HI. 4.
113, III. X. 68)«q^+8T+»m+HPr (VII. 2. 82)=q^iTCT | So also q^+tf^+JRF 3
Why do we say 'when agreeing with what "does not end with the first
case-affix ? Observe f qrqsr: q^ifii 'Devadatta cooks' .
Since the term *& s might have been supplied from the last aphorism,
its double citation is for the sake of larger application of this rule.; that is to
: say, this rule applies sometimes even when the word is in concord with a
nominative case. As 9* w«TCj: 'who is a Brthmana' «=> arftfl OTfTCJ; ; so also
29
Digitized by
Google
4&> Satri and sanach. [Bk. III. Cn. II. § 125, 126.
Rrofr mvnxr: and ftrararit arrcuu: ; *nPl and nilfa 1 and wfcrn?: and ntftS 1
Vart. — These affixes are employed after a verb, when the particle
iin^ is in composition, and censure or curse is implied. As irr T*% and ifT'PIHPr.
c may he not cook' ; w *f\1% *: 'WRTrji^l^lrjRr sffafir 'cursed be he (lit. may
he not live) who though smitten by the pain of the contempt of others, still
lives'. Some commentators read the anuvritti of the word 'option' from stitra
121 into this. That option, however, is a limited option (vyavasthita-vibhd-
shd) and not of universal application. Whenever a particular form is found
as differing from the general form, there it should be understood that the
option has been allowed, and not everywhere.
wt^ *c 11 ^ 11 *^Tfa 11 *«?h^ % (met, *renT-
125. The affixes u« and ixn\ are the substitutes
of w? even when agreeing with what ends with a first
case-affix, provided that it is in the vocative case.
This aphorism declares when these participles may be employed even
in the first case ; as $ qre^or £ <TWT 'O thou who art cooking*.
^rw^wt: famm: 11 ^r$ ii tr^Tfo 11 *nwr-%wt:> fiv<IIJ||* f
(*rar:, iw-nw^i) 11
Wf^f : If 5TW9 tm <*r9 **?HI*H«4ldt: TCW 5HT: J.WUIH*liqifJUI *IW It
*!pfel^ II 5! IfTOf ^ft:RlRRrr: *N5T VHHMHr^ll
wrf^^F 1 ^ ll flWWM ** H
126. The affixes *w and jitt* are the substi-
tutes of **? and come after a verb, in expressing an at-
tendent circumstance or characteristic, and the cause
of an action.
The word srcrcj means that by which a thing is recognised or known
t. e. an attribute ; f H means producer or cause. Both these words are attributes
of the word farm. Of lakshana\— as, vum^t: %&$ ^WfT: 'the Yavanas take their
meals lying down'. ftiF^^rafa «mrar- I Of hetu :— as ffic *T*% ynrd 'by
(reason of) seeing Hari, he gets absolution' ; wfttrpft TOfir 'for the sake of
study he dwells here'.
Why do we say 'when denoting a characteristic or a cause' ? Observe
«Jn 'he cooks' ;qsfii 'he reads'.
Why do we say 'of the action' ? Not so when the participle is the
characteristic or cause of a substance or a quality. As w: qrott tftPWr* 'that
which is shaking is the Aswattha' ; K^fgrf *M% 'whatever floats is light*;
*(%nft*fa njjf 'that which sinks down is heavy*.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 127, 128.] • The affix sanan. 46*
Vart, — This participle also defines the agent of an action as, tftnft^re
•TR* *r t***n 'he is Devadatta who sits studying'.
VarL — This participle is also used to state a general truth : as TjmHt
n$H fyf 'the Dttrv& grass grows in a recumbent position' ; wsfrr *>$£ fatf
4 a lotus stalk grows in an upright position*. The compound smusifit: of the
sQtra contradicts the rule by which a word of fewer syllables stands first
(II. 2. 14). This shows that the rule II. 2. 14. is not universal.
*ft *?Hl ^3 II tr^Tfa II $T, *W, (TO-OT^T)!!
127. These two *rar and wr^ are called *r^.
These participial affixes get collectively this name ; and as such they
are not limited by the conditions enumerated above ; so that they replace not
only the affixes of the Present tense but sometimes of Future also (III. 3. 14.),
as well as other tenses. Thus artRQXra *§*\> *R\k*Q%t tglfoPi «ifR:**PTnxr: I
The word ^occurs in sfttra II. 2. 11. &c.
xrenSto sure* » w « waft m wmi**, wnt h
W 4 f*i: II <£Ft *nh* *rot: V1*% *W**t wRl II
^rfift^ 11 fw: :&**? fw*( 11
128. The affix *nr*pr N comes after the verbs \ 'to
purify' and ^ 'to sacrifice'.
As tojtth': 'purifier (fire or air) r ; totft.* .'sacrificer.
It might be asked 'is the JTPF^ with others that follow, an affix sua
generis, or is it merely a substitute of 5C, as J& and JQFT^ ? Why we ask this
question is this. If they are affixes and not substitutes of *r, then they should
govern genitive case by rule II. 3. 65. instead of nominative or the accusative.
If, on the other hand, they are substitutes of *c, then by rule II. 3. 69. they
should not govern the genitive case. But evidently they are not the substitutes
of 5T, as they are not so taught. How is it then that we have such forms as
«W TqrTFr: 'drinking Soma' ; and wn^fTFr: ? These forms can be explained on
other grounds than supposing that jjPFJ &c. must be the substitutes of 5T. The
term ec^ in stitra II 3. 69. is not the affix ^\ taught in this Chapter sfltra
135 ; but it is a praty&h&ra including several affixes. It is a pratydhdra formed
by taking the sr of u^ in sfttra 124; and *jof %\ in 135 ; and thus it means
all the affixes from x*Z in 134 down to £?r N in 135. Thus though JR**!;, «*nr*t &c.
are not substitutes of *T, still the rule II. 3.69. applies to them, as they are in-
cluded in the term enj-
Vart.— The rule IL 3. 69. applies only optionally when the verb ft^
takes the affix $^. As "iTTf* or *ttt ffcq* x 'hating the thief.
Digitized by
Google
462 The affix satw. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 129-132.
mvftw*ptow*irft*3 ^to^ii ^ 11 infill n wrnfta-
129. The- affix *nnr comes after a verb in ex-
pressing 'habit', standard of age' and 'ability*.
The word nra ft^ q means 'habit' or 'disposition'; **: means the con-
dition of body such as 'infancy', •youth' &c; srfa? means 'capacity to do a thing'.
As ^fW *pafPT: 'habituated to enjoy'; *r**i fwrcr: 'wearing an armour (of the
age at which armour may be worn)' ; jpj Hmnr: 'able to destroy his foe'.
So also, snftt ywnrr:, *gwfpn:, wi Rnfwnfn, ftar>¥ ^»irt: and <to!ht: i
«*%(*! II
130. The affix w comes after the verbs irjto
go' and *rf* 'to hold' in denoting that the agent does the
action without trouble.
The word Bif^^j; means that which is accomplished by the agent with
ease and facility. As wfta?t qraTO^'the facile reading of the PurAna'; >m*TO<T-
fctRPl 'easily mastering the Upanishad'. The root vrrfr is causative of tj and
means here 'to master'.
Why do we say 'when facility is indicated'? Otheroiseq^igfiftft 'he
'reads with difficulty'; sperm mrofii 'he remembers with difficulty'.
fa^frfai 11 ^ n v^fa n fj*:, «ri%£, (to) ii
^fa: 11 MfW *Sft ffltftafalr. to**** *wfii 11
131. The affix are comes after the verb fi^
when the agent indicated means an enemy.
The word Ufa* means 'enemy'. As ffcm s 'enemy', ftrot 'two enemies*,
fKTOt: 'enemies 9 .
Why do we say 'when denoting an enemy' ? Observe ife qrf *fan
'the wife hates her husband'.
3$t mr^n* « ^ II ^Tf?l 11 fw : > *nMfti*>, (to>i
*jfa: ii qgfryfo ftwfr *fapn*3*fritiWt: ^RPwnit *nrfil 11
132. The affix srs comes after the verb f 'to
press out juice* when the sense is that of association
with sacrifice.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 133, 134.] The affix satri. 463
The word «rfre*fta is an instrumental compound, meaning association
or connection ($'$t*i) with sacrifice. As g+^+TOT (HI. I- 76, III. 4. 1 13) =**+
wr (1.2.4.)=*^ (VI. 1.77), 1st. sing. ^[%, ist.pl. CTbrt: 'the sacrifices';
as in wi *|«-qwt: 'all are interested in, or partake of, or share in the sacrifice'.
The word sfaftir indicates that the principal sacrificer. i. e. the trspTTO is
meant and not every person who is associated in the performance of a sacrifice
in a subordinate capacity ; such as *rrwKT: 'the sacrificing priests'.
When connection with sacrifice is not meant we have g^tf% ^n^ 'he
distils liquor'.
133. The affix uz comes after the verb **? iu
expressing praise.
As »rff*r? HftfN^rnTs'thou art worthy of this knowledge here'; stffaf
*W*^P£ 'thou art worthy of honor in this place*.
Why do we say 'when meaning to praise' ? Witness a?$fir , 4hct WJ
'the thief deserves death'.
3JT $t1M0^4gAc1ti^r4<Mft<g II ^8 II M^lPl H9TT,^: f
^f^^?T-?T5^-tld Ml^*f f^M II
134. From this sUtra as far as farc iu slitra 177
inclusive, the affixes that we shall treat of, are to be mi-
derstood iuthe sense of ageuts having such a habit, or na-
ture, or having skill in such and such action.
The force of Mr in this siitra is limit inclusive, and includes fkv^
also. The term fre^fcr means 'the natural inclination towards an action
not prompted by a contemplation of its fruit or result*. The term *pj4
means 'who enters upon an action not from habit but thinking that it is his
duty'. The term TOTTWffrft: means 'who does the action expressed by the verb
in an excellent way*. Illustrations of these will be given under the subsequent
aphorisms.
3WU ^811 tr^T^r II **, (?f *^-*T^-W?f^«RTft3) II
<jRri: 11 «taq*rcppro(4r *r*Rr ^terrfts ^5 11
*rf*fa^ 11 ?f f5w^f?*?j ■qtyrotf w it
*|R?*^H Tf#: ^^^ II
IfPfe^ll fa*t{ f q<M4l*<4iK*h<JMI4ir •Tpir^*«n9 II
wrffh*^ 11 *r*v f%5^ 11
wffi^iiepffor^ M
39
Digitized by VjOOQIC
464 The affix ishnuch. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 135, 136.
135. The affix fnr comes after all verbs in the
sense of 'agents having such a habit &c\
The st of q*i is indicatory, and regulates the accent (VI. l. 197). A9
^J+S^srf, 1st sing. srgf. This affix denotes habit in the following ; as, *rcif
vr*X\ 'who is accustomed to make mats. Nature:— as, HjrfkmKi NlfaBHW *I*fal
T^SJPl 'the family of Sr&visht4yana shave the heads of their widows' ; Mvpcr-
f*ffr WJT^CT HTfaf wt fof 'the Ahvarakas steal away food as soon as
Sr&ddha is accomplished 9 ; ytfqnffqteqgTRPn H?fcr J# nr# 'the Taulvafeyanas
become elated on the birth of a son\ Skill : — as, qrof q^nr 'skilful maker of
mats'. irorrJQteiT 'skilful hunter*.
Vart : — The simple verbs, without upasargas, take the affix *^ f when
the words so formed are names of sacrificial priests. As J+^^fte, 1st. sing.
$m 'the Hotri priest' ; so also qfa 'the Potri priest'.
Why do we say 'when not taking the upasargas' ? Observe 3^TNT
'the UdgAtri priest' ; J?faf£ 'the Pratihartri priest'. Here the affix is &{.
Though the form is the same, there is difference however in the accent ; #'. e.
W.\ places udAtta accent on the first syllable (VI. 1. 197), while c^ places it on
the last (VI. 1. i63>
Vart :— The augment yK N is added when «ft takes the affix jpr N ; as *ft
+^+3^=^r, 1st. sing. 3ct 'the Neshtri priest'.
Vart ;— When signifying diety, the verb fH^ takes *\\ the letter «r is
the substitute for the \ of the root ; and the affix does not take the inter-
mediate ^ augment; as, fi^+SF^f**, 1st. sing, tot 'Tvashtri'.
Vart \— The root to takes 9% when the word to be formed means an
officer; as TOT 'an attendant, a door-keeper'.
Vart :— In the Veda, the root to takes er^ as to:. The form is the
same as the last, but there is difference of accent.
136. The affix rq^ comes after the following
verbs, in the sense of the 'agents having such a habit &c';
viz. — wfi* 'to adorn', fros? 'to expel', **% 'to be born', top*
'to be ripe\ **<ro <to fly', **** 'to be mad', v\ 'to shineV *™X
'to be ashamed', <n* 'to be', f* 'to grow', *% 'to bear* and
^ 'to walk'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. It § 137-139-] The affix ksnu. 465
As *rcfa?ft«(!£: 'decorating', fNrPKfttcj: 'repudiating', srarftdg: 'procrea-
tive', wrP^q: 'apt to ripen', w?fif*q: 'flying 1 , *»?fir*!j: 'mad', dflsr*£: 'bright',
WTftaO: 'bashful', *F<frnp 'revolving', *fij*!£: 'growing', sfipq: 'patient',
^rfoq: 'moveable'.
Vart\— The affix f«q^ debares by anticipation the affix yr of HI. 2.
IS 1 * after the root *m% t though it has the sense of decorating'.
137. The affix rqr^ in the sense of c the agent
having such a habit &c', comes in the Ohhandas after a
verb that ends in the causative fe.
The Causatives take this affix in the Vedic literature. As fq* WtfccQT?:
'who hold the stones' ; tfhw MKfwu* : I
138. The affix t^y? in the sense of 'the agent
having such a habit &c', comes in the Ohhandas, after the
verb Vto be' also.
Thus ffcor: 'becoming'.
The yoga-vibh&ga or the division of this sAtra from the last, with
which it could well have been read, is for the sake of the subsequent stitras.
The word 'also' indicates the existence of other verbs not included in
the above two sfttras ; as, WTftragHr 5ftf*«P***#*T I
(«*«n«ii\M) 11
^% : 11 *m f*i wr ******* w«*wi»m^ *ro irofrarfts «3:unrir **fa 11
^rPS«F , t 11 ftlw^^^w^ 11
139. The affix *^3 comes after the following
verbs in the sense of c the agent having such a habit &c.'
viz.— **\ 'to be weary 1 , fif ( to conquer 1 and wr c to stand', as
well as after *^ ( to be'.
As, t«rrc3: 'languid'; finq: 'victorious'; HWJ: 'disposed to stand firm,
immoveable' ; ^jq: 'being'.
The anuvritti of the word Chhandasi does not extend to this s&tra.
The indicatory letter of this affix is really if and not *r, and therefore, there is
Digitized by
Google
'466 The affix ghinun. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 140, 141.
no substitution of long f for the w of wr, which would otherwise have taken
place, had the affix been Run (VI. 4. 66).
In the stitra I. 1. 5. (^frfif ^) the letter it is also included ; for tf com-
ing before vr, is changed by the rules of sandhi into *? and is not therefore
visible. This affix therefore does not cause guna.
So also in sAtra VII. 2. 11 (m*J3>- fiufir), the augment f? does not come
after the verb q, or a monosyllabic verb ending in the praty&h&ra m, when
an affix having an indicatory sir follows. Here also sir includes *T ; and there*
fore in vjcqj we have no intermediate augment f^.
Vart.—ln the Chhandas this affix comes after the verb tftf ' to bite ;
as <*cqt?: qjj*: 'the beasts that bite\
*jf*r: ii TOrf^ft *ii«jiwe£tarirf^ *[ : iiHrat *wfir u
140. The affix *[ comes after the verbs t^ ( to
tremble', 1* <tobe greedy 7 , w <to be bold* and Rf^ 'to throw*
in the sense of 'the agent having such a habit &c\
As, fr^J: 'trembling'; ij^j: 'greedy'; wsj: 'bold* ; and fipr: 'throwing*.
' f^5«, (croftwrf^j) 11
- ^far. 11 wnftwft ^rj*^i?i^wd0^iRH ^pfwrifr wfir 11
• 141. The affix Sr^ comes after the eight verbs
j beginning with *nj 'to be calm', in the sense of 'the agent
} having such a habit &c\
; The word ffii in the aphorism indicates beginning. These eight verbs
I begin with jj*{ and end with Hf in the list of verbs. Of the affix fiRtlJ the real
If affix is f% the other letters are servile ; the t* is for the sake of substituting
guttural for the final palatals ; ? is for the sake of euphony, or for the sake of
rule VI. 3. 45 ; ^nd the letter ^ causes vriddhi (VII. 2. 116): which in the case of
roots ending ifi if is prohibited by the rule VII. 3. 34, the only verb taking
vriddhi 7 being H? s I
As tffint 1st. sing, tfift 'calm'; likewise tfift 'desiring'; fift 'taming*;
Mift 'laborious'; vft 'whirling', 'moving round'; ipft 'fatiguing 1 ; *nft 'forbearing';
smrft 'mad' and ggmft 'mad'. Though by rule 136, the verb 3*ff takes the affix
l*q^, it also takes the affix Rr^ by the rule of were? (III. 1 94).
All these verbs belong to the Diyfrdi class, After other verbs than
these eight, we have other affixes ; as Mftiff,
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI. Cii. h. § 142, 143.] The affix ghinun. 467
142. The affix Rr*«q; comes after the following
verbs, in the sense of 'the agent having such a habit &c\
viz :— **r%, «r^» w*^» «w*t «rfro. wa^. qft**, hs**, «tWw^, «rft*^, «rfarr s ,
if*** «rfr5f N , *<r, frfc 5*, 5* *^, Mrflft^, ftfi^, m^, *^, *nr, mRi^, m^.
•frj^ and w-uifsr N .
The root a<n; is to be taken as belonging to the Rudhadi class, and
not as belonging to Adadi, because the vikarana is elided in the latter. The
root TftSfir belongs to Bhv&di class, the simple verb being f^ 'to sport'. The
verb fln/to throw' is common both to Tud&di and Divadi, and both are taken
here, ipj 'to concentrate' is Divadi, and ^ 'to join' is Rudhadi ; both are
meant here. The verb rir. 'to color' has lost its nasal in this sfltra, irregularly.
Thus«^+fir3Bj~«<r*+rr s (VII. 2. 52)= «»rft^ist. sing. «n*ptf 'mix-
ture'; similarly, »r«rrWr 'compliant'; •mn'ft 'one who restrains'; vrrarefV 'one
who exerts'; ifirettr 'that which flows round'; *fa*ff 'united'; qftf *r 'lament-
ing'; «**nfr 'greatly heating'; <rftw<ft 'moving about'; gftrrfr 'crying aloud';
ifwtf 'reviling'; «rft*r*r 'burning'; Tfcftft 'beguiling'; frfl 'guilty'; «r 'hat-
ing'; tfttf 'quarrelling*; ftft 'milking'; ^t*fr 'uniting or concentrating'; •ffufrft
'playing*; fofcft 'discriminating'; wnft 'renouncing'; *nft 'yearning after"; *ipft
'sharing'; *»Rmrfr 'transgressing*; witf 'offending'; m4Wr 'a thief; ttmrarfr
•attacking*. (VII. 3. 52 and 54).
The indicatory ^ of the affix shows that the final palatal is changed
into a corresponding guttural before this affix.
qiwis (ftpni, Ti^pbsrrf^^) 11
jftr: if ** sm «m «*h icMt ^ift tvrj«nT?t f%3>a;qnrat *wfw 11
143. The affix fasej comes after the verbs
«^ 'to injure', w^, 'to embrace and sport', *>«? 'to praise' and
«fi 'to believe', when these are in composition with the
prepositional j
31
Digitized by
Google
468 The affix vuto. [Bk. III. Cn. II. § 144-146.
As Rremft 'injuring; fq^TPEft 'sportive, a sensualist'; fronfr 'vaunting';
and fapnft 'confiding'.
*fi * w*i h \w 11 nqifn 11 sr5 f ^ f *w:, (farm) 11
144. The affix fo^k comes after the verb *rcr 'to
wish 1 when compounded with the preposition m and fir.
As tfrcmft 'thirsty'; ftvWft. The term fir is to be read into this sfttra
by the force of the word 'and'.
^ftr: 11 r trrrt OTrfWT Rr^ij^artt wfir 11
145. The affix fa*^ comes after the verbs wn
3, v , to, ** and to when compounded with the preposition fir-
As sremft 'prattling 1 ; srcntf 'extending around'; menft 'running away,
fugitive'; R*mft 'tormenting^; irofl 'reporting'; srarcft 'a traveller*.
The root ^ here is the BhvAdi **r meaning 'to dwell' and is not
Adftdi meaning 'to cover', because in the latter the vikarana is elided.
3 sni ^ iiTnprf^r 11 fa^-f^-firo-^snr^-f^
140. The affix vi is added to the following
verbs in the sense of 'the agent having such a habit &c\* —
r^, ftp*, fte*T, *rrf, farm, qftftrj, «rft*?, ifircrf*, *rof* and wn* i
In this sfltra the whole phrase ending with wp has taken the termi-
nation of the first case ; which, however, has'the force of the ablative here.
As fiw^+5s»=Jif^r: (VII. 1. 1) 'blaming'; so also ffan* 'injuring';
#jn*: 'tormenting or troublesome*; *nv* : 'eating'; (WSPK. 'destroying*; *fbfr-
TO; 'surrounding ; qfirnry : «who cries aloud'; qfrffTO: 'a plaintiff 1 ; cqnifTO:
'detracting'; and tregPK: 'detracting'.
The same forms as the above would have been obtained by adding
the affix *«[& taught in III. I. 133, as by adding 5^; its separate enunciation
indicates the existence of this paribh&sha : —
"The rule of HI. 1. 94 by which an apav&da-zffiui which is not uni-
form with an utsarga-zffix should supersede the latter only optionally, has
no concern with qfravdda-afRxes added in the sense of 'having such a habit'
i.e. with the affixes taught in III. 2. 134—177". Therefore the affixes a^t
&c> are not added in the sense of 'having such a habit &c' .
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. $ 147-149.] The affix yuch. 469
(*«) 11
f fti: 11 ***fc wJcWtwf 3*ro s^nnrit wfa 11
147. The affix 5^ comes after the verbs tfir
'to lament 7 and ^ 'to cry 1 , when an upasarga is in compo-
sition with them.
As ht?**?: 'one who sports or laments'; wftHW: 'vociferous, a revi*
ler'; <rfH*3*: 'one who laments'; qf^frny : 'a reviler'.
Why do we say 'when in composition with an up as at ga} Observe
f*f%TCir and wW formed by a^ (HI. 2. 135).
^q^^i^wUi^ ^pw h\bp 11 ^Rfrf^r 11 ^R-ii^nrhr,
fnri*rn?, 3*, ( ^^nf^| ) 11
148. The affix ^ comes, in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c\ after intransitive verba
denoting 'motion' or 'sound \
As, *rctH-v^-*NrPr: •moving' (VII. I. i); ^frnr: 'creeping'; ^j^r: 'soun-
ding'; ctisj: 'roaring'.
Why do we say 'intransitive'? Observe <rf^rrf%W^.
<n*i<4i3wi5i iw$* ii V* 5 ii m^iPi 11 <R*gcrihj: f % iwr-
$:, (yr, «ratam) 11
149. The affix 3^ comes in the same sense
after such intransitive verbs as are Atmanepadi and begin
with a consonant and are Anudattet i. e. have a gravely-
accented vowel as indicatory.
As *3i: 'being 1 ; q^r: 'growing 1 .
Why do we say 'Anud&ttet' ? Observe qfavr*
Why do we say 'beginning with a consonant' ? Observe ^Rmr, which
though Atmanepadi, takes sn..
Why have we used the term tfrft 'beginning* in the sfttra? Observe
«ppOT: 'censuring'; iffafcTT: # an investigator. For without the word wfc
the rule would have stood thus : — M^tivta** f*f: which by 1. 1. 72. would mean
'the affix ^ comes after the verbs which end with a consonant'; so that even
after jwrwe shall have g^;and there would be no grafter *J*f^ which
ends with a vowel.
This rule will not apply if the root is transitive ; as *ftnrf wi \
Digitized by
Google
470 The affix yuch. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 150-152.
150. The affix 5^ comes after the following
verbs in the sense of 'the agent having such a habit &c',
viz :— w, *'***, jFff**, 3, *!*, *^> *[% ot, ** and 1*.
The verb *[ is not to be found in the Dh&tup&tha, and is taught in
the aphorisms and is hence called a sautra dhdtu. It means 'to go', 'to be
quick'. As sr+ *^=*+ wr (VII. 1. 1. and VII. 3. 84) = st** : (VI. 1. 78, II. 3. 46)
'a courser, a swift horse*. ^fF^+^=^Jn^+i^(II. 4. 74) = WPT: 'moving
about'; so also tgqig: 'wandering'; ferrm: 'flowing'; irj?r: 'greedy'; «*?nr: burn-
ing*; JCffa*: 'grieving'; 5TOJI: 'desiring'; g?n: 'falling'; ***: 'moving'.
The enumeration of the word qf in the above, indicates that this
sft tra applies to the transitive verbs; otherwise the sfttra III. 2. 148 would have
been sufficient, as qj is a ^*m? verb. Others say that the inclusion of q^ in this
aphorism indicates the existence of the paribhdshd already given under sfltra
III. 2. 146 i. i. the rule of HI. 1. 94 has no concern with affixes added in the
sense of 'having such a habit &c\ The affix f^^ which by III. 2. 136 is
added to %T5*^, supersedes therefore not merely the addition of 5^ to ttfTfPt
(HI. 2. 135), but also the addition of »^ to the sajne. If a tdchchhilika apa-
vdda were to supersede only an at&chchhilika utsarga % it would have been
superfluous for PAnjni to teach in this sfltra the addition of ^ to q\, because
in that case the addition of 3*^ to q* by III. 2. 154 would not have debarred
the addition of ^ to q^ by III. 2. 149. The repetition is for the sake of
j ft dp ana, therefore, and it indicates the existence of the above-mentioned
maxim. The jftdpaka is not, however, of universal application; for sometimes
both affixes are applied concurrently; as, irarr W* PrtWlT. I
■rq*TOT$«nw n^v ,Tn n^w^- , '^- g ^ W5 » % tig*)*
151 . And after the verbs having the sense of 15^
'to be angry 1 and n«* 'to adorn 1 , the affix ^ is employed.
As tfrro: 'wrathful'; flPTO: 'irascible'; ifvt: 'adorning'; *^jot: 'ornament',
But not so after the verb *m?x to which stitra III. 2. 136 applies.
* Vi It VK « "Pft « *# *u ( $* N ) *
^ftf: II <l*ll(^Wfll^^Wn!T * q ffif II
152. The* affix vi 1 3 not employed after those
verbs which end in the letter *.
This debars III. 2. 149. As *qRrar 'making creaking sound'; wnfol?
•trembling*. In these cases the affix z\ is employed (HI. 2. 135).
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 153-155] The affix shakaU. 471
"" " ' ' I I ■ II II I II ■nMMM_«MM«Mn_**M«
ffa: 11 *5tfMtar ftitora v^vottT * **f* 11
153. The affix ^ does not come after the
verbs fj 'to strike 7 , i\\ 'to shine* and <ta£ 'to initiate'.
These three verbs are anud&ttit, and by sfttra III. 2. 149, would have
taken ^. The present stitra prohibits that. Therefore they take qy\. As, *jffcr v
1st. sing tfjar'one who strikes'; fffinr'one who shines'; ffftnj 'one who initiates*.
Now, it might be objected— 'We find that sfltra III. 2. 167 specifically
enjoins the affix r after fl*; this apav&da rule will therefore, supersede the
general rule ; where is then the necessity of the present rule ? If you say that
the affix *^ is also obtained by the rule of non-uniformity (III. 1. 94), we re-
ply that the Paribh&sh* given under stitra 146 and 150 will prevent that."
This objection is answered by saying that the above-mentioned Paribh&shd, is
not of universal application; there are exceptions to it, as tor ^Rr; and ariprr
«[*fii: 'a young girl' which are both valid forms derived by adding * and 3^ to
the verb Wf- So also ^«ir and m*V\l Jjrar 'a shaking branch'.
If we prohibit ij^ after the root ^y , how do we get the forms T^siJ T
and ftTOJf ? This objection may be answered in three ways: (1) the present
is an anitya rule, not of universal application, which can be inferred from
finding this stitra separated from the last (yogavibhAga), when it was easier
to make them one, (2) the words hvj^T &c belong to the ir^rff class (III. 1. 134)
taking the affix *n or (3) they are formed by 111. 3. 113 by the affix w^.
154. The affix ott*t comes after the following
verbs, in the sense of c the agent having snch a habit
Ac': — er*, <m, q\, wr, * 7*, *% **» ^ and st i
h* far, iw^iPnf *r*fir, jrrT«irr: <nfc*rr:, nrwr*f srnrrfirrara* irer*^ m^k w*t ftnft
w*far, wrrj* qmrramf Km W$:> f%trrs# tfwrrj: I The * is added after Km
in *TOin^S by VII. 3. 33. The k\ is changed into trm, by VII. 3. 32 and 54.
jfty: 11 n*nf*>*ft m$**uti*tiO<Hifi?[ *r£i ni*^**} *r*flr 11
155. The affix *r*f N coinos, in the sense of the
'agent having such a habit Ac', after the following
verbs:— w% f^ *T, q«* and J 1
Digitized by VjOOQIC
473 The affix aluch. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 156-158.
The q is indicatory showing that the feminine of the words so formed
take the affix #}^ i. e* long f (IV. 1. 41). As sfpqrar: 'talkative'; f*mr*r: 'a beg-
gar'; Qfttt: 'who or what cuts'; 5J*?P*f 'a thief or robber' ; ITVX' 'low, mis-
erable*. In the feminine 3T*TT*fl' &c.
TTWyRf%: II \tft » Mq i fo II W%T:, ffa:, (^^Ilf^j) II
156. The affix *fir comes in the sense of c t:he
agent having such a habit etc', after the verb mj 'to has-
ten forward'.
As snrf?*, 1st. sing, iri|*ft 'an express, courier', 1st. dual snrfWt &c.
f^f%fa>*fU44*l|tf| HT^^^R^U^ia II ^3 II M^lfa II
ffa: 41 ftnrnfa^fr *rnu*r tfiniWRfr H*fir frofterrfaj *rib$ 11
157. The affix tffir comes, in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c', after the verbs far ( to con-
quer\ t 'to respect', far ( to waste, to dwell, to go', Wm 'to
shelter', f 'to go', *t 'to vorftit', ****** 'not to give pain',
•wr 4 to injure', iftn/to humiliate' and *rer/to beget'.
As I *ifa^ 1st. sing, inft 'cohquering';" similarly, jtf 'respecting'; ^ft
'wasting'; f%M«ft 'wasting'; «?HRft 'exceeding'; **ft 'vomiting'; t?cqtfr 'free
from pain'; awpft 'not injuring'; Tfbrtl" 'humiliating' and irarft 'procreating'.
^rf^r^Mfd^rMfH^wiiw^i^M sflnrcr* 11 ^c 11 m^iPi n
^ftf: 11 *sfa*jf*iRur*inr*NiHir*w ^ff*4Wd0^ift^«irw^ wq^wnct wi% 11
158. The affix w*r* comes in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &C*, after the following words: —
€W 'to desire', «jf 'to seize*, <ro ( to go', ** 'to give, to go, to
protect', ftr*i 'to sleep', *m 'to be tired' and **& to venerate'.
The word finer is formed by adding the preposition fir to the verb jrr 'to
go crookedly'; so also *ra*T is formed by adding nqr to *r, and then irregularly
changing the ^ into \. The term ^ST is formed by adding mh to the verb
*\*nj 'to hold'. The first three verbs belong to Chur&di class and take ffer^.
As, ^fmq: 'disposed to be desirous of; «T{*Tvi: 'disposed to catch hold
of or seize'; <nrarre|: 'tending or prone to fall'; ?*rff£ 'compassionate'; ftgrcj: 'dis-
posed to sleep'; qsyrep 'slothful'; M3r^: 'full of faith'. See VI. 4-55 for adding «y*i
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IL $ 159-162.] The affix kurach. 473
Vart :— The affix *TT5J^ comes also after the root jjfti^ 'to Jie down';
as g rarefr " 'disposed to lie down'.
159. The affix s conies after the verbs *r'to
give', $* 'to suck', ftr 'to bind', *r* 'to fall' and ** 'to sit\
As, fr^: 'a munificent man'; >rrc$?*ft HRfT^ 'a sucking child of the
mother'. The genitive case is here prohibited by II. 3. 69, the * being taken
as equivalent to t. As if*: 'binding'; xr^: 'falling*; and w^: 'resting*.
OT9T^: wqT* ii\$o\\ Mq i fa || ^-^f%-^:, WqT^,(?mfto)H
«|f%r: it 3 «rRr *?* t*****fr >rrn^r: *f*s£rwR^ *£^ m^pf^t t *rrRt 11
160. The affix *»rc^ in the sense of 'the agent
having such a habit &c\ comes after the verbs « *to
flow 7 , *Rr 'to eat 7 atid *c* 'to -eat 7 .
As 5*nr: 'going, a kind of deer'; totc 'gluttonous'; fttvsrc: 'voracious'. •
fa^tenf^*) 11
^Rr: 11 *r^ nro fa* f**Swft ^<£?wft wRf TOCtatrf*^ w&$ 11
1G1. The affix ^^ comes in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c/, after the verbs TO 'to
break', nr^ 'to shine', and Frf 'to be fat\
As^+^r^=^+w (VIL 3. 52) «4ijr: 'brittle'; the palatal being
changed into guttural, because of the indicatory qr. So also fif*: to: € a fat
beast'; m^ 5*tf%: 'splendid light'-
After the verb H^this affix gives a reflexive signification— that which
naturally breaks of itself.
faf^ftf^: WW II ^ II *<5Tf* II faf^-f^-f*^,
*<*, (TOftwrf^) II
*tf3$RH II **$: **roHOT %<** TOW II
1G2. The affix «gr* comes, in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c', after the verbs fir^ 'to
know', Pi^ 'to divide' and flr^ 'to pierce'.
As Er|c: *?>**: 'a knowing Pandit'; fir* t *as% 'a splitting or fragile
wood'; f|^n «ij: 'a cutting or breaking rope'. The affix is employed in a
reflexive sense after the verbs Pf? and ffjff.
Digitized by
Google
474 The affix uka. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 163-166.
Vart : — The affix sgt^ comes after the verb ww 'to kill'; and there is
vocalisation of the semivowel; as firwc: 1
163. The affix *rj comes, in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c\ after the verbs f 'to go*, iit
'to destroy', ftt c to conquer', and 5 'to flow\
The ^ is indicatory in order to introduce the augment fl« between the
verb and the affix (VI. 1.71). Thus f+lir^=f+fr+^=3fi^:,fem.f^lr < a tra-
veller*; «r*C:, fern. qptft 'transitory'; fiiw:, fern, flrnnft 'victorious*; sw:
fern. Qtrft 'going, a river*.
Though the affix begins with a letter of m^praty&hdra, and ought to
have taken the intermediate f^(VII. 2. 35) yet it is prohibited by VII. 2. 8.
TOTOf II ^8 II iT^rfSf II *1T**:, * II
164. And the word v&x is irregularly formed.
The word irm is formed by eliding the n of ir^ and adding the affix
UT^. As ir**r:, fem. iw*# 'locomotive, transient'.
«n*p&*: « ^1 n tnfrf^r n ^15:, **:, (q r ^^ r f^N ) 11
165. The affix *& comes after the verb *tm ( to
be awake' in the sense of 'the agent haviug such a habit'.
As snTOCT: 'wakeful'.
166. The affix w comes in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c\ after the verbs «m» *rj and
*H when they end in the affix ^.
The intensives of these verbs take to. As *!**£*: 'a performer of fre*
quent sacrifices'; wwtj*: 'a muttej-er of prayers repeatedly; *ffq*: 'a snake
(what bites frequently)',
i |ft*ftWiWWMf|filfl<ft T: II ^3 II VH^fa ll*rfMrffcf*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 167-170.] The affix u. '475
167. The affix*, r comes in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c' after the verbs *w ( to bow',
*** 'to shake', far 'tosmile', wra/notto cease', wr 'to desire',
ft^f 'to injure ', and #<r 'to shine'.
Thus, srw *U* 'soft wood'; «wjr 3(jwr 'shaking branch'; fW g^r 'smiling
face'; wra sjfffir 'he sacrifices perpetually'; mm igtft 'a beautiful maiden'; ff&
*H: 'the injuring RAkshas'; <ftf *ntf 'brilliant wood'.
The word anm' is an adverb, and is derived from the root 9^ 'to set
free', with the negative particle a?, and the affix ?; as *?+3f^+*:=»awJ I
(tf*tfl<fllf^*l) 11
^Pi: 11 sw^^t ^rjm *Trtf«f*ftrv ^afacrfrs ^f? *:*wft **Ri 11
1G8. The affix s comes after roots that have
taken the affix *% and after the verbs wjt^ ( to wish' and Pw^
'to beg' in the sense of 'the agent having such a habit &c\
The term ^ in the aphorism means Desideratives in the affix m% and
not the verb, W{ because the verb si^is never seen with this affix.
As, ftreft^: 'desirous of doing'; finftar: desirous of taking'; vrrcrtt: 'de-
sirous'; Pw^: 'a beggar'.
The verb *?rcr^ with the upasarga w is the verb ^jf%r 'to desire' and
not the verb *f% 'to praise'.
f**5ftw II ^<n i^Tfa 11 fipj:, ^15:, (**£\* 11
ff%: u ftt^^rnnr v*ftu4t<iy«fcK4i WRct Rrwrfi *ragfterrf*5 sfrfj 11 .
169. The words f^j and %*a are irregularly
formed by the addition of the affix s, in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c\
To the verb (%f% we add the augment ^ and then the affix 7 ; as, Rr^
+*nf+*=fa*$: (1. 1. 47) = ^f?ft5f: 'intelligent'; so of f^'to wish', the * is re-
placed by u, and we have {«ff:=ipn!nrfter: 'desirous*.
<wi^^Ri ii y# n Tr^rfa 11 *rra, sp^ft, (<rotfh&o) 11
^Rf: 11 5WMM^i«*u^nftacspf?% fired *r«5(ftF?rf*«r ^5 ^rncm^Rf) wfir 11
170. The affix s comes in the Ohhandas, after
the roots that have taken the Denominative affix ** in the
sense of 4 the agent having such a habit &c\
The term sra includes the three affixes 3*r^, 9^ and ^^(see stitras
III. 1. 8, ii, 13, &c). As Pt^:, tfs*^:, *£**: (Rig. Ved. 1 3. 4).
33
Digitized by
Google
47 6 The affixes ki and kin. [Bk III. Ch. II. § ijx.
In the modern Sanskrit q* N will be employed. As Prftfrirr. By sfttra
VII. 4. 33, the long f replaces the final a?, when **r^ follows ; as yr+**^[=3
3 , ft+*r= 5 yfr*. Why then in the case of firw^: there is not the substitution
of long i for the •? of finr? Because the rule VII. 4. 33 is set aside by VII. 4. 35
which declares that in the Chhandas the long f is not substituted for the a? 1
vrRte* 11 ^fsqfatfsrrfitwft *&*%**: W+*k *rTf&ft 11
171. In the Chhandas, the affixes far and fo* N
In the>ense of 'the agent having such a habit &c' come
after the verbs that end in long w, or short or long m, and
after the verbs ^ 'to go\ r* 'to kill', and *n ( to bo pro-
duced', and thes& affixes operate like fti^ causing redupli-
cation of the root.
The ^ after w is either for the sake of euphony, or for the sake of pre-
cision. Had it been ^, then by the rule of *rrc (I. 1. 70) short g* would only be
included and not long gy. But the present rule is applicable to long qy as well.
Thus qr+fa* =tPt: 'drinking'; as qfo: *t*r 'drinking the soma-juice';
Jfalf: 'giving cows' (Rig. Vcd. VI. 23. 4). PrtTOJ> **[fc: (Rig- Ved. IV. 39. 2,
VI. 68. 7). <pf *n*nR*jfr:(Rig. Ved.X. 108. 1). ipr+fif^^siffcr: 'being in constant
motion, wind'; *rf"HI*r (Rig. Ved. II. 23. 11); *«r s +fiFiT»*i^f«T: 'killing, a
weapon offensive'; «i^Pr^r^ (Rig. Ved. IX. 61.2); *i* N +fapr N « nftn as n fti ^ f ii f
(T.S, VII. 5.20/1).
The letter stf in these affixes is indicatory. It might be said 'it is su-
perfluous to make these affixes fajw, because these being treated like fas N will
be fas* by rule I. 2. 5'. True, they would be faj^ by the rule I. 2. 5, but then
the rule VII. 4. 1 1. (when, lit follows, guna is the substitute of the verb m*Q and
of those that end in the long qy) would also have applied to these affixes, and
would have caused guna. It is to prevent this guna of the letter m that we have
annexed an indicatory sir to these affixes.
Varb — The affixes fa? and fapr N are of universal application in the
Chhandas, and not confined to the verbs enumerated in the stitra, as we see
them in ** s &c; as #ff : (Yaj. Ved. XII. 105); #ft: (Rig. Ved. II. 5. 3).
Vartx— The affixes faj and ft^come after the roots >n^,^, 3, ufa,
Digitized by
Google
Bk. ill. Ch. II. § 172-175.] The affix varach. 477
«rf*r, and «rf>T in the secular literature also; as, *fa:, ■*%:, *[Rr., 11%:, *lP*r, #I?r: I
Vatt\ — The affixes Rf and fiR*r N come after the Intensive (*r*«) roftts
of *S N , *f N > ^, and ir^. As, *rraff :, *!*%:, *ir*fw, Wrfir: (VII. 4. 83).
^f^pArifanBF 11 ^ 11 ^rf^r 11 ^fa-?^:, *rf^w,
(er^ns^^nf^2) 11
^ftr 11 wtosv^r *i*iflwiR*i **4s «ffin?TiHrBft *i*fii 11
*Tf*^ 11 »Wfit **F«*\ 11
172. The affix iftn? comes, in the sense of c the
agents having such a habit &c', after the verbs ctj c to
sleep* and «pc 'to be thirsty'.
As s^+lfifff =m*t 1st. sing, mps^ 'sleeping, drowsy 1 ; tou^ 1st. sing,
« «Gjq[ 'covetous, thirsty'.
Vart : — So also after the verb ^ 'to insult, be bold 9 ; as, wmm
1st. sing, tgcora^ 'bold, impudent'.
y»£lHW 11 ^ 11 t^rfa 11 *[-*p£fr.% an*:, (*rafio) 11
173. The affix w* comes in the sense of 'the
agents having such a habit &c' after the verbs xr 'to in-
jure' and *** 'to praise', c to salute'.
As Wtt: 'noxious, a mischievous animal'; vw. 'praising, a bard'.
$mt w^ft n^38 i mqifii iif*ra:,$-tg*R^ (*roflo) 11
^Pfi : 11 ftrtt *$ wm^Drateroftarft* «r£$ fl^trak unnft top ii
jtRNpmi «5«fwRt Wi«i: 11
174. The affixes ig and 5*ft coine in the sense of
'the agent having such a habit' after the verb *ft c to fear\
As, *fft>: 'fearful, timid'; *ftotff: 'timorous, a bear, a tiger, a jackal*.
Vart : — The affix fF*FT N should also be stated ; as *fft3*: I
*3*rw*fawj%T *ci n ii \«| 11 vuft u WT-^ir-Hro-
^frr: 11 wr f V hwt far *ra ^frwwi-HCNruR^ ^5 Ji^w^l *rafii 11
175. The affix <re^ comes, in the sense of 'the
agents having such a habit &c* after the verbs *m 'to
stand 1 f*r 'to rule', *n% 'to shine', fH 'to go' and «ro 'to go*.
As ctrnr: 'immoveable'; f mc: 'ruler, God'; *N*^: 'going, destructive';
ftrarcrc 'opening, expanding*.
to w. 11 ^ 11 ir^ifa 11 vt> % to, (*r*jfftarf^2, *rc*)u
Digitized" by
Google
4/8 The affix kvip. [Bk. Ill Ch. II. $ 176-178.
/
176. The affix 1*^ in the sense of 'the agent
/having such a habit &c' comes after the verb m when it
'' ends with the affix *w£.
With the affix ij^, the intensives of verbs are formed; as *mrrc 'a
vagrant, an ascetic'. See sfltra I. 1. 58.
VT^m^f^^^Jiira^: %* II ^33 II V^jfa II
*jfa: 11 tu*ifq**ft ^rTw^w^ltrtif^l «F*r<5 ftfprartt *rcrfir 11
177. The affix fa* comes, in the sense of 'the
agent having snch a habit &c.' after the verbs *m 'to shine'
*m 'to shine', g$ 'to injure 1 , «pi'to shine 1 , «n* 'to be strong',
* c to fill', *r 'to move rapidly' and ^ 'to praise', when it is
preceded by the word «n**r c a stone'.
Thus, ft*ni 1st. sing, fipil^ 'splendid'; «n^ 1st. sing, ht: 'light'; >J* N +
ffc^=*^(VI. 4. 21), 1st sing. *£. 'who injures'; ft^f^ 'lightening'; ir£ 1st. sing.
3^ 'strength'; 5^ 1st. sing, <r: 'what fills'; ir 'swift*. In the case of *j, a long
vowel is the substitute of sj; qra£^(VI.i. 71) 'a stone-worshipper'. Though
by the universal rule III. 2. 76, the affix ffc^ would have come after these
; verbs also, the repetition of the affix shows that *TTO6:<rfirfir does not apply
in tdchchhilika affixes.
(d^^wif^M, fqro) 11
siRjc«^|| fi^qp«tM*t*JWlW q^npffcrt {NfTfl9|UltlHlU*1 II
*rf*tailii *i$tf*favii
«nPfc*n n *w ********** ^ 11
*if$*ntji **?**}: tfroroD'^ 11
178. The affix fm\ is seen after other verbs
also, besides those mentioned above, in the sense of 'the
agent having such a habit &c\
As 3*j, 1st. sing, ^'joining 1 ; fe^ 'piercing*; ^'dividing'.
By using the words 'is seen' in the aphorism, it is implied that other
rules also apply concurrently with ft%. Thus in some cases we find lengthen-
ing of the vowel; in some, there is reduplication of the root; in some instances
there is samprqsdrano. of the semivowel; and in other cases there is not
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 179, 1 80.] The affix du. 479
Vart\ — When ft*<r follows, the long vowel is the substitute of **£ 'to
speak', sregr/to ask', ^psraeej 'to praise long', sf?jj 'to move through a mat', sj
'to move rapidly', and *ft 'to serve', and there is no substitution of a vowel for
the semivowel (VI. 1. 16),
As, w^ 'the voice'; *^+fav*irej+ft^(VI. 1. 10) = *^+%^ (VIII. 2.
36) = sir? (VIII. 4 56) 'who asks'; a*r*m**y 'who praises long'; s^yir 'a worm';
it: 'swift'; ift: 'the goddess Lakshmi'.
The word sr which was mentioned in the last sfttra is redundant here.
Vart\ — There is reduplication of the verbs *J« 'to shine', ip^'to go' and
£ 'to invoke', when fir^ follows. As, ft«p( 'shining'; sirr^ 'going, the world'.
Varti— There is lengthening also of the vowel of sjj: as *[$: 'a crescent-
shaped wooden ladle used for pouring the sacrificial ghee into the (ire. ,
Vart\— The root f 'to tear' is shortened also ; as j£^ 'tearing'.
Varti — The verb urr 'to think' has sampras&rana; as *ft: 'thinking*.
WT: ^UR^: \\\*Z\\ ^Tf^f H TOT:, TO-3RTOt:, (% vi) \\
179. The affix ft^ comes after the verb ^'to he'
when the word so formed denotes a name or a surety.
As, !%*£ 'a person called Vibhft' ; «jfir*fc 'a surety i. e. he who stands
intermediate between the debtor and the creditor'.
farther TOlimrrw it \*o n tr^r w f*-w-*«fr, 5,
v >*
^Rn 11 fir v *^ wt* TjTwtoWr: *w»*r mfh *r ^ *m irofl 11
*rf$*rn 11 ^TOj^ifl pRW[*rf*«r ot^ p tpt^ 11
180. The affix 5 comes after the verb ^ when it
is preceded by the upasargas fir, v and m^ provided that the
word to be formed does not mean an appellative.
As fiw 'all pervading'; q$: 'lord'; ^f^: 'Creator*.
Why do we say 'when it is not a proper name ? Observe F**: 'a person
called Vibhft'.
Vari: — The words pftr^ &c, also are formed by this affix. As firsfl^
'the sea'; jf*: 'causing happiness'.
Why have we applied 7 and not Rr^ to this root, as the forms would
have been the same in either case ? We have done so for two purposes: (1) ,To
prevent the rules relating to dhdtus from applying to this. (2) To prevent the
insertion of q?f[ augment. Thus the 1st. dual of Prfn£ is firaar, 1st. pi. is fir<fg?:i
Here there is no substitution of miw % which the rule VI. 4. 77 required, if 5 had
retained its dhdtu characteristic; so also the rule of accent in VI. 1. 17s
Digitized by VjOOQIC
4 8o The affix shtran. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 181-183,
does not apply to Instrumental sing. fanPTT &c, (2.) We have no f( which rule
VI. 1. 71 required. Ptf **fif=fa**: I
*: W^f% *£WJI ^ II qqifa II nr: f qrifir, ^W^U
181. The affix «r^ comes, in denoting the ob-
ject, after the verb m 'to feed'.
The indicatory * denotes that the feminine is formed by rft[ (f ) affix.
As \jnft r a nurse whom the children suck (dAayanti)'; and 'Amalaki fruit which
holds (dadhdti) all medicinal properties'.
fan ^^-im^g-3*-^-^ **$,(*£*)"
**rr# *fci^w4tH*fir 11
182. The affix «**, with the sense of instru-
ment, comes after the verbs *n 'to cut', 5ft 'to lead 1 , acre c to
hurt*, 3 'to join', *^ <to join', *g 'to praise', «* 'to inflict
pain', fe 'to bind', ftr^ 'to sprinkle', fa* 'to urine*, <ni 'to
fall', to 'to bite' and Tf 'to bind'.
As *pr, 1st. sing, neuter {PT'g'a sickle* (lit. that with which one cuts);
$* 1st. sing, ^r^'eye'; jj&t (VII. 2. 9) 'a weapon'; ^hf 'the tie that fastens the
yoke'; ^^n'the tie of yoke'; ^rtf % a pencgyric'; fitf 'a goad', *rf 'a ligament';
*fttf «a sprinkling vessel'; ft^yir'the penis'; <pr^ 'a vehicle'; tfqci 'a large tooth'.
The word qf«?r belongs to the Ajddi class and hence forms its feminine
in ?r^(W) and not in f (IV. 1.4).
The root ixs is read in the aphorism without its nasal i e. as ^. This
indicates by implication that 7^ loses its nasal before some affixes such as ?*&;
thus we have ^CR*t 'tooth'
And lastly T^+«f{=5 H^Vi fern. *r^gft (VIII. 2. 34 and 40), 'a thong'.
f W^fliq* : gw II \c| II xnfTfa II ^T-^JI!^:, g^:,(«jw) II
^pH'- H , d ^ "^» wtrctoT: ^nrtl *>k*J «**nro*nfT H*fil Ifeftt went f5W£
183. The affix ^ is employed after the verb
^with the sense of instrument when denoting a member
of the body of a plough or of a hog.
The verb ^ includes both <ri^and «^; as i\^\ 'a plough-share'; it*ft
'the snout of a hog'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. II. § 184-187.] The affix kta. 48;
184. The affix v* comes after the verbs ^ 'to
go\ 5£/to cut', Vto shake', ^'to bring forth', ^ 'to dig',
^ 4 to bear', and "*ir to go' with th8 sense of instrument.
Thus, arft* 'a rudder 1 ; eifirw 'a sickle'; *finf 'a fan'; *f%# 'cause of
production'; w** 'a spade'; ^arlf* 'patience'; ^frw' 'an instituted observ-
ance or a narrative'.
vpi ^vniTw h v^ 11 xr^Tf^ 11 g*-, 4wrara, (r*0 n
«jRn 11 wl*rf<it: sroxr **nr* ****** *r*fa ^s^t *^irr ***$ 11
185. The affix f* come3 after the verb ^ c to
purify' with the sense of the agent so expressed being
the instrument; when the sense of the complete word is
simply appellative, and not descriptive.
The verb ^ includes two verbs <gF and <£t both meaning 'to purify',
but belonging to two different conjugations ; as *faw an instrument for clean-
sing or purifying, such as a sieve or a strainer; and in this sense it means
'two blades of Kusa grass used at sacrifices in purifying and sprinkling ghee'.
It also means 'the sacred thread, the clarified butter, &c.
«£fc ^^Rpft: 11 \*$ 11 *^Tftr 11 *SR % *rf*-^rcnfr*,
(T*:, g*:) II
186. The affiLX pi comes after the verb %/to
purify* in the sense of 'the agent or the instrument'
when it is respectively employed in connection with a
sage or a diely.
That is to say, when applied to a Rishi the force is that of an in-
strument, and when applied to a DevatA the force is that of an agent. As,
TfriftHtVft: 'this sage is sacrcd\through whose instrumentality one is sanctified);
•Tfir: <Tfir*f *r.Hr yrrg 'the God Agni is sacred' (one that purifies), 'let him purify
me'. So also, mq tfm: *$ t*y: tW fl *rr w« 1
*ifa: TO II \cs || ^Tfa II f*T-TTT:, TO II
fRr: 11 *toflr wtirffoiW? ton*** ntfer 11
187. The verbal roots, marked with an indica-
tory Pi, take the affix w, iu denoting the present time.
Digitized by
Google
482 The affix kta. [Bk. III. Ch. II. § 188.
The Nishthd affix *ir, as a general rule, is a past participial affix and
denotes past time ; and is so ordained by rule III 2. 102. The present sfltra
thus makes an exception in case of those verbs which are marked with an in-
dicatory fsj in the Dhdtupdtha\ as foP^T'to be affectionately inclined'; Pm:
(Rr^+^^Rrf^+^^ft^+^r (VIII. 2. 42) 'being affectionately inclined 9 . So
filf^T— f^TO: 'sounding inarticulately'; ftrun— tar*: 'bold'. The anuvritti of
q^rt 'in the sense of the present', is read into this sfltra from HI. 2. 123.
*ftr: 11 HfifRr«5(r, 5^3rf^l» %?ff wr «rr, wwNv >*HI*St jAmmi*? ^m**)
h*Rt 11
188. And after roots denoting inclination, un-
derstanding, or respect, the affix ^f is employed with the
force of the present.
The word *f?r means 'wish' or 'desire'; ^Rf means 'knowledge'; and qgir
means 'worship', 'honor* or 'respect'. As rorf «m:, — fe:,— 5^>— W&>%— < jfifl : » &c.
'the king wishes, desires, thinks, knows, honors, respects &c\
The force of the word n is to include other kinds of verbs not included
in the above sfltra. Thus the following participles have their senses confined
not to the past time only: tftfcra: 'practised'; *%*?: 'protected'; in*l: 'forbear-
ing'; «?!*[?: 'censured'; *&: 'pleased'; *r: 'angry'; sfas: 'angry'; »?f*|c*r*9:
'uttered'; «r: 'happy'; **: 'satisfied'; m**: 'favourite'; *Uw: 'restrained'; to*:
ready'; to? 'evil, misery' (with a future signification); and n^i 'immortal'. So
also:— 5^: 'sleeping'; jrRni: 'lying down'; wftpi: 'eaten'; ftnr: 'smeared'; mr:
^satisfied'; all these have a present signification.
Digitized by
Google
BOOK THIKD.
Chapter III.
— :o:—
^onr^ift *^?i ii ^ ii m^tPi ii ^i-stt^:, wraw, (^ti^) ii
jfa: II OTJH*: Wmt ^fol^tf ^flTRrf fiNT^ *fw *Wfol II
1. The affixes 'Un' and the rest, with the
force of the present, and with a sense simply appella-
tive, are attached diversely.
The phrase 'with the force of the present* (implying neither past
nor future time) and 'with a sense simply appellative 9 (and not descriptive)
must be read into this sfltra by anuvritti from sfttras III. 2. 123 & 185. By
using the word 'diversely' it is indicated that these affixes are, of course, applied
after roots about which they are ordained, but they come also after roots
about which they are not ordained. Sometimes we must infer their applica-
tion by seeing actual words. Some affixes, though there be no express injunc-
tion regarding them, arc to be inferred to belong to this class. The maxim
in regard to the Unddi affixes is that when, in appellatives, we find the forms
of verbal roots and affixes coming after them, then we may know, from the
result as presented in the word, what are the indicatory letters which the affix
must be possessed of in order to produce the result.
These affixes are not given in Pinini's work, but they have been sepa-
rately collected. The affix to^ is the first of these. The first sfltra of Unddi
affixes is the following—
The affix ot^ comes after the verbs ft 'to make', *r 'to blow 1 , qr 'to
drink*, fit 'to overcome', fir 'to scatter 1 , i** 'to be pleasant to the taste', *l>?
'to accomplish 1 , and WJ/to pervade'.
Thus tf+^q^^rc: 'an artisan'. So also, nv$: 'the wind'; qpj: 'the
organ of excretion'; wj: 'a drug (which overcomes disease)'; m^: 'the bile';
W* : 'sweet'; *T*: 'who accomplishes the object of another, hence virtuous';
and Wf[: quickly'.
These Unddi affixes come after a limited number of roots, and not
after every root, as the affixes taught in this grammar whose application is
general ; hence the word wim has been employed. Moreover there has been no
exhaustive enumeration of the several roots after which these affixes come:
35
Digitized by
Google
484 The unadi affixes. [Bk. Ill Ch III. § 2, 3.
only some of them have been collected in works treating of Unddi affix-
es. Thus though the affixes *CT^ is ordained after f*, it comes also after jp&
as xra[5fn. In fact there is a long discussion and it was a moot point at the
time of P&nini whether these words said to be formed by Unddi affixes were
really derivative, or primitive ones. Moreover a// the operations of these affixes
have not been shown, that is, their effects are not without remainder (ct$*).
They are valid and good if found in sacred Scriptures or secular literature. The
authors of Niruktas and grammarians of the school of S&kat&yana, consider all
nouns and substantives (sot) as derivative words from simple roots 0?rw*r).
Therefore where the derivation of a word is not apparent, one should infer the
existence of proper base (ffift) or affix (sror*) to form such a word.
The following slokas will be of some use to the student for ascertaining
the Unddi affixes :
*tr wiftjtagfti toto: nfrifv nvju^ u ^ u
*l4lfftW4'^«'M3n*tlltl*lUJl(|3 R I m
*%*fo j*&% ii*h v^ft m gitvrft, fi^,(vn^rt)H
^f%r: ii ♦jn«*i<*l 3i!Rfir: iraw pcjf^ II
2. The ^nftdi* affixes are seen also attached
with the force of the past time.
By the last sfltra, it was taught that the Unddi affixes come with the
force of the present time. The present aphorism teaches that they come with
the force of the past also, not as a general rule, but in special cases. The
force of the words 'are seen' being that no general rule can be laid down about
it, but on finding that certain words have a past significance, we conclude that
the affix in that particular case has the force of the past time.
Thus ^+qf5f^=^R^ «a way, road' (that which has been established
as a rule) ; ^+nf3r^='*^ 'skin' (that which is lived in) ; so also vm^ 'ashes'
(that which has been reduced to ashes).
^ftwfir f^TT^i: ii ^ ii xrtjfa ii ^firofir, ifo-sn^wi
wfit : ii Hfirurfir 3»n^ irarro: *w: wwit *r*fai u
*iM*^ ii awnpr ^w^Umim^ ii
3. The words 'garni', &c. are valid forms, hav-
ing the sense of the future time.
The force of the future time is in the affix, and is so ordained, and not
in the original word which takes the affix. Thus we sec that the Unddi
Digitized by
Google
Bk. tti. Cm. ill. § 4, sJ The unadi affixes. 485
affixes, in a way, do come with the force of not only present, but past and
future also, though in the latter two cases its scope is very limited. As ipft
WH* 'intending to go to the village' ; afTTPft 'that which has to come' So also
TOircft 'departing* ; nfirctf f 'an opponent, (who is going to obstruct). srf?tft>ft
•going to be awakened*. So also sfafoft 'an adversary*; qfircftift 'an enemy';
Rfircrcft; wmft; nnflr, &c.
Vart : — The Future, for the purposes of this rule, must be anadyatana
future I e. the affix should come in the sense of what will happen but not in
the course of the current day. In other words, the force must be of the first
future 53^, and not of the second future sjs. As ^ ipftqnpl'he intends to
go to the village tomorrow'.
*uq«^<ifoMia4VJU N 11 a u nr^rfa 11 imm-3^i-f^mRVs f
*rc, (nfWw) ii %
^ftr. 11 *rc^^n*r«^f^w^*4H*4l$f%«ffa «t#> mfll^y wit **(% 11
4. The affix c Laf comes after a root, with the
force of futurity, when it has in construction with it the
particles 'y&vat' and 'pur&\
The present tense has the force of the future when the adverts *r*^
and sr*H are used. The phrase 'futurity &c' is to be read into this sfttra from
the last. Thus wsft* * Ernifil *ft 'he will surely fall in the range of your sight',
irr^w sum: qygr rre W& *wift <l shal1 scftd Satrughna to exterminate
this wretch'.
These words yr and mv^ must be used as adverbs (nipAtas), and not
as relative pronouns. Therefore not here, wr*^ VCTfil ?ire* N *fr*iri* 'as long as he
will give, so long he will eat'; yr frf^rRl 'he goes along the city'. Here *t*^
is a relative pronoun; and yr is the Instrumental singular of 3^ 'city\
(nfWfr, wt) ii ^^
jf*r. u mvtfit twnfttfro^tFfwn *fa**fn **r£ ^rtr^jiwnft «w fa 11
5. The affix 'Latf is optionally employed after
a root with the force of the futurity, when it has in con-
struction with it, the adverbs 'kad&' and 'karhi'.
As w *^fc 'when will he eat', or **r *ftl*« or $m ; so also *!&&;*
or *fr5«tf or 4t*l*r 'when will he eat'.
Digitized by
Google
486 The unadi affixes. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 6, 7.
C. When the word 'kirn* or its derivatives are
in construction with the verb, the affix 'Laf is employed
optionally after a root, in denoting future time, provided
that the sentence expresses a desire of gaining on the
part of the speaker.
The word 'optionally* is understood in this sfltra. By using the word
JtT along with fife it is meant that the rule applies even when f%n takes the
affixes ¥W and *w. The word f«rcrr means the desire of gaining or acquir-
ing, a wish to have something or an intention of begging*.
As w »*^lr Hfapsifa! or 4t*tf*rarc : 'whom will you feed' ? It implies a re-
quest on the part of the questioner to feed him also. So also qrart f»nrt fTC*fif,
ffrftf, jnir, or *m4t finprt *rwfir &c, 'Which of the two or which of these all,
will he give alms ? Will he give something to me* ?.
When no desire of gain is implied, the future tense must be employed
as qr: qnrf^tf nfirofil 'who will go to PAtaliputra'.
f^q^n^rfa^T *r 11 3 11 tr^rfw ii famwiM-fayT, *f,
^t: 11 RwAHMflRft unronrrot HfirofaKrcl qriffifaw wsjmrit *i*Ri 11
7. And when the success, that would accrue
to another by fulfilling the desire of the speaker, is indi-
cated in a sentence, the present tense may optionally be
employed with the force of the futurity,
The word 'optionally' is also understood here. The word t»n*3HHfti fy
Is equal to focwTPTI^ ftrfo an Ablative-Tatpurusha Compound, signifying
siddhi or success, that would be acquired by another by complying with the
request of the speaker. The difference between this and the last sfltra is, that
whereas the last related to interrogative sentences having fa*n in construction,
the present relates to sentences in general. As «ft h*# TOftr, 9 t**f T=5[fn 'he
who gives food, goes to heaven'; *f n*tf jrwRr or imr, s wft itfrofii or «?«fr-
Here the speaker encourages the giver to the act of charity by hold-
ing out the hope, that from rice which is the object desired (facnprpr) the success
(f*rf^)> * n ^e shape of svarga % will accrue to the giver.
In other words, 'the present is sometimes used for the future In condi-
tional sentences, i. e. it is employed in connection with a sentence declaring
the compensation or rew^rcj ^ich follows from the granting of the wish*.
fflWI^i (w^f^T, ^W) II'
v
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 8-10 ] The affixes tumun and nvul. 487
■ I I - III! — — ■— I I I I !■» I I
^Ri: 11 efartf: fallow* ** « wt^Jwfnrft w**t mr *#«n*r*r*tffa«*ffi
**ra fww 5T? s nwnft *prfh 11
8. The affix *Lat* is optionally employed with
the force of the futurity, after that root, which in a con-
ditional sentence, is the condition precedent for the ac-
tion indicated by another verb having the sense of the
imperative mood.
The word stotf means 'having the sense of the affix 5^ or impera*
tive mood'. The force of lot is 'to command, direct, invite &c* as given in HI. 3.
162 and 163. The sfttra, translated literally, will mean 4 the present tense may
optionally be employed when the action denoted by the verb is related to an-
other action denoted by another verb in the imperative, as a sign (^TOUT) is to
the thing signified fa**)'. Thus OTiMtrarf^PTOcfir (wrFr«*fir or HPFtrr) aw **
fpfrnft** 'if the professor comes (*. e. will come) then read you prosody*. Here
the coming of the professor is the lakshana of the direction as to reading.
9. The 'Lat\(presont) or the 'Liii' (potential) is
nsed under similar conditions in denoting futurity, when
the future time is future by a 'muhfrrta* (48 minutes).
All the conditions of the last sQtra apply here also, namely 'when the
action denoted by the verb is related to another action denoted by another
verb in the imperative, as a sign is to the thing indicated'. By force of the
word *| we read the anuvritti of lat also into this aphorism. The word *?vt-
*ftorf^*i is a secondary derivative from 3^3*^, meaning 'that which exists in
time above a muhflrta*. This is an irregular compound ; and the vriddhi takes
place irregularly of the 3 of g and not of 3? as the general rule required. The
whole word thus formed qualifies the word 'future'. Thus n& ^fjfcsvft Jf WW
s<m*r*n&*r«T*aTf (»?pr«arRT, wuRrurfii or wrar), w ** **frr*ft«* 'If the tea-
cher comes after an hour (of 48 minutes), yflu had better read the Prosody 1 .
*?*: 11 fr,*rohrT fawns™? vrniltffirafa *n$ VPFV^ *****& *** : 11
10. The affixes 'tumun'" and 'nvuP are placed
after a verbal root, with the force of the future, when the
36
Digitized by VjOOQIC
488 The affixes ghan&c. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § it.
word in construction therewith is another verb, denoting
an action performed for the sake of the (future) action.
As Ht^OTitr 'he goes to eat'; tft*raft vcnfo 'he goes to eat\ Here the
upapada or the verb in construction is snrfit; it denotes an action performed for
the sake of the future action (fif^mif), namely, eating.
Why do we say 'denoting an action' ? The upapada must be an action
and not a substantive; as fnf^T^ f Rf W*r *nrr: 'matted hair is for the purpose that
he should beg.' Here the affixes are not employed.
Why do we say 'performed for the sake of another action'? Observe
>mrcNtf «?RrwrRf ^F*: 'running, thy stick will faff.
Now, it might be asked why *J5J is taught a second time, when it was
already taught generally by rule III. I. 133 ; and that being a common rule,
would have applied to this subjeet also ? If you reply that the future affix «s
would have prevented its application, iq conditional sentences like the above,
we say that the rule of 'non-uniform affixes applying simultaneously' given in
III. 1. 91 will step in and will conduce the application of °%*( in spite of 5*?.
Vart. — The repetition of the affix oj^ (ordained, to come after a ver-
bal root, when the word in construction therewith is another verb denoting an
action performed for the sake of the future action,) is for the sake of prohibit-
ing the application of the affixes like ^ &c. in denoting the above sense;
that is to say. the rule of WfTCT (III. 1. 94) does not apply here and we can-
not optionally employ any other affix, with this gerundial sense. Thus we can-
not say *rof ?nrRf 'he goes to do'; but we must say ^nfij instead.
These affixes form the gerund of the infinitive of purpose.
^fa: 11 Hfnfir *V* t *iin* Rrffrofr ^*mw*f%«*ffair#l fww*nm$
11. And the affixes that are ordained to come
after a root with the force of denoting the mere action of
the verb, such as ^ &c.^(III. 1. 13.) have also the force of
the future, when the word in construction therewith, is
another verb denoting an action performed for the sake
of the future action.
- As grof* iniRf 'he goes to cook'; agrif jnrfir 'he goes for the sake of suc-
cess'; jrt *ni Rf I
Now it might be asked, why make this rule at all, when those affixes
have already been ordained ? It has already been said that the wcict rule
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 12] The affix am. v4g^
does not apply in regard to infinitive; and hence $3^ would have prevented the
application of other affixes. So the making of the present sfttra.
Why the word qr*T has been employed in the sfttra ? The meaning
is that the words should be expressive or qptt- How do the affi xes become
*TOff ? When affixes which are ordained after certain bases, are employed
after those bases only, then they are said to be *rw*, not when they are em-
ployed after other bases, or are even after those bases, but not in the mode as
directed. So that, in short, those nouns only which have been especially form-
ed by the wrara affixes, q-sj &c, can be employed with the force of gerund,
and not every noun. The WW** nouns correspond to the nouns of action or
verbal nouns.
3TO *F$fw* II ^ II H^Tfa II 3T«,«F$fqr, (*tf**lfa, *T$,
12. The affix c ajgi' comes after a root with the
force of the future, when the word in construction with
it is in the accusative case, and when the action is per-
formed for the sake of another action.
The word 'future* is understood here. The force of *t is merely that
of a connective particle. By rule III. 2. I. the affix w^ comes after a root
when the word in composition is in the accusative case. That is a general
injunction ; and the rule of *ne*7T not applying, the affix *j5J would have de-
barred it as already said ; hence this repetition. This rule being an apav&da
rule (an exception or a special rule with regard to those verbs which have the
, accusative case in composition) will thus, within its own jurisdiction, prevent
the application of iq^ of III. 3. 10 ; and by the rule of <?w given in I. 4. 2,
it will debar the affixes like q? &c. Therefore this met comes after even those
verbs also which were especially exempted from its operation by rules like III.
2. 3. Thus by rule III. 2. 3 the wi^ of III. 2. 1 could not have come after simple
verbs ending in long w, such as jr 'to give* &c But the present w^ with a
gerundial force will come even after such verbs. As *fr?rat zraft 'he goes to
give cows', and not if|j: 1 So also qr*35PW*ft STiffa 'he goes to give blanket';
wwrtT w^ffir 1 W+w^= W (VII. 3- 33>
v So also q» rg55Tre l' Wffil 'he goes to cut wood'. In this case MCT N would
have been applied even by % III. 2. I.
^s ift * 11 ^ 11 ir^Tfa 11 src, Ift % (**ftrofa, fwnnrt,
fanrnrbri, w?ft:,sr?) 11
Digitized by
Google
49° The affix lut. [Bk. III. Ch. in. § 13-15.
• — ■ — —
13. The affix 'Lrit 7 is employed after a verb, in
the remaining cases, where futurity pnre and simple is
indicated ; and also where there is in construction with
it another verb denoting an action performed for the
sake of the future action.
This is what is well-known as the Second Future. As qrftu(Tf»r ffil
*nrf?r 'he goes that I will do'; tfirorfir *f% w*ffa 'he goes that I will take*. So
also, *f?cqrft lie will do'; f ftc*ft 'he will take'. Thus the Second Future is
used both in dependent sentences as well as to denote simple Future.
*£i *5T II \V II Hq i fa II ^:, *f , *T H 1
14. The* affixes called 'Sat' i. e. '^atri' and
'6&nach' are optionally the substitutes of 'Lrif.
The *m has been' defined in III. 2. 127. This option is a regulated op-
tion ; that is to say, the affixes tot and *TR^ replace 5?* under the conditions
in which they replace ^e; thus by III. 2. 124, these affixes will replace b? when
agreeing with what does not end with the first case-affix. In these cases ?eht
will invariably replace 5j*. In other cases it will optionally replace w^. In
these cases they will form what is known as future participles. As n » fi; m* H
?**** 1** 'behold Devadatta about to do; *fr**mUT ?*f*f <n[* 'behold Deva-
datta being about to be done'. 9 *rf*«*^or i sFTfr^mrar. Besides simple futu-
rity, it denotes intention or purpose, as ftrffcupnttft toRi 'he dwells intending
to earn his livelihood' ; qrftnpnqj : qjjt ^rcrcpt 'intending to furnish his bows
with arrows'.
When, however, it agrees with the nominative case, it is optionally em* .
ployed. As ^rftnr^, thftwimuj :, *rfrofir or *rft«ir?r tarr* 'Devadatta will do'.
The form ttft*** is thus evolved. As f> +^ s =»fr+w+fj» (III. 1. 33)=.
^nr+f?+W+^Rr»«FR^ni nom. sing. qtf?«4«r I In other words the participial
affixes Wf (wr) and unr, technically known as jrcr and STPPJ, also come
after a verb that has taken the personal ending w of the Future.
<*Htid3 57 11 ^ h ur^rfw 11 vnrcrait, 3?, (*fMfe)N
15. The affix 'Lutf comes after a verbal root in
the sense of what will happen, but not in the course of
the current day.
This debars 'Ljrit\ As **: TOif 'he will do tomorrow', ^ft *ftw 'he will
eat tomorrow'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 16-18.] The affix ghan. 491
The word 'anadyatana' is a Bahuvrihi compound. Therefore in cases
where there is not pure futurity beyond today, but a mixture of the two, w? will
be employed and not ^j». As «w m|T *r *f%«cfa 'it will be today or tomorrow'.
And where there is doubt, the second Future should be employed.
Vart.— The First Future (g^) is employed with the force of the Second
Future (m) when sorrow is expressed. As f* 5 mi «WIT, *hf <roft Pljwfil 1 'Oh
when will she go, who places her feet in such a way (who is such a slow walker)'
•wi 3 m isi&m, * urwrf^?^ 'when will he learn, who is so inattentive*!
*s 11
16. The affix 'ghaii' comes after the roots ( pad'
(to pace), 'ruj' (to pain), c viA' (to enter)* and 'spriS* (to touch).
The anuvritti of 'future' does not extend to this sfitra. The affixes
hereinafter taught come in all the tenses.
As<u+*P^=*n*: 'foot'; ^+^«^ir: 'disease'; so, *tf: 'entrance*.
Vari : — The verb ^p^ takes ir^ when the sense is that of 'distress';
as pnfc 'disease' or 'warmth'. The word jsnfi meaning 'touch' is formed by
adding the affix m^, under rule III 1. 134; as *riff ^: I There is difference in
accent between these two words.
^ fe£ 11 \$ 11 ^f^ 11 ^r, feft, (to) ii
17. The affix < ghafi > comes after the verb 'sri'
(to move) when the agent is permanently fixed.
The word ferc means an object remaining steady throughout any
period of time. That which thus remaining permanent moves through any
interval of time, will apply to the agent of the verb. Thus, 5+«nr»trrc: 'an
essence'; as ^i^TOft: 'the essence of sandal', QfftTOTC: 'the essence of catechu'.
Why do we say 'permanently fixed' ? Observe *rtf 'moves', otto:
'that which flows'.
Vart:— The word so formed also applies to disease, fish and strength.
As stftrarc: 'dysentery'; firmc. 'a fish'; W. 'strength'.
MT$ II \* II ^fa II MT$, (TO) II
18. The affix 'ghan' comes after a root when
mere action is denoted,
37
Digitized by
Google
492 The affix ghan. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 19.
Thus, q^+tp^«qr*r. 'cooking' (VII. 2. 116 and VII. 3. 52); mr«r: 'aban-
doning*; n»T: 'colouring' (VI. 4. 27). An action expresses a general state; so
that all roots denote 'action' when their meaning is to be expressed. And as
the meaning of the root can be expressed by the root itself, therefore, the
affixes fr^&c come after all verbal roots, when the sense of the root is denot-
ed as having attained to the completed state. It is not necessary that the
words so formed should be always of the masculine gender, singular number.
They may take any other gender or number. As Tfar:, <wr^,<?ra& qrafr: I These
affixes form, in short, verbal nouns, or abstract nouns being names of action.
Wi$f* * WTO* ^HTmra H \<! H tr^Tfa « SMR*R *,
jf%: 11 tttfttfft wc* dJTRrt fire* *rohf^ s?*nft H*fii 11
19. And the affix 'ghan' comes after a root,
when the sense is that of an appellative, the word being
related to the verb from which its name is deduced, but
not as agent.
Thus Jjra: (1. e. srrcufcf fPl) 'a dart, lit. that which men throw'; Jrehr: (1. e.
srtftofat WQ 'a sack, lit. that which men stitch together'; mmtK: (*• *• WjrfRf
itOffOT*) 'food, lit. that from which men take out the juice to nourish themselves'.
As H^tffft:, fWiJffSmfnc: I
Why do we say 'not related as an agent? Observe fa: 'a sheep, lit. that
which looks helplessly'. Here the word fa is related to the verb ffafii as
agent, and the affix is consequently not *r*J.
Why do we say 'when denoting an appellative*? Observe 3*far: mr.
'the mat must be made'.
The force of ^ in the sfltra is to indicate that *n? may be applied irre-
gularly in cases where appellative is not meant: as ^t W*T *rft W *what gift
was given by you'; 3?t?mr«rpft w«j: 'what gain was gained by you'.
The word <*u* is used in the stitra for this purpose. The word bto-
£ ft is a compound word formed by the negative *pj The word means a non-
agent. Now the word 'non-agent' has two-fold significance; either it means
any other k&raka which is not an agent-k&raka; or it may mean any thing in
general which is not an agent. That is to say, the former negative, called
■f^fTO, points out, by implication, the objects which are different from the
thing prohibited; and in fact, makes the rule applicable to those objects; while
the second sort of negative called srcrcft J?fit*qr is a simple prohibition of the
particular matter specified, without mentioning what is different from it. Giv-
ing the former interpretation to the word trarifr, the word qffTO becomes
redundant, because 'non-agent' would mean any kAraka other than an agent.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IIL § 20.] The affix ghan. 493
But the very fact, that tFrcq? is used, indicates the existence of the following
rule which is nowhere expressly taught by P&nipi: — That sr^ is compounded
even with the force of ircran qfa^r'. (VI. I. 45). *rf*r^ f non-sit.
Both the phrases, 'when denoting mere condition (HP*)' and 'a kAraka
'which is not an agent' are understood in the succeeding aphorisms. See II 2.
6 about «r^ Compound.
MRnmmwmi qfai 11 ^0 11 vqrfk 11 trf*m*-3Trsn-
ht*t, ^b*n, (^r) 11
mftfal 11 jinnd *tfft foq^ ** M
20. The affix 'ghafit* comes after all roots when
the word so formed is the name of a measure.
Thus, Pr+ftr+*rn=M+M (VII. 2. H5>-Prani(VL 1. 78) 'a heap 1 ; as
<FKw*5*ifa*irar:; (ft ygfrfawnth *r 'to scatter* +tsr^=aKit: 1 qcV mft; *nr. *ht: i
By using the word 'all' in the sfitra, it is indicated that the affix *r^
(III. 3. 57) is also superseded when this sense is to^be indicated. Otherwise the
affix *r^ would only be prohibited by the Paribhdsha: — "Apav&das that pre-
cede the rules which teach operations that have to be superseded by the apavd-
^-operations, supersede only those rules that stand nearest to them, not the
subsequent rules". Thus a^j being taught in III. 3.56 would be superseded,
but not so h^ taught in the subsequent aphorism IIL 3. 57.
Why do we say 'when they are the names of measures'? Observe fipwr:
'ascertaining'.
The word tiro*: has been used in the aphorism in order to indicate
that the words so formed are not 'Primitive words (*:fir). The numerals are also
there included, and not only measures like Prastha % Pa/a &c.
We have said above, that the force of the word wfar: in this sfltra is
to indicate that the affix «nj must be used after all verbs (not excluding even
such verbs as require «T^|;or *rj by stitras 56 and 57), when we want to express
measure. This must be taken however, with certain limitations. The word
*T9*tr: is not after all so wide as at first sight it may appear. If we wish to
form a word indicating measure, in the feminine gender, we cannot use *n^;
we must use the affix f%fr^(III. 3. 94). In other words, the feminine affixes
are not superseded by ^'^^ when it supersedes a?«^ and a*^. Thus in forming a
feminine noun denoting measure, we have ^fiteftfasfftf:, f TOjFft &c.
Vart\-~ The affix v\ comes after the causative verbs ^ft and 3Tffc, and
there is luk elision of the causative affix ffcj^ ; when the word so formed is re-
lated to the verb as agent. Thus vrtqfoi Wf^=*qr?Tr: 'a wife* (lit 'who divides
brothers' a wife breaking up the brotherly love); *rrrofal ^^TNT; *a paramour'.
Digitized by
Google
494 The affix ghan. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 2I " 2 4*
T*«r h ^ u tn^f ii x9t, % (to) n
*iM*H ii wn?rt fei«rryr*5irnnr tit^m** *r rt^n
21. The affix 'ghan' comes after the root 'ift*
(to study).
This debars a?^ (III. 3. 56). As nRr+f+tn* « Mfir+^+H 83 WTRC
'a lesson or lecture'; ottoo*: Grfrmra i m ftft) 'a teacher'.
VarL — When the word to be formed is related to the verb f^ as an
ablative, the word is feminine also and optionally takes the affix tf^. As
^^r^RTje^rr^^m^Rrror OTTurnft 'a female teacher'.
VatU — The affix ip^ comes after the root jl when the word so formed
means 'wind', 'color', or 'cessation*. As qnr» 'wind', 'green colour' &c. «ftR^rrfin-
•ftjrrr: m$m Rjfjj? fncr: i
***5? fsw: 11 *r 11 ^rf^r 11 v*r*5f , w*: f (to) 11
22. The affix 'ghaiV comes after the verb 'rfi'
(to roar), when it has anupasarga in composition with it.
This debars ^ (III. 3. 57), As sftr*: •clamour', 3TCW &c.
Why do we say 'compounded with an qpasarga? Observe ** : 'sound',
^fa ^T5^ : M ^ " m^iPi 11 *fa, 3«-V-£*:,(TO )N
jRp ir *rfir *mf 355 f*$*>*t *rni«ft ^ untft *nrfii 11
23. The affix 'ghau* comes after the roots € y\V
(to join), 'dru'(to run) and 'da' (to burn), when in com-
position with the preposition *sam\
As *far?:, sffff* :, ff*r*:i Bqt it**: where the preposition is not sam.
{w4\**\wh% n ^ 11 wfw « fa-Vtr-yc:, **w*^,(to)m
jfir: 11 Pi uft ^f*^*it ^^^m^^t *p\ mwOt »*fii 11
24.- The affix 'ghaiY comes after the roots *sri'
(to go to) hiT (to lead) and c bh(l' (to be), when not in com-
position with an upasarga.
This debars the affix h% (III. 3. 56). As MPT. 'shelter', mwi # a means',
iff*: 'a condition'.
But with upasargas, we have iwr: 'respsct', um*: 'love'; mf f : 'source'.
How do we explain the form JWTT in ipffft tRf : 'the splendour of the
king 1 ? Here the word m is not made from the compound root mi +**&
but by compounding * with W? by the rules of s^m^sa, meaning 'excellent
condition'*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. hi. Ch. III. § 25-29.] The affix chan. 495
How do you explain the form *r* in «pft wg: ? Here the root iff has
taken the affix *r^ diversely by III. 3. 113.
tft ^Wbt: II ** II xppf* II tft, *-**:, fa*) H
^fti: 11 myn? «j g *s*n**t W3*rt ^ unntr **fii 11
25. The affix 'ghaii' comes after the roots
4 kshu' (to sneeze), and ^ru' (to move and hear) when the
preposition * vi 9 is in composition.
This debars the affix i?n (III. 3. 57); as, f%*r?: 'cough'; ft%OT: 'flowing
forth', 'celebrated 9 . But when without preposition, we have w. and M<n I
m*ft<(\fifo : || ^ || T^rfa 113?*-*$:, f3p|:, (to) II
.26. The affix 'ghafi' comes after the verb l uV
(to lead) when the prepositions 'ava' and c utf are in com-
position.
As WfW 'throwing down'; trarat 'elevation'.
How do you explain 3irof: in *w*: *urqfaP£? Here the affix is 'ach 9 by'
III. 3. "3-
5 5TOTO II ^ H tr^Tfw II % *-^J-^*-, fa«) M
*jftt: 11 $w ^ 5 ** g friKteft *n«»wt ^ unrtr *wfa 11
27. The affix 'gliaf!' comes after the roots , dru , l
'stu' and 'sru', when the word in composition is 'pra\
As q*nr:, TOIT*:, TOT*: 1 But not so in **:, «r*: and m: I
Gw*ft: i^ftnivii^nnf^H Ofc-spRft:, 3-vftt C^r9i)ii
28. The affix 'ghan' comes after the roots 'pd*
(to purify) and Tu' (to cut) when 4 nir' and 'abhf are res-
pectively in composition.
The word prefers to both qj£ and <m. The rule I. 3. 10. must be
applied here, and thus Pi^ comes before <r, and iff* before 5^1 As ft^qr?: 'win-
nowing 9 ; HPr^mr: 'moving 9 . But <f?: and »f*:, without these prepositions.
***ft£: II ^« II Tpjrfir N *<T-*ft:, TJ:, (TO ) II
jfa: II g^feTTyghf : ^y^^ HI<IHl4 ^n4 tHfRf 11
29. The affix 'ghan 7 comes after the root 'gj-r
when the upasargas 'ut' and 'nf are in composition.
The verb ij here refers to both the verbs ij 'to make sound 9 , and ij 'to
swallow*. As 3^*1?/ * 5*ni 'the r6aring of the sea'; Prmft t*vror 'the swallow-
38
Digitized by
Google
496 The affix GHAif. [Bk lit Ch. HI. § 30-3 i-
ing of Devadatta'. But when without these prepositions, we have m:: 1
« m** 11 \o 11 Tpjrfw 11 ^, ^T5$, (tiff, **wte)n
30. The affix 'ghaii' comes after the verb 'kj-i 1 ,
when the prepositions 'ut' and 'ni' are in composition
and when the sense of the verb relates to grain.
The verb w here means 'to scatter', and not 'to injure', because no
words formed by this affix are found in Sanskrit in that sense.
As roraft *n**s* 'the winnowing of corn'; frorft tfiwsw 'the winnowing
of corn'. But when not referring to grain, we have &**ftwr. 'a heap of alms',
5«rf5niir: 'the essence or heap of flowers'.
*rifr*fa ^f- 11 ^ 11 xr^rf^r 11 n%, *f*r, *$*:, (to) »i
81. The affix 'ghan' comes after the root 4 stu*
when it is preceded by the npasarga 'sam' and the word
refers to sacrificial subjects.
As jfcwnaFTftlHfP^ 'the SanstAva of the Chhandogas ; *faireO=>OT*
*5*fal nfe*% Sit ffftan 9 t*r) means 'the place which the BrAhmanas repeat*
ing hymns and prayers, occupy at a sacrifice'*
But when not'referring to sacrifice we have ewTJBfPnft: 'the praising
together of the two pupils'.
S «Nmd ii ^ 11 tnjTfir 11 d, to, anrifr, (to) h
^[Rf : 1 1 wr N wepr^ iiwii!^: Jwrappprt *n? s i?nnitH*Rr, ^rtrofiffi: stftifr
**fir 11
32. The affix 'ghaii' comes after the root 'stri'
(to cover), when preceded by the preposition 'pra'; provi-
ded that the word so formed does not refefr to sacrifice'.
As, itaTOtf?: 'a bed of conch'; *fqjTOtT?: 'strewing of gems'.
ITO% *TTO*$ II^H *?ti* U W^, wt, WTO^, (**:, TO)m
m* urtto* * *mfil II
33. The affix 'ghafi' comes after the root 'stri'
(to cover), when the preposition 'vi* is in composition
with it, when the sense is that of extension, and when
such spreading does not refer to words.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 34-36.] The affix ghan. 497.
The word mpf means 'extent, circuit, range'. As TO* from;: 'the ex-
tension of the gartnent'.
Why do we say 'when meaning extent' ? Observe, fttufwii: c a cot*
lection of grass'. . Why do we say 'not referring to words' ? Observe ftatft
*^wrpj 'prolixity of words'. '
^ mftt * II ^8 H ^:, *nfa, % ($T, fW f Tjo)
34. The affix 'ghafi' comes after 'str.f with
the upasarga c vi', when the word so formed is the name
of a metre.
The word ep* here means prosodial metre such as G&yatri &c;and not
the Vedas ; otherwise the word «tpi would not have been used. Thus fir+w+»
^r,f%+«54-^(VIII. 3. 94)=sRr*ir:'the name of a metre called Visht4ra-Pankti\
The whole word frorffeF is the name of a metre, and is not a worcj
en ding with the affix ghan ; only a member of this word, *. e. the first part ends
with ghan. The seventh case-affix in the word S(?$fnf& has the force of loca-
tion i. e. when the word so formed occurs in a portion of a name of a metre; it
is not the full name, but it is in the name i. e. forms a portion of the name.
^{%: 11 v$m ffWfWhpntft *nfa 11
*tM*h 11 fj^faf^tfaftntf ^Ttw«r!vmprty: 11
35. The affix 'ghafi' comes after the verb 'grah 1
(to seize), when the proposition *ut' is in composition.
This debars the affix M^. As 3^qff : 'lifting up'.
Vatt\ — In the Vedas this affix is applied even when the word qf is
preceded by Pr; and the f is changed into *; the sense of the two words being
•to lift up* and 'throw down* respectively of the sacrificial ladle; as, ^itf* *| Pnrirt"
*f* gfr »i ^ h *M* * *fy g^T* (*¥ : > *o) H
36. The affix 'ghan' comes after the root
'grah 1 when in composition with the preposition c sam'
when the sense of the root refers to fist.
The word ijffc means 'boxing', 'fist'; as, •*$* nwnr fhnf : '01 the clench-
ing of the fist of the athlete'; M$r jfifWJ ««*!*: 'O! the seizing of the boxer',
meaning grasping firmly.
Why do we say 'referring, to fist'? Observe mq$ tfl*W* 'a collection
of grain'. .... < . ■•
Digitized by
Google
498 The affix ghan. [Bk HI. Ch. III. § 37-39-
<jfa: ii «rfT^r«t Prtfifr ^rrt qwrenrt fin* fnro wr*W*5iHrtt *wfa mft-
WT : » «gfrcta*fc II
37. The affix 'ghan* comes after the roots l nV
(to lead), and c i' (to go), when the prepositions 'pari' and
'ni' are respectively in composition with them, *and
when the words so formed respectively mean 'a game*
and propriety or arrangement or law\
Here again we take help of I. 3. 10 in interpreting this sfttra. The
verbs qfic+«ft and f*r+j, take ^r*J when respectively meaning 'gambling' and
•fitness*. As qftisrnfr trfrn^ f for 'he kills (or takes) many pieces by moving
a chessman/ Here <ff^tnn* =fTTWfr«Ri means 'the moving of chess-pieces from
every side, and so winning the game'. So also f^+*+«r^=f3H-ff +•!=%+
HPf=9*nir: 'justice', 'propriety', 'logic'.
But when not having these senses, we have qrftur*: 'marriage', and
*rt 'decay' ; as a**3pf: W- 'the sin has been destroyed'. The word tf3<t
means (Jtmf'fl'H'i'JlO **rnOM*MUH>l
38. The affix 'ghan 1 comes after the root 'V (to
go) in composition with the word 'pari* when the sense
is that of following in regular succession.
As q^far: 'turn, succession'; ?nr <P*far: 'thy turn'; inr *nW. 'my turn*.
Why do we say 'when meaning turn? Observe CTsmr <c4*: 'the lapse of
time*, The word i ^qTf^m=H» H^fHMHnfm^ : 'not breaking the series or order'.
■jfar: 11 fir ** y*< n fo « Hf41 : ^NWfrt*pw«^ wftr 11
39. The affix 'ghan* comes after the root *&V
(to lie down) when the prepositions 'vi 1 and *upa' are in
Composition with it, and when the sense of the word so
formed is that of 'regular succession'.
As, n* ftxn*: f thy turn of sleeping* (#. e. the rest enjoyed in rotation
by the sentinels on watch); ipc farm* 4 my turn of rest'; w tntain*: 9 * VY'tniPri
IXrftw'TOhr: 'thy turn of sleeping the king'.
Why dp we s*y 'regular succession' ? Observe ito*: 'lying by the
side of or ambush'; fiHRn 'doubt\
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 40-42.] The affix ghan. 499
40- ,The affix 'ghaii 1 conies after the root 'chi 1
(to collect), when the sense expressed is that of taking
by hand, provided it does not refer to stealing.
By saying 'taking by hand' the close proximity of the person taking
to the thing accepted or taken is indicated. As y qq q rn: 'gathering flowers
by hand'; qftrProra: 'gathering fruits by hand'.
Why do we say 'taking by hand'? Observe ^tfTTOWTf <ir*fprt *CTT
HI* **ftRf 'he gathers with the stick the fruits hanging on the top of the tree*.
Why do we say 'when not meaning to steal' ? Observe 3«wratritQ!
'the gathering of flowers by theft*.
Fart. — Prohibition must be stated in the case of the word w*W*
'gathering'; as 5*flr« w 'gathering of flowers by hand'.
«[f%r: 11 f«r*re fafii *rrh: swrronr, ^«rff^ f^fr^r^^Htft wfrctf*
m*m *rr?tft m*Ri n
4L The affix c ghafi\ comes after the root 'chi 1
(to gather), and 'k f is the substitute of the initial 'ch* in
these senses viz.— c a dwelling', ( a fire on the funeral pile*,
'the body' and 'collection.
That in which people dwell (RrraRr) is called fltflran or 'dwelling'.
That which is gathered together (*fctf; is called fa^f or 'funeral pile', jjtfc
means the body of all living beings ; and ST^PTWT means making a heap.
"Thus from: 'a dwelling'; as in qn#m«nr: 'KA3i-dwe!ling'; afrarpeprf!^ filNHr
'let him arrange the ftk^ya fire i. e. the funeral fire'; qrnp 'body', as nffimr: mnv
•a perishable body ; *W\ iforehRinr: 'a heap of cow-dung'.
Why do we say 'when having these senses' ? Observe nq: 'gathering*.
Why is not this rule applied in h$x\ sfirePr^: 'a large heap of wood' ? Here
multiplicity is expressed and not collection or aggregation.
*§ ^raTwuii u \r 11 x^Tfa 11 *5, *r, e&nrcrau?,
(^:, 3TT^*, «•> TO) «
42. The affix 'ghan' comes after the root 'chi'
(to gather) and 'k' is tho substitute of the initial 'ch' in
Digitized by VjOOQIC
500 The affix nach. [Bk. III. Cn. III. { 43.
the sense of 'a multitude or assembly' (of living beings
possessing some common characteristics), but not merely
a confused crowd of men.
The word sfa means a collection or assembly of living beings. It is
of two sorts : — either by collection of persons possessing common qualifications,
or a mere confused crowd of men. The collection denoting a confused crowd
is here excepted and by paryud&sa negation the other is taken. Thus fttpff-
frora: 'the assembly of beggars'; Fft mujfH*H : 'the assembly of Br&hmanas';
^4ittt<Ujn<«ltl<|: 'the assembly of Grammarians'.
But q^ifaqq : 'a herd of hogs'; because it is a mere collection. So
also fafffrcray^ra ' 'the collection of what is done and not done'; smiUHJ^'tq*:
'the collection of proofs'. Here there is no tfq- in either of the two senses,
it not being a collection of living animals, the affix ghaft is not employed.
WW, fiwWTW II
43. The affix 'nach 7 comes after a root in de-
noting reciprocity of action, and the word so formed is
in the feminine gender.
The word %% means 'action' and is not the technical 'Karma' meaning
the accusative case, nrflrtnr means reciprocity or interchange of action. Th*s
word so evolved is feminine in form and denotes mere 'action* fan) also. The
anubandha ^ in nj^ is qualitative and is added to distinguish this affix from
other affixes: thus in stitra V. 4. 14 this particular affix is meant.
Thusf%+H^+^n N +i!T^+Hw+^=«mTOlr^(V.4. 14, and VII. 3. 6)
'mutual abuse'. So also s*rratrcft, *srr*^ft. The affix oj^ forms only an im-
aginary stem ; for this stem must take the affix *n? s by V.-4 14, which even
does not form the complete word until the affix w\\ of the feminine is added.
Why do we say 'in the feminine' ? Observe nrftrroft lifl I
The making of this a separate sfltra by itself and not reading it in the
subdivision of feminine affixes beginning with $pr\ (III. 3. 94) is for the sake
of removing the obstructing aphorisms that would otherwise have prevented
the application of this rule.
For, had it been taught in connection with fcfFj &c, then the affixes
that would have debarred far^ &c, would a fortiori have debarred this also.
But by keeping it separate from that class, it is indicated that those obstruct-
ive affixes which debar fifpj &c, do not debar this. Thus nffrtW, **HHNf l
Here *R being a nm class root would have taken **(M. 3« *°7) in the ferai*
Digitized by
Google
Bk, III. Ch. III. § 44, 45.] The affix ghan. 501
nine, as nfcnm ; and T* would have taken wf by HI. 3. 104, as ^B|f. The
roots f^ and f j n , by III. 3. 102 & 103, take m by debarring ftfFji This debar-
ring affix •?, however, is not debarred by this rule; as etrf.w, fsnftjr are the
proper feminine forms, and not nrfort &c. The form tirrwtrt is, however, an
apparent exception. All these exceptions, counter-exceptions &c. are examples
of wfvf taught in III. 3. 113.
^ftr: 11 aristf*^ iTwwtf *mtfr* i^qjwrtr wRr 11
44. The affix 'iainf comes after a root in de-
noting condition, when co-extensiveuess is meant.
The word Mftfirftr means co-extensiveness, that is to say, the complete
comprehension or relation between the action and the quality. Thus tffn-
f%UJH 'a general or tumultuous uproar'; sf +^r + |^H-Wff (V. 4. 15. and VI 4.
164) « ^fni^nj 'a general confusion'; so tfrarftUT^ 'a general flow or stream'.
Why do we say 'when meaning co-extensiveness'? Observe ««kT?:,
Why do we use the word w again in this sfltra, when its anuvritti
was already flowing from sfltra HI. 3. 18 ? The object is that the *tt*ror rule
(III. 1. 94) should not apply here and hence ^ never comes in this sense,
Patanjali says that the repetition is for the sake of indicating that in neuter
gender, when co-extensiveness is expressed, the affixes yK &c. arc prohibited;
so that the affixes t£ &c. should not come in the neuter with the force of wr I
The separateness of this sfltra is for the same purpose as the last
aphorism. The affix wj? is not, however, prohibited ; as ^FSTJ. See rule
fffW^*! Wf 5* (III. 3. 113). The affix f^u^ (the operative part being f?{) forms
but an imaginary stem, which does not become real and complete till it takes
the affix %ro by V. 4. 15, as shown above*
45. The affix 'ghan' comes after the verb
'grali' (to seize), in composition with 'ava', and c nf ; when
malediction is meant.
Though %n® is immediately, near, we take the anuvritti of **{ (III. 3.
16), because we see that its anuvritti is possible. »
The word •tfffaj means 'cursing'. As wnmrt f^i * fV«P£n*l 'cursed be
thou, O! sinner'. So also ftinvt* l Bn < t ■
Why 'when meaning cursing' ? Observe wif : IfCT ; PnTf*?rcCT I
J* %tnffTiTTW II »$ II H^lf* II d, fw^TRm, (TJf :, TO)H
Digitized by
Google
502 The affix ghan. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 46-49-
46. The affix ( ghan' comes after the root
f grah\ when the word 'pra' is in composition, and the
sense denoted is the desire of acquisition.
As qwrarrtor *$Tft[ Pnj: f^nff 'the beggar walks for the sake of alms,
carrying a vessel in hand' ; ^qqrtd *rcfa fcift ffirUFmif 'carrying a sacrificial
. ladle, the Br&hmana walks about for his fee 1 . The word focCT means the wish
to have something* .
Why do we say 'when meaning desire of gain? Observe nn$t fqfTC* I
t^T *H& « 83 II Mq i fo II t&T, vft, (xjf :, TO) II
«jf*f: ii ifHimMM* oi*?wiw*lr *r*fir n
. 47, The affix 'gliaii' comes after the root ( grah\
in composition with 'pari 1 when it relates to sacrificial
subjects,
As SHffrrfonT- 'the northern fencing of the sacrificial altar'; n>*r-
^ftTTf : 'the southern fencing of the sacrificial altar'.
Why do we say 'when relating to sacrifices' ? Observe <rfbrf: $**W*
'the fencing of Devadatta'.
?fr ^ VJT** II «C II TPR^fa II 5t, ^, ^T5$, fa*) II
«jfii: H Riitwtf j {TOreHi^!^qf~4ftH3.rf*$$ ^rsi^jmuit H^fit ii
48. The affix ( ghan' comes after, the verb c vj\i*
preceded by <nf ; when the sense is that of grain.
The i| here means both ^* N and «fif s . This debars the affix h^. As
ifiTOT: 'rice growing wild or without cultivation'.
Why do we say 'meaning grain' ? Observe fifTO *F*T 'a virgin girl'.
^f^ ^Mf^ffaM^sr: II 8< II M^xfa II *f^, SRfa-$lft-
49. The affix 'ghafi' comes after the verbs
'6ri', «yu', 'pft' and 'dm*, when the preposition 'ut' is in
composition.
This debars the affix dch (III. 3. 56). Thus w*&jq: 'rising of a planet';
*HT*: 'mixing'; ^*n*: 'purifying ghee'; and tct*: 'flight'.
How do you explain the form 93*55: in TOTFRrr: w^ptf:? The
word f%HRT 'optionally' in the next sfttra, exerts a retrospective effect on this
sfltra, and the form is an optional one. This is a most unusual thing and 13
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cn . IIL § 50-52.] The affix ghan. 503
called f*t{r?«D4iHtLJll4: 'the maxim of the lion's backward glance*. It is used
when one casts a retrospective glance at what he has left behind, while at the
same time he is proceeding, just as the lion, while going onward in search of
prey, now and then bends his neck backwards to see if any thing be within
its reach.
fkmm wfrqragft: 11 yw xr^fa ii&tott, snfe, *-
v^nftt, (tiff) 11
50. The affix 'ghafi' is optionally employed
after the verbs 'ru' (to roar) and c plu' (to float), when the
preposition 'dix' is in composition.
As Wtt* : or WW 'noise'; wgnr: or his*: 'bathing'.
«ri ^nft *$*ftre*3 11^11 v^rfk 11 srir, xjf :, *$-*fa- 1
51. The affix 'ghan' is optionally employed
alter the root 'grali', when the word 'ava' is in composition,
the sense being witholding of rain.
The word 'optionally' is understood here. The word rfsrGfea? means
the absence of rain, from some cause or another, when the season has arrived ;
as Hrort : or »mft Sm ' the draught of rain'.
Why do we say 'when meaning 'obstruction of rain 9 ? Observe arotf :
52. The affix c ghan' is optionally emi>loyed
after the verb f grah' in composition with 'pra', when the
word so formed relates to commerce.
Both the words gfah and vibh&shA are understood here. By 'relation
to commerce 9 is meant here the string of the .balance; and not commerce in
general. That string by which a balance isheld is called ffsvntttf : or ^nrorf:,
as *vtnnir$QJ ^cfif or ^vfnnTtoj^cfiljand this maybe said of any person
whether he be a trader or not.
Why do we say 'when belonging to commerce'? Observe sra$?39TO*
Jthe whip of Devadatta'.
*s?ft * 11 <$ 11 ^Tf^i 11 n?ft,% (xjf:,ftHrn,^^w) 11
^Ri : 11 *? 5«^n? *tf>iWtPf*mr M*(MWit h*Ri rf^^Mwi^iPnfttnl 11
Digitized by VjOOQIC
504 The affix acii. [Bk. III. Cii. HI. § 53-56-
53. The affix c ghafi* comes optionally after
the verb 'grah* in composition with *pra', when the word
so formed means ( a rein'.
The word tfapT means here the bridle by means of which horses &c.
joined to the carriage, are held under control ; as mnp or gin?: f a rein'.
**TOT, 5, TO) \\
***& 11
54. The affix 'gliaf!' comes optionally after
the verb 'vyi' (to choose), when 'pra' is in composition,
and the word so formed means 'a sort of covering'.
As HNTO or w: f a cloak, a veil'.
Why do we say 'when it means a covering' ? Observe RTCmt I
*ft Wit WI^ HVJUqft, 5^:, 3T*WT^, (fttPIT,TO)ll
55. The affix 'ghaiV is optionally employ od
after the vorb'bhlV, the word 'pari' being in construction,
and the sense of the word so formed being 'disregard*.
The word H^RTPT means 'contempt', 'neglect', 'disregard' &c. As «rforr*:
or <rfcw 'insult, humiliation'.
Why do we say 'when meaning disregard' ? The word qfbff : may
be then construed to mean *T$*rtH^=<Tfwr: 'surrounding'.
wrftfap^ 11 itf^ft H*rft«ngTO**rT»i; 11
*rffi««£ii *i*H*ft ep*fa raaft 11
56. Tlie affix 'ach' comes after a root ending
in 'i* or 'I 1 (when mere action is denoted, or when the
sense is that of an appellative, the word being related to
t&e verb from which its name is deduced, but not as an
agent).
The words within brackets are to be supplied from sfltras 18 and 19 :
and these words are to be supplied in evtry subsequent sfltra as far as sfltra
113 of this chapter. This debars «r*r N . The v in h^ is qualitative, in sfltras
like VI. 2. 144.
Thus, to 'collecting* ; •**: 'goingf ; to 'victory'; to 'wasting'*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI. Ch. III. § 57 , 58.] The affix ap. 505
Vart. — In this connection the words *ra &c. should also be enumer-
ated. As *flr+M^=H*n'fear'; *$n'rain\ These being neuter words, otherwise
would have taken the affix tit &c. but for this VArtika.
Vart.— The words iff and m are formed by this affix, and occur
in the Vedas. As 3$ ftt^ 3 3T*:, qWifarar- I These roots ij and *r would have
otherwise taken the affix *rj. The form would have been the same, but there
would be difference of accent. See Rig. I. 1 12. 21, and Yaj. XI. 2.
*n?rt<ni <*3 II TI^Tft 11 sjw-sft:, sro II
57. Alter a root ending in long 'jl', short f n\
or long '(V, there is the affix *ap\
This debars tr>T. The <^is indicatory for the sake of accent (III. 1. 3) ;
as, ^+m^=^t: 'scattering'; *r— TC: 'beverage, poison*; *r— jjr: 'arrow'; *[—**:
'barley'; $£- 5^: 'reaping'; T;-^: 'winnowing corn'. *
The * N in ^p s is merely for the sake of euphony : it is not w % changed
into $ ; for then by the rule l that which follows *i N is also called mK" short 3
only would have been taken and not long 3; (I. 1. 70). . .
fori) u
irfit^n ^ruftmwnr^ii
*fM*Pl 11 *r*ru si*fin*pf wKHroiwiRfff*rt[wrtJn 11
58. The affix c ap' comes after the verbs 'grali',
'vyi', *dji\ 'niSchi' and ( gam\
This debars R*{; and in the case of firfv the affix m^ is debarred. As
iff: 'a planet'; **: 'a boon'; *t: 'tearing, a cave'; ftrVT. 'certainty'; n»r: 'march'.
The verb Prf%i would have taken s^, but takes i*\ which causes differ-
ence of accent.
Vart. — The roots ^ and ^ should also be included in this ; as *^f:
'obedient'; rnj: 'battle'.
Vart.~ .When the sense is that of *t^ the affix q» is directed to be
employed, after the following verbs :— w, ^r» Tf. ***» f^ an d **1 As rw 'a
table-land' (on which they move); q^f: 'a vessel for bathing* (in which they
bathe)\ qqr: 'a place where water is distributed to travellers' (that out of which
they drink)) MlPnr: (VI. 1. 16) 'an awl, a drill' (that by which they pierce); fro:
'an obstacle' (in which they are obstructed^ wn?: 'battle' (where they fight).
*tre*f i^: 11 *s 11 Mqifo 11 ^raJf, g^:, (mn) h
Digitized by
Google
$06 The affix ap. [Bk. III. Cii. III. $ 59-63.
59. The affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'ad' (to
eat) when an upasarga is in composition.
As f%«rar: (II. 4. 38) 'half-chewed morsel'; inrer: 'voracious*.
Why do we say 'when compounded with an upasarga 1 ? Observe *nar:
'grass'; ** +H3*=^+*r ( n - 4- 38).
^Tf ^r II $0 II Xf^f II #T, W, *, («R[: f 3R) II
*f%: 11 fog** ^rrrt h$*? *»c$:smnit H*fa ^wrn^^ 11
60. And the affix hia' as well as *ap', comes
after the verb 'ad* (to eat), when the npasarga 'ni' is in
composition.
As nr+B^+l!J=:Rr+«nf +a?=nn*: (VII. 2. 116) 'feeding'; pr-Mfl+HV*
fa+^+H (II. 4. 38)=Pnro: 'eating, food'.
wjsnftoprei? 11^11 tn^fw 11 *r\j-*!rft:, ww^r, (an) n
61. The affix 'ap' comes after the verbs 'vyadh'
and 'jap', when no npasarga is in composition with them.
This debars cpr. As wf*p 'wound'; *nr: 'muttering'.
Why do we say 'when upasarga-less' ? Observe MTOrar, WSfrar i
*«w f ^ml N$«t treTfw n^R-f %t:, *t, (snr, ^qprxr^f) 11
^f^ft II fJIfdk^HiHfjtai M'prwft wfif II
62. The affix ( ap' comes optionally after the
verbs '8Van' and 'has* when no npasarga is in composi-
tion with them.
Thus *tt: or **r: 'sound|; **r: or frcr: 'laughter'. But with upasargas,
we have only one form ; toft: 'a loud noise*; mm- 'a loud laughter'.
TO q*|MftfeM * »Q» ^^Tf^f II TOjCT-CT-ft-frv,
% fa^TOT, *T, «W) II
^Rt: 11 ^ t* f% fa i«itfajmVj M^iwif jRr qnni «i^pmrft *rrfir 11
63. And the affix 'ap' comes optionally after
the verb 'yam', when the npasargas 'sam', 'upa', 'ni' and
*vi' are in composition ; or even when it is npasarga-less.
This debars ?*{. As e*rnn or a>ro: 'restraint'; otot: or 3TO*: 'mar-
riage'; PrtCPf: or Pr*TO: 'restrictive rule; AroPT. or ft**: 'check, distress'; ^nr: or **p i
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 64-67.] The affix at. 507
jftr: 11 Pnrn srtf nfTf <rs w* TriNf««t *m**t *r *?^piwpft *?*fa 11
64. The affix 'ap' comes optionally after the
verbs 'gad' (to speak), 'nad' (to souud), 'path' (to read),
'svan 1 (to sound), when the upasarga 'ni* is in composi-
tion with them.
This debars ipf. Thus fSpir*: or ftifrf : 'recitation'; flnrf : or fjprr*: 'noise';
Pptt. or f*rar*: 'reading'; frtCT: or f«rc?Pr: 'a noise'.
*t, sijiroJ, «r) 11
65. The affix 'ap' comes optionally after the
verb 'levari* (to jingle), when 'nP is in composition with
it, as well as wheii it is without any upasarga, or when
'flute' is meant.
This debars the affix tp^. Thus falntf: or Prsnu: 'a musical tone'. fJCJ:
or iTOT. 'sound'. When it refers to 'flute', it must have some upasarga not
necessarily pr; as 9*e*nsraTO7t «fhur-
But not so here, MfitfJmjT *$#, where the upasarga being nf*r and the
word not referring to 'a flute', no option is allowed. When flute is not meant
the upasarga must be fir or no upasarga at all, for the optional application of
the affix h<j. To sum up, shuj takes ^ optionally under three conditions: — 1st
when preceded by fir, or 2ndly when having no upasarga, or 3rdly when it
refers to 'flute', and then it must have some upasarga.
(anj n
*jftr. 11 tot *w*i? *$*ft % wmrtlWw^wiJn wfir <rfCTn& ifvhS 11
66. The affix 'ap' comes invariably after the
verb 'pai*' (to barter), when the sense is that of measure.
The word firni 'invariably' is used in the aphorism in order to stop
the anuvritti of the word optionally. Thus tgrraror: 'a handful of radishes';
jjntfPU: 'a handful of vegetable'. These words secondarily have come to mean
'a measure equal to a handful', irrespective of any thing.
When not meaning measure, we have <nur: 'trade'.
qjUgmifl 11 $» « *^Tfa 11 ^:, *yni5f , (are) 11
67. The affix 'ap* comes after the verb 'mad',
when not in composition with an upasarga.
4*
Digitized by
Google
508 The affix ap. [Bk. III. Ch. III. { 68-70.
This debars ^. As ftfiR^: 'pride of knowledge*; WW 'pride of
wealth'; ^enif : 'pride of family'. When compounded with upasargas, we have
?**T{: 'mad'; iron: 'error or carelessness'.
hi ^*w$i ^ 11 $c 11 tnfrf'i 11 lnn^-^pwf^T, ^ u
^f%: n mi wr* f*3*V tf^ft frn^a ffrfW* 11
68. The words 'pramada' and ( sammada Y are
irregularly formed, meaning *joy\
As q?»irPrt *Pfln 'the joy of girls'; iflfatHHl *Pf* : 'the rejoicing of cuckoos'.
Why do we say 'when meaning delight? Observe ifmf : 'carelessness';
OTTf : 'frenzy'.
Instead of saying 'the verb mad preceded by pra and xarw takes the affix
a/' which also would have given the above forms, the full forms have been used
in the sfltra to indicate that these words are *m? in this sense; for the sense of
the root is not visible in these words.
*3$** : 'HSS *£" xt V^ ( nvMrqfc, «r*-\ ^55, (are) u
69. The affix <ap' comes after the verb *aj f
(to go), when the prepositions ^sam' and 'ut' are in compo-
sition, and the word so formed refers to beasts.
This debars n*{. The root ini 'means to go, to. throw'. When preced-
ed by **, it means 'a collection'; and preceded by *n it means 'driving'.
As *fim: fTgrt 'a herd of cattle'; «j*f: <H[grt 'driving forth of cattle'.
Why do we say 'when applying to cattle ? Observe tttrntt miUUftU
**nr irfiranjrt 1
«T^5 **Hf: II 30 II qqift II «f%J, **np II
70. The word 'glaha* is irregularly formed,
when the sense of the root refers to gambling.
This word is derived from the root i^r. The verb 11^ takes the affix
nor and thus forms nfj and then irregularly c is changed into w 9 as MfTC*
tiff; 'cast of the dice'.
Why do we say 'when referring to gambling' ? Observe qf : <rrffi* 1
Others say, this word is derived regularly from the root nFf^ 'to gam*
ble', by adding the affix m^, and thus debarring «nj. They suppose, therefore,
the existence of the root *&1 S to explain the form »5ff : \ The counter-example
which they would give, is *OTf: 'receiving', formed by adding the affix **ji
Digitized by
Google
Bk, HI. Ch. III. § 71-74.] The affix ap. 509
mft wRi n ^ 11 xnpfa 11 jhi*, *$, (*n) 11
^ftr: 1 1 *r*fa? tit: m& f%*# w^sturat *refti 1 1
71. The affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'sri'
(to flow), in the sense of impregnating (the covering of
cows &c).
This debars tr^. The word u*pf means 'the first covering of a cow by a
bull'. As ireryrer : 'impregnation of cows'; <ragn$TOC: 'impregnation of cattle*.
f *: *reTO? * « q^qfoq || 3^ II i^rfa II fW: f
«iwnw , % fa-arfa-^ir-f**, ( arc) u
jFtc: 11 fir Hfa ot Rr grafts w&% ? N ***fc[Wr: tfrotTO^ h^hw** *r*Rr 11
72. The affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'hve'
(to call), when the preposition ( ni' ( abhi' 'upa' and *vi'
are in composition with it, and its semivowel is changed
into the corresponding vowel.
This debars tpr. As ft+* N *+^==ft+5+H(VI. 1, io8H*r +?»+•?( VII.
3. 84)-fa*r (VI. I. 78) 'invocation'; arfaf*: 'invocation';, wf^: 'invitation;
faff: 'calling*. But Iff*: 'a summons'.
^Rfi: 11 wr^Tit ^^#fr.«wrrovr smnft»prft t^rftdt 11
73. Tho affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'live'
when the word in composition is the upasarga 'M', and
tho semi- vowel of the root is changed into its corres-
ponding vowel, when the word so formed means battle.
As airf*: 'battle' (where they challenge each other). But otherwise
•!!#*: 'calling'.
ffr mmutm : 11 aa 11 t^rf^i 11 fa*nR, emgr*:, (arrfv,
*%: 11 ansFqgw cjratahft: src«iOT*<pwrot *F&* faro** Pnrpf Mf*r
>}w Hffif 11
74. The word 'Sh^va' is irregularly formed
when moaning a trough.
The word atw?: is irregularly formed from jf by the prefix nr, then
sampras&rana, and the vriddhi of the vowel. Thus w+£+li*^r$+B^=*fIf^+
lf saTTfro ( a trough near a well for watering cattle'. Otherwise fttrgnn 'calling'.
Even in the word Wfrc: the sense of calling is understood. It is that place near
a well, containing water, where cattle are called or invited to drink water.
Digitized by
Google
5J« The affix ap. [Bk. 111. Ch. III. i 75-77-
q i 3wmiii4M II 9)1 II M^lPl II *ni, ^MH^W, (TO, *JI*T-
75. The affix ( ap' comes after the verb 4 hve'
and. there is the change of the semi- vowel to its corres-
ponding vowel, when the root is upasarga-less, and
mere action is denoted.
As («: 'calling* ; ft ** $*4 iTyft^Cn i
Why do we say 'when no upasarga is in composition with it ? Observe
•ttfrcr: l Though the anuvritti of the word hpt was understood in this aphorism
from sfltra 18, its repetition here shows that the anuvritti of sfltra 19. which was
running, must not be taken ; so that this word applies to agent-k&raka also.
^rar *re- u 9§ M M^lPl II 1R:, *, to, (*ror, sijto*-
w, ^ni} ii
^Rf; ii j**laMk*imj*i net ti^iTHreft wSi» traffir^Wr ^ *wHn> tivflfwi
76. The affix 4 ap' comes after the root 'han'
when npasarga-less, iii the sense of mere action, ani
'vadha* is the substitute of 'han' before this affix.
Thus tpr has ud&tta accent on its final. The affix ai^ which is anu-
d&tta generally (III, 1. 4) thus becomes udAtta.
As revKnUTT ; 'the killing of thieves'; qtfttRFrpi 'the killing of robbers'.
When action is not denoted, the affix ^si applies; as rot: 'a blow.
So also when an upasarga is in composition with it; as Kim.. TOT I
The word ^ in the aphorism does not connect ^ with the substitute
TO, there being no co-ordination, it refers to the affixes under discussion. Thus
we have the affix tr*j also ; as trm: 'killing'.
*nff TO II 33 II M^ l fa II JTlft, tpf:, (to, «w n )«
77. The affix 'ap' comes after the verb ( han\
when the word so formed means solidity, and *ghan' is
the substitute.
The word ijfa means 'hardness*, 'solidity'. Thus MOT*: 'a mass of
cloud'; qfinr*: 'solid curd'. How dQ we say irt *fa ? Here the quality is taken
for the thing qualified.
swrfcft ^ use H^Tfw 11 vpicto:, ^$, (TOi *w )n
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 78-82.] The affix ap. 511
78. The verb 'hail* preceded by the word 'an-
tar' takes the affix <ap', and 'gliaii' is the substitute of the
word c han', when the word so formed means *a country'.
As *r^+f^+ai^=ii^=^+*i=*WP?'r: 'name of a country of Ba-
hika'; (a porch or court, an open space before the house between the entrance
door and the house). Some write the word with a hj as W*nf(u:, that is also valid.
Why do we say 'when meaning a country' ? Observe trerfmt 'strik*
ing in the middle*.
79. The words 'praghaijLa' and ^ragha^a' are
irregularly formed meaning 'a portion of a dwelling house'.
Thus nmn: or ngnu: 'a porch before the door of a house, a portico'. *
This is formed from f^with si, irregularly.
Why do w6 say 'when meaning a portion of a house'? Observe qirra: I
(I w:, arc) U
80. The word 'udghana' is irregularly formed
in the sense of 'bench*.
This is formed from 3^+t^ irregularly. Thus ^«nr: 'a carpenter's
bench* (the wood on which placing other planks &c. the carpenter carves &c).
When not having this sense, we have 39.5m: 'uneven'.
wm+fUjt^ii <^ 11 1141ft 11 «r<nni: 9 «r]pr» (fw: f «w) 11
^pfi: 11 wgfw fwJrnrT fRr Prnrotf , ntf ^M^nTn 11
81. The word 'apaghana' is irregularly formed
meaning c a member of the body\
This is formed irregularly from w+j^. Thus wra*: 'a limb or member
of the body*. The word n^pn means a portion of the body, such as hand or
foot, and not the whole body. Otherwise we have # w*nw: I
•re , nm) u
82. The affix 'ap' comes alter the verb *han'
42
Digitized by CjOOQLC
512 The affix ap; [Bk. HI. Ch. III. § 83-85.
when the words 'ayas', 'vi' or 'dm' are in composition
with it, when the word so formed is related to the verb
fis an instrument, and 'ghan' is the snbstitute of 'han\
As BTOhro: 'a forge-hammer' (whereby the iron is destroyed); fatpn
'a mallet'; J^pr: 'an axe'. Some write *w:, the ?r being changed into qj either
by rule VIII. 4. 3. or by including this word in the class of ajiflgUJ l fi j (IV. 2. 80).
*?!** « Y II q II q q c fa II ^TP$, W,^, (w*$,I*T:, «Rj U
83. The affix 'ka' also comes after the verb
'han 1 , when 'stamba' (a clnmp) is the word in composition,
and the relation of the word so formed to the verb is
that of an instrument.
The word n in the sfltra draws in v\ from the last aphorism and in
that case qr^ replaces $?r. Thus *3*TO: or friMM T. 'a small hoe for weeding
clumps of grass'. In the feminine gender, the forms are ttfJ-tft^r as well as
wreTT I When m is added, we have ttPTO: I Thus f^+^*^+*T (VI. 4- 9 8 )
-PT (VII. 3. 54). When n^is added, 5* is totally replaced by v* 1 When in-
strument is not meant, we have *3*qrqm: I
^ V. II q* 11 xt^tf* 11 v&, ^:, (**i, ^f r, STl) It
*fa: 11 qftxi**3<w fS«Htt^nnir H*fa *rotanr* *njs*vrw 11
84. The affix 'ap' comes after the verb 'ban',
"when the npasarga 'pari' is in composition, and the rela-
tion between the word so formed, and the verb, is that of
an instrument, and 'gha' replaces 'ban'.
. Thus qR*: or qfotr: (VIII. 2. 22) 'an iron beam used for locking or
shutting the gate, an iron club'. .
^PqrjT 3TP5P& II PJ II M^lPl II ^PqfJT, 3Tnp>, (&Ft> f^T:) ft
85. The word 'upaghna' is irregularly formed
meaning 'an inclined place for leaning or support'.
It is formed by adding n^ (III. 3. 76) to the verb f% preceded by the
upasarga m, then eliding the penultimate H of * ; this is the irregularity. Then
by sandhi rules ^rjs changed into ^5: I This form would have been given by
the affix * also, without any irregularity.
The word ww refers to proximity, contiguity/ Thus qltfrn^: 'the
declivity of the mountain'; so also fTmlr^f: 'bordering tKe village'.
Why do we say 'when meaning 'support? Observe <rftftrom: I
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cn. HI. § 86-88] The affix ktri. 513
^t^ft »ronMfc 11 *$ 11 qq i fa 11 **-*^ft, ^mr-n-
«jf*r. 11 *iftm**t$**i jffltr^qwrf&sfrtt *** ^f Frm*$, wrtfw ircfrfirSa
8G. The words 'saiigha' and 'udgha' are irre-
gularly formed in the sense of 'a collection 1 , and 'a
praise' respectively.
These words are thus formed; ^H+*H+WT=*f + * +*T-3 +tr,.+*T=*fa: I
Thus snr: TjyrcVa herd of cattle'; so also 3^*r^«*: 'an excellent man*.
The word 'respectively' is inserted from I. 3. 10. When not used in these
senses, we have tf*7W 'union'.
f^pft Rrfrrcw 11 ca 11 m^iPi 11 ftro:, fafSrcn?, (f*:, «rej«
87. The word 'niglia' is irregularly formed in
the sense of 'as high as broad 9 .
The word Prftrci means 'measured all round' i. e. 'as high as broad ^
As Arer fW. 'trees as high as broad'. Pnrr SJT5W 'square or cubic or circular
halls'. Otherwise, when not meaning 'as high as broad', we have front: <a blow*.
The word f¥*TO=*R*mfam, *TOnft*f fajJH * i It may be derived from W or from
fa 1 In the first case it will mean 'measured' and in the other, 'erected, built'.
Professor Bothlingk refers to Apastamba Dharma. I. 20. 30 for the meaning
of this word.
fHfa: ft*: u cc 11 Ti^rfSi n 5-^:, for:, (*mt sw^ft,
^f%: 11 5 rnnr otot % farot *rtt: fa: wrot wfit 11
88. The affix 'ktri' comes after the verb which
has an indicatory ^u', when denoting mere action &c.
The phrases 'when the sense is that of mere action', and 'when the sense
is that of an appellative, the word being related to the verb from which its name
is deduced, but not as agent', are of course understood in this, as in all the pre-
vious aphorisms. Then by IV. 4. 20, (of the affix fa, n\ is always the aug-
ment) we must add »t, for we can not use the affix f*t alone ; but we mast al-
ways use fir*. Thus <5<re^ 'to cook'— vfam\ 'what is ripe'; ^^— OTf%*t^ 'sown*
(VI. 1. IS); !?H-?rf'P!H 'artificial'.
f^jj^ii « 11 TnsTft 11 5-**:, «iy» f (ura, sra^ft,
Digitized by
Google
514 The affix ki. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 89-92.
89. After that verb which has an indicatory
^u', the affix 'athuch' comes with the force of denoting
mere action &c.
As?^j— #q^: 'a trembling'; gtitft— 19*^: 'swelling'; **J-fT**i: 'sneez-
ing; ?L— **J : 'burning.
90. Alter the verbs 4 yaj' (to worship), ^ach'
(to ask for), c yat' (to strive), 'vichchh' (to shine), 'prachchh'
(to ask) and 'raksh' (to preserve), comes the affix 'naft'
with the force of denoting mere action &c.
The conditions of stitras 18 and 19 are understood here also. The ^
of *«? is for the sake of prohibiting guna or vriddhi(I. 1. 5); as «w: 'sacrifice';
m**U 'solicitation'; **: 'effort'; Pm: (VI. 4. 19) 'lustre'; to: 'a question'; **yg;
protection.
The root sr«ej, by VI. 1. 16, ought to have changed its * into ^ before
the fiftt affix «rev Its not doing so must be taken to be an irregularity counte-
nanced by P&nini, as we know from the fact that PAnini himself uses the form
im: in III. 2. 117.
vrfh *nni <^ 11 ^rRr n ***:, *pt, (^xir, sran^ft, *rrc%)n
^ftr: l! *rt*rf?itf * writ H*fa fi
91. The affix 'nan* comes, under similar cir-
cumstances after the verb 'svap' (to sleep).
The final i^is indicatory and regulates the accent (VI. i\ 197); as ***:
'a dream'.
^TO? ^ti ft: II <SR II M^Tfa II^TO*?, ^fc, ffc:, (HT§, ST-
m$ft, «mTC%) II
92. The affix 'kf comes under similar condi-
tions, after a 'ghu' verb (1. 1. 20) , when an upasarga is in
composition with it.
The ** is indicatory, by force of which the final w is elided (VI. 4. 64).
Thus n+v+ft^tff- ^ present 1 ; qftr: 'the periphery of a wheel'; *<nfa: 'fraud';
, M*tf3 : 'vanishing*.
*$«qfa*<^ ^r 11 <s^ 11 xr^rfa 11 jrifa, <*iftwn$, % (^t:,
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 93, 94] The affix ktin. 515
93. The affix ( ki' comes after a 'ghn' verb,
when a word in the accusative case is in composition
with it, and when the relation of the word so formed to
its verb, is that of 'location'.
As JRftft: 'the ocean (in which water is held)'; jirfa: 'a quiver (that in
which arrows are put)'.
The word 'location 9 in the aphorism indicates that the words so formed
should have no other significance. The word ^ in the aphorism draws in the
affix f* from the last sfttra.
f^rnt faw 11 <n* u it^tOi 11 form*!, flpr. (ht§,
^ftf: 11 tft&raF*? mt$i *rot: Rk^ ***** H*Rr 11
mfifa?^ 11 RfiHwiR'^i^i 'Wf^'n^ii
mtffclPl II s 5^W5^: *ro$ 11
wtPS^ 11 «wi*Mivuft^it fir.* 11
(rfttat 11 ^fBR^^rt^*^ ^wwR f ft fiw^ 11
94. To express an action &o. by a word in the
feminine gender, the affix 'ktin* is added to the root.
The conditions of rules III. 3. 18. and 19 are understood here also.
This supersedes*^, H^ and m% affixes. Thus frfti; 'action'; fafa: 'a gathering';
qrfii: 'understanding*.
VarU — The affix ktin should be declared to come after the verbs nnr v
•to get' &c. There is no list of these words given anywhere, but by seeing
the form, we can infer the affix. Thus tuft: 'getting'; nft[: 'accomplishment';
<tfir: 'shining'; sfw 'a slip'; wrftw: 'destruction'; mfb*: 'gain'.
VatL— So also after the verbs m 'to hear*, ^ 'to worship' and **j 'to
praise', when instrument is meant; as *jfii: 'ear* (that by which we hear)'; so
ffir: 'a sacrifice'; ^fif: 'a praise.
Vat /.—The affix f* comes after the verbs i£ 'to be exhausted', *& 'to
fade, 's*t 'to grow old' and ff 'to leave'; as *9trf*r: 'exhaustion 1 ; **rrf%: 'fading',
l*rPr: 'old age'; jrfa: 'loss'.
Vart. — The affix Rk* coming after verbs ending in long qj and
the verbs e^&c. is like a Nishfhi. Thus qfhTi: 'scattering'; This form is thus
evolved: ^+fa^=*fi* +fii (VIL 1. ioo)=R^+fn (L 1. 50= *fK+fil(VIII. 2. 77).
At this stage, m is changed into * by the affix being treated as a Nishfhft
(VIII. 2. 42), and this * is changed into m by the ordinary rules of sandhi; so
Digitized by VjOOQIC
516 The affix ktin. [Bk. III. Ch. III. $ 95, 96.
also iftftf: 'praise 1 ; *fffid: 'old age'; tffijfc 'drying'; *£*: (VIII. 2. 44) 'cutting';
vfif: 'joining'; \arRr: 'agitation'; qPr: 'destruction'.
VarL— The affix fi^ comes after the verbs *<r^ &c; as tf«m 'prosper-
ity'; Prr^ 'a calamity'; *Riqr^ 'access'. The affix far^is also employed after
these verbs:— as q'vftr:, fq?ftl: I The verbs 5^&c. are 21 verbs of kryAdi class.
(forai, ftw ) n
95. After the roots 'sth&' (to stand), 'g&' (to
sing) 'p&' (to drink) and 4 pach' (to cook), the affix 'ktin' is
employed, when a word in the feminine gender denoting
a 'mere action' is to be expressed.
This debars the affix m*j (III. 3. 106) which generally supersedes f%*r
in cases of compound verbs ending in long nr. Thus stfefftf: 'a journey' (VII
4.40); ^iftfif 'a singing aloud'; $+ftr=:?rr+fit (VI. 1. 45)=«ft+fa(VI. 4.66);
?Eftftfii: 'a concert'; irftSr: 'a cistern'; tf«ft3r: 'drinking together'; qf%: 'cooking'.
The repetition of the word w* in this aphorism, in spite of its anuvrit.
ti being understood from sfttra 18 is to exclude every other significance.
How do we get forms like htcu and ttetf ? P&nini himself, in his sQtras,
has used forms like «r**zrr &c. See I. 1. 34. This is enough justification for us
to derive forms like *m*TT, tfwr &c. by applying the affix asunder rule 106, in
spite of the present sQtra, which requires us to apply fai^only.
T^ ^MM^*iHf*l^^flTT ^HT: II <!q II M^lf** II T^,
jfti: 11 n** flrw <|«rrf*wft trnjur: fan^ ^ *r*fir a*w 11
96. I a Mantra literature, 'ktin' acutely accent-
ed comes aftar the following roots, forming words iii the
feminine gender, denoting a mere action:— 'vrish' (to rain),
'ish* (to wish), 'pack' (to cook), 'man' (to think), 'vid' (to
know), 'bhft'Cfcobe), 'vF (to go, to consume) and ( r&' (to give).
The construction of this sfitra is anomalous. Instead of the bases be-
ing put in the ablative case, they are put in the nominative case. Thus ^fc:
•raining'; ffe: 'wishing'; qrf^fT- 'cooking'; irfii: 'thinking'; fqrf%: 'knowing'; ^.
'being'; flfir: 'consuming'; nfH: 'giving'.
The affix fajsj has been generally ordained by sfltra 94 after all verbs.
The present sfitra is made for the sake of regulating the accent in the case of
these nouns. From f^ we have also an irregular noun top (III 3. ioi), and
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 97, 98.J The affix kyap. 517
another by the general rule 94 having acute accent on the first syllable, al-
together 3 forms. See Rig Veda I. 116. 12; II 5. 6 ; I. 62. 3, 57. 2; IV. 24. 7;
III. 39. 1; I. 6. 5, 60. 1; X. 95. 17 for these words.
^ft4ft*ft<llf>llft<in^4UI II <8S II M«lPl II «ffc-
s^-l^-^Tfa-^fa-jfrfa:, *r, (*^nr:) 11
97. And these words viz. 'dti' (preserving?
sport), c yfttf (joining), "jCitr (velocity), ( s&ti', (destruction),
*hetP (a weapon) and 'kirti' (fame) are anomalous forms,
acutely accented.
The anuvritti of the word H*t does not exist in this; but the word **TO
of the last syllable is understood here. The word *?ftl is thus formed :— ti^'to
protcct'+f%?r s =*?+fa: (VI. 4. 2o)=3tffc: I this form is 'regular and could be
evolved from sfltra 94 also ; but not so the accent. The irregularity in «rfn:
and ijfii: consists in the lengthening of * into *; in orRr; the nr of the root $
which becomes srr by VI. 1 45> w n °* changed into f, as rule VII. 4. 40 required,
and this is the irregularity. This form may also be derived from the root &{
with perfect propriety, except as to the accent which would be regulated by the
present stttra: thus *^+pFR^W+fa>^ (VI. 4. 42>*nfil. The form ifa may
by derived either from %\ or f^ftRf 1
r* nnf^ *fto sttbms * 1 wmftVftfi*: f 1 (Rig. I. 7. 4) 'O Indra,
mayst thou mighty, defend us in battles and in fights of a thousand duels, with
thy mighty protections'.
n^mSlwH} vp* n 11 * u y^ifa 11 sni-^nft:, vm, wr,
(^ni:)u . N
^|f%r: 11 *rn*3taWt: ferfSf^f *r* *o\ *mit w*fir, s*ra: 11
98. The affix 'kyap' comes after the roota
'vraj* (to go) and 'yaj' (to worship) acutely accented in
forming a word in the feminine denoting action.
This supersedes %^. Thus *rs*f 'wandering about* ; fsur (VI. I. 15)
'worshipping'. The ^of vi^is indicatory, and though it serves no purpose in
this sOtra, it is, however, necessary in the next, for it is by force of m\ having
*£, that we add a ^f by VI 1. 71, in the words formed in the next aphorism.
^wmi, ^^nr-f^^-f^^T-^-f^-3^-^t^w--f^r: # (front, w*,
^nr:) «
Digitized by
Google
5i8 The affix sa. [Bk. III. Ch. III. $ 99, 101
wRr: 11 wnrrfcift ^rnj^: fiawt «wi N Rwnit wRi *fni : ffsrnrt ftii n
99. The affix 'kyap* comes after the follow-
ing verbs in forming a word in the feminine denoting an
appellative 1 and is acutely accented viz: — 4 sam-aj* 'ni-
shad', 'ni-pat', 'man', c vid\ 'sun,' *&&\ 'bhrin' and ( in\
Thus tR3*rr 'an assembly'; ftror 'a small bed or couch'; RnwiT 'slip-
pery ground'; i&m 'thinking'; fircrr 'knowledge 1 ; *|**ir (VI. 1. 71) 'extraction
of soma juice, parturition'; jjc*r 'bed'; »p*r 'wages, service'; \m 'a litter,
palanquin 9 .
Here a question arises as regards *|. By rule III. 1. 1 12, >j would have
taken qRi^, and we could have got the form ijnrr by that rule also. But the
*TOr formed under that rule would not have denoted an appellative which the
present rule does. It would be said that rule III. I. 1 12 when it used the words
wf^Tfrt, was rather too wide, for spr^does come in denoting star in feminine
nouns by the present rule; so that the word wriTTOt there, must be qualified by
the phrase, 'except in the feminine'. The test whether rule 112, is too widely
worded or not, has been made to hinge on the forming of the term hri? mean*
ing 'wife'. This word is formed by the affix ir*^ to the exclusion of **<ji
tf?TRrf jftr f*w T # *?ref Jrflcwffil »
fertfr Hrerfwpftj for ^t hto! *ftrw*Ri 1 1
The word H(ufa* K K : is explained by the author of KAsika as HRPTOfft,
w. v *r 11 \oo 11 tn^rfSr 11 *?*:, y, % (ferei, *r*J 11
100. And after the root 'kyi' comes the affix
4 6a' in forming a feminine, as well as the affix c kyap\
By the force of the word *r we draw the affix **rj into this sfitra, and
by the process called iftirfaHPT we can split up this aphorism into two :—
(1) fi^f : 'after the root $r there is the affix f$&(
(2) jj n 'and the affix jj as well as w^\ Thus fiinvr, $**r (VI. 1, 71)
and ^fif: 1 When the affix jj is added, the root assumes the form fii** by III. 1. 6j \
T**x h \e\ ii ^rrf^r 11 r**j, ( v) «
«[f%: 11 f^rffit: sr top** mipirw fww* 11
*ififar»tn q R^^iTHRti^fymdi«imiiM^iKi i *m 11
101. The form c ichchli& 9 (desire) is irregular.
The word is thus formed : f^+JJ=t«5+*T=p^r. The Preordained
* by III 1; 67 is not added, tbt3 is the irregularity,
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 102-104.] The affix an. 519
VarL — The following words are also irregularly formed :— qficsm?
'perambulation'; qft^wf 'attendance, service'; f<r*r 'hunting*; WTTQ'the habit
of roaming about as a religious mendicant'.
VatL — From the root smr we have either *u*m orirnrnt 'waking'. The
first is formed by the affix %?, the latter by jj which brings in ^ (III. 1. 67).
9T nmTff II \°* « vqjfo H W/WWWTI, (fWTT* ) II
102. After the verbs that end iu an affix, there
is the affix 'a', the word being feminine.
The verbs that end in an affix are derivative roots, such as Desidera-
tives, Causatives, Intensives and Denominatives, Though taking affixes, they
arc called *rn (III. 1 . 32), after these verbs the affix m is used in forming the
feminine noun.
Thus *|4-*r*T=faaift^'to wish to do ; this is a Derivative root; after this
root f*X\i, we add H 1 Thus ftraftf N +H (VI. 4. 48)=^^* I Then we add ?i^
by IV. 1. 4 4 and get fasiftfr 'the desire to do'; so also ftrtftaf 'the desire to take';
yfNf 'the desire to be like a son'; ^TOmn 'desire of a son'; *ft*grr 'much cut-
ting'; wp&tt 'itch'. The sOtra is also found as m: Rf WlP^ I
«jp*i: 11 fv«^t *lr *npis*n^ nm ftwnwwr: unrtt »*Rr 11
103. The affix 'a' comes after that verb which
has a prosodially heavy vowel and ends in a consonant,
when the word to be formed is feminine.
This debars R?^ I Thus a»«*r'an adulteress'; ^o*f « a tigress'; ffr 'effort';
9f r 'supplying an ellipsis'.
Why do we say 'which has a prosodially heavy vowel' ? Observe Hf%
'devotion'. Why do we say 'which ends in a consonant' ? Observe sftfc 'polity'.
«jfti: 11 fintft flrcrftnw R**roi?ronft *r*fii 11
104. The affix 'an' comes after, those verbs
that have an indicatory 'sh', and after 'bind' &c, when the
word to be formed is feminine.
Thus 3T^ has an indicatory ^, the real root being m: 1 From it we have
*ia 'old age' (VII. 4. 16) ; *J*— *qr 'bashfulness'.
So also from verbs of Bhidddi class we have P^r 'breaking* ; in the al-
ternative we have Pri% l So also flRT 'cutting'; ffe[ft; 'cutting'; war 'a knife, an
44
Digitized by
Google
520 The affix yuch. [Bk. III. Cn. III. { 105-107.
iron instrument'; *nf8: 'distress'; ^rrr 'a stream'; vfin 1 The list of Bhidddi verbs
will not be found given in one place in the Dhatupdtha. They have been col-
lected from different Ganas % and are the following : —
Pt*t» fswr fircfi firotf *PR (PrarcwRr:), %rar, ^> to mrt, fnrr, *rrtT, ftrar,
nrrr, wo, w!ir, ?w, ^tr> , ft*r i *<rr, **rr, g*rr, 5*rr> fisrr, (*tf ^'tophst ^*) 11
igfoMHb, *, (f^TOT, «f» ) II
105. The affix 'aft' as well as the affix 'yuch*
comes after the following verbs, forming feminine
words:— 'chint' (to think), ^ftj' (to worship) 'kath' (to
narrate), ( kumb' (to cover) and 'charch' (to learn).
The force of *i is to include the affix q«^ into this sfltra (see III. 3. 107).
Alt these verbs belong to the ChurAdi or loth class, and would have exclusively
taken 5^ by III. 3. 107.
Thus fa*«Tr 'thought'; «r*if 'worship'; qror 'narration'; qr**r 'a covering',
'a thick petticoat'; «* l «^? 'recitation'.
When the affix is ^, the forms are fa**f?rr & c - (VII. 1. 1) .
<*U««ftmHl U^©$im^Tfa II 3TT?!:, 1 *, ^SHre^l, (fniqi, STS) II
*rf*fai*ii *f5*ifrsTO*h;*%: if
106. The affix 'aft' comes after those verbs
which end in long '&' when an upasarga is in composition,
and when the word to he formed is feminine.
This supersedes fax\. Thus *<ii Wl> *W> WW, &c.
Vatt — For the purposes of this rule the particles m^ and hf*i^ should
lie treated like upasargas. Thus MSPr 'faith' »??Kg? (I. 4. 59).
jf%: 11 **F**$t wt^m* mtcto*t fwnurf n fm*\ ^rqwtfr H*fir 11
*iM*H, ii ^rft^fM%ft |, T ^to^wpti 11
vrftfon 11 f^rfir^n l^ ^jjtoi*: 11
**fHt*i^ 11 «r?*f 11
107. After verbs ending in ( ni\ and after '&$'
(to sit) and '6ranth' (to loose), there is the affix 'yuch'
when the word to be formed is feminine.
This excludes the affix H (III. 1. 102). Thus f?+fisr^=s*Tfc; *rifi:+^=a
WsXTHSX (the f is elided by VI. 4. 5 1 ) 'the causing to do'; fwsjr 'the causing to
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 168.] The affix nvul. 521
take' ; HTCFTT 'the sitting'; 4TOTT 'the loosening*. How do we get the form
«rrc*rr? It is the feminine of »rrc* formed by adding «*rw to the rootnr^ by
ill. 1. 124. Is not that rule made non-applicable by rule III. 1. 94, which declares
that ttto*:? rule does not apply to Feminine affixes ? Yes, that is, however,
not total exclusion. The phrase BYfew( in III 1.94 is to be interpreted
thus: — "Non-uniform affixes prohibit each other, when they belong to the class
of affixes especially ordained for the feminine nouns; such as the affix far ^ (HI.
3. 9), mn^ (III. 3. 98), H (III. 3. 102); That is to say, an utsarga- feminine affix
will be always superseded by an apav&da-fcminine affix; but a feminine affix
in general will not supersede another affix which is not enjoined in, the femi-
nine gender especially. In other words, feminine affixes mter se supersede
each other totally, but not so with regard to general w^ affixes". Now by the
present sOtra the root a*c^ takes *|^; this totally excludes other feminine affixes
like H (III. 1. 102); but it does not exclude the non-feminine affix «9W 1
The root m^T taken here belongs to the Kry&di class, meaning 'to
loosen' and is not the m«T of Chur&di class, for the latter would be included, as
a matter of course, by belonging to the Chur&di class which class of verbs take
the affix Rjt^ I
Vart.— The verbs *3 'to move', *** 'to praise', and f%* 'to feel', should
also be enumerated, as taking *[^. Thus irf *f 'shaking', n^px 'praising', $j?rr
•knowledge, feeling, pain*. The verb tjf here belongs to the Tud&di class, and
means 'to move' and not *ff of the Churadi class, for that is already included
by being fign^ff 1
Vart.— The affix ^ comes after f* when it does not mean 'to desire'.
Thus w3ror 'solicitation'; 9f?$*0Jr 'the searching after'.
Vart.— So also optionally when ^ takes the upasarga <?fi:; as, totot
or qtfifc: 'investigation by reasoning'.
flmqmq t ***** *ro « V* « ^n^rfa n fta-a^rorar*.
^Ri : ji d n n w * tf *p^r»nTRrt wfr$5*» "ssniwfr H*fa 11
qrrPfajH u *rwf Rrf H •*$;&&*• 11
*rftfa*Htl *Wlf«S[: 11
mlffa^ 11 pnrrr***: 11
*rfi!*n tn^«*if?¥*f: 11
108. The affix 'vvul' comes diversely after
verbs when the word to be formed is a feminiue noun,
begin the name of 'diseases'.
Digitized by
Google
5 2 2 The affix nvul. [Bk. III'. Ch. III. $ 109, no.
This debars f%^ and all the rest. By using the word «TPf*r in the
sfttra it is meant that the word so formed by this affix should be the appel la-
tion of the disease. The word 'diversely' shows the usual licence in the applica-
tion of all the rules of grammar. Thus sf^BrRfqa (VII. 1. 1) 'vomiting'; TOfffOT
'diarrhoea'; froftqtr 'itch, scab'. Sometimes this affix does not apply; as ftrftW:
'head-ache'.
Vart. — The affix nvul is employed also in simply pointing out the
meaning of the roots ; thus, HTftT^if 'to enjoy', wfrCT to 'lie down' &c.
Vart. — The affixes f*f and R^f% (that is ^ and firO are a l so employed
in merely pointing out the roots ; as PrRr, faff : » * ^fa-> ffir: &c. The constant
use of these affixes is to be found in these very sfttras. In the aphorisms the
roots are exhibited in various ways; thus in stitra49 of this chapter we have the
root fM and ^ exhibited as wtRt and $rfii: 1 These latter forms indicating no-
thing more than the simple roots. So also, see VIII. 4. 17 ; VI. 4. 49.
Vart. — The affix w\X is employed in merely pointing out letters; as
TOtTC: means 'the letter *'; so also ararr?: 'the letter •?'; I**!*: 'the letter f ' 1
• Vart. — The affix jft is employed in pointing out the letter c; as ?9? r
Vart. — The affix 5 comes after the word i*rqru in merely pointing it
out, and there is elision of the final •?; as f trrcfa: I
Vart. — The affix %*{ comes after the verbs *m &c; as wRf:, HrSr, wff: l
Vart.— The affix incomes after the verbs fj^ &c; as, fjfa:, farf*:, &c.
*imn*ui \*& n Mqifo 11 ^imnr*, (wsi, fennw) 11
jfa: 11 tfsrnrt fire* ^mt^s^mrtt ^rfii 11
109. The affix %vuY comes after the verbal
roots, when the word to be formed is an appellative.
As atMg» y si4faflKT 'a sort of game played by the people in the
eastern districts in which qdd&laka flowers arc broken or crushed*. tou^«t-
fwrfaur 'a sort of game'; wwu s uft^ c; w^rarf^r; jraptfw; tircriftnfir i
110. And the affix 'in' comes optionally after
a root, when a question and answer is expressed, (as well
as 'livul' and other affixes ordained by other rules).
The word ffcra means 'question' and afre<rnr means 'answer'; in the
• ?&tra, in making the compound of these words, the logical sequence is not
observed. The compound mmiHqRm T may, however, be justified on the
ground that in a Compound a word consisting of smaller number of syllables
should stand first (II. 2. 34,) and hence Akhy&na is put first.
Digitized by
Google
a Bk. III. Ch. III. § in, 112.] The affix ani. 523
The force of n is to draw the anuvritti of the word *j^ from the last
into this. By the word 'optionally', it is meant that those affixes which would
otherwise present themselves from the subsequent rules, should also be applied;
thus: Q.— qrf f# *irfc«ranff: 'What work did you do' ? A.— *$t qftfcrairf^
'I did all work'. Optionally we may have instead of wnft the following also.
Q.— *rt srrfbirf, fm\, irf&, Brat, *r*nff: A.— *i\ grr forf or $**rt or tfn or %irf
•wtf'f 1 Similarly, Q.— *rf nftj (iniwf, n%*tf &c.) arfftoi: A.— frffrffr &c.
BT^ftirePi;. So also *rf ^nf*iiL or *rf*wpj ; «ut *rfa^ or *rftrarf &c.
Why do we say 'in question and answer ? Observe ftfei: and *3r« I
trf^rj, to*, (faranr) 11
111. The affix 'ljvnch' comes optionally after a
root in the sense of succession, merit, debt or production.
The word Tufar means turn or order of succession; «r| means worthy
of respect; ^prf means debt owed to another; and swIfT means birth or produc-
tion. This rule supersedes Rit*j and other affixes. Thus: (1) hw vfiran 'your
turn of sleeping 1 ;* Hf^inrrffr^r 'your turn of eating first'. (2) n£fH »mft*£Hf*nffPt
'you deserve to have a meal of sugar and molasses'. (3) f<f£*ftrarf 5 wrftr 'thou
owest me a meal of sugar and molasses"; *ftf?p*Tf*Hrt 'a meal of rice'; TO;<ufaqrt
'a drink of milk*. (4) YOglftrPKr ^ *rwft 1
The word 'optionally 1 is understood in this stitra also; as ferafttrrtrart r
The forms given by <*[5J and *5* N are the same, the difference is only,
in the accent. (VI. 1. 193, and VI. 1. 163).
3TT$rii «^qft : II ^ II t^rfa II STnfenk *f*f, vrfk: I!
112. The affix 'ani' comes after a Verb when
the particle { nan' is in composition with it, and the sense
implied is that of cursing.
The anuvritti of the word 'optionally* does not extend to this aphorism.
The word attffffrT means to curse. This supersedes the affixes Rfr^ &c, Thus
s?*rcfo*fl ^ra y$f\ 'may failure be to thee, O sinner*! TOvrarcfttfro^, 'may
he be disappointed'.
Why do we say 'when meaning to curse'? Observe Hffirareq *&**
'the non-making of his mat'.
Why do we say 'when w*{ is in composition'? Observe tftad *ro
*jnw 'may death be to thee, 01 sinner' I
ypi^jet iwwn ^ 11 ^Tf^r 11 5c*r, 95^1 whpui
45
Digitized by VjOOQIC
524 The affix lyut. [Bk III. Ch. III. § 113-115.
113. The affixes called 'kritya' (111,1.95) and
the affix 'lyut', are diversely applicable and have other
senses than those taught before.
The anuvritti of the phrases 'when denoting action' and 'when the rela-
tion of the word formed to its' parent verbis not that of an agent', which
began with sfltras III. 3. 18 and 19, does not extend to this sfltra or further.
By saying 'diversely* we mean that they occur in other places than those where
ordained by the rules. Thus the kritya affixes are ordained to come when 'act*
or 'object' is to be expressed, but they come also when the kdraka is other than
the objective. Thus wnfW «sjnH 'powder for bathing'; TPftftirrcrcr: 'a BrAhmana'
to whom a donation is to be made'. In the first of these examples the •powder*
is the 'instrument* expressible by the 3rd. case, and in the second the 'Br&h-
mana* Is the recipient expressible by the fourth case; so that in both cases the
affix is applied without any express rule.
Similarly, ^j? is ordained to come in denoting instrument, location,
and a verbal noun (III. 3. 115 and 117). But it is applied in other senses also.
Thus <cnfHti|5Tr: JJT5W 'halls for the eating of kings'; iM i ^i^l fH TOlffa
'dresses to be worn by the 'king*.
By using the word 'diversely*, even the krit affixes are applied in places
other than those expressly ordained. Thus qT*P*HR N fatf^qifflTO: I «KS
•€t^^=TOHlt f TO: I For accent see VI. 2. 150.
wftt: 11 ^q^ fa gr? Hit wit: *k unnft wfa 11
114. The affix 'kta' is added to the root, when
actiop. is expressed, the word being ip, the neuter gender.
These are neuter abstract nouns : thus, *%** 'laugh'; irf*<m Speech';
jCTfftltf sleeping'. So also irf, «fttf &c.
we * n \^ 11 ^rf% 11 src, % fr*Mt> *mr) n
*Rr: u ^'sptffsrjp hi* wmt*5^wnlt wfir n
115. The affix 'lyut' is added to the root, when
the name of an action is expressed, in the neuter gender.
Thus fSPf €[(*re* 'the laughter of the student'; tfrt* 'beauty'; ff^pf
'speech'; *nrt 'sleep'; w*R^ 'seat*.
The separation of this sfltra from the last, in which it might well have
been included, is for the sake of the subsequent aphorisms, in which the anu-
vritti of lyut only runs, and not that of *?? 1
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. .Ch. III. § 116, 117.] The affix lyut. 525
116. The affix 'lyutf is added to a root, when
the name of an action is expressed in the neuter gender;
provided that the verb has in construction with it, such
a word in the accusative case, as indicates the thing, from
the contact with which, there arises a pleasant sensation
corporally to the agent.
This sfltra is thus translated by Bohtlingk: — "The affix e^ comes in
connection with an object, when through the contact with that, the agent
of the action feels a lively pleasure". Though the affix lyut would have present-
ed itself by the last aphorism, under the circumstances mentioned in this siitra,
the framing of this sfttra, is really for the purpose of teaching, that the com-
pound so formed is a firetj or invariable compound i. e. a compound which cannot
be analysed into its component members:— for every svr* compound isja froc
compound. (II. 2. 19) Thus to: «W*^f 'the pleasure of drinking milk'; tffespfcFI
!g*3C* 'the pleasure of eating rice'.
Why do we say 'when the word in construction is in the accusative
case 1 ? Observe nRrtfRniT 3W* * ^f 'rising from a bed of down is pleasant 1 .
Here there is no compounding as the upapada trfsrair is in the ablative case.
Why do we say 'from the contact' ? Observe MfM^SJiqlil*!* spa* 'it is
pleasure to sit near by a fire-hearth'. Here there being no contact between
'fire' and 'body', there is no compounding.
Why do we say 'to the agent' ? Observe *£*t: ^rrpf g*5r* 'to the teacher
it is pleasure, when he is made to bathe'. Here the word ^: is not the agent f
but the object of the verb ^Tfqr^Rf l
Why do we say 'corporally' ? Observe jireir <r ft*T5R ^5PJ 'embracing
of the son is a pleasure'. Here the pleasure is a mere mental satisfaction and
not a physical one.
Why do we say 'a pleasant sensation' ? Observe qtofiprt irf* 5:^ 'it
is painful to rub thorns'. In all the above counter-examples there is no com-
pounding; see II. 2. 19 and the connected sfttras.
117. The affix c lyuf comes after a root, when
k >» <
Digitized by
Google
526 The affix giia. [Bk. HI. Ch HI. § n8, 119.
■ii II ■ I 1 ■ 1 1 11 .ii h ii. 1 ■ 1 r ii , ■
the relation of the word to be formed to the verb is that
of an instrument or location.
Thus turortFT: 'an axe' (lit. an* instrument for cutting wood) ;
q<HHj !U HM : 'palAsa-cutter'; iftftfft 'a milk-pail' (a vessel into which milk is
milked); so also *rerqrpft 1 In other words, this affix expresses also the idea
of the instrumental case (a tool) , and of the locative case (a repository).
^%: 11 tfinpit* *prc<mfa*TO^fti*^?*!hr: ***** **Rr v^trifr ^w
118, The affix 'gha' generally comes in the
sense of an instrument or location after a root, when the
word to be formed is a name and is in the masculine
gender.
The force of the word svr$GT 'generally' is to show that this rule is not a
universal rule. Thus {e*«8R: 'the lip'. B[fff 'to cover' +ir(VI.4. 96)=*BTC lit
'that by which the teeth are covered'; so also sr^aflf 'a breast plate'; q?: 1 These
denote instruments.
So also in denoting 'location'. Thus w+ff+tT^W*?:: 'a mine', so
named because men work (akutvanti) in it, tircra: 'a house' that in which men
settle down.
Why do we say 'in the masculine gender? Observe TOWf/a comb';
(lit. that by which men decorate). Here the affix is lyut.
Why do we say 'when the complete word so formed is merely an ap-
pellative? Observe mxvSt W- € the beating stick'.
The indicatory ^ is merely qualifying; for the application of sfltra VI. 4.
96. by which after the causative epff , when it is added, the long btt is shortened,
jflwh<M«*w*iM*ft J wyi 11 w? 11 v^fa 11 ift^c-
H^-^-j^-^nr-^TT^v-f^nnTT:, *r (ti:) 11
jfa: 11 iflwrr^r: y*$ vmnmm Grmvvit <r£fem*iff 11
119. And the words 'gochara', 'samchara', ' vaha'
'vraja', 'vyaja', '&pana' and 'nigama' are anomalous.
These words are irregularly formed by the affix ff with the same force
as in the last aphorism. This is an apav&da or exception to rule III. 3. 12 1,
by which after roots ending in consonants, the affix ^ is added. Thus ift*w:
'pasturage', (lit. that in which the cows graze); *Nc: *a passage', (lit. through
which they move ); *f : 'a vehicle' (lit. by which men are carried); jnf: 'a cow*
pen' (by which they go); qpi: 'a fan' (by which they move the air); the anomaly
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § iao, 121.] The affix ghan. 527
in this consists in not replacing the w^of s*n (Rr+ WJ) by the substitute i\ as
required by stitra II. 4. 56; Htvn 'a market' (lit. that in which men come and
traffic); ftipc : 'the Veda', 'a market' (that into which they entef).
The force of the word ^r in the aphorism is to include other words also,
which have not been already mentioned. Thus *q:, ftCTr: 'a touch-stone',
(lit. that on which they rub).
jfn: 11 w gqtf imUOTfftv writ: qftonftraraspit: tfirnrt tnnm^t »*fii 11
120. The affix 'ghafiL' comes after the roots
'tif (to cross) and 'sfcjT (to spread), when the upasarga 'ava'
is in composition with them, and when the word so
formed is an appellative related to the verb either as an
instrument or as a location.
This supersedes * I The sj is indicatory and causes the vriddhi of m
(VII. 2. 115) and is also for the sake of regulating the accent (VI. 1. 195, 197).
The indicatory ^ is useful in the subsequent' aphorism where it changes the
palatals into gutturals. Thus *?TCTC: 'the descent (or incarnation of a diety);
HTOff?: 'a screen round a tent 9 .
How do we apply twmr also in phrases like troirft «rur: 'the descent
of rivers', for here the word avatdta is not an appellative ? This use is also
allowed, because the anuvritti of the word vm is understood here also ; so that
these words avatdta &c. may be employed in senses other than appellative.
f*m 11 ^ 11 vn&f* 11 fw*, % (xrfir, Himri; qrcfrft-
qranfr, to) h
121. And after a verb ending in a consonant,
comes the affix 'ghafi'^when the word to be formed is mas-
culine, and related to the verb as an instrument or a loca-
tion, and thereby the palatal is changed into a guttural).
The whole of the phrase within brackets is to be read into this stitra
from sfttra III. 3. 118. This excludes 7. Thus $9: 'a writing' (that in
which something 'is inscribed) ; tf : 'the Veda' (that by which all is known) ;
#q: 'dress' (that which is entered into); ***: 'obstruction' ; iftif : 'a way' (that
on which they seek); w^RP? : 'a plant' (that by which disease or the like is clear-
ed away) ; KPt : 'RAma' (#'. e. in which the devout delight).
46
Digitized by
Google
528 The affix ghan. [Bk. III. Cn. III. § 122-124.
122. And the words 'adhy&ya', 'ny&ya', 'udy&-
va', 'samh&ra', ^dhdra' and &v&ya' are anomalous.
These words are formed by adding the affix ^ to the exclusion of q-
which would have come by rule HI. 3. 118. All these words are derived from
roots which end in vowels. Thus *rf\r+t +*P* = wrni: 'a chapter or book' (lit.
that in which they read); sft_;*rar: 'logic, justice', (lit. that by which men are
Uad)\ 3<f;*— TOIT. 'mixture* (lit. that in which they blend)\ fi^-*— #|!*: 'des-
truction' (lit. by which they are destroyed); w-*— WITC: 'support' (lit. in which
anything is held); m-fir— HUP*: = WTOfal ufar^ I
The force of 1 is to include others not enumerated above; as, WJTC. I
ti^§tw|^5i 11 ^ 11 tnjrft 11 ^5:, ^15^% 11
123. The word 'udaftka' is anomalous, when
the sense of the root refers to subjects other than 'water'.
The word is thus formed: ew+w^+fp^-^f: 'a vessel'.
Would not the affix qs{ have come by sfltra III. 3. 121, why then this
aphorism ? This is made a separate aphorism in order to prohibit the applica-
tion of the affix, where the word to be formed means 'water'.
Thus S^TtfJ": 'a leathern vessel for oil'.
Why do we say 'when not referring to 'water' ? Observe 99*|ftf *w 'a
bucket for drawing water' (3^+W*+*3*).
Why do not we give the counter-example by adding the affix ir to the
root 3**r ? Because the form evolved by applying fr, would be the same in every
respect as that evolved by q^ ; even the accent would be the same. For by
sfttra VI. 2. 144, the ud&tta accent, in the case of q*r, will fall on the final.
q nowHui : 11 \«t ii vtfk 11 *rrcR, snuro: h
124. The word 'an&ya' is irregularly formed
when meaning 'a net'.
The word is thus formed in the sense of instrument, mr+^+^ea
UPrra; 'a net' (by which they are caught); as ttmnft »TCW!*f 'a net for fish';
HPTPft fWnr^'a net for wild deer &c\
*wV v * 11 ^ ii *^rfw ii *a*:, *r,*r, ( «<«ifaw3, *ra)w
*ftr: 11 fswfcsWt: ^cnr>w^tf*wft **?% *wrcr^«n* ^11
srfifa^n *ftqro«*: 11
*fffa^M«ifr«m«*:ii
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 125, I2 &] The affix khal: 529
125. The affix 'gha* as well as 'ghan' [comes
after the verb 'khan* (to dig), (when the word to be form-
ed is an appellative related to the verb as instrument or
location).
The affix *?( has been read into the sfltra by force of the word <* 1
Thus 9?rcn*: or imOT: 'a spade, a hoe'.
Par/.— The affix « also comes In this sense after the verb *T^. Thus
ttt^r-f T=W3: <a spade 1 . The indicatory^ showing that the final portion
called fc should be elided.
Vart. — The affix 3* also comes in the same sense; as unsrc: 'a spade 9 .
Vatt— So also the affix my, as draft*: 'a spade 9 .
Vart.—So too the affix t*ro* as atretfTOTO: 'a spade'.
^% 11 HW? frtfh|yrt^ vag^rd; *nft: ^^Rnnft niTn 11
126. In the sense of 'hard and difficult/ or 'light
and easy', the affix 'khaV is added to a verb, when 'ishad*
and 'dur' and 'su' are combined with it as upapadas.
The anuvritti of the phrase 'when related as instrument or location 1
ceases with this aphorism. The word ^pea; means heavy, and J^has the force
of conveying that sense. The word triT^ means 'light, easy'; and the words
f qa and H convey that sense. Thus frf^ffft VWT W?: 'a mat Is made easily
by you'; so also ;«*X: 'made with difficulty'; %*X: 'made with ease'. Simi-
larly f^ftn: 'eating pleasantly'; *nri|: and fpfft: I
* Why do we say 'after |q^ &c. ? See fT«6 Qj *n4: «**: 'the mat which is
made with difficulty'.
Why do we say 'when meaning 'hard or light' ? Observe f *fttffp$
'a small work' .
Of the affix *wj, the letter 9 and ^ are indicatory ; 9 causing the in-
sertion of a nasal (technically called yi augment, VI. 3. 67) ; and ^ regulates
the accent (VI. 1. 196). The augment 5* will be added in the subsequent sfttra,
the 31 thus having no work in this sdtra.
TO* **Rr 11
Digitized by
Google
530 The affix yuch. [Bk. III. Cn. III. § 127-130.
127. The affix 'khal' comes after the verbs
'bhft' and 'kri', when the upapadas in composition with
them are 'agent* and 'object' respectively, preceded by the
words 'ishad' &c. in combination with them, meaning
'hard or light'.
Thus imrw'q *nr 'being enriched easily' f jn*r wj'to be enriched with
difficulty'; W&HhO H?pSr *HRIT 'Devadatta can be made rich by you easily'.
Vart.— It should be stated that the agent and object in composition
should be, as if they ended in the affix f%* (V. 4. 50). Compare HI. 2. 56 and III.
2. 57. &c. Therefore we do not have it here : *rfftR ^H or «n$qFT *J*pr3 11
128. The affix 'yuch 1 comes after roots ending
in long c &*, (when 'Sshad\ 'dur' and 'su' are combined as
upapadas, in the sense of easily or with difficulty).
The word ft* &c. are to be read into this stitra, not so the words m£-
wfoj &c. This supersedes the affix *i^. Thus f**qnr: tftft HTO «the soma juice
can be lightly drunk by you'; f *w- 'difficult to be drunk'; q^w 'easy to be
drunk*, TO^IUft *fhtf*r 'the cow can be given with ease by you 1 ; jtf* :, *V*> &c.
^[i^fii Tpro"*': 11 \& 11 tn^Tfa 11 «*^fa, ^fii-^nJ^r:,
**fiiii
129. The affix *yu<?h' comes in the Ohhandas,
after roots having the sense of 'to go', when the word
'tshad' &c. meaning 'lightly' or 'with difficulty 1 are in com-
position with such verbs.
This debars the affix «9|. Thus ^Tfi^ftif^r: I *crs*'r»TOftfnr 1 See TS.
7. 5. 20. 1.
*Rh$ftfa 5*w* 11 \\o 11 TT^Tft 11 m&*: 9 arfir, jn&t,
(*Rq$*:, 3*) II
mfim\t 1 nnrot xrrfii^f^ft^ft^mf» VI tow u
130. The affix 'yuch' is seen to come in the
Vedas, after other verbs also, than those meauhig € to go\
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. HI. § 131.]. Present tense affixes. 53*
Thus fjftf wr fjrSr^ircraf irt; so also gft inr pift* hto? «rtn (Rig.
Veda. X. 112. 8).
Vart. — In the modern Sanskrit, the affix % yuclC comes after the verbs
nt% **J, &i ^ and ij^; as **jrepr: 'Duhsisana'; jifr>rr: 'Duryodhana'; jtifrrr,
**f$Oj: and £*<ta: I
131. The affixes which are employed when
the sense is that of present time, may, optionally in like
manner, be employed when the sense is that of past or
future time not remote from the present.
The words wfrt and wftal are the words with the same signification, 1
the latter being derived from the first by adding the affix nra?. This affix is
added with a self-descriptive force, without making any modification in the
meaning. We learn thus incidentally from P&nini's using the word trrftar, that
the affix mr also comes with a self-descriptive (sv&rtha) force, and the words
■nn»|*4: &c. are thus formed.
The affixes which begin with sfttra HI. 2. 123 (**hn^5T?) and end with'
III. 3. 1 (OTJTf* *$<*>) are affixes which come in denoting the present time*
These affixes come also with the force of the past or future time, when the
sense is that the action has just taken place, or will immediately take place.
Thus, to the question eirjr ta?iirftmtf*r 'when didst thou come Devadatta', it may,
be replied, either traraPTOrft 'I come now', or TPTCFttf* *rtfirffc 'know
me even to have come'; or jmnniprig 'I have now come'; or hmH*hhk i: 'I have
come now 9 . So also to the question **r $**n <rfir<*lf% 'when will you go Deva-
datta' , it may be replied, either ^ iTOCrft 'I go now* or ira^tfT *tf firfe or
H* nflnRnfa or iFfirfCT &c
The phrase 'in like manner' (^i^) has been employed to indicate com*
plete resemblance; that is to say, with whatever qualifications, the affixes have
been enjoined to denote present time, namely, with whatever bases (Rfift), and
words in compositions Omf), and restrictive significations fcrrft) , certain
' affixes have been enjoined;— the same affixes under tliose conditions and those
circumstances, only will denote also immediate future and recent past. Thus
3[rnPJ by rule III. 2. 128 comes after the prakptis ^and ^ in forming present
participles; this affix, to denote past and future, must* come only after ^ and
**, and so on. Thus <mpr., **TOPT:, wi*>R:«ig: (III. 2. 136) &c.
Why do we say 'not remote from the present, (frnft^)' ? This rule will
not apply when distant future or distant past is intended to be expressed
47
Digitized by
Google
53* The affix lrit. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 132, J 33-
As qnr^MfTOJ^ wfaycn 'he went day before yesterday to PAtaliputra'; *iro
fRdlfif 'he will go in a year'.
One may say that "the word n«€[rft can denote by itself nothing but
the present tense, and It is because it occurs in a sentence in connection with
other qualifying words, that it is made to denote any other time; and it is a
well-known fact that a tense which a sentence as a whole may indicate, has
no bearing on the question as to what tense a verb must take, when we are
preparing it for taking a grammatical tense ; and hence the present sfitra is
supsrfluom". To such wi reply that the present sQtra and those that follow
are not meant for those who know the proper idioms of Sanskrit language;
but for those only who do not know this.
Dr. Bohtlingk translates this stitra thus: — 'Whatever is near to the
present time, may be expressed as a present tense.
T^HW! II
132. The affixes which are employed, when the
sense is that of the past time or of the present time, may,
I optionally, in like manner, he employed, after a root in
denoting future time, when hope is expressed.
The word 'optionally* is understood here also. The phrase 'not remote
from the present* is not valid in this aphorism. The word Hraferr means the
wish or expectation of getting an object not yet obtained, and consequently
this can refer only to future " time. The force of ^ is to draw the word
*&TPW( from the last sfltra in this aphorism. This sfltra has been thus put
by Mr. Apte: — "When hope is expressed in a conditional form, the Aorist
(wr), the Present, or Simple Future is used in both the clauses to denote a
future time. Thus ?Tiuire<*'Pl« or wm:, or imP€[fir or arorfturfii *r S#
«« H*iU W « *fN* fir, or HtftaqF*: or wfrr* or w^^lWf? # if the teacher were to
come, we should read grammar*.
This construction is possible only when the past tense is expressed by
qij (Aorist); and not by«e N or fa*. For q^denotes past time in general,
while wf and fas denote particular forms of past time; (see III. 2. no, 1 11 and
1 15), The phrase *p*w making an analogy with time in general, will not
therefore, refer to fa^ or fcl* which refer to past time in special
Why say 'when hope is expressed* ? Observe nnrft«*&! lie will come'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cil III. § i33- x 35-] Prohibition of second future. 533
133. When the word 'kshipra' (quickly) or its
synonym is in construction with the verb, the future
affix, *Lrit' is employed after the root, when 'hope' is
expressed in a conditional form.
This supersedes the last rule by which Aorist could also have been
employed. By the present rule the Second Future can only be employed.
Thus rmm^^toOTOTftcrft (or gq im rq^fHw— Apte.) fai nrnitraw^cwrt
•if the teacher were to come soon, we shall soon learn grammar'.
By force of the word ^er in the aphorism, we take the synonyms of
faq also, such as tftef , wjj, ftfwfc &c
An objector might say, "the use of the word 5^ in the stitra is redundant;
for Future tense is the natural tense to be used, whenever hope is indicated.
SQtra III. 3. 132 Was merely an exception to this rule; so that the present
sfltra re-enacting the general rule, ought to have been worded thus; — h Rmq * hl
'not so when a word expressing quickness is employed'; for such a rule debar-
ring the past tenses given by III. 3. 132, would have, of necessity, given scope
to the Future tense which is the natural tense to express Aope". To them we
say, that there are two future tenses, 5^ and q? I By specifying ms we mean
that *!? should not be employed even where it would otherwise have come,
such as in the following: — ^: fifTW^sm? 'to-morrow we shall learn soon'.
134. The affix of the Potential is employed
in den oting Futurity, after a root, when the upapada in
composition with it, is a word expressing 'hope'.
Thisisalsoan<*/<mWa of rule III. 3. 132, and teaches the employ-
ment of the Potential with a future force. Thus 4<liuii4«j4ii|«ti9, mwt ^Hs
tfcft* 'if the teacher will come, I hope, you will study with diligence*. This
being a subsequent rule, will apply even when the words expressive of 'quick-
ness' are in composition. Thus ami# ft ppnffrft* 'I hope, you will learn soon'.
So also, aw**q9 ywfr>ft*fi* t &c.
135. When constant continuance of action or
a near Past or Future is meant, the Past and Future are
not denoted as taught in III. 2, Ill and IIL 3 f 15, through
Digitized by
Google
534 Prohibition of second future. [Bk. III. Cii. III. § 136.
the Imperfect and the Second Future, but through the
Aorist and the First Future.
The affixes ot^ (Imperfect Past) and q» (First Future), have been or-
dained to come, when past time not belonging to the current day, and future
time not belonging to the current day, are respectively indicated. The present
sfttra prohibits these two affixes. The word fa<um«» vy: means 'performing an
action with continuity'; and *rnftar means 'not remoteness of time, immediate-
ness, without the intervention of anything of the same genus*. Thus mepnft*
wjjWWH (not •WHO 'he gave food throughout his life'; or Htprw *rc*ft 'he will
give much food'. *rTOJTt? yTtwfarn 'throughout his life he taught', or TO*3ft?T-
t*H<rftraft 'throughout his life he will teach'. In both these cases the Aorist
and the Second Future are used instead of the Imperfect and the First Future.
So also when recent past or immediate future is meant, the Aorist and
the Second Future are employed, instead of the Imperfect and the First Future.
Thus $n <?ta}m«ifiii|ii^ir, vi«ii*iMlwn*ftMt | nfin! or ^ttfra? or qntfftf 'during the
full-moon that has just past, the teacher consecrated the fire, or performed the
soma-sacrifice or gave a cow*. Here the Aorist is for the Imperfect. 5**rirr*r-
**rr,f*rrf*Ff t, 5W*T5 f nuuiJl | *fl'HiNi**i# or iftftsf ^^, or sr irt qjwJ 'on the next
liew-moon day, the teacher will perform the fire-sacrifice or the soma-sacrifice,
or ho will give a cow'. Here the Second Future is employed instead of the
First Future.
The double negative «? trorop? 'not non-today* implies the proper cor-
responding tenses which indicate adyatana.
* wl4i«w*, mcfenr, (HMinweid ) 11
136, The Futurity is not expressed, as taught
in III. 3. 15, through the Second Future, but through the
First Future, when a statement is made of a limit on this
(avara) side of another place.
The phrase frnMHFTTW is valid in this sfttra also. The two conditions
of the last aphorism, namely, 'continuity of action' and 'immediateness', how-
ever, do not apply here. Thus <fr*TOProP* HPntfgTpntTW ***r «ftmw»m< f M
Ht^TPI*, *Pr ^^quam: 'on this side of the road from the city of Kos&mbi to
the city of P&taliputra, there we will eat rice, and there we will drink saktu'.
Why do we say 'in denoting future time'? Observe *tanrarnra WTO-
faj^ni *lf* ^nf ^fhen^wrt^n *pcirr iwtaffc 'on Ithis side of the road that leads
from the city of Kos&mbi to the city of P&taliputra, we read together &c
Why do we say <when signifying limit' ? Observe 3Jtm *Hq f P f * qftH>
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 137] Prohibition of the first future. 535
*F*l*roi«w *T*K qhuvtiwitV* flrwwt, *Rift qrorw l Here the First Future
is employed.
Why do we say 'when the word wt is in construction' ? Observe
itonnurntw* nm* f^%mn nw myt sftac^^rwfft* Ht^rrwt &c.
The examples of limit given in this aphorism, refer to local limit; in
the subsequent stitras examples will be given as to the limit of time and some
difference will be observed therein.
^,^-3?f:-TOmirni, (^ff^Rl, *m^im^, ^«ifw , *r, <*Hti*M^d) 11
wRr, *r Sffmwvtft firenrc«*t ^ front «rfW*: 11
137. The Second Future is employed instead
of the First Future, in denoting Future time not belong-
ing to the current day, when the word 'avara' is used
together with a word expressing division of time, hub
not when it is a word giving the sense of 'day* or 'night'.
The whole of the last sfltra should be read into this. The difference
between this and the last sfltra is, that stitra III. 3, 136 referred both to the
limit (A space and timt, while sfltra HI. 3. 137 refers to the limit of time only;
moreover with regard to time, there is exception with regard to the portions
of day and night The yoga-viblidga, the separation of this sfttra from the
last, is for the sake of subsequent aphorisms. Thus $trt ^t^r WiFPft fW
KTOCTTOTOCTrcnw 3?ffr Mutantf 'in the month of Chaitra, the year after next,
we shall read together'; «*hvi Hts*m* <we sha11 eat rice then &c> -
This construction is, of course, only valid in denoting future time,
otherwise not. Therefore not here: *trci *^*TCtafHmrcir * m<m*W* u «HW **f*r
wutitf? 'in the month of Chaitra, the year, before last, we read together' ;
wto5PT>i^p?ff 'we ate together &c'.
Why do we say 'limit'? Observe *Trci firafw *RF! HOTPft im t^xa-
«if prawn* ¥*m Hrfhmnt— irJW hI-Hii^hJ i
The limit must be 'on this side i. e. wt side*. With the <f* side limit,
this rule will not apply. With the word <rc, this construction is optional. Sec
the next stitra.
Why do we say 'when not divisions of day and night* ? There are
three sorts of counter-examples in this case; as, irtro ijrar »?nTPft !IW *ftflJT:
* wrcm: or *ts* RrtfsrT arnrnft w* wtarftiNw: or *ftraf fwroffcrw tfmpft m^
vfts*K: v*NHincnr«iw ^*fff H>3<ir*H* **r ww vmm- 1 Here Lut^ or First Future
has been employed and not the Second Future.
48
Digitized by
Google
536 Lrin in the future. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 138, 139.
138, Optionally so, when a declaration is made
with regard to that side of a limit of time.
The whole of the last aphorism must be read into this: The sOtra will
then stand thus: "The Second and the First Futures are optionally both em-
ployed in denoting future time, not belonging to the current day, instead of
the First Future alone, when the word *rc is used signifying a limit of time on
that side of a fixed period, provided that this word does not give the sense of
day or night".
This rule allows an option when the time refers to the qr side of a
starting limit. Thus iftx* mwyeK trrnrft aw nx <roncfrcr*rrcflw yirr wtwrnr?
or Hutara? c we will read together in the month of Chaitra, the year after next*.
AH the counter-examples given under the last aphorism, are also vali^l
here by substituting the word <nr instead of wrr.
139. Where there is a reason for affixing 'Lift'
the affix 'LpA' is employed in the Future tense when the
non-completion of the action is to be understood.
The words 'in denoting future time* are here. The reasons for affix fo*\
are such as cause and effect &c. mentioned in sfltra III. 3. 156 and 157 &c.
The 5H£ Js called the conditional tense. "It comes in the conditional sentences in
which the non-performance of the action is implied; or where the falsity of
the antecedent is implied as a matter of fact. It usually corresponds to the
English Pluperfect Conditional, and must, in Sanskrit, be used in both the an-
tecedent and the consequent clauses". — Apte's Guide.
Thus?|^f^fHft«^fW^PlwnTRr«'rH'if there had been good rain,
then there would have been plenty of food; or if there were to be good rain
then there would be plenty of food'. It is implied that there was not good rain,
nor consequent plenty: or that the occurrence of good rain is dubious, and
the desirable consequence equally so.
So also here, *%xifc *5vrirreiw Jj^i «ntf *3r«*^ 'if he wtJre to go by
the right side, the carriage would not be upset'; *fa 3TOT^ wip**^ «r tf**
Digitized by
Google
Bk. hi. Ch. III. § 140.] The affix lrin. 537
<nrfafiwm 'if he were to call Kamalaka (which he will not), the carriage would
not be^upset'; utftW! Wf^ *rto *ft iNHEr*ffrrn wrflr«*nf K 'you would eat food
with clarified butter, if you (were to) come to me (but you will not come).
All these sentences refer to future time. The non-upsetting is a
future contingency and is an effect the cause of which is the 'calling of
Kamalaka. The speaker— having apprehended the cause and effect, and
having also learned from other sources that such an effect will not take place,
that is to say, that Kamalaka will not be called, and the carriage will be upset —
has employed this conditional tense to express his idea. The whole sentence
*rff *nw*PJ &c. really gives this sense: — That both actions, 'the calling* and
'the non-upsetting', which are subjects of a future time, and which are related
as cause and effect, will not be completed; that neither Kamalaka will be
called, nor the impending fate averted from the carriage. The sfltra may also
be thus rendered according to Professor Bohtlingk: — In a conditional sentence,
which would require a Potential according to III. 3. 156, is used, if the sense is
that of Future time, the Conditional Tense, when the action is not complete.
fwrmfw ^nft) 11
140. And (where there is a reason for affix-
ing ( LhV, the affix 'Lriii' is to be employed, when the non-
completion of the action is to be understood) if the sense
is that of past time.
The whole of the last aphorism is understood in this. The last stitra
enjoined otf in the Future tense; this sfttra ordains it in the Past, the Condi-
tional tense having both these significations. The reasons for affixing fat*
arc given in sGtras III. 3. 152 and those that follow it. In sQtra III. 3. 141
and those that follow, as far as III. 3. 152, optional rules for the employment of
the Conditional tense will be given. Thus:— fit mn Hftjwtjfiruf 'mHRtqwu:
mttv fiNt HTCHunff, *f* s to i#t **f*«*w, sjtjh wire, *r $ g*r*rn, *«to <rorr * toi
'I saw your son, wandering about in search of food, I saw also a twice-born
in search of a Br&hmana (whom he would feast); if he (your son) had been seen
by him (the twice-born), then he would have been fed; but as a matter of fact,
he has not been fed, he went by a different road'.
The conditional sentence irft 9 to ffftrHfa**^ *TfTtfTv?ra is employed
under circumstances set out above. It refers to a past time, there is the
relation of cause and effect existing, one being in search of food, and another
in search of a' guest to feed; and the action is not completed; both taking
different roads, did not come across each other. •
Digitized by
Google
538 The affix lat. [Bk. Ill, Ch. III. § 141, 142.
ftrd, foqifauift) 11
141. From this point as far as sfttra III. 3.
152 (the whole of the following sentence is to be taken as
exerting a governing influence on the sfttras that follow:
where there is a reason for affixing 'Lin', the 4 Lrifi may
be) optionally (employed in denoting past time, when
the non-completion of the action is to be understood).
All the words within brackets must be supplied from the previous
sfttras to complete the sense. This sQtra cDnsist* of three words *r 'optionally*,
W 'as far as' and ^fwfr (the sfltra III. 3 153). The words *t+btt+3 form
^t by the rules of conjunction. The particle *rr in this aphorism has the
force of limit exclusive and not that of limit inclusive. The optional use of
the conditional tense will be illustrated in the following aphorisms, where, in
addition to the special tenses to be employed by those rules, we may employ
the conditional also under those very circumstances, in the alternative, pro-
vided that the non-completion of the action is understood. Prof. Bohtlingk
translates this aphorism thu?: "optionally so, in connection with 3* and a?Fc,
the conditional tense may be employed".
«i^l«ii w«fM«i«ih:ii\irRii^n^Tf^rn T^Hit, ^nfj vrftarefrii
^fa: 11 ttfnrt «i*irm«!raii[ Hfir5CR«flr^r^4t>if^rwjn^ *nft h
t 1.42, The affix 'Lat' is employed after a root,
• when it has in composition with it the words 'api' ov
3&tu', the sense implied by the sentence being that of
'censure 7 .
The word ir*f means 'censure, 'blame*. The affix *r? has been enjoined
to come with a present signification, and would not have come to denote" time
in general, which, however, it does hcre t for here the Present tense is employed
in preference to the tense required by the time of the action, which is totally
excluded. Hence the present sfltra.
Thus nfir *nr *PfPT ^sf *rnraf?f 'even your honor sacrifices (or sacri-
ficed or|will sacrifice) to a SQdra'; srr^ <r* «wr^ TOR unr*Rr irtfitf, *Dft aTOTOftRf
^possibly your honor sacrifices for a SQdra'; the sense implied being that such
conduct on the part of those men are blameworthy.
- In the present case, there being no occasion for the application of %^ f
pf course, we cannot employ shf to denote the non-completion of the action
Digitized by
Google
Bk. Ill Ch. III. § 143, *44-] The affixes lin and lrit. 539
So also Ufa or unr JTRlf upifa 'Fie! you abandon (or abandoned or will
abandon) your wife* I
f**!TO mnfa f*r¥ * 11 ^ 11 *mfa 11 ftwrwT, mnfa,
143. The affix c LifL 7 as well as 'Latf is option-
ally employed after a root, when the word 'katham' is in
construction with it, and censure is implied.
The word 'censure' is understood, and by *r we draw 5f^ from the
previous sfttra into this. By using the word 'optionally' in the aphorism, it is
indicated that this rule does not Exclude the application of the alternative
tenses which would otherwise have been required by the time of the action. It is
not total exclusion like the last. Thus q*tf *cpt nw *W* 'J^^m^or «rnr*fic
or *rr*fi*«*fa 'Indeed, how your honor can (or will) sacrifice for a SAdra'.
So also **tf wh tiwwi*,*?} *niRcflr, *?*ni*m or nm^N^n: 1
Here there is an occasion for the application of the Potential mood
(f«n£); therefore when we intend to express non-completion of action in the
past time, we can optionally etaploy the Conditional also (sjr). As qnf ith
*nr ^rrw ^*5f^ wnffawi^ or wntf^ 'Indeed, why did your honor (attempt to)
sacrifice for that Sftdra (in vain)'.
Under similar circumstances, in denoting future time, the Conditional
(5|«j) must invariably be employed (III. 3. 139); as, sutf *$n a?tt(ftra: 'why will
you (attempt to) give up your duty'.
|kw, ^ITWT:) M
144. The affixes 'Lin' and 'Lrit' come after a
verb, when the interrogative words like ( kim' &c, are in
composition with it, and censure is implied.
Here also the Potential and the First Future are employed in preference
to the time required by the action.
The word 'censure' is understood here; not so, however, the word
'optionally'. This excludes all other tense-affixes. The repetition of the word
%fj* in this sfttra, is for the sake of excluding &\, whose anuvf itti would also
have run into this sfltra, had we taken the anuvritti of fo* N from the last stitra,
instead of repeating it. Thus *?: *?*rct *r *ft Pf*t^. Prfa«*fa *f 'who will
censure Hari ?
49
Digitized by
Google
540 The affixes lin and lrit. [Bk. HI. Cn. III. § 145.
In the Past tense, when the non-completion of action is implied, we
may optionally employ the Conditional (5|*>) ; and in the Future tense, under
similar circumstances, we must employ the Conditional necessarily; as qft srnc
^TOt v tf*r HqTOfnffftra^ 'who is the Stidra for whom your honor did sacrifice
(in vain)'. This sOtra may be rendered thus also:— " In connection with an
Interrogative Pronoun, when censure is implied, may be employed the Poten-
tial or the First Future".
145. When it is to be expressed that some
body holds that something is not likely to take place, or
is not to be tolerated, the Potential and the First Future
are employed, even without the Interrogative Pronoun.
The anuvritti of the word 'censure* ceases. The word tTOTOft: means
•impossibility, not to be believed*. The word wrf: means 'not endurable or
not to be tolerated'. This excludes all other tenses, the Potential and the
2nd. Future coming in preference to all other tenses required by the time of
the action. In the Dvandva Compound JHTOS^nrriift:, the word tmfFfir ought
to have stood as second member of the compound as it contains larger number
of syllables than the word wpf (II. 2. i4). The non-compliance with rule II.
2. 14. indicates that the rule of irarafc*, (I. 3. 10) does not apply here, which
would otherwise have applied— the sense of the sfltra then being 'that the
Potential should be employed when the act is not likely to occur, and the 2nd.
Future to be used when the act is not to be tolerated'. This is not, however,
the interpretation which we should put upon the sfltra.
Thus *TI44i*Mtuttt, f tfHTWrfa, *T *W$$> OT WJ TPT ^5f TOl^ or
WsifawrftT 'I do not believe, or think it possible or trust that your honor
sacrifices (or sacrificed or will sacrifice) for a Sfldra'. n ffarf* qf^ n^f
WfiTOff or OTrfiroftr 'I can not tolerate that your honor does (did or will)
sacrifice for a Stidra*.
When past time together with the non-completion of the action is to be
expressed, we may optionally employ the Conditional (w^ f but necessarily
so, when Future time is to be expressed. Thus *rTO*F*rft fnnwi^ m* , f«!5Pj
tntmfttqqt 'I do not believe that your honor did or will sacrifice for a SAdra'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. HI. Ch. HI. § 146, 147.] The affix lin, r 54*
146. The affix 'Lrit' (the First Future) is used
after a root, when the words 'kimkila' or those having the
sense of c asti' (he is) are in construction with it, (when
the action is not likely to occur, or is not to be tolerated).
The words within brackets must be supplied from the last aphorism.
The whole word fofatri is to be taken as an upapada and not the word fifr and
Rref separately. This word expresses anger. The words having the sense of
asti are nftei, **fil and firw* 1 This rule supersedes the Potential (jmw,). Thus
RrRkw or nfef or **fii or f%w* srnr ot wj }*ret wiRrofir, «r *rf mftr, *r M^fJ
'Is it possible that your honor will (or did or does) sacrifice for a SOdra ? I can-
not believe or tolerate it*.
As there is no occasion for Rfc^ here, we cannot have the Conditional
(spO required by rule III. 3. 141.
Another example is n «nf? n n$$ *r f%f%5f Pf Jgnw^ >&5*tf 'I do not
believe or can tolerate that thou shouldst eat the food of Sfldra'; a^fai H*ftl
fwa <rr y$t <rfTO% 'Is it possible that thou shouldst go to a female Sfldra'.
147. The affix 'Lift' comes after a root, the
words ( j&tu' and 'yat' being in construction with it, when
the sense is that the action is not believed to be likely, or
is not to be tolerated.
This excludes the First Future or 'Lrit'. *TRJ frw ww^TO* *n**|'ff. or
Vart. — The words *c*r and qfo should be enumerated along with the
words srni and ^ in tllis rulc - As 'W or *f* *r **Titff fft R*t w*9*e<nrrfir
f *pfarfa 'neither do I think, nor do I tolerate that one like you should bias*
pheme Hari\
Here also when the non-completion of the action is implied, the Condi-
tional (trar) is necessarily employed in denoting future time, and optionally so
in denoting past time. As strj, *r^, **r or «rf| mftft ffc Rf^i or arfaf^P^
Tr^^^nrrPr, t *$*rrfa *r 'neither do I believe, nor do I tolerate that one like
you did attempt to blaspheme Hari\ *tf* yf^fre^s^fs frgraH repr w *Rl
CHfa^pi ^"^^PlPTft^'ifyouhad felt (which you clearly have not) the fra-
grant smell of her breath, would you have had any liking for this lotus* ? .
Digitized by
Google
542 The affix lin. [Bk. III. Ch. Ill § 148-150.
148. The affix 'Lift' comes after a root, the
words 'yachcha' and 'yatra' being in construction, when
the sense is that the action is not believed to be likely,
or not to be tolerated.
This supersedes the First Future. The separation of this aphorism
from the previous one, is for the sake of the rules that follow. The rule I. 3. 10
does not also apply here. Thus **^ vr *T «*W *[*?: T *r?, T H$ ITPr 'I do not
think, nor can I tolerate that thou wilt do so'.
The Conditional (^rrj will also be employed under its own proper con-
ditions as shown in the last aphorism.
149. The affix 'Lift* comes after a root in all
tenses when the words 'yachcha* and 'yatra' are in com-
position with it, provided that censure is implied.
The governing force of the words anavaklipti and amatska ceases.
This debars all other tense-affixes. Thus v*t or ** w* *m\ *TO *ntf*l W&
«[*: fr«l nun?:, *T*fat, M$ iimnawfm * we b,ame y° u who being an opulent, old
VrAhmana (who ought to know better) officiate as a sacrificial priest for a
Sfidra, O 1 It is improper' I
When the non-completion of the action is indicated, the Conditional
tense. must be employed under the rules given in III. 3. 139-140-141. As w* 1 *
or *w *i fft f^t: or Bifam**:, *T*fat 'we censure that you should (have attemp-
ted to) blaspheme Han', &c
%¥, W^ITO*) II
150. The affix 'Lift' comes iu all tenses after a
root, when used with the words 'yachcha' and 'yatra' and
the sense implied is that of 'wonder'.
... The word PM^iul means 'wonder, astonishment, strangeness &c\
This debars all the other tense-affixes. Thus **<* or *w nw *m% ^*& *iwtw MT*
^^W,.'thi3 is a wonder that you should sacrifice for a Sfldra'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk, III. Ch. Ill § i$r, 152.] The affix un. 543
When the non-completion of the action is indicated, the Conditional is
employed under the rules III. 3. 139,140 and 141. Thus *rrv£3tr^*«n or
m*i *{jr *nw or ironr^*: 'it is a wonder that you should (have attempted to)
perform a sacrifice for a Sftdra'; sfprf^T^I or *r* ** U* wmrR^r: 'it is a
wonder that you should (hereafter attempt to) make a Siidra perform a sacrifice.
^Ri : 11 W^rrt fitfrtrotf *t***t% *rofcfe«rnrtfr H*f*r srfftjcrvw n*s*S 11
151. In all other cases, when wonder is impli-
ed by other words than 'yachcha' and 'yatra', the affix
'L^it' is employed after a root, except when the word
c yadi' is used.
In all other cases, that is to say, in cases where the words «r*f| or to
arc not employed, as well as where the word *ft is not used, the First Future
is used in preference to the Potential.
Thus w*S, fa*, *^*fi w*t *tpc <r# *pntr**Ri, sfatf *rro wmiwsT^ w^«*«
'it is wonderful, strange and astonishing that the blind man should ascend a
mountain, or a deaf person should read grammar'.
Not so, when the word *lft is employed. Thus arrarif *rf* ^raffrfta 'a
wonder, if he study'. *rrvd *ff * HTjfai 'a wonder, if he eat'.
As there is, in this case, no occasion to employ the Potential, we cannot
employ the Conditional as directed in sfltras III. 3. 139, 140 and 141.
%S II
152. The affix 'Lin' conies after a verb in all
tenses, when the words 'uta' and c api\ both having the
same meaning, are in composition.
This excludes all the other tense-affixes. The meaning which is com-
mon both to t?i and aift is that of *r*n 'assuredly, certainly, surely, really'.
Thus ot *j*ft*l 'certainly he does'; atf* ^J^tf* 'assuredly he does'; 3tmft*fta 'cer-
tainly he studies (will study &c)'; w*tfWta 'surely he studies &c\
Why do we say 'when they mean certainly' ? Observe m to «rfa**Rl
'will the stick fall' ? ajRr err WwR* 'he shuts the door'. Here ot is employed in
asking questions, and ifft with >rr means 'to shut'. The option allowed by rule
III. 3. 141. ceases. Hereafter the Conditional (s|F N ) must invariably be used even
in indicating Past action, when action is not completed, and there is reason for
the employment of fi?jr N (Potential). In indicating Future time, of course, *n£
5?
Digitized by
by Google
544 The affix lin. [Bk. III. Ch. III. § 153, 154.
I must necessarily be employed as before. Henceforward, therefore, no option
is allowed, but »?; must be employed where sfttras III. 3. 139 and 140 require it.
153. The affix 'Lift' comes after a root, in ex-
pressing or making known of a wish, except when the
word 'kachchit' is in composition with it.
The phrase *rnmjT means the expression of one's wish. This debars
all other tense-affixes. As mftH **ifta H^=*fa*n«fr * 3«fta H*PJ 'it is
my wish that you will eat*.
Why do we say 'except the word sirf^rj ? Observe Cfffc^ftaft #
wrr yfi*refafa ft fair 1 imfir* **r i*spflr *f**reftaPc <rrfcihi 'I hope thy
mother is living, I hope thy father is living, I ask thee, O mAr&vid ! (Parrot), I
hope that P&rvati is living*.
*nc T**rci *wvr fTOn inissrii, ti4't4) ^r^nvitffRn&Ju ^wruT^trsSa* Jiwrcft *refii 11
154. The affix 'Lift' is employed after a root,
when the expectation (of a person or thing being able or
competent to do or suffer the action denoted by the verb)
is implied (or expressed by any other word used along
with them) than 'alarn'.
The word fira^ is understood here. The word *f wct means supposi-
tion and expectation in the power or ability of another to perform any action.
This word is here qualified by the sense of the word *?**. The word qftt means
'adequate'; so that the above-mentioned timvt must be completed, full and
true i. e. realised. -The phrase fTCgntftf qualifies vtm, and means 'if the non-
employment or omission of w is valid or unobjectionable. When is that unob-
jectionable, when the sense of wr is implied by the sentence, but this word
itself is not used ? The Potential Mood is employed when the expectation is of
the kind above described. This rule debars all other tense-affixes. Thus **fa
<rttf ftfWT fi^UT^ 'I expect he will break even the hill with his head'; Ufa jftCX-
*W g**ft*l 'I expect you will eat away even a drona of cooked food'.
. Why do we use the word wf 'competent to do' f Observe, firfjjTOraft
Digitized by
Google
Bk. ill. Ch. III. § 155, 156.] The affix lM. V545
9*1*1 *r*to Tfa«*Rl 3FP^ *I expect Devadatta who is living in a foreign country,
will some day go back to his country'. Here though expectation' is expressed
the idea conveyed by wf, namely, the power to do something or adequacy to do
is not present; and hence the Future is employed instead of the Potential.
Why do we use the phrase flr^Prftf 'when the actual result does not
take place' ? Observe, are? ?***it f fwf f fa«*fif 'Devadatta is in a position to
kill the elephant, and he will carry it out also'.
Under similar circumstances, in past and future times, when non-com-
pletion of action is indicated, the Conditional tense (snj) must be invariably
used in preference to every other tense. Professor Bohtlingk translates the
sfttra thus: "The Potential is employed when it is expressed that some one is
believed to be capable of doing something, pre-supposing that the actual per-
formance of the action does not take place'.
fe*T*T ^*mft ^TOR**i3tarf^ 11 ^<n 11 vyfa 11 f5roT*T f
155. The affix 'Lin' is optionally employed
after a verb when it has another verb which expresses
'expectation', in construction with it, but not so when
the word 'yat' is used.
The whole of the last sfltra qualifies this sfttra; the 'expectation 9 indi-
cated here being of the kind mentioned in the last sfltra and governed by the
conditions laid down in that aphorisnt. The word by which an 'expectation*,
is expressed such as *4TC* *Tfa, or affair*, is called «'*rnnT-*^r. This stitra
enjoins an option where by the last aphorism, there would have been necessa-
rily the Potential Tense. Thus «**fr**rrf*r g*afta or nt^rd H*T^ 'I expect you
will cat'; w^TOffa H^gftff or qt^ifi nw% 'I hope you will eat'; *fl{j$ ^j^hf or
Hfi5*3 H*l* 'I believe you will eat'. But no option is allowed, and the Poten-
tial must necessarily be used, when the .word ^ is employed. As 9*Hnrarft
**n Wft* TO^'I expect you will eat'.
The stitra may also be rendered thus. "The Potential is not necessari-
ly employed where there is in connection with it a verb in the sense of 'to
hold as possible', but not when mjs employed."
*f%: 11 $2>$ i*nrfii ^n? ^m^^rnitFqfoF ***** wfir 11
15G. The affix 'Lin* is optionally employed
after both those verbs which express the condition and
its consequence.
Digitized by
Google
546 The affixes un and lot. [Bk III. Ch. III. § 157.
^^"^ — — ^ — —
The word fa means 'cause or 'condition' and $*$H* means consequence
. or effect*. This supersedes all other tense-affixes; in other words, 'in condi-
tional sentences in which one statement is made to depend upon another as
its reason or ground, the Potential is used in both the antecedent and the con-
sequent, otherwise called the protasis ($3) and apodosis (t^iw), the former con-
taining the condition or ground of argument, and the latter the conclusion
based upon it'. Thus :— fftrar* wraw *ranr^<nifw^ 'if he go by the right
side, the cart will not be upset'; *rff afT*?^^ HTROT V> <* * \ TO?»I%3 'if he calls Ka-
malaka, the cart will not be upset'. Here 'going by the right side* is the
protasis (f tr), and 'not-upsetting' the apodosis (^*nro N ).
This is an optional use of the Potential; we may use the Second Future
in the alternative; thus fftnrrr ^* *rrc*rfil T Wtt <nrfafir«*rfii 'if he goes by the
south, the cart will not be upset'. .
" The word firam 'optionally' used in the sfltra immediately preceding
is also understood here.
Though the anuvptti of fo^ could have been taken from the last
aphorisms, its repetition here is for the sake of pointing out the particular
time, namely, the Future, in which the Potential should be employed. There-
fore it is not employed in the following sentences: $*ftrH TOrirf 'he kills,
therefore he flics' ; vi?*t |fir wRr 'it rains, therefore he runs'.
It, of course, follows that when the non-completion of the action is
indicated, the Conditional ($r<) should be employed, under these very circum-
stances. See examples under sfttra III. 3, 139.
^r«f^2 ftrarcfart 11 ^s 11 v^tfk 11 tnrc-snK fsnp-
157. The affixes 'Lift' and 'Lotf are employed
after a root, when another verb having the sense of
'wishing, is in construction with it.
This supersedes all other tense-affixes. When words expressing 'wish',
such as 1^, m^ unf &c, are used, the Potential or Imperative is used; thus {*qrf%
mm* or *rv* ^W^or *$wt H^r 'I wish, desire or pray that your
honor may eat'.
Vart.— It is only when a desire is expressed that Potential or Im-
perative should be employed and not merely when the verb 'to wish' or its
synonyms are m composition. Therefore the Potential or Imperative are not
% used here: x*8\ *tfW* 'wishing, he does'.
The sfltra may be rendered thus: 'In connection with a verb in the
sense pf 'wishing* the Potential or the Imperative may be employed',
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 158-160.] The affix im 547
( W%) n
158. The affix 'tumuii* comes after a verb,
when another verb meaning 'to wish' is in construction,
provided that the agent of both the verbs is the same.
Thus HBtRr, *?€ or *te[Rr HT*5* 'he desires to eat'; q*rcirf Ht^ 'he
wishes to eat'; pH i ^lfiij qfiiq;iny^r > gftf 'desires to obtain for her husband
the Pin&ka-handed God Siva'.
But why do we say 'when the agent of the Infinitive and the verb
are the same'? We can not say 9*yi Hfrfft **8[fir *Hif *n 'Yajfladatta wishes
Devadatta to eat'; for here the agents of ^ and **r are not the same. We
must say, *JWP£ instead of *Jfair\ 1
Why do not wc use it here: — n6[^ tftflfa 'wishing, he does' ? Because
the Infinitive is never found in such constructions,' In other words, the
Infinitive in ^ is employed when both the verbs have the same agent.
159. The affix 'Lift' is used after a verb when
verbs moaning 'fco wish' are in construction with it, and
the agent of both the verbs is the same.
Under similar conditions, with words implying 'wish', the Potential is
used in the sense of the Infinitive ; Thus *fljfta f fir f*S[fil 'he wishes that he
may eat' ; wfoft&Op^t! 'he wishes that he will read'.
When the non-completion of the action is implied, the Conditional
must be employed under rule III. 3. 139.
TTOT^Rft ft HT^T 3< fa l3 It ^0 II xj^rf* II TTO-3nh*:,
ft*T*T, V$*rT^, (fav) II
160. After roots meaning 'to wish', the Poten-
tial (Liii) is optionally used in denoting the present time.
This ordains Rf?; where there would have been otherwise f^. Thus
S^[Rr or ^fi^'hc wishes'; *ftr or ^pn^J mn^t or qtptfta I
f^ RlfH ^ ^q i l^M^ l v ^^ flM^m^^ ftvil^ll M^ft ll
^Sr: 11 fir«rro3s >?n!Tf5*r N TOift wfif 11
5i
Digitized by
Google
548 The kritva affixes. [Bk. III. Ch.MII. § 161, 162.
161. The affix 'Lift' comes after a verb, when
the agent either commands, invites, permits, politely
expresses a wish, asks questions, or prays.
The word fqfa: means 'commanding or directing a subordinate'; fr*mnrf
means 'giving invitation'; WFTOt means 'expressing permission to do as one
likes'; wflg: means 'to politely express a wish'; *r*sm: means 'a question'; and
UTtfrr means 'a prayer'.
This excludes all other tense-affixes. Thus : —
(0 *& *pft* ,,et Wm make the mat> I *W[ *m% wrahi^ 'you come
to the village';
(2 and 3) ff *wrr^ $^ta 'you will or may dine here'; ** topj wtfta
•here you will or may sit*;
(4) wft^BCPfr *WF* OTOWf HTTT^n 'we wish that you should con-
descend to initiate this boy';
(5) fk Ht *q c *h<UJH *ffrftar 9n frafrr ? 'Sir, what shall I learn, the Grammar
or the Logic'?
(6) *l*fa 3 UHu*rr «*TOro •i^Wrt 'this is my prayer that I should learn
Grammar*.
162. The affix 'Lof also is employed after a
root in the sense of commanding, &c.
The Imperative Mood is employed also under the circumstances men-
tioned in the last aphorism. The division of this aphorism from the last, is for
the sake of subsequent sfltras in which the anuvritti of 5ft? only runs and not
those of others. Thus : —
(1) *v* *ra^ *m% *if*« 'make the mat'; imf H*pr wipsfRi l
(2 and 3) *iyr H*PJ MTCflnj 'there you are invited to, or you may, sit'.
(4) 5T»Wl wirrprq 'you will teach, I hope, the son'.
(5) Tk ^T 5**rwr$ s*i TO? 'Sir what shall I learn, the Veda or the Logic'?
(6) H*fa ^ Hnf TT *qw< g JH * * l£ SFfrtt*^ 'this is my prayer that I may
learn the Grammar, or that I may learn the Prosody'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. III. § 163, 164.] The affix lin. 549
163. The affixes called 'Kj-itya', and the affix
'Lot' come also after verbs, in the sense of direction,
granting permission, and proper (particular) time.
The word fa means 'direction'; atftcrf: means 'permission to do as one
likes'; *mraffvf: means 'arrival of appropriate occasion or time for the doing
of an action 1 . The force of <* is to introduce the word eft? into this aphorism.
Thus WIT q&: qrofta, qrfc*:, ffcic: or *jpi: *you must, (may, or it is proper,
time for you to) make the mat'.
So instead of the Passive Potential Participles, for such the Kritya
affix (III. 1. 95 &c) may properly be called; we may have the Imperative also.
Thus «Rftf[ *R? 'you must (may or it is the appropriate time to) make the mat\
It might be asked 'Why the kritya affixes are enjoined to come with
the force of direction, permission &c\ They have been ordained most gener-
ically to come in denoting action in the Abstract (hi*) and object (qrf) and
a fortiori they will come in denoting the senses of direction, permission &c; for
the latter are but a species of action, If you say that tft\ being ordained in
these special senses, will (on the principle, that an apav&da or special rule ex-
cludes an utsarga or general rule within the jurisdiction of such special rule)
exclude kritya affixes; we would reply, that kritya affixes will not be exclud-
ed, for the rule of non-uniform affixes (IIL 1/94) will apply'.
To this objection we answer 'the special mention of the word kritya
in this sfltra, indicates the existence of the following maxim :—
'The rule of non-uniform affixes (III. 1. 94) does not necessarily apply
in all cases after sfttra III. 3. 94 treating of primary affixes by which feminine
nouns are formed'.
Q.— What is the difference between the words RrRr andifa? Some
say fafa means a precept enjoining something for the first time; while ftr means
mere 'direction*.
VXK&* 11
1G4. The affix < Liii , (as well as the 'Kjltya'
and 'Lot') is used (under similar circumstances in the
sense of direction, permission &c.) when the time is future
by a Muhftrta (48 minutes or an Indian hour); (or the Po-
tential may be used as well, when it signifies 'at this
very moment';,
Digitized by
Google
550 The affix tumun. [Bk. HI. Ch. III. § 165-167.
X —
The words fa &c. of the last sfltra must be read into this. The force
of n is to introduce the words $ror and oft* from the last sfttra, into this. Thus
*&$ Sf^fj'rft W*fc* wit isrej ***: ^H**r>, srorfta:, 3*r5:, or h^t^ *srej *f£ snsfor
(Potential) or cfrft^ (Imperative). 'You may make the mat after an Indian
hour'; or 'you must &c', or 'it is proper time for you to make a mat just now'.
Compare III. 3. 9. '
165. The affix 'Lot' comes after a verb, when
the word ( sma' is in composition; (when the sense is that
of 'direction' permission) &c. and referring to time future
by a Muhiirta).
This supersedes the Potential (fcflO anc * Potential Passive Participles
(*jnrr> Thus *tfn ipgif^ to* «# *tfh[ *r. irrt ir*sflj *t, qWUwmi i mq ot
'you (may, must, or it is proper time to) make the mat, or go to the village, or
teach M&navaka just now'.
Wfh£ * II ^ II XJ^rf* II 3T«ftt£, *, (^, $T*) M
166. And when 'wish* is meant (the Impera-
tive may be used when the word 'sma' is in composition
With the verb).
The word m is understood here. The word vrfte has already been
explained in sfltra III. 3. 161. This rule supersedes the Potential. Thus irjfr
'« kf*\ Hr uyqqNHi gi m or try w rnwrfarfr* ^r fi* 'O I King ! I wish that you
teach the boy or make Agnihotra sacrifice'.
^fa: 11 *Mifi|v,jN?«r trrfte^^wtpft wftr 11
167. The affix 'tumun' comes after a root,
when the words 'k&la', 'samaya', and 'velftf (all meaning
time) are in composition.
Thus njrett *th£H 'time to eat'; srw *I5J wnrtnit tfirwn 'it is time to
bathe and take food'; twfiTOl 'time to eat'. In short, Infinitive in twtmay
be used with words meaning'time'; as *fTOft;«PtR*Pi iWffncrflRPT 'this is, indeed,
the time to show myself.
Why do not we use the Infinitive here ? *?rw «pi% y^tifH 'time de-
Digitized by
Google
Bk. Ill, Ch. III. § 168-170.] The affix mm. 551
vours all creatures'. The sense of 'direction &c\ is understood in the sfltra; so
when 'direction &c* is hot meant, the Infinitive will not be used.
Why do not we use the Infinitive here, graft ^r^rw 'proper time to
eat 1 ? Because, by the rule of non-uniform affixes (III. 1. 94), W e can use
also the affix «**& (by which the word $nm is formed). As we have already
said in sOtra III. 3. 163 that after sfitras III 1. 113 and forward, namely, in
other sfltras than those treating of feminine affixes, the rule of III. 1. 94 may
be employed as an Anitya or a non-universal rule.
f*re *f^[ « ^ « *tf* 11 f%v, *% (wrsre^srig) 11
168. The affix 'laii' comes after a root, when
the word 'yad' is in composition, and the words 'k&la', &c.
occnr in construction.
This ordains the Potential and supersedes the Infinitive in Uumun 9 .
Thus mm:> **rft> $5fC *r *ft,*m\ **iffrl '** ^ txme * at y° ur honor should take
your meals'.
3f? *c*9TO II X*<! II Vftf* II snf, V 91-9* :, *, (% 5 ) n
1G9. Tho affixes 'lqitya', and the affix 'tvich*
are added to a root, when fitness as regards the agent is
implied, (as well as the affix 'lift').
The force of ■* is to introduce the Potential (fa^) into this, from the
last. Thus >wir 13*! vR**tt ftv&tt *rjTT or ***ffar, (kritya) ; or ^nj ?jpy ^i^m\ *tac
(trich); or Hfr^e^g *i«rt *i* (lift) 'your honor is fit to marry the girl'.
Why specifically enjoin kritya' and 'trick 9 in the sense of fitness ? They
being enjoined universally, would a fortiori, be applied when fitness is to be de*
noted ? Because the fog^ being specially enjoined to denote fitness, and being
an Apavdda, would have debarred kritya and trich, which being universal
affixes, would give way. Nor can we, to prevent this contingency, take shel-
ter under rule III. 1. 94 of 'non-uniform affixes', for we have seen that that
rule is not universally valid.
^i^w*i^Wfarfarfa: 11 \$o 11 m^iPi 11 3rptt?ro-3TTO-
*[*pHft:, fafa: II
170. The affix %mV is added to the root in
denoting agent, showing that there is some 'necessity'
53
Digitized by VjOOQIC
5$2 The affix lin. [Bk. III. Oi. III. § 171, 172.
or indebtedness or obligation on the part of the agent in
connection with the action denoted by the verb.
Thus *TOC*r Stftf 'must be done'. The compounding here takes place
by II. 1. 72. So also jjtf $r*ft 'ought to be given a hundred'; ^9 jnft; Pr«F
*Rff &c.
ttcU T g II ^ 11 ^rf^r II W^QJ: 9 % (3TWR?WirsnW^T:) II
171. The affixes called 'kritya' also come after
a root when the sense to be indicated is that of 'necessi-
ty or obligation*.
Thus wrr *rej H<npf **?: *$* >*', sFTOhn, «Fn5: or $&*: 'you ought to
make the mat'; mm yrf ?ra*tf, W, &c, 'you ought to pay a hundred'*
Q.— Where is the necessity of this aphorism ? The kritya affixes,
being enjoined universally without any limitation would, of course, come under
these special circumstances also.
A. — They would be excluded by the special affix fojf* of the last
sfltra, which comes especially with the force of 'necessity' and 'obligation'.
Q.— Not so, for fijjffir comes in denoting the 'agent' (siref), while kritya
denotes the 'action* (*r*r) and the 'object' ($&)\ so their scope being different,
how can one supersede the other ?
A. — Well, to remove this objection, some'say, that kritya words like
wsir, Hn &c. (III. 4. 68) which especially refer to the agent % are the proper ex-
amples to be given under this aphorism; and not examples of kritya-formed
words in general.
srfa fsre * n ^ u ^ifw 11 *rfa, fsnp, % (sfit:) it
172. * And the affix 'Lift' as well as the 'kritya*
affixes come after a verb, when the sense is that of Capa-
bility'.
The word 'capability' qualifies the root so that the sense of capability
must be inherent in the root ; Thus wir *l*J wit «fta*V, *f*ft*:, TOT: (kritya),
or *ftp^ ?R5 nnf qrf^'you can carry the load'.
Though kptya-affixes would have come in this sense, even without
any special rule, for they are general affixes, their special mention in this
sfttra is to guard against their being superseded by fmw^ for rule IIL 1. 94 is
not universally valid.
snfljfa f^SfttT II ^ II *^Tfa ll«nfi^,f%V-^ltTII
Digitized by
Google
Bk. hi. Ch. III. § 173-175] The affix lom. 553.
173. The affixes 'Urn' and 'Lof come after a
verb by which benediction' is intended.
The word afftffcr means the wish to obtain an object which one de-
sires, a blessing, an expression of one's good wishes. The fer s here referred
to is what is known as the wtftrsfr^ or the Benedictive tense. Its conjugation
is different from the conjugation of the ordinary f5TCF N which we have called
the Potential or Optative ; as far sfrmT* WJ or fan: sft*H w* 'may you live
long'!
Why do we say 'when denoting benediction'. Observe far: sffafti
fsS^i: 'Devadatta' lives long'.
*fa: 11 wffrfa Pre* *tth %yift nam h*s: «s*i*t $mm *roS u
174. The affixes c ktich' and 'kta' are employ-
ed after a root, when benediction is intended, provided
that the whole word so formed, is an appellative.
The affixes therefore, 'give the sense of the agent, with the addition
that the action is simply the object of a prayer of some one who wishes that
that may be the action of that agent, the sense being simply appellative. 9 Thus
tifrr: » n**m 'a weaver* (lit. may he weave); srfit: or *ftr: = **VKH (VI. 445)
•wealth or gift'; «jRi: =H*nfFJ 'success'; »rf^r:='FJ l w^ 'respect'. These are exam-
ples of words formed by the affix Ri^ 1 Of words formed by w in this sense, we
have ta[*i: =$*npf 5*rer: 'Devadatta (lit. may the Gods give him). Though the
affix **$ has already once been generally ordained, its repetition here is to pre-
vent its being superseded by %^ I The «^ of ftr^ is qualifying only, distinguish-
ing it from Ru^ &c. and is useful in sfltra VI. 4. 39.
175. The affix 'Lrui' comes after a verb when
the word 'm&iV is used in connection with it.
This sets aside all other tense-affixes. As iff *OTfs 'let him not do fi
Tf Srefy 'let him not take'.
How have we then the Imperative and the Future tenses in the follow-
ing sentence instead of the Aorist ? iir **x w& <rrt m *f%nrfii 1 This sentence
is against good usage. Or, we may explain it by saying that there is another
irr which has not the indicatory r; and with that m, other tenses may be used..
The augment ig elided after the prohibitive particle nr, by VI. 4. 74.
Digitized by
Google
354 The affix lan. [Bk. m, ch. III. § 176.
*5tanft W¥ * H \*$ n ^ft w *f> *m, w, *, ('fife,
«*) N
*Kr: 11 w *i*ft*i? irajyntf smft^ n?**r wfn ^tnwr, ^ h
176. When the word 'man' is followed by
'sma', the affix 'LaiV as well as 'Lun' may be employed
after a verbal root.
By "* we introduce gr into the aphorism. Thus nm *rfm s or wfiV N
•let him not make'; ww ?*« N or frffrl N 'let him not take".
Digitized by
Google
BOOK THIRD.
Chapter IV.
— :o: —
jRi: if wrofat***^ *nrsw>r:, Pri^rcjfird«r*rR:,^»n^rRi wnmirafcirr
•ifir *mnv srmt *refoi n
1. When there is a syntactical relation be-
tween the senses of the verbs, the affixes are valid, even
in denoting time other than that for which they have
been specifically enjoined.
The above sfttra is thus translated by Professor Bohtlingk :— "Words
formed with affixes stand, (in reference to the time) in closer relation to the
verb (with which they are allied)". Thus HI. 2. 85 has taught that words like
•rf«r^*nrrf3f^ have a past significance,**, /.they denote a person who has
already perfotmed the ceremony of Agnishtoma. According to the present sOtra,
in spite of this past significance, inherent in the word, one may use this word
with a future tense, whereby it is reduced to a future-denoting word. Thus
s tfWrgftreresre * yet *lf?rar means 'to him a son will be born who will perform
the said Agnishtoma sacrifice* .
The above is not a literal translation but rather an adaptation. The
literal translation will be something like this. "Affixes are employed in de-
noting relation (fi *«*) between the senses of verbs". The word WfltTOar is
a Genitive Compound meaning 'relation of root'. The word wr* 'root* is figur-
atively used for wtrf 'sense of root'; so that the above compound means 're-
lation of the senses of roots'. In other words, the relation between the roots
should be that of qualifier and the qualified. When there exists such a rela-
tion between the senses of two verbs, namely, that of qualifier and the thing
qualified, then the affixes may be employed in denoting other times than that
specifically ordained for them. In other words, to quote from the Guide to
Paninj: "It is to be observed, that when primitive words are joined with verbs
so as to qualify them, the time of the verbs being mainly the time that con-
trols the sentence, any time denoted by the primitive affixes, by which the
former words have been formed will be subordinate to and regulated by, but
need not correspond to, the time of the verbs, so far as the form of those words
is concerned.'*
53
Digitized by VjOOQIC
55 6 The affix lot. [Bk. III. Cn. IV. § 2.
Thus *i*f *?a^ WTT 'living there, he saw'; Mfar g fr pyre re q yftr sifcnir
'to him a son will be born, a performer of the Agnishfoma sacrifice'; fRf: ^j*: ^J
HSffiT 'he will be to-morrow maker of the mat'; wftftTOfrcft* I
Here, though the time of the action of living denoted by wr is present,
(III, 2. 124), this action is present only in relation to the action of seeing, and
though because the latter action is past, the former action also is past with refer-
ence to the speaker or writer, this circumstance does not affect the form of m% 9
which therefore may remain as it is. In other words, 'affixes are related direct-
ly to the root, and not to the whole sentence'.
Similarly the word arffcrfftronft is formed by an affix (III. 2. 85)
denoting past time, while the word irfsnir is in the Future tense. Now, this link-
ing together of a word in the Past tense with a word in the future is a valid
usage. Here the time of the qualified verb nfw does not affect the special time
of the qualifier AgnishtomayAjt.
Q— Why has the word TCiRr been repeated in this sAtra, when it was
understood in this from III. 1.1 ? Ans. — The repetition is for the sake of indica-
ting that affixes which are not ordained to come after roots farj), but which
are enjoined to come after nouns &c. such as Taddhita affixes, are even
valid in other tenses than those in which they have been specifically enjoined
when related to a verb. Thus iftTPTctft^ 'he was possessed, of a cow'; *ftm^
qfkm 'he will be possessed of a cow'. Here the Taddhita affix ipj^ is added
to the. noun *ft 'cow', with a present signification (V. 2. 94), the word iflro^
meaning 'who has cows' or 'in which there are cows.' This wordiTtatr, however,
is related and validly so, to the words ifrcfcf and Hfiror— one in the Past tense
and the other in the Future.
^f%: 11 ^*rPlwn:f%ftre#r'rr^nrrffnJlr5Tf^Rn^ H*ffir wf^ «n^, vtaJtKiuii*
2. When the (frequency or) repetition of an
action is indicated, the affix 'Lot' is added to the root, and
the verb is repeated. And the affixes 'hi' and c sva\ or
the affixes 't&' and 'dhvam' are the substitutes of ''Lot 9 .
Professor Bohtlingk translates this as follows: "When the repetition of
an action is expressed, the Imperative is used, and though the second person
singular is used, it may also stand for the second person plural"
The phrase tfnj* '*** of the last sdtra is understood here also. The fre-
quency or repetition of an action is called *PTPnrc: I This word qualifies the
sense of the original. In other words, "when the sense of frequency &c. isunder :
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 3-1 The affix lot, 55?
stood in connection with the action, this sense not being included in that of
the verb, as it may be in the case of a verb from frequentative roots."
This Imperative mood is employed in all Tenses and Persons in con-
nection with all moods. But this peculiar use of the Imperative is confined to
the 2nd. person singular and plural Farasmaipada (f* and *i); and 2nd. person
singular and plural Atmanepada («r and wt^> In other words, "the Imperative
second person (Parasmaipada and Atmanepada) is repeated, though the subject
of the main verb be different and the verb be in any tense." Thus yftft *fft#-
f$*rt enrrfif 'he cuts repeatedly', as if some one was always calling out to him
•cut thou, cut thou*, spftff $^hfr«a* rft q'fot: or ^ w^foi 'they cut often and
often'. So also vnftfif spft^f^* ** sjfrftr, *j*pj qsffa: or ^jr wfta 'thou or you
two or you all cut repeatedly' as if some one was calling out to you 'cut you,
cut you'.
So also q?flm qsftn *5* *gf spfhr, m* wnft, «FflR?irfK &c. 'you cut, I
cut, he has cut repeatedly', as if some one was calling out to us 'cut ye, cut ye*.
Similarly with Atmanepada , roots; as atftanft^tfrHPDftft, %$l iOftwrS, *5
Wftsnt &c. 'he or they study hard' as if some, one was calling out to them
'study thou, study thou'.
So also aftfttvnitaftf&r HJWftvf &c Similarly in every tense,
mood and person; as, wftanfctvttatiwtf , wwrffet, ****>*> l
The Intensive verbs in m^ also have this meaning of frequency, but
there the verb is not repeated, as the sense of frequency there is inherent in the
verb; in this case we must repeat the verb to express frequency. See VIII. 1. 4.
This use of the Imperative is not found in Literature (Bohtlingk), but
in Marathi.
($te, *i\€t, fw*£r> t> irwi^r:) 11
3. The affix 'Lotf is similarly added to the root
optionally, when several themes follow one after another.
In this case also the terminations of the second person singular and
plural Atmanepada and Parasmaipada are employed, namely, f$, c?, or 3 and
**H 1 Thus qropt? hshz *JT*jpTC w*^l4NMH2riNr*PT*Ri or vrra?tf :, or fftrefai 1
Similar examples can be formed as in the last aphorism; only the Im-
perative is not doubled as in the last case.
Similarly epftttfta, «u*<UJH*it«*, f%s^roft«t*3qnnNft#, or {rrrotar* or
ffcnft*# 'he or they two or they all learn, learning Prosody, learning Grammar,
learning Nirukta*.
This being an optional rule, we have these forms also; tttrarcQPDfttr,
Digitized by
Google
55* LUN LAN AND LIT. [BK. III. Cll. IV. § 4-6.
BFfrftfffii PRifiitfW, («<tai4H\ft5, frroftaT^, jftnftiifi i t4*qYtflii, uii4im]Hv£3,
MMlfti U|4IU)HI* ^f^TW^ II « II ^R[Tf^ II *r*T-filfa, WW-
4. In the first case (coniprised under s&tra
III. 4. 2), the same verb must be used in the subsequent
clause, as the verb which was put in the Imperative mood.
The examples have already been given under sfltra III. 4. 2. We
cannot say «rgftf| vjtfWl^wf td^TVi ; we must use a verb from the root 5^'to
cut 1 . Such as ^prrfil, &c. So also wfhlfnft** takes w^ only after it and not
a synonymous verb like <prfa &c
*ftot ii
5. In the second case (III. 4. 3) where many
actions are spoken of together, the verb that is made to
follow, should be such as has the sense common to all
those verbs.
Thus aftjtf ***?> OTgfa* . ^HC! wWhTVWTCfa 'he takes his meals,
eating rice, drinking saktu, and tasting fried corn'. Here the verb irarafcft
has a sense common to all the verbs in the Imperative mood. The object of
taking the second verb, having the senses common to all the antecedent verbs,
is to prevent the repetition of all the previous ones. In the secular vernacular,
the brevity, however, is often not approved.
^[^f% ^^i^pic: h % ii M^rfti ii *^fa, w^^rap-f^rj:,
(*rm*HFS) ii
6. In the Yedas, the Aorist, Imperfect and
Perfect are optionally employed in all tenses, in relation
to verbs.
The words vjrn^^r^vr and &TO3TOP( are understood here also. By
saying 'optionally', other tense-affixes may be similarly employed.
Thus Wr ttfcPPIfl (Rig- 1. 1. 50 f O God Agni 1 come hither with the
gods'. Here the Aorist •fm^ has the force of the^ Imperative. $ ^rw R*W
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 7-9] The affixes se &c. 559
Vf ***itsmt **: '1 make salutation &c. &c\ (Rig. X. 85. 17). Here mtf is Aorist
d&0 anc * ^ as the sense of the Present.
So also Hfrnra jtaH ' ^oft ai* ipriR: I Here 5^ is used instead of m\ I
So also wr imrc=*TO finril f Here f^ is used instead of m\ I
^fii : 11 fort? <*w fa* N fWfanf, firwf^t^g^^^f'^*^ ^** BPffa firai
7. The affix 'Let' is optionally employed in
the Vedas, wherever the Potential can be need.
Thus in the sense of 'command' &c, £» may be employed instead of
for.. This is called the Vedic Subjunctive and is peculiar to the Vedas only.
Thus *tRw^(Rig. II. 35. 1) 'may he make us beautiful', sifi*^ (Rig. t 25. 12)
'may he increase'. <nirft Rrcj^ (Rig, VII. 25. .1) 'may the thunder-bolt fall', wrftl
(Rig. V. 37. S) 'may he become'. So also hN^> #sr, *?*f , nfw^r N ,^fRr *nra*rfiri
jfti: 11 ?<rata$ wxf ^nrf n nnnrpmrt ep*Rr fine* fh; «w?nfr wfii 11
8. Where a contingent promise (a reciprocal
agreement), or apprehension is implied, the affix 'Let' is
employed after a root, in the Ohhandas Literature.
The word «*m*wr means 'reciprocal agreement, contracting to doV
Thus *ft * **rf«rf qgeq?^ *ifHfir *rro flf jcwrflT f If you do this for me, I will give
this to you'. Agreements like these are called yre*W t ; while guessing or in-
ferring the result from a cause is called Hncrf^ 'apprehension or fear'.
Thus a?ffcr wppftri 11 *wr s* it w *i*rntf 11 *^*wrr*a* *: m*vn&
**p& 11 #fewr^*r (or ftfcrappuit) *nr* topt 11 (Nir. L 11. Bohtlingk>:fSnrroci9*
*TC*rmi HltfwS II AH the above examples have the sense of Potential, but the
Subjunctive (Let) must be employed necessarily in these senses and not option-
ally, which anuvritti was understood in the last sfttra.
9. In the Vedas the following affixes come
Digitized by VjOOQIC
56o The affixes kai and isiiyai. [Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 10.
after roots with the force of the affix ( fcumuu', viz :—
'seV'sen', <&se', 'aseu', *kse\ 'kasen', 'adhyaf, < adhyam%
'kadhyai', 'kadhyain', 'Sadhyai', Sadhyain', 'tavai', 'taveii'
and <taven\
In the Vedig literature the Infinitive is formed by the above 15 affixes.
These, when stripped of their indicatory letters, will be found to consist of the
following five affixes :— (1) #=$, <8^and ^3 tl (2) *t3 = m#, ttfigand ^#j 11
(3)w^ = wt, mAw, w%, m$% w& and qU^ii (4)^11 (5) *i#=w^
and fl^l
The difference in the. affixes is made by four indicatory letters, viz.
% ^» 1 an d ^ i The forces of ^, ^ and * N have already been explained ; the
indicatory ^ makes the word take the ud&tta accent on the first syllable (VI. 1.
197). Thus § is acute (III. 1. 3); €^ has acute on the first syllable of the
word (VI. 1. 197); wf has accent of the affix (III. 1. 3); WPT throws the accent
on the first syllable of the word; the indicatory jj makes the numbers 11 and
12 ScUVadh&tuka, and the root takes the proper Vikarana of its class before
these affixes; while before i& 9 the acute falls both on tha first syllable and the
last syllable simultaneously (VI. 1. 200, VI. 2. 51).
Before going to give examples of these affixes, let us explain- what is
meant by yr*? 'the sense of the affix mfi 1 The -word ijirf is here equivalent to
HT4T or 'action'; for the pratyayas or affixes, to which no meaning has been as-
signed in grammar, convey the meaning of the bases to which jthey are added.
Thus no special meaning having been attached to *pj^, it will convey the ♦mean-
ing of the root to which it is added, #. e. it will denote the 'action' of the verb,
or Infinitive mood. (1) 3— **f W. t (2) i^^it TOT*n^ (Rig. V. 66. 3).
(3 and 4) «r# and hS*— Mtfc *m wail tftali WT (Rig. III. 36. 10). So also fK$ wi*
rfrw' (Rig- X. 57. 4)- With iral^ the word will be *M# • (5) **#— W *nn* I
(6) «5^— irirft? P*** ( R, "g- V - 59- 3)- It has not the ft^ accent (VI. I. 197)
which would have given us faif# I (7 and 8 ) w^> »*fo— «rt u ynK« f 1
(9) i igi£— moitf ngtid (Rig. VI. 60. 13). (10) ^^-fa^Uh (11 and 12)
1P$, *MH— fiwufr (R { g- IV- 2 7- 5); the accent however is on ft 1 «« *rv*i3
(Rig. VI. 60. 13). (13) f&— **ft»ww <rrot i (14) «**—« * «nl wn* to* *r%
*?* (Rig- X. 184. 3)- (15) nt^=ifn% (Rig, I. 46. 7)5 *** (Rig- 1- 85- 9); f** 11
^rfW, (g*nl, vtf*) 11
10. The words 'prayai', 'rohishyai' and 'avya-
thishyai' are irregular Yedic Infinitives.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. 5 11-14.] The affixes tavai &c. 56*
Thus (i)n$ W**r»f#: (Rig. I. 142. 6); *+*?+£ = *$=**!** I (2)wnft-
iRf: 11 %ft f%*S v$& s**% ft** fhmntft 11
11. The words 'djifie' and 'vikhye' are ano-
malous Vedic Infinitives.
Thus fri fr*w f^^ (Rig. 1. 50. 0=r«!h 1 fire* w fCTfa=fa**i^ i
vtfk) 11
12. The affixes 'ijamur and 'kamnr are added'
to roots in the Ohhandas to form Infinitives, when they
are governed by the verb '6ak' (to be able) .
Of the affix m*^ the real affix is M»i; the letter m causes Vfiddhi (VIF.
2. 115); and ^regulates the accent (VI; 1. 193). So also of *?3^, the letter a^
prevents guna and vriddhi substitution (I. 1.5).
Thus mP* <? f^rr fironf iung*^ 'the Gods were not able to divide Agni\
Rr>nr +103^=* fwnf =fir^^ I So also *rr*ft •mtpgf'fc instead of wrefrnr 1
t^ ^i^h««h) 11 ^ 11 ^4i(h ii f^> ^3*-*3$i , i
^fiim Ntw mt'^FfRr far* yrirqrrtfe^s^*wnft wr 1
13. The affixes 'tosun' and 'kasmi' are added
to roots in the Ohhandas, to* form. Infinitives, when the
word 'iSvara' is in composition.
Thusf^^f*P|ft?ir==^fW^^l |^ftf§fwi:M%fwftppil i^it Vm:=»
firnff*^ 1 ^
*cMm5 tt3%* 3fan?R: 11 $ u^ffH 11 ^Fi-an^ *tSM*w-
^I-^R:, (OT(ft) II
vfa: 11 f&*tarHW*rwrto&, frf^ $ncc# eptflr Rr*S «t *^ *«r w[ *it-
14. The affixes 'tavaf, 'ken', 'kenya* and
'tvan' are added to roots iu the Ohhandas, in the sense of
the 'Kjltya-affixes'.
The force of kritya affixes is to denote 'action* (nr*) and 'object' fanfcj).
Thus m-t^=m*****t; qft^im^form^; *nwt=*ir*«itft«i««P£ ftfifa*: (Rig. I.
Digitized
by Google
5te The affix kasun. [Bk III. Ch. IV. § 15-17.
146. 5) =3 fTCftranpi; *p$«n: « jpjf^ro^ ; *r*#n; (Rig. 1. 10. 2) = *ftai( 1
The affix fi^ was mentioned in sfltra III. 4. 9 also ; there it ha3 the
force of the Infinitive, and here that of the Passive Participle. For its accent,
see VI. 1.200; 2. 51.
spsroi <* it ^ 11 miGi 11 ^nsnrS, *r, (3>?n3, JF^fa) w
15. The word < avacllakslle , is an anomalous
passive participle in the Vedas.
ThusSfrjirrr *TT*tf (Rig. IV. 58. $)= Hmnw« »r;i *T*+*wt+sn=nr«itfi
The sfltra II. 4. 54 is not applied here.
*fa: 11 nrtt 5wMI *r sfararaf qp8*rr#*r *nft«ft qmi**n[5**fcr firoi wn«f
Ht&{ H*&tt *rcrfti 11
16. The affix 'tosun* comes in the Yedas after
the following verbs, when mere name of the action is in-
dicated, viz:— 'sthft' (to stand), 'iiL' (to go), 'kyif!' (to make),
*vad' (to speak), ^har* (to walk), 'hn' (to sacrifice), 'tarn'
(to grow tired) and 'jan* (to produce).
These are also Infinitives. The phrase qramtf is not to be read into
this sfttra. The word WTCNTCT qualifies the sense of the root (*nft Sf^ri $T) #
Thus, wr— w wi iqffu l tftffof =» HrerarS: sftfar \ tc£- V* *$*$&%*&*' \ f^—
(Gopatha Brahmana II. 2. 10) 1 5— w ft^tow^ftroff i 1 ^— w ntfralfOffta (Taitt.
Br. I/4. 4. 2) 1 jfj— nr froFrtft: H*wm (Taitt. S. II. 5. I. 5).
Tfit: 11 sfro^htofarawS^ q3qH4lu^fafqM3 *»!ff *q\Hw ft qrfcu
17. In the Yedas, the affix 'kasun* comes after
the verbs c srip' (to creep) and <trid\(to injure), in the
setise of Infinitives indicating name of action.
Thus fire*: » ^IiigcCTfi^/: (Yaj. I. 28.); *ro*: (Rig. VIII. 1.12); jn
•Iwm* HRTf: (Rig. VIII. 1. 12). These words are Indeclinable by L 1. 40.
«reNrwt: xrf^aftr: Jn^«3^ll^||iT^ II^TO-^lt:,
nftwptT:, HTOT, 1TWT H ,
Digitized by
Google
BK. III. CH. IV. § 18, 19.] THE AFFIX KTVA. 563
18. According to the opinion of the Eastern
Grammarians, the affix 'ktvfi/ comes after a verb, when
there are in combination with it, the words 'alam' and
'khalu', expressing the sense of prohibition.
The anuvfitti of the words 'in the Vedas &c does not extend further.
Thus arei irw 'do not make"; *&q <ftw 'do not drink'; arc* m$ *fa*f 'do not
weep, O girl I
Why do we say 'when there are *r»r and ^' ? Witness qrarrff: 'do
not make'. Why do we say 'when expressing prohibition' ? Observe sfflftH :
'decoration'.
The phrase 'in the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians' shows that it
is an optional rule. Therefore we have *reitt?3*f 'do not weep'. Or if rule
III. 1. 94 be applied, then the use of the word qrat is for the sake of merely -
showing respect (pflj&rtha); the rule could have stood without it
**\ (**") n
19. According to the opinion of the Northern
Grammarians, the affix 'ktv&' is added to the root 'meft'
(to exchange), when the sense is that of interchange,
(though the action denoted by the former word is not
prior to the action denoted by the latter word).
Thus swftTO *cr*3 'having offered an exchange, he asks' *t?-f-d+q[t*r
=m+*n+*^==w+Fc+5*+n (VI. i. 45 and7i)=m+flrac (Vil. 4.40).
This is an optional rule, as the phrase 'according~to the northern' indicates.
So we have in the alternative, *rrfi***r*TO»T$ 'having asked he exchanges';
and this is the more general use of ktvd\ namely, it comes after that Verb which
is concerned about a time anterior to that of the other; see rule 2 1. 'The present
sfltra is an exception to III. 4. 21.
The root H* N has been exhibited in the sfitra as hvf s , with the vowel
HT instead of 5. This indicates the existence of thc'following ParibhAshft:—
"A root, which, when destitute of anubandhas, ends in either 3,
%ft or $, must not be considered to have ceased to end in either 3, aft, or $, when
an anubandha has been attached to it/' By this Paribh&sha &<j must be regard-
ed as ending in $ , and as therefore w may be substituted for the vowel § (VI.
1. 45), even while ^ remains, l\ docs assume the form ^ and is consequently;
by the prohibition *t\t\ in sfttra 1. 1. 20, forbidden to be termed * I
55 Digitized by G00gk
564 The affix ktva. [Bk. III. Cir. IV. § 20, 21.
mm<3i«l ^ 11 ^ 11 Mqifa 11 tnr-sra*-^, % (**n) u
20, The affix 4 ktv&' is added to a root, to
denote what is situate on that (para) side or on this
(a vara) side of something.
The situation on the <TC 'the other* side and srer 'this* side, is called
<ITT*r*far 1 Thus wro Tft^fifl: ft*J*r 'the mountain is situate without having
reached the river i. e. on this side of the river, the river being on the other side.
Here the word q#*r is qualified by the word h$ which is the point from
which the situation is taken; and which in this case, is on the other side of the
mountain. Similarly srfnn***fl ^ft ?nft fwrr 'the river is situate on the
other side of the mountain'. Here the relation between the 'mountain' and
the 'river' is of i?*T and <rt I
In other words: — "The gerund of a root may be used to imply the
situation of a thing with reference to the situation of another spoken of as the
agent of the action denoted by that root and of the action donoted by another
verb or primitive word used along with the gerund; though the action referred
to in the gerund is not prior to the other action" — G. P.
*rf<feR 11 Mr** wrrjnr vtWh <a**fl«i ^^t^tJufflMH^^M w^ 11
21. When two actions have the same agent,
the affix 4 ktv&* comes after that verb which takes place
in a time anterior to that of the other (i. e. the Absolu-
tive in 'tva* refers to that action which precedes in time).
Thus 3*i**r snifil 'having eaten he goes'; <ftt*r mrfil 'having drunk, he
goes'.
The rule is not confined to the case of two verbs: thus, *=TT?*T, tftar,
3*«rr, mr snifir 'having bathed, drunk, eaten and given, he goes'.
Why do we say 'having the same agent' ? When the agents are
different, the gerund cannot be used, but the Locative Absolute construction
will have to be used to express the same sense. Thus H*K*fi» HTfTCt «n@[Rr
17*3: the 'Br&hmana having been fed, Devadatta goes'.
Why do we say 'which denotes prior action* ? For, if the actions are
' co-eval, the gerundial construction will not be employed. Thus ap*fii * l^rfH *C
*he goes and chatters'*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 22, 23.] The affixes ktva and uamul. . 565
Vart.— The phrase WW **r*nr wftfa, *Wt**f*fil 'he sleeps, with his
mouth open, and laughs with his mouth closed', is valid, though the affix *£f*r
is not added to the verb denoting prior action.
22. The affixes ^lamul' and 'ktv&' come after
a root, when re -iteration is to be expressed.
The phrases 'when the agent of both the verbs is the same 9 and Rafter
the verb whose action occurs first in time' are to be read into this sfltra to
complete the sense. The force of ■* is to introduce the affix qjjwrr into this
sQtra. The affixes ktvd and namul express 're-iteration* then only when the
verb is doubled, and not singly. See rule VIII. 1.4. Thus Htsf *W JHlRt
'having eaten repeatedly, he goes'; similarly w*j**r *?*sjr snrfa, TOf *t* snrfil
'having drunk repeatedly he goes'.
23. The affixes 'ktv&' aud 'ljamnr are not add-
ed to a root, when the word <yad' is used, in a simple
sentence, which does not depend upon another to com-
plete the sense.
The word atrotar means 'inter-dependence* or the inability of a word,
phrase or sentence, to indicate the intended sense in the absence of another
word, phrase, or sentence. In other words, when there are two actions one prior
and another subsequent, and they complete the sense of the sentence, without
standing in need of any other verb ; in such a case, ktvd and namul are not
used, when the word yad is in composition. This sfltra prohibits the affix ktvd
also, though the affix namul is in immediate context. Thus «r{4g^ft tW
trcfif, 3T?tpntf$ ff?r: rfW, having eaten, he cooks ; having read, he sleeps'.
But when there is inter-dependence or W^Nrr, we have -*$* H^m
*r*lfa, wfar S? iri: Wl 1 Professor Bohtlingk translates it thus : "In connec-
tion with *re N the above-mentioned Absolutives will not be applied, unless the
two verbs required one more as complement."
f£roT*rifri*WM«m 11 *8 11 usifti 11 fiwnnr, sto-ttifi-
Digitized by VjOOQIC
$66 The affix namul. [Bk. III. Cn. IV. § 24.26.
24. The affixes c ktv&' and ( namur come op-
tionally after that verb which denotes the prior action,
when both verbs have the same agent, provided that the
following words are in composition : — 'agre', 'prathama'
and 'pftrva\
This is an AprApta-vibh&shd. The word 're-iteration' is not under-
stood here. Thus bt^, iftpf, <jf qrT hW h^W *niftl 'having first eaten he goes'.
By using the word 'optionally' it is indicated, that the regular Tenses,
such as the Present &c, may be employed also. Thus m£ ^y N w fRf: inifir 4 he
eats first and then goes'.
Q —The affixes of Lat (Present tense) &c. would have been applied
by the rule of tttoct (HI. 1. 94) ; why then use the word 'optionally' ?
Ans.— The very use of the word 'optionally' in this sfltra indicates the
existence of this Paribhdshd : — "The rule III. 1. 94 has no concern with the
affixes ktvA and nimul, when both these affixes are enjoined at one and the
same time by a single rule."
Therefore, we cannot apply III. i. 94 and use the affixes Lat &c, when
're-iteration' is meant That is the exclusive province of *w*r and CTJ^ I
Why is not here the Upapada compounding by rule II. 2. 20 ? For an
answer to this, see the commentary on II. 2. 20. Had only cjj^been enjoined
bythissfttra, and not a^T also, then we could have formed the *<n? OTTO »
for such is the force of the word ^r in that sfttra.
<jfti : 11 *tf °g«T<tf f? 5fir wtfr: *5T3*r *ror*?lr H*fir wift* nnpitf k
25. The affix 'khamun' is added to the verb
'kji' (to make), when a word in the accusative case is in
construction with it, if the sense intended implies 'abuse*.
Of the affix ^5^. the efficient portion is *r*£ ; the indicatory ^ intro*
duces the augment 5^ (VI. 3. 67). Thus *ftr «M<*mi i H)Ri c he reviles him as
thief, i. e. he calls out in abuse 'thou art a thief, thou art a robber, &c/
The person is not really made a thief, but making him a thief is to express
one's indignation.
mi^fo *gsui ^ 11 tr^Tfrr 11 ^rar^fa, *gw, fas?:) 11
26. (When the actions, signified by the verbs
Tqri* and another, have the same agent), the affix
( i>amur is added to the verb 'kri* (which is concerned
Digitized by V^OOQlC
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 27] The affix namoL. J567
about a time anterior to that of the other), provided that
a word signifying 'sweet/ is in composition.
The words within brackets are to be read into the sfltra by anuvritti
from III. 4. 21. Thus *srrjyre* or vrrcfofl?,*^ 'he eats, having made his food
sweet or seasoned'.
In the sOtra, the word WJ^ is used ending with a ij. It is an anom-
alous form, and indicates that a ^ must be added to the upapadas in these cases
the object served by this form being that rule IV. 1. 44, by which feminine of
words like **r* ending in 3 is formed by long #, does not apply here. Thus
€*tftn $** f *Prprj5 ^sf^ = ^frr wrj 2^ l Here though w^is feminine,
the attribute is still *?n^ and not *?rg)f!
It might be said 'why not use the previous affix ^3^? That will solve *
all difficulties ; and will give us the augment 5^' 1 To this, however, there is a
fatal objection. The augment g^ will, no doubt, come in the last example, but
it will not come when the word to be formed is an Indeclinable (VI. 3. 67), such
as, when the sense is of the affix par and all c/ivi-ending words are Indeclin-
ables (I. 4. 61). Therefore, the affix ^15^ will not remove the difficulty in the
following case;w*nBf Wfl[f 3>W 3^ =» WJfW ^^j* 'he eats, having first
sweetened what was not sweet before'.
By applying rule III. 1. 94, we have the affix ^*r in the alternative.
Thus **r* fiw ^8j^r l All these affixes form abstract nouns (mw) as they have
the sense of the affix ^yr (III. 4. 16). In connection with <d$5T n , the Instru-
mental case can not, however, be used, /. e. we cannot use the Passive cons-
truction ; c, g. **i $3*nf *wr£ 5T* f ***fr will be wrong.
^m : u ^wnnf^rr5^ %fit m%«{ writ «rcrfa ftnrR^n^irftHwRr 11
27- When the words 'anyath&' (otherwise),
'evam' (so), 'katham' (how) and 'ittham* (thus) are com-
pounded with the verb, then 'namur conies after 'k^i* (to
jiiake), if it be such that its omission would be unobjec-
tionable.
When is the non-employment of frsj valid ? When the same sentence
will remain correct by omitting $, 1. e. when without employing it, the same
idea will be expressed. Thus wqq i fr r i , S#sRjr, «TO^]R: or mfatfi $3Ft£ f he
eats otherwise, he eats so, how does he eat, or he eats thus'. In fact, the sentence
MrW^tf 3^ is equivalent to arorar $5^ I
Why do we say 'if the non-employment would be valid' ? Witness
' \ ' ' P
Digitized by VjOOQIC
568 The affix namul. [Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 28-30.
WTOT f>W ffrft H«;^ 'he <?ats, having turned his head aside'. Here qrq could
not be spared.
28. The affix ( namur is added to the root 'kri'
(to make), the words 'yatha' and 'tath&' being compoun-
ded with it, when an angry reply is made : (if the omis-
sion of 'k^in' is unobjectionable).
When one questions or replies in indignation, displeasure or anger,
then is this construction valid. Thus <WT3iH: Hfaif, f% <W*fcr 'I will eat in that
way ; what is that to you' ? Similarly trarqrrc *l^*r, f% shtrt l
Why do we say 'when an angry reply is made* ? Observe trarfTCTWr
affair Wrr t* *5*cfa 'in what way I will eat, that thou wilt see'.
Why do we say 'when the omission of $*j would be valid' ? Witness
WTfiWrtf fijff Ht5$ f% wrf*r 'what is that to you, in what way turning my
head I will eat' ?
srif* ffSjfaft: ^T^ll^ll v^tf* n *fW% jfcr-f*^ : ,
29. When the object is compounded with it,
the verb 'dri&' (to see), or 'vid 1 (to know), takes the affix
'nam til', to denote the total number of such objects.
Thus wnntf *TOfH 'he woos every girl that he sees £ e. all the girls
seen'. 5OTTCJW *t*Plfif 'he feeds as many Br&hmanas as he knows, £0. all'.
Why do we say 'when denoting the total number of such objects' ?
Observe m*wj l^Jir Htarafa 'having seen the Br&hmana he feeds him'.
*?%; 11 *t**s[«* ^rrf fiFV&ritahn uw^ siwRft **fir ti
^ 30. The affix 4 namuP comes after the verb
<vid' (to get) and 'jiv', (to live), when the word 'y&vat*
is combined with them.
w - As *tn**i H* 'he eats all that he gets'. *r**iftwtf# 'he studies as
long as he lives, £ e. throughout his life'.
Digitized by
Google
Bic. III. Ch IV. § 31-33] The affix namul. 569
31. The affix ';iamur comes after the verb
'pur* £to fill), when the words 'charman' aud 'udar' are
compounded with it as object.
Thus 3*r# M*i? 4 he eats so as to fill his belly' ? 1%% ^isjifir c he spreads
so as to -Cover the skin'.
*4lPTTqi ^ ^Mgl<«l^d<4M l *M I^ II *^tRc U*$-JPU$,
^r-^to, % ^w, arrow r* f (*fWw, W3*f) 11
32. The affix 'liamur comes after the verb
'pur* (to fill), when the word so formed expresses a mea-
sure of rain-fall; and optionally the long '&' of this 'p&r'
is elided.
Thus *fir«qv£ ot «ffaT*tf ?j£t fa: 'it rained filling up small puddles (lit. the
impression made by the foot of the cow on the soil)', tfhrr^ or *ftan? *i\ fa:
'it rained filling up all furrows'.
Why have we used the word arc* 'of this pflr' in the sfitra ? The long
3? of <y: is to be elided, and not the long 3*, if there be any, of the upapada.
Thus ijJq^rRrergf or i*CTfr*tf ^it fa: • Here the long sr of »^is not shortened.
^ qR^Wfc 11 ^ lltr^rftll ^, *Flt3:, (wW%, ^3^ *$-
*(*i: 11 *pjjft v& ***# % wrT^^ffr?r^OTv<j stfg wfr$ nsqft *****
>nfa *$*md n**mf 11
33. The affix <;iamur comes after the causa-
tive of the root 'kufty* (to wet), when there is compound-
ed with it a noun denoting 'clothing*, in the accusative
case, as an upapada, if the whole word so formed exj>res£-
es a itieasuro of the rain-falL
The verb aflrfir is the causative root formed from the simple root arj£
'to wet^ Thus 3*URtf yit fa: or TOftf.? or TOTOfrr &c 'it rained so as to wet
the clothes'.
Digitized by
Google
S7Q The affix namul. [Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 34-37.
34. The affix 'rumul' comes alter the verb
'kash' (to rub), when the words -'nimfila' and 'samftla'
are compounded with it in the accusative case.
. Thus f5PTj5re?re mqfh 'he scrapes down to the roots'; ^pgrTCEPf 3i<f! 'he
scrapes up to the roots'. In fact, the gerund of the root and the root itself
denote the sams thing; the whole sentence Ptagrartf^f^ being equal to fire?*
STqf?r. From this sfltra up to sfltra III. 4. 46, the subsequent verb governing
the previous word, must be derived from the same root from which the gerund
is derived; see sfltra III. 4. 46.
*r*ir*qN;*N fa*: 11 mii *tctOt 11 u*«-yi-*fll3, ft*:,
*fir: 11 *r*3?rf** *xAi xfiv^ni* fW^fflhds* sf^^ft Hlfa II
35. The affix ( namur comes after the verb
'pish' (to grind), when the words 'gushka' (dry)) 'chiirna'
(powder), and 'rfrksha' (dry), in the accusative case are
compounded with it.
Thus tr*qtf*f Rrcfc *» *ptf Pr^fe 'he grinds it dry'; *jdW frrflr 'he grinds
to powder'; 5TC^ farf* 'he grinds it dry'. Here also an appropriate verb from
the same root fq^ must be used to govern the gerund.
4JWfl 1**^0 «IM 4pl4>3tU{! II ^ II M^lPl II H*WI-<*I*d*
ff%: 11 ^gr bt^pi sfta *?*a^ j[wv *5*qq*s *rcro^ ^ *r* nw s
%*$xvft *mj»*t cg**r qwtft >i^Rf 11
36. The affix 'namul' comes after the verbs
'hail' (to kill), <kri' (to make) and 'grali' (to seize), when
the words 'sam(ila\ 'akjita' and 'jiva' in the accusative case
are respectively compounded with them.
Thus *r« o <rram ffal (VIII. 3. 32 and 54) 'he destroys so as to tear up
by the roots 1. e. he totally extirpates'; ar^nratnf ^ctfi f 'he does a thing which
was not done before'; ft sftaifrf *[3Tfa 'captures him so as to preserve his life,
1. e. captures him alive'. Here also appropriate verbs from the same roots are
used to govern the gerund
TOf f*: II ^3 II V^fk « ^*& ***:, (^3^r) «
^fa; II SKtursm* SywsfofafjJSl qnpft *r*fo II
37. The affix 'namuV comes after tjie verb
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 38, 39.] The affix namul. 571
'han', when a word in the Instrumental case is in compo-
sition with it.
Thus TrPSnrnf *ff ffal (VII. 3. 32 and 54>=frftpn 9fk ffal lie strikes the
Vedi with the hand'; *mm* ^ ffaf 'he strikes the ground with the foot*.
Reading this s&tra along with III. 4. 48, we find that f*{ here does not mean
'to kill', and the further difference between this aphorism and that is, that in
the case of this sOtra a cognate verb from the same root must be used, as the
gerund; not so in sAtra III. 4. 48; or this sfttra may be for the sake of form-
ing Invariable compounds with the upapadas, such as <TTf*ntf I
According to PAtanjali, this affix comes after fir under this aphorism,
even when f*j means 'to injure'; thus counteracting rule III. 4. 48, by antici-
pation, and in opposition to the general principle of interpretation enunciated
in rule I. 4. 2. Thus H%qrrtf ffor 'he kills with the sword'; trrroi *foi 'he kills
with arrows'.
Rule III. 4. 46 applies here also, and an appropriate verb from the
same root is employed to govern the gerund.
1^1 ft*: II ^c II ^T^l II ^1*, fa*:, (**%, *g*r)u
jfti: 11 s#*wfafa iron *to! Fi^MtuJ*^ swnflr wfU 11
38. The affix ^ainuP comes after the verb
'pish' (to grind), wheu a word in the Instrumental case
denoting liquid' is in composition.
Thus ***r farftr - *f*T forf* (VI. 3- 58.) 'he grinds with water'; dstW
f^lfgr c he grinds with oil*. Here also III. 4. 46 applies, and an appropriate verb
from the same root is employed to govern the gerund,
*^ *fihlft: II *< II XF^fir II f^, trfS-THft:, (***,
^5^ % ) ««
«jftr: 11 tararPiRr **d s<ntf *l*atf ^isjrftw wtft Rnnfr *wfir u
39 f The affix '£amur comes after the verbs
'varti* (causative of vfit) and 'grab.', when a word deno-
ting 'han^, in the Instrumental case, is in composition.
Thus *w*3, *wS or <rrf&*5 *tf *fir - ftfhr *iiirfff c hq revolves by the
hand'. So also, fi^fepnf^*r^Jjrfil 'he takes him by the hand': so qrrfisjijrf^,
CTmfl &c.
Here also rule III. 4. 46 applies and appropriate verbs from the same
roots must be employed to govern the gerund.
*3 gv u «o 11 xRpft ii *£, 3*:, (w£ $ *g*ij 11
jfa:iimrPif i r ^rctfwtf 3*^^551 iraifrwfir 11
5;
Digitized by
Google
572 The affix namul. [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 40-43.
40. The affix 'namul' comes after the verb
'push' ( to feed ), when a word in the Instrumental case,
having the sense of 'sva* is in composition.
The word ** means 'self, 'kinsmen* and 'property'. Thus *rftf gpurrfir
*e feeds himself ; wwftf, *ftfW, farfW, H&tM, ^ThW, ^ft^T &c. See 1. 1. 68.
Rule 46 applies here also.
srfw^sfa: 11 v\ 11 ^ft 11 srftTOf, *n*:, (*$$) 11
41. The affix 'namur comes after the verb
c baudh' ( to bind), when a word expressing location is in
construction with it.
Of course, rule III. 4. 46 applies here also, and the gerund must be gov-
erned by a verb from the same root bandh. Thus qpy«r ^ T ^wrrfii 'he binds to
the wheel'; aijt-uf ^nl% 4 he binds in a snare'; ^fir^vf ^Trfir 'he binds in the
fist'. «qtew\**W *vttRi => «*r^ *vrrft i
*vnmni « 11 tr^r 11 tototw, (to, urg^r) 11
^fit : 1 1 « srncr^ ft^T ^^5^1^55? ***** H*fa 1 1
42. The affix 'namul' comes after the verb
'bandh' ( to bind ) when the word so formed denotes an
appellative.
Thus flirNYM'^lTft 'he binds in the manner called krauncha-bandhan
or 'heron-knot'. HsJfaFl**! TOrrfir or *?: 'he binds or is bound in a 'peacock-
knot'. a?f rf^s^RW *y: 'bound in a knot called att&likd-bandhari.
All the above, krauncha-bandhan &c. are names of various sorts of
|bonds or knots'. The rule III. 4. 46. also applies here.
*nft:, ^rBr-^nft:, (nrg^r) 11
43. The affix 'namul 1 comes after the roots
'na6 f (to perish) and <vah' (to carry), when the words c jlva'
(life) and 'purusha' (person) expressing the agent of
these verbs, are respectively in construction with them.
Thus sfrrrrcf T^f^frft *nprfir 'perishes, so that his life perishes i.e.
dies away'; <{*<r?r? **fii 'the man carries, i. e. the man becoming a servant, carries
another on him =5^: $«*f *gj*T?r*fir 1
Why do we say 'when denoting an agent' ? Observe, *ftfa ir: 'des-
troyed by life'; ytfuft*: 'carried by a man'.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 44-46J The affix namul. • 573
*rg*0 11
44. The affix c ;iamuV comes after the roots
'sash' (to dry), and 'pftr 1 (to fill), when the word '(irdhva',
denoting an agent, is in composition with them.
Thus 3kt5tfW V**fo ^K- = «tf STOffa 'the tree is dried up while it is
still standing*. Compare ^ft^^fWOTWrfRrXT^F: 'or wither like the up-heaved
grass drying up* (Bhatti. Ill, 14); ^«5f <$fl 'is filled full to the brim'. Rule
III. 4. 46 applies here also.
(**f •% *gsr) h
^ftr 11 inw*t *$°qp& n*iw{ **$fic *rifcfr3^irc*nft n*Rr 11
45. The affix ^lamur comes after a root, when
an object or an agent, denoting similitude, is in composi-
tion with it.
The word 'agent' is read into the sfltra, by virtue of the word ■*
'also'. That with which any thing is compared is called 3TOPT or 'object of
comparison or similitude'. As «j*ft>TF*^ PrffS'J tra^ 'water was kept as ghee
would be kept'. ^sSfcreraFlftfta: 'was kept as gold'. The force is that of
fl \ thus ^PnrnPJ RfpP ^l^fiw (Mfw: 1 So also when the object of comparison
is as agent: thus, tt?Frnrt *&: 'be perished like a goat'. So also *£f3Pfn(J\
< wnu«^ &c.
^5^Tf^ H HT favq i uuftn : 11 \$ n i^rftl || ^-snf^f ,
*nrr-ferfe, sronfta: 11
<jfri: 11 f%*vTO*jsnftf?Wftr;rcHr 3rar?ra:> 533 TOrftruppnfrit *wfa it
46. The same verb should be employed after
the gerunds formed from the verbs 'leash' &c; as the verb
from which the gerund is derived.
From sQtra III. 4. 34 up to sQtra HI. 4.45, a verb from the same root
must be employed in the subsequent part, as anuprayoga, ^from which the
gerund in namul was formed. This rule has been illustrated in the examples
under the previous aphorisms.
The present is a restrictive or niyatna rule. This chapter deals with
affixes employed in denoting syntactical relation between two verbs (wc 3**??
smrar) I See III. 4. 1 : so a gerund in namul> would, of course, be followed by
some verb as anuprayoga\ the present s&tra declares that the other verb must
be from the same root as the gerund.
Digitized by
Google
574 The affix namuu [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 47*49-
W 4 f%: II f V TO^» •fWlvHhWjyhjlrti'WHl *"ff$ CT*^ HWRlIf «T*ffif II
47. The affix -liamul' comes after the root
'danS' (to bite) preceded by the preposition 'upa'; when a
word ending with the third case-affix is in composition
with it.
The Upapada samdsa is optional in this case (II. 2. 21). Thus nsrot-
«rf V*i 3^fT or ig^ftTO^ $^ff 'he eats after having relished the food with
radish'. Similarly arrv^fftf TF{ o f arnr*frutaf TF{ 'relished with ginger'.
The words *<-ra~ &c in the above examples are the 'objects' of the verb
OT^fT, and 'instruments' of the verb *jn i
By the rule of *rJ*WT (HI. I. 94) the affix *m (or its substitute ewQ
may be optionally used, wherever we may use the affix dg^l Thus *j?ra^t-
TO[* «5* I
*mt ispr*? wnft *r*fii 11
48. The affix 'namur comes after roots hav-
ing the sense of 'Inns' (to strike), when the object of this
gerund is the same as the object of the main verb, and
when the nonn with which it is compounded ends with
the third case-affix.
Thus yrfHremn *TT qffiraft 'he collects together cows, beating them with
a club*. The compounding is optional (II. 2. 21.) Thus we have also f^flr-
•rem^l Similarly with other verbs having the sense of fif*r; thus, ***m*^ or
f «*r firrn 1
Why do we say 'when the object of the gerund is the same as the
object of the main verb' ? When the objects are different, 111551 will not be
employed. Thus ^^ ***flNf W, *ftaf*Wt iff: tffliraf* 'having beaten the thief
with the club, the cowherd collects together the cows'.
iffrf-*i*-W$:, fatfhlFrt, WJW} II
w*ftin
* 49. The affix 'l.iamul' comes after the roots
'pt$' (to press), c rudh' (to obstruct), and <kpish' (to draw),
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Cu. IV. § 5052.] The affix namul. 575
when they are preceded by the p reposition 'upa', and
when they are compounded with nouns ending with the
7th case-affix or the 3rd case-affix.
The phrase '3rd case-affix* must be read into the sfltra by virtue of
the word •* I Thus qrsnrfK JfW 'he sleeps pressing on his sides'. The com-
pounding is optional (II. 2. 21); so we have in the alternative, qpfcft vufU^
or qrfrar gvfrci 1
So also sriftdwt ( or ** ^flr^or ert^ftrtwO m: wrrofir 'he stations
the cows so that they are all in the fold'. qptgTOi? (or qnnr^T^f^ or qrfcpfK-
*4«j) *flrn WJ^!Jffir I It is BhvAdi f^ here, and not Tud&di.
50. (The affix 'riamur comes after a root, when
a word in the Locative or Instrumental case is in compo-
pibiou with it), and when immediate contiguity is inten-
ded i. e. 'to fall together by the ears'.
The word snrrcrfar: means 'immediate contiguity'. Thus cfrenrrpt (or
*f^ Tit 1 or Si?qff»$) *^*?tf 'having closely caught each other by the hair,
they fight. 1 Similarly f*?n?pj*or ?^ v* \ or fehrf*^; so also *few^ 'taking
a stick' ; *ft^jTl* &c. See II. 2. 21.
tptt# * 11 ^ 11 ^tRt 11 vm$, % (^ftumt, *Hnrf;
51. The affix '^tamur comes after a root, when
a noun in the Instrumental or Locative case is in compo-
sition with it, and when measure of length is intended.
The word jpmiPJ means 'length or extension*. Thus OCTJfcsftmitf
(k*j$ ***$% or ffg^CTfT^rf*) *3f"**f fepfRt 'he cuts pieces of the length of
two fingers'. See II. 2. 2 1.
^f%: 11 qtfNrwt imprrcrot wuifi vnrt wfttfj^nw^F wfii 11
52. The affix ^lamul' is added to the root,
when a noun in the Ablative case is in composition, and
when 'haste* is intonded.
58
Digitized by
Google
57$ The affix namul. [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 53, 54.
The word <p£h*rr means 'haste, hurry'. Thus ^ic^tart (or j[rcqpu
9ttIPt) Wfa 'having risen from bed, he runs away*. That is to say, he runs
with such a haste that he does not perform even the necessary ablutions &c,
but as soon as he rises from the bed, he runs off. Similarly torto}^ qrar: fwfil
'he drinks milk from a hole in the vessel', he being in such a haste, that he does
not care to drink from the proper aperture. w^jrar^ fr rffP t ^fnifil'he eats
cakes hot from the frying pan', not waiting till they are placed on a dish.
Why do we say 'when meaning hurry* ? Observe, HnOTftttn* iraffil
•having risen from the seat, he goes'. Here 'haste* not being intended, the
affix *m (f^) is employed. See II. 2. 21.
^f*i : 11 fafonw rrc? <rftarat irarprnrt wShnj^ ***** »*fir 11
53. The affix 'namnr comes after a verb, when
a \vdrd in the Accusative case is in composition, and
when 'haste' is intended.
Thus iifemf^ (or *f«* arf^) ***** 'they fight, having hastily taken up
sticks'. That is, they arc in such a haste to fight, that they do not tarry to
take up the proper weapons, offensive and defensive, but engage in fight with
anything, that is at hand, such as sticks, stones &c. Similarly «ft«£qr$i^ or
TOT]f Jifi II W II ^?TBf II TOTf , 3W9, (f3^THf,«3^) II
jfti: 11 mm* wj^rfafa fWtaT^i *v& w^to jrapftwfii 11
54. The affix 'yamur comes after a root, when
a word in the Accusative case is in composition, signi-
fying the limbs of one's own body, when the limb is such
that its loss will not destroy life.
Thus ^lH *TO*fif 4 he narrates, throwing his eye-brows (glances) about
in all directions'. a*firf«nifn5JH *l*<Tfil 'he prattles, having closed the eyes'.
The wtfJF word is "a word denoting a thing which not being liquid
or gaseous, and being capable of being perceived by the senses, and not being
one produced by a change from the natural state, exists in a living being, or
though found elsewhere actually or at any particular time, had previously
been known as existing in only a living being, or is found to have actually,
(not figuratively) the same relation to the being it is in, as a similar thing has
to a living being."
The word wjqr means r non-vital organ', or a limb which even being
cut off, does not necessarily destroy life. Therefore, we cannot use the affix
Digitized by
Google
Bk. hi. Ch. IV. § 55, 56.] The affix namul. 577
— »- 1 ■ ■
HT^vf in the following, as head is not an wi* limb: — *ftfra fgx: «W*Rr 'he
narrates, having thrown the head on one side'. Compare VI. 2. 177.
fjcfhrrat, «3*i) 11
55. The affix ( ijamur comes after a root, wheii
a word in the Accusative case denoting a limb of one's
own body, which is completely afflicted by the action,
is in composition.
The word qrfc %Tfr*rP f means 'completely hurt or affected'. Thus sr:
*fH*or ^:Wgi^=«Fiwji::<frr*Ri: 'they fight so as to afflict their whole
bosom'. So also fjrcW or fjjt:ilfirc«i I
The difference between this and the last sfitra consists in this, that
this sdtra applies even to vital organs, such as 'breast', 'head' &c; while the
last aphorism applies 'non-vital organs' only.
fe filMfcNf^W^I en|U4^HI^W^H ift: II 1$ II ^njTf^ll
<ji%: 11 fttftar^i svtf finc*rfMt wp^t mgsr TOtft h*% eqtapirt and??-
5G. The affix ( ]jamur comes after the verba
'viS' tfo enter), 'pat' (to fall), 'pad* (to go) and 'skand' (to
leap), when a word in the Accusative case is in composi-
tion, and when the sense denoted is that of complete
pervasion and total absorption.
The word wnRr (or sqropfre) means the full and complete pervasion
of the substances with the actions (denoted by the verbs fafy &c). The word
a?l$7r means 'assiduous performance of any action, or absorption into it\ In
other words, 'frequency' of an action is mtcNt l The word «*tfir therefore refers
to the noun (in the accusative case) and imfer to the verb (such as vis &c).
These two words have the same significance here as the words fimr and tfterr
in sfltra VIII. 1. 4. and by the application of that rule, both the noun and the
verb require to be repeated. That rule, however, will not apply here, when there
is compounding by II. 2. 21. But when there is no compounding, (for rule IL' t
2. 21. makes composition only optional) then there is repetition of the noun
if wirRr 'all' is meant; and of the verb, if amta 'frequency or assiduous per-
formance' is meant. Thusiffr^stscpirat (or ^*hpp«?*XRrc& or tffnprtsrw?^-
m^i) 'having entered the house, he sits down', meaning either, 'having en*
Digitized by
Google
578 The affix namul. [Bk. III. Cii. IV. 5 $7.
tered tvety house in succession, he sits down', or 'having repeatedly entered
the house, he sits down'.
Similarly with the root T^, we may have three examples as in the last,
and so also with the roots q^and eff?9 1 Thus yff ryyqnnrr^ (or AtfinFPj!roram«3
or n f M^qin nyH i w re}); nti«j*wTre*r (or m ifr^^w or tffir^Rqro^Jiw'r);
*?frWT*f«n*S (or Hi it f fW^f or ffoipreK ^wysjH) I
Why do we say 'when the sense is that of all or frequency ? Observe,
iftppnifini* *w^ 'having entered the house, he eats'.
Q. — By stitra III. 4. 22, namul would have been valid, when dbhikshna
was meant; and dbhikshna and dsevd mean the same thing i. e t 'frequency'.
Why then ordain namul again, by the present stitra, in the sense of dsevd ? If
you say, "we repeat it, in order to prevent the coming of the affix iwr", that
is not so. For ffff would come by cthtch rule; (see III. 1. 94 and III. 4. 47).
A. — The repetition is for the sake of Upapada-samdsa with a word in
the accusative case. Under rule 22, there was no upapada, while in the present
case there is an upapada.
Professor Bohtlingk translates this sfltra thus: — "fair, q^, q^, and s^sv
in composition with an accusative, form the absolutive gerund in a^ (namul),
when one wishes to express that every object of that name is completely affec-
ted by the action, or that the action is constantly repeated in that object."
m*qfdqq\ : f*nri*ft WTO3 II **3 II v&fi*i II srofa-il^,
wrf3fcRr*srt ffrftafFtfs «fir*mfai^<ni$s C &3*1 *&*& *wfir 11
57. The affix 'ljainur comes after the verbs
'as' (to throw) and 'tj'ish* (to thirst), when it is intended
to express an intermission of the action denoted by the
root, provided that a word in the accusative case denot-
ing time, is in composition.
The word BhUhHiC means 'the interval between two actions'. Thus
OTfrrarcf or wgqwrePj iff: ^rrouRr 'he gives drink to the cows, after an interval
of two days, i. e every third day*. So also gtffrf or «xtf itf ijr: TOPlfff *having
kept the cows thirsty for two days, he makes them drink'. That is to say,
. 'having given them a drink today, he gives them another drink after an inter-
val of two days'; &c.
Why do we say 'after the verbs wr and ir^' ? Because the affix isripf
will not be applied after other roots, though the sense be that of interval of
time. Thus OTfyfT** h* 'having fasted for two days, he eats'.
Digitized by
Google
Uk. III. Ch. IV. § 58, 59.] The affixes ktva and namul. 579
Why do we say 'when denoting an intermission of action' ? Observe
WWlM^jr iro: ; here there is no intermission in the action of 'going'.
Why do we say 'denoting time' ? Observe <tJFPf nrc* TO Tnmfil 'allow-
ing an interval of four miles to pass, he gives drink to the cows i. e. he wa-
ters the cows at every four miles'. Here the interval is that of 'space' and not
of 'time', and hence the affix is vq^and not 133^ l
(fgrcfarrat, ^ijw) n
*f*r: 11 *rprcr«* fWtarar wtf wWWi* wfaSssj nwuft **fii 11
58. The affix ^amul' comes after the roots '&-
di&' and 'grah', when the word 'n&maii' (uame) in the Ac-
cusative, is in composition.
Thus m mfr i mmg 'he mentions it, telling his name', iron? miH^fo
'he calls me by taking my name (#. e. by my name)'.
69. The affixes 'ktvff and 'ljamul' come after
, the root 'kri' (to- make), when an Indeclinable word is
in composition with it, and the meaning is the com-
munication of anything in a disagreeable or undesired
way.
The word iwn fiffolRWPI means literally 'to denote the expression of
that which is not really intended' u e. a manner not suited to the proper
communication of that news, such as communicating a bad news in a loud
voice and good news in a low voice. The compounding being optional, the
affix ^m may be replaced by **<£ Thus we have three Iforms sfrfamr,
*ft^:«|tfri or Ht^mnt* Thus if one had communicated an agreeable news like the
birth of a son in a low voice, the other may retort "fir nfitf yRFT «fHfc *^rr, ifrfc
*pq or «ft4:OT?Tnrf"; and so, if one had communicated an unpleasant news as
mwaj MP*** irftfdft in a loud voice, the other may reply "ft? <rf<f y^^^tqi ,
*«4fc ww, or ?«4}:qmifrofr" 1 (See II. 2. 22 for compounding).
Why do we say 'communicating in an undesired manner*? Observe
vritagtWJ^T 3«retf nm: I Here only im is added. Why have we repeated
9fT in this sfttra, when in this chapter, by the rule ofjirrtrcv (III, 1. 94),
ktvd would have presented itself in the alternative ? The repetition is for the
sake oi samdsa or composition, by the application of II, 2. 22. The repetition
59
Digitized by
Google
S8o Ktva and namul. [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 60-61.
ofajj^is for the sake of the subsequent sfttras, into which the anuvritti of
ktvd and namul runs concurrently.
**&) n ' ' N
60. The affixes 'ktvS/ and 'namul' come after
the root 'kri', when the word 'tiryak* is in composition in
the sense of 'carrying to the end'.
The word wrapf means 'completing or finishing'. Thus RraN^qmr,
ftofa^OTT or firo^SRPt TO - *Ht** TO 'having completed, he went away'.
Why do we say 'when meaning completion' ? Observe ftreNr q[t?r mt
TO 'having placed the wood obliquely, he went away'. Here cj^ is not
employed. See II. 2. 22 for compounding. The word RnHn is the locative of
the word-form finS 1 ^, and not of the word firi^ 1 Other examples are: ^fifh^
(V. 3- 5); H**t*ni(I. 1. 12).
**rjf < i m<q3 w*$tx 11 t\ 11 nqift 11 **t$, to-jrh^,
61. The affixes 'ktva 1 and 'liamul' are added to
the roots 'kjT (to make) and 'bbCl' (to become), inrcomposi-
tion with a word denoting a member of one's own body;
when the affix 'tas' is joined thereto.
The word WFtf has already been defined in sfttra III. 4. $4* The
svAnga word in the present case must be such as should end in the affix ?i*r —
a taddhita affix technically called fiftr and *fa^(V. 3, 78 &c). Though here
there are two roots $ and H, and there are two affixes to be applied i. e. sfjf
and CPJv? n ; yet the rule of 'respective allocation' (I. 3. 10) does not apply here.
Both the affixes are applied to each of the roots. Thus yro fro TO or 51m:
vqm TO or wm: **n?TO I Similarly jew: ^JC filHfir or ***: *£*F fitsRl or jto:
hwt firarfif 1
Why do we say 'a word denoting a limb of one's own body' ? Ob-
serve crfr:-^*? TO I
Why do we say 'ending In the affix n^ ? Observe gtftajf* to, 3*ft-
JJTTOI
Why do we use the word 'the affix 1 ? If to is not an affix, but a verb,
the rule will not apply. Thus 3$irerftrs3*rff: 'throws in the mouth'. With
this ipsw: so formed! we cannot apply the rule. Thus *pro: wpn to I
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 62, 63] The affixes se &c. 581
*?*: 11 smmtonr* *r«* **n * tsw$ *p**t*Wt: wnsTj^ wait hw 11
62, The affixes ( ktv&' and '£amul' are added to
the roots c kjT and 'bhii', when a word ending in the affix
'nS,' (V. 2. 27) or in an affix having the force of 'dh&' (V. 3.
42), or having the sense of the affix 'chvi' (to make or to
become something what it had not been before, Y. 4. 50),
is in composition.
Two words, wn 'various* and Rr*TT 'without* are formed by the affix
srr (V. 2. 27); affixes having the force of *r are \*r, wpj, h\ and ^*r (V. 3. 42 to
46) which are added to numerals in the sense of 'part' or 'fold' &c. The
force otcAvi has already been explained.
Thus MsfPfr TPH *p*1 «m: =«Cfn *JW «m: Similarly *nrr *JW or « T H|cMc
nm I So also firar 9*W, f%*rr *JW or fw *W «ro: I So also mm or f%^r *gr— *rw or
Htf *m: I With words formed by m and cognate affixes, we have: — ftt?r or fcf
^nr— sf* *r— *mf— ^— ^r or *n* «nr: 1 But not so in f**^ f;*m> 5^ $w 1
Why do we use the word 'affix (****)' in the sfltra ? Without it, the
sfttra would have run thus: mmu «*&, and then any word, having the sense
of m, which has the force of 'except', Various' or the sense of *rr which means
'part or fold', when in composition with q| or *^, would have taken the affix
isjj^ and sur. But that is not so. Thus the words ftCT^ 'except' and jihk
•separately' have the sense of m and *r respectively; as ff*9^f4T, or j^ *jm 1
Why do we say 'when the upapada has the force of the affix chvil
Observe mm *jf*t «FTOTPr «m: I
The word wf in «rratf qualifies only the term vrr, and not m, for there
are no other affix having the sense of m, which is a single affix taught in V*
2.27; while, as shown above, there are other affixes having the force ofvni
The composition optionally takes place by II. 2. 22.
63, The affixes 'ktv& f and igtainur are added to
the root 'hliti', when the word 'tftshijum' (silently) is in
composition. *
Thus «*Qflfv£r, *£Qif >g*r, or q*gfftWT 'having become silent'. The
repetition of ^in this sfttra, shows that the anuvntti of *| does not run into
it and altogether ceases*
Digitized by
Google
582 The affix tumun. [Bk.* III. Ch. IV. § 64, 65.
*fT-ng$r) 11
64. The affixes ( ktv&' and 4 namul' come after
the root ( bh(V, when the word 'anvak', in the sense of be-
ing favourably disposed, is in composition.
The word »ir*<ri)*4 means 'agreeable, friendly or favourably disposed,
or doing according to the wish of another'. Thus w*tj^*— %T^^*f or h??^
WPTrcft 'he is favourably disposed'.
Why do we say 'when meaning friendly' ? Observe tn^^r Irofii
'he remains behind'.
65. The affix 'tumuu' is added to every verb,
when another verb having the sense of '6ak 9 (to be able),
'dhrish* (to make bold), 'jM* (to know), 'glai' (to be
wearied), 'ghat' (to strive), 'rabh' (to begin), 'labh' (to
get), 'kram' (to set about), c sah' (to bear), 'ark' (to be pleased
or to condescend), and 'as* (to be), is in construction.
The use of the Infinitive in ijg^ formed by this rule, differs from that
given in sfltra HI. 3. 10. In that sfttra the Infinitive had the force of 'purpose'
and here there is no such force. Moreover in this case there is an upapada in
construction, though that upapada is a verb; in rule III. 3. io, there was
no such upapada.
Thus jraftRr ^5H 'I am able to eat'. Similarly iTPrrftl— nanrffi— **5
— tfTTH^— w$l— Wtf— *rf*l— ntfa— trRn— >nrfir— or firo* 4mR 'he knows',
he is wearied, he strives, he begins, he gets, he proceeds, he bears, he con-
descends or he is, to eat'.
This sfttra presents a knotty point. Bhattoji Dikshita says ttthvtd-
ufalfo Ofiurii l*WKW i m 1. e. the sfltra gives roots from tf^ to irf and roots
having the same sense as w^'to be*. But this is hardly consistent with the
almost overwhelming evidence of usage. According to Dikshita's interpre-
tation, <rrcn 'to be able' cannot be used with the Infinitive, but it irarrft Rrtf-
fan* (S. 4), MKfo*Wl*w m*mfc>S^ (M. 3) a i* e instances frdm a standard
author; similarly fajjto know' cannot be used with the Infinitive; but«r<* Sf
6**^*^ **r (R. VI. 30) is as good an instance. We must, therefore, suppose
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 66-68.] The kritya affixes. 583
that the sAtra indicates the existence of an interpretation connecting an? with
all the preceding roots; otherwise we shall have to condemn as wrong, all such
constructions as those given above. Taking this view I have interpreted the
siitra, connecting wf with all the above roots. — Apte's Composition.
6G. The affix 'tumuii' comes after a verb
having in composition with it, 'alam' and its synonyms,
•when these words express 'to be capable of something'.
The word q*?f?r means 'capability, ability, fulness'. Thus fofisnmft
vTCff? iftftft** *: vrf : (Hitopadesa) 'who is able to avoid that which is stamped
on his forehead'. ^RH5t (w^ffe nw (Kum&ra II. 56) 'his penance is able to
burn the worlds'. aifw $ far*: *|5 fftcTTtf (Vikramorvasi 2) 'I have power to
know every thing'. tit^R inftoj: *yj5T: <f|*f 'skilful in eating'.
Another interpretation of the sQtra is "the affix tumun is added to a
verb, when it has in composition with it, the word q$rftr or swj or a synonym
of alam having the sense olpary&pti. Thus q^bft Ht^M, Wf ift**, H^ff* TR^lRr r
Why do we say 'having the sense of capability? Observe trep^ror 1
Why do we say 'having the meaning of stot^' ? Observe <raT$t3? N : t£r
The word jyx in the preceding sfttra has not the sense of mwj in that aphorism.
With the sense of ^ the present sfttra will apply: as wtftf *&\ 1
«^ft 1W II $3 II U^lfa II w^fr, UW II
*r*r: 11 v^efiniir- wnir *k$3: sot* wfar 11
67. The affixes called 'krit' are used in the
sense of an agent.
The words formed by krit affixes have the sense of agency; when no
other special sense has been assigned to them by any rule, then this rule will
apply, and fix the force of the affix. This rule will not, therefore, apply to krit
affixes like n*^ (III. 2. 5 and 6) to which a special sense has been assigned, but
affixes like *m and z* &c, (III. 1. 133)- Thus qrror: means a 'doer' ; vr*& 'an
agent'; ?r?^: 'one who causes happiness'; i^t 'who seizes'; q^r: 'who cooks'.
^^MH^ifti> IM «l f^ \i | ^^I T MaiWW f< M imil $* II H»ll
^fSr: 11 »ranv* : nnr *** fi: *t firow& 11
68, The words 'bhavya'/geya', 'pravachanlya',
60
Digitized by
Google
584 The la affixes. [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 69.
'upasth&ntya', 'janya*, 'ftpl&vya' and 'dp&tya' may option-
ally be used to denote the agent.
These words are formed by kritya affixes and therefore by rule III. 4.
70, they would generally denote an action in the abstract, and the object,
but not the agent. The present sfltra, however, makes them denote optionally
the agent also. In the alternative they denote the action-name and the object
also. Thus *|«C may mean 'existed', 'existence', or 'one who exists'; it* means
'a singer', c a song', or 'singing'; q?^fta means 'one who explains', 'what
ought to be explained', or 'an explanation'; OTWfta means 'who waits upon',
'what ought to be waited upon or served', or 'waiting upon or attendance';
5im = *tt*9s& or g| g3PT 5*T means 'one who gives birth /. e. a father', 'birth' or
'what is born'; sffgTO =»HTg*fi.reft or arreffCOT^r means 'who immerses', one 'im-
mersing', or 'what ought to be immersed'; a?ramr =3 a?r<Pl?WV or wm*P^T means
'what falls upon', 'falling upon', or 'what ought to fall upon*. Thus vf^t TTOPrar.'
mn\ 'the boy is the singer of the S&ma'; or *farfir H iU M<»f STPTrft 'the boy ought
to sing the S&ma'; u*^FfWt*£*: WMHIW 'the "guru Is the expounder of the
lesson'; JT?*pfcft ^*GJT WT«rn*: 'the lesson ought to be explained by the teacher';
*<TWPfWfr*tf*reft I^TJ 'the pupil is the servant of the teacher'; CT^fPft*: ftF*d
*pr: 'the teacher ought to be served by the pupil'.
69. . The tense-affixes called 'la* are used in de-
noting the object and the agent ; and after intransitive
verbs, they denote the action as well as the agent.
The term ^ means the ten affixes known as *rs, Rff», &c; ^ is the
common element of them all; and these affixes, when stripped of all indicatory
letters, leave behind only the letter i^ which is thus common name for them all.
The m: in the stitra, is the nominative plural of ^ 1 By the word ^ in the sfttra,
we draw in the word sjflf or 'agent' from the last sQtra into this. The force of
these tense-affixes, when placed after transitive verbs is to denote the object
and the agent ; and when placed after intransitive verbs, is to denote either
'action' (*m) or it may denote the 'agent*.
The verb Itself denotes the action ; to be or to do, generally ; or to be
or to do, in a particular manner. In the active voice the affix marks the
agent ; in the passive voice of a transitive verb, it marks the object ; but
in the passive form of an intransitive verb, the action itself. Thus. ip*d qnflr
*#**%* 'the Village is gone toby Devadatta'; here * of *n*rt denotes the object
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 70.] . The kritya and kta affixes. 585
and is in passive construction. *r*S[ft wi ***?r: 'Devadatta goes to the village';
here the affix fir of *r*S[fif denotes the agent, and the sentence is ill active con-
struction. The verb ir^ being a transitive verb, can take both the active and
passive constructions or, to use the Sanskrit technical phraseology, the tense-
affixes, after transitive verbs, denote the agent and the object They can never
denote *rr* or action after transitive verbs, that is, transitive verbs cannot be
used impersonally. Let us now give examples of Intransitive verbs; irrcttf
t*f#r 'it is seated by Devadatta'; the verb armrf here denotes merely h nr
or 'action'. In other words, we may call this an impersonal construction. am$
5*$rf: 'Devadatta sits'; here the verb aircfl denotes the agent or is in the
active voice.
Professor Bohtlingk translates the sfttra thus:— "A finite verb expresses
the agent as well as the object ; but the Intransitive verbs denote, in addi-
tion to that, the Impersonal idea of the action". The word HT«r means action
considered in the abstract.
ci*h^ci taMWIUiri: II 30 II M^lfvf It ?nft:, jpf } Wm-16-
Wtf: II
^Rr: 11 *rttf* ^ffrofaft: ftwmiw : *raremifa rww wfar 11
70. The affixes called 'kritya' and the affix
'kta* and those that have the sense of 'khaV, have only
these last two senses, namely, an action and an object,
(bhava and karma).
The word *nft: 'of those two' refers to arc* 'an Impersonal act', and
*tf, 'object'. The word ^ 'only' is used in the sfltra to exclude the word
'agent' from it. Thus qrfc*: *it *mir 'the mat must be made by you'; >?taror:
Mlfft H^RfT 'the rice must be eaten by you'. Here the affix *ror has the force of
denoting the object; we may, therefore, call it the Potential Passive Participle
affix, So also tffficrcrei *mr 'thou must eat'; ^fSntcii hwt 'thou must lie down'.
Here the sense of the affix qc*r being that of the action "itself, which being Im-
personal, U in the singular number, as it is one only, and neither male nor fe-
male, there is, from the nature of the case, a singular affix, and the neuter gen-
der is employed.
Similarly the affix *v? denotes both the object and the action; ^tr: vtfit
*r*3T 'the mat is made by you'; *j*f afYfft w**H 'the rice is eaten by you'. Here
* is used with the force of denoting the object and may be called the past pas-
sive participle.
Similarly a may be used in denoting the mere act; wft v wir 'you sat';
JfM WIT 'you lay down*. >
Similarly the affixes having the sense of ^ (III. 3. 126) denote both
Digitized by
Google
586 The affix kta. [Bk. III. Cn. IV. § 71, 72.
the object and the Impersonal act. In the following examples the affixes denote
the object; Jtott: *&t WW 'this mat is made, by little at a time, by you 1 ; «!*?*:
'what is made with ease'; $«SRf: 'what is made with difficulty'. In the following
examples the affixes denote the act; £q?(?cptf wit and ^1IW WIT l -
After transitive verbs, the ktitya> the kta and the khal&rtha affixes only
denote the object, but never denote the HRT or 4 an Impersonal action*.
irift, *, (^Ti,^ftr) ii
71. The affix 'kta' also denotes the agent, when
it expresses a beginning of ah action.
The word MTf^FT^fcj means 'the beginning of an action' or when the
action signified by the roots, is intended to be expressed merely as having
been simply begun. The force of *t in the sAtra is to indicate that even when
the beginning of an action is intended to be expressed, the ^ may be used to
denote the act and the object as well. Thus nfRi: vrz faf^f: here the agent is
denoted, iqrci: mil Stt^T; here the object is denoted. M<h*\\ $**^T; here
jnere action is denoted. Similarly spp? *ftfif fafw (agent); ipr*? Mt*«ft **T*T
(object); q^fc fr^sr (act),
^gMV|H^»nL^M^^ l M^fi^H^^Mfd^4<| II 3* II tr-
n HTTOTfaft: II
72. The affix 'kta* is employed in denoting
the agent as well as the act and the object, after verbs
. implying motion, after intransitive roots, and after the
verbs 'Slish' (to embrace), '&¥ (to lie down), 'stM,' (to stand),
'fts 1 (to sit), <vas' (to dwell), 'jan' (to produce), 'riih' (to
mount) and 'jri' (to grow old).
The phrase 'the act and the object* has been added into the sfttra by
virtue of the word «*, Thus imt $WT$t *n»P£ 'Devadatta is gone to the village'
(agent); farc^T WV *r<r. 'the village was gone to by Devadatta (object); irtr $*-
lH*1 'Devadatta went' (act). The past participle forms from Intransitive verbs,
denote*the agent and the act only ; or in other words, they are used imperson-
ally and in the Active voice, but never in the Passive voice or denoting the
'object! Jhu<j rifpft *f*T^/you were wearied' (agent), t^th* *mrr (object); arrfant
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 73, 74.] The affixes kta &c. 587
«^i^ 'you sat 1 (agent), *rf%* ***r (object); sqfrct *»£*^*WT^ 'you embraced
the teacher' (agent), *rfwet *T*: *mif 'the guru was embraced by you' (object),
^fire^ H^ir 'you embraced' (act); OTUfrfft *JS^ H*P^ 'you lay near the
guru' (agent), OT<rfc«t *£*: *mir (object), OTtffaw Wlf (act); OT%tft *T**
H*pr (agent), wfwft *J*: H**r (object), sqftim HTOT (act) ; 3<nf«*t ^^ WT
(agent), OTrfcft *T*: HWT (object), OTffeff *?**rr (act); *T*jfirat 1** N H*PJ (agent),
wfirot *T*: H?lfir (object), W^rf H**r(act); H^JTmT *TH!J*tft WSJfWTC* (agent),
nH^imr HrcyTOT huxtR^rt (object), it^pfrrf wsj**t (act); a?rc£t ^*f *m\\ (agent),
•Treat ^ffY H^tir (object), tn^f h*w (act); BFpfhxfr vimi fcr^i: (agent), ar^ta?
yreftt**^! (object), M**ft(ff $*?Hh (act). The verbs fip*^ &c, become tran-
sitive with certain prepositions or upasatgas, hence they have been men-
tioned here. Otherwise there was no necessity of mentioning them separate-
ly; as they, being intransitive verbs, when without prepositions, would be in.
eluded in the word akarmaka of the sfttra.
^fnptuft qxyft 11 3^ 11 Tf^rfa 11 ^nj-W*, *>h^ ii
*P«t: 11 wj'ihu v^t *a*rcr% *rc«B f*nn?*W 11
73. The words 'd&6a' and 'goghna' are irregu-
larly formed, and the affix in these denotes the idea of the
Dative or Recipient.
The word w comes from the root f nj 'to give* by adding ths affix
H* under rule HI. 1. 134. This being a *$&* word would have , other-
wise denoted the agent by rule III. 4. 67 of this chapter. The present sfttra
makes it denote the recipient or have the force of the dative case. Thus toj
means 'to whom something is given i. e. a servant*. Similarly goghna does
not mean 'the killer of cow* but 'he on whose coming the cow is killed in order
to give him, that is to say, a guest'. It is this irregularly-formed word goghna
which is made applicable to the priests, gu%ts, sons-in-law &c, and not the re-
gularly-formed word goghna which means 'a killer of cow' or a 'Chand^l*. Thus
*n * n^um<ii3 11 3» 11 m^rPi 11 *ft^3nr^T:, om^r?* 11
74. The words 'bhlma' &c, are irregularly
formed and denote ablation.
These words are formed by Un&di affixes. Thus vft+^^^T (Un. I.
145, 148); *fr+yir+»T5ff=>ft«r (Un. I. 148) &c. By jthe next sfltra, Unddi words
do not denote ordinarily the recepient and the ablation.
The present stitra makes them do so in the case of tfhnff words. The
following i$ a list of ChimAdi words :— *ft*c:, *«*:, H^PHir: (Un. III. 82), **:, ■**:,
6l
Digitized by
Google
588 The affix kta. [Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 75, 76
(Un. 1. 7), *$?: (Un. IV. 45). TO (Un. IV. 217), «fe*rc:, tfi*^.-, WPC:, *3*:, y*: f
or 3*: (Un. II. 61), f^ (Un. II. 62) *!f*ffti: I
*umm«q*mnqq : iis^u imfo 11 crr^ri, ^nnr,w^T: 11
75. The words formed by 'TJn&df affixes denote
other ideas than these two, i. e., recepient and ablation.
The Unddi affixes being a subdivision of krit affixes, would have, by
rule III. 4. 67, denoted the agent. By the present sfltra they are made to de-
note the object, the instrument and the location also. The word fiintf has
been used in the stitra in order to include the word sampraddna also. For, had
the sfitra been »*urftan?«r:, only the Apdddna kdraka would have been excluded,
as being the nearest; but not so the Sampraddna kdraka. Thus ffftmt^«frRr.
(Un. IV. 120) 'agriculture i e. what is ploughed' (object); ireniffH— 9?$ (Un.
I. 69) f a thread i. e. what is drawn out'; ^iPrfif m$ (Un. IV. 145) 'a way i. e.
what is established'; ^fW =■ *& (Un. IV. 145) 'skin' (in which they live).
*fa: II W^faMWUMjifaflf IT: 5FT Wf*f: ^f>J3iTl&H*fa ^*Hlt4MIHlH ^
*ro$^ 1
76. The affix 'kta' which is ordained after
roots denoting fixedness (to cling to a place), motion and
taking, gives the sense of location as well..
The verbs denoting sftwr or 'persisting in a place' are Intransitive verbs.
The word pratyavasdna means 'eating' also; the force of ^ in the sfltra is that
the affix kta expresses other relations also. Thus after verbs denoting 'fixed-
ness' or dhrauvydrtha it denotes the agent, the act and the location; after verbs
denoting 'motion' it gives the sense of agent, object, act and location; after
verbs denoting 'taking or eating , it has the sense of object, act and location.
Thus MrftnfY ***^i: 'Devadatta sat'; *tT%9 ffa 'sitting by him (act); H * ( mm RmH,
•this was their seat' (location); unft ?W*fr HtH* 'Devadatta went to the village*
(active); wft * ??3ft W- (passive); mtf S***r (abstract); n^qrt m*r^ 'this is their
place of going* (location); *^ afftpft ?*r*pr (passive); «*? afhpf frj*i: (active);
***^r 5^r (abstract); %yto\ g^ (location); wuhsft HTSTCJf: l«ftwni*:i The
W in ym and tftur has the force of hh% (IV. 2. 85). yfrfrqmfw or <fcft*Prfcr I
*PP¥ II 33 II xn^Tf^f II *TTO II
Digitized by
Google
Bk. hi. Or. IV. $ 77, 78.] Substitutes of la. 589
77. In the place of 'la' will be substituted the
affix which we shall auuounce hereafter.
This stitra consists of one word m&t meaning 'of m'. It is an adhikdra
sfltra. The word ere* is the genitive singular of m, the *r in m being for the
sake of pronunciation. The m means the ten affixes: w N present, fa* perfect,
m^' first future, $jf second future, wit* s imperative £^ Vedic subjunctive, sr^
imperfect, Rtof potential and benedictive, sj^ aorist, 5jr conditional. Six of
these tenses have indicatory ff , and four have indicatory r l
Professor Bohtlingk translates this sfltra thus: — In the following sfltras,
the word ere* should be supplied to complete the sense, *\ e. the phrase 'in the
place of all those endings which are known as the Personal endings of va-
rious tenses and moods, and are known in their totality as m' I
jrtn 11 wnr Rnrn* ■ntOT wl^i n
78. The following are the substitutes of 'la': —
<tip\ c tas\ <jhi'; 'sip', •time 1 , 'tha; <mip\ 'vas', 'mas'; <ta' f
'atAm* 'jha'; thftsV atham', < dhvam , ; 'it', <vahi\ mahto.
These are the well-known Conjugational-affixes, called also Personal
endings, and are ordained generally after all the ten tenses. But as a matter of
fact, they undergo various additions and alterations in the different tenses.
Some of these changes have already been mentioned before; see sfltra II 4. 85,
III. 1. 33, &c. Others will be mentioned hereafter. It is only in the present
tense or &\ that the affixes as above given, may be applied to the root, in
some cases, without any alteration.
The * in fii^, fi=r^ and fa^ is for the sake of accent (III.i. 4); the ^ in f*
for distinguishing it in the sfltra %itsn (III. 4. 106); and the r in irffr for form-
ing the Praty&hAra Rr^ which is the general name of the above 18 conjuga-
tional or personal affixes. Stripped off their indicatory letters, the following
table shows the conjugational affixes as added under various tenses ;—
Present Tense.— m\ 1
Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing, Dual. Plural.
S it *i
# m* it
1st. pers. fir w^ n%
2nd. n fir *% V
3rd. „ fil *W£ Hfal
Digitized by
Google
590
The tense affixes. [Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 78.
Imperfect or First Preterite
.— m^i
Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
Sing. Dual. Plural, Sing.
Dual.
Plural.
ISt.
pers.
•m, * n
f
«ft
ndr
2nd.
**
H ti* if
tii^
wir^
ivr
3rd.
11
H nnj h^
*
•rnirn
•wi
Potential or Optative.— ftfrfori
ISt.
pers.
mn m* wnr
**
W*
ttt
2nd.
it
?n^ ^rn 1 ^ nm
*m^
inror^
#m
3rd.
i>
*n« % wir^ n^
In
tuning
**l
Imperative.—^; I
ISt
pers.
wPr •iw wi
*
wri
•iroft
2nd.
ii
Ff nn n
«r
wii^
i^
3rd.
99
% fOH •*?$
«n^
wnrn
•fir^
Perfect or Second Preterite.-
-fa*j
1st
pers.
•i * n
S
*t
ft
2nd.
n
v •mq; h
€
•fid
tf
3rd,
i»
h iig* *^
*
W*
tf
First Future or Definite Future.— eft i
ISt
pers.
firflff nrc*^( mw^
mi
m**t
fmut
2nd.
ii
«iffir to^ firej
w#
fllflltf
nn%
3rd.
11
w w^ mc^
nr
WCf
*ic^
Second Future or Indefinite Future.— g^i
ISt
pers.
wiftr fwrw^ wni«
**
Wft
WW*
2nd.
n
wftr w^f^ fm
w#
***
w«
3rd,
11
fWftl flfl^ Wfal
w»
«w
w#
Aorist or Third Preterite.—
■w
ISt.
pers.
*pj w *t
r«
«fTf
tiff
2nd.
if
*R^ w% w
f«ii^
9wr^
n*
3rd.
n
*&% wnj. *R,
ei
ffnn^
fTO
Precative or Benedictive.— •ntftf^rj
ISt
pers.
wrcru wrc* *ot
tfv
*IWfc
2nd.
11
iw n ^rwj inn
*fl»*i«i N
tff*TC*|l^
^flur^
3rd.
11
*m iifwj i n^^
«fte
tffanwnt
*JK^
Conditional.—^ i
ISt
pers.
W^ WTf ctpc
«*
wntf
wnrff
2nd.
11
f ^H w^ wi
CT«n^[
f€tir^
WfH
3rd.
ii
wi wjpj w^
«*w
Htai'l
*WI.
Digitized by VaOO
Bk. HI. Ch. IV. 5 79-82.] Substitution in the Perfect. 591
f^r m i wfrnqMi ^«*iii ^r^rf^r 11 few, m i wfrnqi -
79. The substitute 'e' replaces the last vowel,"
with the consonant that follows it, of the 'Atmanepada'
substitutes of that 'la* which has an indicatory '#•
The m or the tense-affixes that have an indicatory s are six: — 5T? N ,
f%f? # w?, 9ff. 5?fir N » w^ I In these tenses the final portion called ft of the Atma-
nepada affixes is changed into 5 I Thus 3 becomes ft, WTT^ becomes «n9, IT
becomes (f &c, as shown in the foregoing table.
The affixes hr^ ( and gfTPT^ are also Atmanepada affixes. Why are
not their finals changed into q as in TWf:, *sr?pr: ? Because the word ifftirf-
g$nrt in the sfttra refers by context to the Atmanepada affixes included in
the PratyAhAra Rrf; t
*m«% n w ii n^rf* n to:, % (mm; torn) ii
80. The word *se' is the substitute of 'th&s' in
those tenses that have an indicatory l %\
In the six tenses already mentioned in the last sAtra, the Atmane-
pada tnt( is replaced by $, as we have already shown in the preceding table*
Thus <r*«, #fW, «PW#, <T?*t I
^Ri: 11 faiifr i ^lwiJ^qiihwKyg^ |rt*r*i*sft wi: ii
81. The words 'e6' and 'irech' are the substi-
tutes of 'ta' and 'jha' respectively in the Perfect tense.
The j{ of nj[ indicates that it replaces the whole of the affix «
(I. 1. 55). The ^ of f^j[ is for the sake of accent (VI. ti. 165). Thus M, **ffr
9 W 1 See the foregoing table of tenses for the Atmanepada.
*f%: 11 fsrcrfccrnrt w»toi<UraiPrt *rarcre* fimfrrt i05n**lr TOtjrr **F* 11
82. In the room of the Parasmaipada affixes,
the following are substituted in the Perfect tense :
Sing. nal (*) thai (?r) pal (•?)
Dual atus (wj:) athus («r^:) va (*)
Plural us (*:) a (ti) ma (*r)
62
Digitized by
Google
59? The Affixes of the Imperative* [Bk. III. Ch. IV. $ 83-85.
The indicatory ^ in oi5l and tf^is for the sake of accent (VI. 1. 193).
The indicatory ig^ is for the sake of causing vRj (VII. 2. 25). Thus <roi%
^rg:, <f g:, $ftw or «nra£i, faiv:, far, ttt^ or «rr% qftre ?far f
Ti?flr >nrfar 11
83. The above nine affixes of the Perfect
tense are optionally added in the Present tense also
after the verb c vid\
Thus:—
Singular. $* or $Rt #«t or *f?*r #$ or #fa
Dual fir^: or Rr*r: Rr^: or f%w: . fa* or fir*:
Plural. firj: or fiKffoi far or faw firw or fatr:
5T8T: M^MIJUfVi ^TT%T H W: IKWI M^ l Pl II J|w:, iT^TmW,
«rrf^?T:, SIT*:, S *:, ( MW^H l, W^«W , *?TC:, *t) II
^ftr: 11 a*: <ns* 5f?: *rita^N*Frprrft>rcpri ^ qm^i wnrr H*far,
84. Instead of the first five tense-affixes, in
the- Present tense coming after the verb 'brd' (to speak),
there may optionally be the affixes of the Perfect; *&ha* be-
ing, at the same time, the substitute in the room of c br£i\
Thus w* 'he says'; BTTfq/. 'they two say'; ws : 'they say'; mvq 'thou
sayst'; wjir: 'you two say'; the rest like u^as shown below : —
Singular. »fff or ipjtft wnrorirftfir frftfir
Dual. an*$: or ip; «*r*U: or ip: ip:
Plural. **J*: or q:*faf mr *F :
The word Mrffrf: 'first' is used in the sfttra to indicate that the substi-
tution should not take place in the case of the last four affixes. The repetition
of the word fpr: in the stitra indicates the original expression which is to be re-
placed ; and shows that this change occurs in the Parasmaipada affixes only. .
^t€t WWR II c^ II *4£fPl H ^taf:, ^WWfl II
85. The personal endings of the Imperative
are as those of the Imperfect.
This is an a?RtfjJ sfltra; as in the 5*1* there are the affixes irr^, **t *r, *
and *, 50. alsa in the 5ft? 1 Thus <rornfc q*wj, <r«ro, iro, <wr 1
Digitized by
Google
Bk. ill. Ch* IV. §86-88.] Substitution ill the -Imperative. * -593
Q —If sit? is like wr;, why have we not the augment w N , W? v or the
substitution of *pr s for % (see III. 4. 1 1 1) in the case of *ft? K also ?
A. — The *rof sfttra HI. 4. 83 is understood in this sfltra also, so that
the analogy between sits; and ^j* is a limited analogy and does not make all
the rules which arc applicable to 5?*;, equally applicable to sft^ also.
^5: II c$ II m^lPl II If:, *:, (tfta) II
^Rr. n *H«i?!UI1iTh«uw ***rctftft H*fif 11
86. Iti the Imperative, hi' is substituted for «i\
Thus fie becomes g, nfNi becomes h*$, as have already been given in
the above table.
Vdrt.— Prohibition must be stated in the case of affixes ff and fir of
mt* l In the case of these two affixes, the f is not changed into *, either because
they have been so taught in the sfttras, or because the *r of sfttra III. 4. 83 is
understood here also and makes this rule an optional rule of limited scope as
in the last sfitra (nrafept finWtf). Thus trot, q*F$ I
In fact* this sdtra is confined to ft and fff only* and does not apply to
fit to which the next sfitra applies.
%$qfa^ II C9 II %:, ffc, srfaf, *, (tfta) «
^f*r. 11 sftartjjur SR? fnupfttjtfY *nrRr it
87. In the Imperative, { hi' is substituted for
4 si', and this has not the indicatory { p' of 'sip', i.e., it is
acutely accented.
' The substitute being like the original expression (I. 1. 56), (|. 'substitu-
ted for fijir, would have been a U% affix, but for this sfttra, which clearly states
in its latter portion that this f$ is not to be regarded as having an indicatory <n
Thus 5j*ftff , yftff, HUff, WSjfa ; and as this affix is Bfft*, rule I. 2. 4
makes it firfl^also, and thereby no guna takes place.
*T ***fa II cc || U^Tft II *T, «^ft, (%#frfq?T, tfte) II
88. In the Vedas, the substitute 'hi' is option-
ally treated as nob having an indicatory f p\
The result is that in the Cbhandas the second person singular of tft? N
has two forms as sftorrff or sihsftft; g^fa or %$tfe, ftr being substituted for f| in
the Vcdas, by rule (VI. 4. 103) as in the following verse:
Digitized by
Google
594 Substitution in the Imperative. [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 89-93.
^f$* 11 « 11 tr^rft 11 %:, fir:, (tfta) n
Jfii: H mIii^ i w ^f^rtachr *nftr 11
89. In the Imperative, 'ni' is substituted for
the affix 'mi*.
This supersedes the rule relating to the change of f into *, and the
rule of lopa \ see the table; thus T^rPr, wft 1
«rr^?r: 11 <o 11 Tr^rf^r 11 wrw, ipr:, (itet) 11
90. Iu the Imperative '^m' is substituted for
what would have substituted otherwise 'e' by III. 4. 79.
This relates to the Atmanepada affix £• In the Atmanepada, vm is
substituted for 15 in the Imperative; see the table; VW{, T^rnj, <n*5*irn l
**r*fr vrtt II <^ II U* II *-*prjt, *-spft, (mtzt, ^f:)u
wr: 11
91. For such an 'e' coming after < s , > is substi-
tuted V, and for that coming after V, is substituted 'am',
in the Imperative.
This supersedes the np£ substitution of the last sfltra. Thus, for # we
have **, and for *% we have i*n; see t * ie table; thus <rav, <nfupj I
wnntniw f^iWRinT^ni an*,**TO,fow,% («te:)n
<|fitt 11 5iftr N Q**fof*T 4^i*i^siriii€iii4t wfii ^r ^J^hji^h: faur fir 11
92. In the Imperative '&V is the augment of
the affixes of the first person and the termination is as
if it had an indicatory *p\
This is clear. Thus in the Parasmaipada, we have nrPr, •mr, HPT I
Thus JKCqiftj, 3tt?!V f «FWTC WTC^, *PCfT*f, ^CJPlfc I
^er $ 11 <§ 11 xn^Tf^r 11 ^n, $, (#*:, «vw) u
^Rr: 11 5ttnpra*wf*w wrw iN*mt*ft wfii 11
93. The 'ai' is substituted for c e' forming part
of the affixes of the first person of the Imperative.
This relates to the Atmanepada affix. Thus *rc^, qrcro}, «TOP?$ l
But the c resulting from sandhills not to be changed into $ 1 Thus <rqnr
+{* , i a "rar*tt, T*nT+W^=»<niri*^l Here, no doubt, the if belongs to the Im-
perative by VI. 1. 85, being the substitute of a? of if and *. But this is not to
be changed into $ on {he maxim that this ^ is the result of a fffrjp rule, for
Digitized by
Google
Bk. hi. Ch. IV. § 94-97-] Elision of v. 59$
the rule of sandhi (VI. I. 87), is a wftc^p rule, while the present sfltra is an
irerc^: rule; because °f th e following Paribh&shft, wRrj y fft^pT^ft ^ 'that
which is Bahiranga is regarded as not having taken effect, when an Antaranga
rule is to be applied.
TO* J*tSt II <8 II ^T^rf* II *hf: f 3TC-3n$T II
^Rr: 11 w^lfjwrfwnft wr: v*Hta 11
94. The augments c at* and *&& are added to the
personal endings of the Vedic Subjunctive.
The augments m^ and mi? are not to be added at once, but by turns.
Thus ^+Rr^+if^+^==^wn; wft^r,irf^W[} similarly <nr+%fi^+fii »qnrRr;
*wrwfil I See III. 1. 34 for the addition of Rr^ in the above.
«mr tj 11 «u» inpfk u «mr: f % (*hf:) u
95. In the Subjunctive, 'af is the substitute of
'&' in the first and second person dual of the Atmanepada.
Thus ii*t£*, iFW^d, **$*, **** l Why is not the augment unchanged
into $ ? Because otherwise the rule enjoining nf^ would be superfluous.
3stt*r* 11 <$ u vyfa M *Tf fa, ««*ni, 0§te:) II
•im $ i^iftwr s^ftmr <** $ *wfit 11
% 96. In the Subjunctive, 'ai' is optionally the
substitute of 'e\ in other places than those mentioned in.
the last sfttra.
Thus tr$, i d, &c, in the following examples:— cranrrft tf#, H&*
ffgrrthfti *npir y* ft *Hf IfHF^i nf *wn*#* v *w^**n?ft i And In the alterna-
tive we have simply ^, as ** or «* fl *nft W^ *WW?H^l
Why do we say 'in other places than those governed by the last sAtra' ?
Observe Thrift, w»ir$d l
^!J. (ft*) »
^ftt: 11 $**Wfa'n*!nTO TO^nfarow sartt *Mn*i*pjtf: TO^mjnfHH^fii it
97. In the Parasmaipada affixes the T is op-
tionally elided in the Subjunctive,
The *r of the last sfltra is understood here also. Thus iftftqti (Rig. II.
35. i> fflftqtl (Rig. I. 25. 12). irf^^i In the alternative, it is not elided as
■rorfii firyURig. VII. 25. 1). s*Rr IFRtRi I The f of $r N , *ft and irff of the
Atmanepada are not .elided.
63
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Sp6 Substitution of 'tas 1 , 'thas', &c [Bk, III. Ch. IV. $ 98-101.
^ <WH3I II *c II Tpqfa || ^:, ^JTCPTO, ($Zi, *T, ^Tta:)ll
^ftr: 11 WMEF*foiT 3*ih5*m« *i*hw m sfHt *raftr 11
98. The 'a 1 of the first person is optionally
elided in the Subjunctive.
As q^OT or ifftmr:, *TC*PT or qrc?pr: I The first person is used in the
sfttra to indicate that the ir is not elided in any other person.
fSfcif flra: MQI> tfO II f^lFT , ftffll:, (WW, WW, ^:, JSta:)n
jfti : 11 finJt «f<Mitii ir Mqtn** Prrt ti*K«i sflft wfir 11
99. There is always elision of the 's' of the
first person of the affixes that come in the room of that
'la 1 which has an indicatory c ii\
The tense-affixes having indicatory s? are four, namely, snr, f«rqr, qt^
and 5JI^ 1 In their case, the elision of ^is not optional as was the case in the
last sfttra, but compulsory. See the table already given. In other words, in the
Imperfect, Potential, Aorist and Conditional, the ^ is elided in the 1st person.
Thus wranr, W^TFT I The word fhnr 'always' is used in order to stop the
anuvritti of the word 'optionally'.
X** II \00 II TT^r II I*:, *, (f*W:,f*W,tfhf:, *&**)»
wf%: 11 frspFfW^forf f*TFC**l firrt 5ft"fY wfir n
100. And there is elision of the <i* of that Pa-
rasmaipada affix which is the substitute of a 'la' having
an indicatory '£'.
Thus, for fir we have n, for fir we have % &c, as in the above table.
The f of Atmanepada is, however, not elided, because the anuvritti of Paras-
maipada is understood here from stitra III. 4. 97. Thus m^, UTOftw, but
nmnrff and tfrofff 1
wsawfiini ^mfcr?*: 11 \o\ 11 ir^rft 11 icH-TO-^-f^wni,
?rr-tf-*-sn*:, (f^r:) 11
jf*i: 11 f*M4nw*4P)f*rt **& wirotaf wrnpi •irtjji *wPn 11
101. The affixes 'tarn', 'tarn', 'ta' and 'Am* are
the substitutes of the four affixes 'tas', 'thas', c tha' and
c mip* respectively, of any 'la* which has an indicatory *A\
This we have shown in the above table. Thus uroir*. HTTO* N i
fw»*4fl^dji \o^ 11 tnjrft w ^nf : i ^3* B
^faf: II fuelling I tfl^*i*int *rcfi| 11
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. $ 102-104.] The augment yasu*. ^7
■ ■ ' ■ ■ ■ * ■ » iii^
102. The personal endings of the Potential
and the Benedictive take the augment 'styut*.
The r N of tfty^ is indicatory and shows that this augment is to be pla-
ced before the affixes (I. 1. 46). The w is for the sake of pronunciation; this
rule applies to the Atmanepada affixes. In the Potential, the ^ of this aug-
ment is elided by VII. 2. 79, and the ^ also, before a personal-ending begin*
ning with a consonant, is dropped according to VI. 1. 66. In this way, we
have Tta, <rfr*ntPfr and by III. 4. 105, <r3t^t In the Benedictive, the augment
retains its full form, only so far as it is «iot geverned by VI. 1. 66. Thus
^Ri: il trn^ftmw fa#t 9IU *1<l4t H*ftr tftg^rwuf : a^tftnft *HrfU, fibril
103. When the Parasmaipada affixes of the
Potential follow, then 'y&sutf acutely accented, is their
augment, and the termination is regarded as having an
indicatory 'tit.
This debars titgtj the 9? N of in*? K is indicatory; the real augment is
UTO All augments being anud&tta, the present sfltra therefore especially uses
the word uditta to show that this augment is an exception to the general rule.
Though for?; has an indicatory r N , and therefore by the rule 1. 1. 56, its substi-
tutes would also be regarded as having an indicatory sf, the repetition of the
word fe*l in this sfttra shows the existence of the paribh&sh& "that the if be-
longing to m does not influence its substitutes;" in other words, the substitutes
of oif, %rc^, tjy and 5jr N are not to be regarded as having an indicatory r s (*mw-
HM^ fr^H l t MH t «r *?*fa ). In the Potential, the ^ of *rg? s is elided by VII.
2. 79. So we get the forms f[q?<t, wifm^, and by applying III. 4. 108 and VI,
1. 96, «pr ^ 1 For the Benedictive fer N the following sAtra applies.
finjTBrf^ 11 \on 11 ^Tf^ 11 faw, snfirfa, (fwv:, *ngs.
^RfTBT:) II
104. The augment 'y&sutf comes after that
•lift* also which denotes benediction, and it is acutely-
accented, and the substitutes of this 'lift' are as if they
had an indicatory *k'.
The Rk^ of this sfltra refers to the personal affixes of the Benedictive
mood and not to the augment *T9? N i for that would have been unnecessary,
Digitized by VjOOQIC
598 The augment sut. [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 105-107.
being already fr*jby the last rule, fr^ and fafW are equal in prohibiting guna
and vriddhi, but fi^ is distinguished from far*r N inasmuch as fr^ causes the
guna of *ipr (VII. 3. 85), and also there is distinction between them with regard
to the change of semi-vowel to vowel (VI. 1. 15 and 16). Thus %*m\, {c^reir^,
fnrnj:, and tmrafel, stnnrfarr^ and wr*f^: I In the Potential, qrarrq; (no
samprasarana); in the Benedictive, 3«*Rl, (vocalisation). So also *tnrwi;
in the Potential.
, WI **J' V* M M^ l Pl II W**> ?R, (%¥:) II
105. The affix 'ran' is the substitute of 'jha' in
the 'Lift' (Potential and Benedictive).
The # in other places, is replaced generally by H^f (VII. I. 3), but in
flWF, It is replaced by t% I Thus *m% *nk% lrftt*T N 1
TEtiW II \9% II Vtfk II TSt 9 «m, (%¥:) II
<jfitt 11 fSfwtxjre^r f^xftfini^^ft H^rfif 11
106. Short 'a 1 is the substitute of <f of the At-
manepada first person singular in the Potential and
Benedictive.
Thus <Hfcr, w&t, ^p*fta, i*fh* 1
Q,— In the sfltra, the word w^ is used, and the final ^belongs to the
fqrafeff, therefore by rule I. 3. 4, this « is not indicatory; why is it made so ?
A-— This fi is not any portion or member of the^substitute «m; it is
added to «r merely for the sake of euphony,
The prefers to the wrf<T{ aflBx of the first person singular ; and not
to the augment f^ on the strength of the maxim wN^qgq ? <TR*fa** I A
combination of letters capable of • expressing a meaning denotes, whenever it
is employed in grammar, that combination of letters in so far as it possesses
that meaning, but it does not denote the same combination of letters void
of a meaning,
3^ f?mfc 11 \o$ 11 xr^Tfir u 3*, f?Mffc, (fmwi) h
ifftf: II 6fl£ IRpqrcl W*IOWK4T: ^ennft wfti II
107. The augment 'suf is added to the affixes
'ta* and *tha' when part of the affixes of the Potential
and Benedictive,
The letters n and q* are the objects to which the augment 9? s is to be
added; provided that the *i and tr are the initial of the affixes employed in for •
Tbe aqgment tfl^* N is applied to fsn^ as such; In other words, Rw N is
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 108-110.] Substitution of 'jhi\ 599
there the MPT'ft ; but in the case of «* s , ffer is not the arrwfti but n and ti are
the unnft 1 The scope of tft*p s and *p N being thus different, one does not debar
the other.
In the sfttra, the word Rf is used; the f of Ri is merely for the sake of
pronunciation. Thus ftflr, frftareift nrftK% %H*C> flH*mi\\ In the Po-
tential, the ^ is elided by VII. 2. 79.
£^9JI \9G || T^rfa II $:, 5*, (f^RF:) II
108. In the Potential and Benedictive, ( jus'
is the substitute of c j hi', the ending of the first person
plural Pax % asmaipada.
This debars wi (VII. 1, 3); thus <rtr^:, nit*: I
jRr: 11 Rra to* wcw tf«r*«$* **Nt*m?* ^nttft >r*fii ii
109. (In those tenses which are marked with
au indicatory 'ft') 'jus' is the substitute of 'jhi*, when it
comes after an Aorist in 'sich', or the Imperfect of a re-
duplicated verb, or the root 'vicT (to know).
This applies to tenses having ^ othfer than that of fif^F, namely, the
to andnri
fa^ is omployed in forming the first Aorist. The reduplicated verbs,
as well as the verb fir^, form their third person plural in aj*c , in the tenses other
than Rfvr s , and those that take ftr^l The word fr*: of sQtra III. 4. 99, is under-
stood here also; and therefore this rule is restricted to the Imperfect (mO of
the reduplicated verb. Thus of ftr% we have wfr:, Hfr4:l Similarly, after the
Imperfect of the reduplicated verbs, we have Kfwr^:, Hffff^:, ftTOPTCl In the
case of Rrf^ we have arfirj: I
stto: 11 \\o 11 t^rfa n m*x> (*fcfa, fk*} 11
110. (When 'sich' is elided), ( jus' is the snbsti-
tnte of 'jhi', after an Aorist stem which ends in long '&'.
The ftr^ is elided by rule (II, 4. 77). Thus •*£:, wn, tf^v: \ In other
words, in those cases, where fa^ is elided by rules II. 4. yj t 78 and 79,
only sj^ is the substitute of fifr where the verbs end in long ht i In other
words, this sfttra restricts the scope of the last sfttra, by which after every Rr^,
lje was to replace f|r 1
The Present sfltra says that after verbs in which W^ has been elided ,
64
Digitized by
Google
6oo y Sarvadiiatuka Affixes. [Bk. III. Cii. IV. § 111-113.
fj*^ does not replace fjjr in the case of any other verb than that which ends in
long arc ; it is thus a niyapta rule.
*Thus, by rule II. 4. 77, fir^ is elided after the verb H, but as ^ does not
end in long bw, its 3rd person plural Aorist will not be in sra 1 Thus, *T*[^!
Here, by the last rule, and on the maxim that 'though %^ is elided, yet its
force remains (I. 1. 62)', sr^ would have replaced fir ; but the present stitra
prohibits that. But where the fa^ is not elided, there, of course, sjfj does
come, Thus WFnj:, 3fl?T§: I
*TC: *H*eC*WI« II \\\ II M^ l fa II W5:> HIMieHHW, ($:,
*ra, smr:) 11
111. In the opinion of S&kat&yana only, 'jus* is
* the substitute of 4 jhf, in the Imperfect of the roots
which end in a long '&\
Thus ajir:, bto i I In the alternative, we have aroPT and vftiH 1
Why is *rs? repeated here, when the context would have supplied this
word; for the sfttra applies to fr«( tenses, of which qg? N being dealt with in the
last, would leave ot n only to be dealt with by this aphorism, for no other fr?t
tense (like fsr^ or ««Q can end in w? The repetition shows that the rule
applies to those affixes which come after 5W N as ot s , and not to those which
come after another tense which is treated like 5Cg\ I Thus wte s is treated like
OT\, but for the purposes of this rule, $t\ would not be so treated. Thus the
ffl of 5*Y? N will not be changed into sra by III. 4. 109. Thus ftv*^, ^HT^, fk&n I
The word 5* has been used in the sQtra, for the sake of the subsequent sfttra.
f^RT ll^RHTRfTfa ttfff*:, *, (^fg:, ^l»dl^H4H, ^g)ll
*jfa: u ffr«r: src** othIujw ffajwfapY *w% *rraranrc i wr^nek* Mil 11
112. In the opinion of S&kat&yana only, 'jus' is
the substitute of c jhi', in the Imj)erfect after the verb
'dvish'(tohate).
Thus arffe*: 1 But according to others, hFct^I
ftatfita^niw^vrar 11 ^ ntro i»f?re- , fij7T, ^Tster^pwu
*f%r: 11 fas*: Qjero mum: arfwrMratar **fai 11
113. All personal endings (III. 4. 78) and all
affixes with an indicatory '6', are called 's&rvadh&tuka\
Of course, this applies to the affixes which have been already treated
before, namely, the affixes which relate to verbal roots and not to fif^fr affixes
&c. Thus, wr<cfa, ftftfti, <r wr:, W&r- 1 fa^ and wtfrfS^ are exceptions.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 114-116.] Ardhadhatuka affixes. 601
3*1^113* %m n \\)i 11 M^ifn 11 m i j*i T 4* *r, *fa* 11
jfli: 11 far: ftRiv *^ftre*if^: r«w *ft t^e^s^r firffcn awtw^ttat
114. Tho remainder, i. e. the affixes other than
'tin', and those with aujuidicatory '6' subjoined to a verbal
root, are called Ardhadhatuka'.
Thus the affixes 7, nn t trttpi &c are MhNr^li affixes as in the follow-
ing words— «r3r<lT, vTfatnj, StRri**^ I Here the augment j? s is added , because of
these affixes being called drdhadMtuka by VII. 2. 35.
The word *neft: whose anuvritti began with sfttra III. 1. 91,1s understood
here also. So that the affixes in relation to the verbal roots get the name of
s&rvadhdtuka and &rdhadh&luka\ the affixes applied to nouns do not get these
names. Thus the case-affix t*rr« when added to the noun 5^, is not called an
ArdhadhAtuka affix, and therefore we have ?£*IP^, vjfi: &c. Had these affixes
been drdhadhdtuka, they would have caused the guna of the base (VII. 3. 84).
Similarly the affixes \% and nr.in the words ^fnsf and ^flf are not dtdha*
dhdtuka affixes. Had they been so, there would have been the insertion of
the augment f? s (VII. 2. 35).
Similarly in s&tra HI. 1. 5, the affix ^ is used without changing the
sense, after the roots ^, f?m and f%^ t But as this affix is added with-
out the enunciation of the word wJU as it is in sfttra III. 1. 7, this flsj is not
called ArdhadhAtuka, and does not take the augment f? s , as ^'T^tS i
f*rc * 11 \y) 11 ^Tf^ 11 f%s, % (^nf^T^^R) n
115. The personal endings of the Perfect are
also called '&ixlhadh&tuka\
This debars them from being called sArvadhdluka and, being drdha*
dhdtuka, some of them take the augment *» N ; as Sfatq', 3ftro I Moreover by
their being drdhadhdtuka they do not admit of the Vikaranas ^ &c.
So from *& (?t*r, VI. 1. 45) we have zt*$; here the Hr is elided by
VI. 4 64, the affix being treated as drdhadhdtuka] similarly **# from *& I
f%5Tfofa ii^u ^^Tf^ 11 fw, ^Rrrfitrf^r, (w4^t«*^) ii
11G. When the sense is that of Benediction,
the substitutes of 'lin' are called DrdhadMtuka', i. e. the
personal endings of the Beuedictive are DrdhadMtuka'.
This debars these affixes from being called sdrvadhdtuka. Being dr~
dhadhdtuka they take the augment f£, and before these affixes the root does
Digitized by
Google
6o2 Sarva & Ardiiadhatuka Affixes. [Bk. III. Ch. IV. § 117.
not take the Vikaranas ^ &c. Thus from the root 55^ 'to cut', we have in the
•irtfffifev wfirtfte; and from the root %/to purify', qfitfte. But in the WvrfJw N
(Potential), we have the proper Vikaranas &c. as qrnffciTff 1 yftaf* I
*Ri: 11 sptflr Rnrt swim wfir *r$tnr3*nrc£wf53i ^ 11
117. In the Vedas this distinction of 's&rva-
dh&tuka' and '&rdhadh&tuka is not always maintained,
and the affixes are promiscuously employed.
In the Vedas, there is no hard and fast rule about s&rvadh&tuka and
Ardhadh&tuka affixes. Sometimes the fire^ and fijff are treated as if they
were drdhadhdtuka. Thus *\}?*r t^r OTTO: l Here the affixes of the Otz arc
treated as drdhadhdtuka and consequently there is the elision of the ftj^ by
rule VI. 4. 51; the proper form of this word would be q>h(7a 1 Sometimes dr-
dhadhdtuka affixes are treated like sdrvadhdtuka affixes; as fanP*?; here the
affixes of the fro are treated as sdrvadhdtuka and so there is the Vikarana *
and the * is changed into * 1 Thus, |Rr+*J+w+i?=fir+*T+3+|? (III. 1. 74)
-fir+XJ+^+fr (VI. 4. 87) = ^^ 1 Similarly, gf*tf 1 The fef^is some-
times treated in the Vedas both as sdrvadhdtuka and drdhadhdtuka at
one and the same time; as yRtim^ jjxni ***** 1 Here, by treating the affix
as sdrvadhdtuka, there is elision of ^r in^the f5f«^(VII. 2. 79) and by treating it
again as drdhadhdtuka^ the w of w is changed into ij 1 So also in *?flt! the
affix fs treated as sdrvadhdtuka and there is no substitution of ^for wr as
required by II. 4. 52.
to 9
~ 15
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
>
BATES OF SUBSCKIPTIC :
tide in advance /or the wmpltrt* w<>rk, htclvding
Indian
Foreign
... Its* 20
... £ 2
Price per Bet of 4 parts, L c>, one Book or Adhjnija^ botuvl in o
volume — e&clitiling postage and \\ P. commission— Rfc, |
Intending Sub.^crik^ ami Patrons arc rcqu I ■ I applj
remittance to the
Panixi < h ikf,
- l//c?//
PHtitr a jit U o Ci«y AlUut) fa IM«
Digitized by
Glfele
This book is a preservation photocopy.
It was produced on Hammermill Laser Print natural white,
a 60 # book weight acid-free archival paper
which meets the requirements of
ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992 (permanence of paper)
Preservation photocopying and binding
by
Acme Bookbinding
Charlestown, Massachusetts
Q
1996
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
3 2044 025 019 191
Digitij
tU by Google
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11